Epson 7880 PDF

SERVICE MANUAL
Large Format Color Inkjet Printer
EPSON Stylus Pro 7400/7450/7800/7880/7880C

9400/9450/9800/9880/9880C
SEIJ05002
Notice:
All rights reserved. No part of this manual may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic,
mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION.
The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice.
All effort have been made to ensure the accuracy of the contents of this manual. However, should any errors be detected, SEIKO EPSON would greatly
appreciate being informed of them.
The above not withstanding SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION can assume no responsibility for any errors in this manual or the consequences thereof.
EPSON is a registered trademark of SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION.
General Notice: Other product names used herein are for identification purpose only and may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective owners. EPSON disclaims any and all rights in those marks.
Copyright © 2007 SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION.

Imaging Product CS,PL & Environmental Management
PRECAUTIONS
Precautionary notations throughout the text are categorized relative to 1) Personal injury and 2) Damage to equipment.
DANGER Signals a precaution which, if ignored, could result in serious or fatal personal injury. Great caution should be exercised in performing
procedures preceded by DANGER Headings.
WARNING Signals a precaution which, if ignored, could result in damage to equipment.
The precautionary measures itemized below should always be observed when performing repair/maintenance procedures.
DANGER
1. ALWAYS DISCONNECT THE PRODUCT FROM THE POWER SOURCE AND PERIPHERAL DEVICES PERFORMING ANY MAINTENANCE OR
REPAIR PROCEDURES.
2. NO WORK SHOULD BE PERFORMED ON THE UNIT BY PERSONS UNFAMILIAR WITH BASIC SAFETY MEASURES AS DICTATED FOR ALL
ELECTRONICS TECHNICIANS IN THEIR LINE OF WORK.
3. WHEN PERFORMING TESTING AS DICTATED WITHIN THIS MANUAL, DO NOT CONNECT THE UNIT TO A POWER SOURCE UNTIL
INSTRUCTED TO DO SO. WHEN THE POWER SUPPLY CABLE MUST BE CONNECTED, USE EXTREME CAUTION IN WORKING ON POWER
SUPPLY AND OTHER ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS.
WARNING
1. REPAIRS ON EPSON PRODUCT SHOULD BE PERFORMED ONLY BY AN EPSON CERTIFIED REPAIR TECHNICIAN.
2. MAKE CERTAIN THAT THE SOURCE VOLTAGES IS THE SAME AS THE RATED VOLTAGE, LISTED ON THE SERIAL NUMBER/RATING
PLATE. IF THE EPSON PRODUCT HAS A PRIMARY AC RATING DIFFERENT FROM AVAILABLE POWER SOURCE, DO NOT CONNECT IT TO
THE POWER SOURCE.
3. ALWAYS VERIFY THAT THE EPSON PRODUCT HAS BEEN DISCONNECTED FROM THE POWER SOURCE BEFORE REMOVING OR
REPLACING PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS AND/OR INDIVIDUAL CHIPS.
4. IN ORDER TO PROTECT SENSITIVE MICROPROCESSORS AND CIRCUITRY, USE STATIC DISCHARGE EQUIPMENT, SUCH AS ANTI-STATIC
WRIST STRAPS, WHEN ACCESSING INTERNAL COMPONENTS.
5. REPLACE MALFUNCTIONING COMPONENTS ONLY WITH THOSE COMPONENTS BY THE MANUFACTURE; INTRODUCTION OF SECOND-
SOURCE ICs OR OTHER NON-APPROVED COMPONENTS MAY DAMAGE THE PRODUCT AND VOID ANY APPLICABLE EPSON WARRANTY.
6. WHEN AIR DUSTER IS USED ON THE REPAIR AND THE MAINTENANCE WORK, THE USE OF THE AIR DUSTER PRODUCTS CONTAINING
THE INFLAMMABLE GAS IS PROHIBITED.
About This Manual
This manual describes basic functions, theory of electrical and mechanical operations, maintenance and repair procedures of the printer. The instructions and procedures included
herein are intended for the experienced repair technicians, and attention should be given to the precautions on the preceding page.
Manual Configuration Symbols Used in this Manual

This manual consists of six chapters and Appendix. Various symbols are used throughout this manual either to provide additional
CHAPTER 1.PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS information on a specific topic or to warn of possible danger present during a
Provides a general overview and specifications of the product. procedure or an action. Be aware of all symbols when they are used, and always read
CHAPTER 2.OPERATING PRINCIPLES NOTE, CAUTION, or WARNING messages.
Describes the theory of electrical and mechanical operations of the
product. Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice or condition
CHAPTER 3.TROUBLESHOOTING that is necessary to keep the product’s quality.
Describes the step-by-step procedures for the troubleshooting.
CHAPTER 4.DISASSEMBLY / ASSEMBLY
Describes the step-by-step procedures for disassembling and assembling
Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice, or condition
the product.
that, if not strictly observed, could result in damage to, or destruction of,
CHAPTER 5.ADJUSTMENT
equipment.
Provides Epson-approved methods for adjustment.
CHAPTER 6.MAINTENANCE
Provides preventive maintenance procedures and the lists of Epson-
approved lubricants and adhesives required for servicing the product. May indicate an operating or maintenance procedure, practice or
APPENDIX Provides the following additional information for reference: condition that is necessary to accomplish a task efficiently. It may also
• Connector pin assignments provide additional information that is related to a specific subject, or
• Electric circuit boards components layout comment on the results achieved through a previous action.
• Electrical circuit boards schematics
• Exploded diagram & Parts List Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice or condition
that, if not strictly observed, could result in injury or loss of life.
Revision Status
Revision Date of Issue Description
A July 29, 2005 First release
B September 2, 2005 Revised Contents
[All chapters]
• “Weight” has been changed to “mass”.
[Chapter 1]
• “Service Personnel Mode” has been changed to “SERVICEMAN MODE”.
• Descriptions have been added in 1.4.4.35 Power Cleaning (Page 99).
• “CAUTION” in Edge Sensor Level Measurement (Page 118) has been deleted.
[Chapter 2]
• Made changes in 2.2.4 Cleaning Mechanism (Page 171).
• 2.5 Colorimetric Calibration (Color ID) Overview (Page 178) has been added.
[Chapter 4]
• “ADJUSTMENT REQUIRED” has been added in 4.2.4.2 P/S BOARD ASSY. (Page 243).
• “ADJUSTMENT REQUIRED” has been added in 4.2.4.4 BOARD ASSY., SUB (Page 245).
• Made changes and added “REASSEMBLY” in 4.2.5.2 CR MOTOR ASSY. (Page 252).
• “CAUTION” has been added in 4.2.7.4 PUMP CAP ASSY. (Page 298).
B September 2, 2005 [Chapter 5]
• Descriptions have been added in Table 5-1. Parts and Units that Require Adjustments (Page 307).
• Descriptions have been added in Table 5-2. Required Adjustments in the Order of Execution (Page 308).
• Descriptions have been added in Basic Adjustment (Page 311).
• Made changes in Table 5-3. Tools for Adjustments (Page 313).
• Made changes in “System Requirements” in 5.1.7 Adjustment Program Basic Operations (Page 314).
• Made changes in 5.2.2 Cutter Position/Height Adjustment (Page 316).
• Made changes in 5.2.3 Paper Thickness Sensor Position Adjustment (Page 318).
• “Shield Cap” has been changed to “Seal Cap” in 5.2.8 Air Leak Check (Page 324).
• Made changes in 5.3.4 T&B&S (Roll Paper) (Page 334).
• Made changes in 5.3.5 T&B&S + 980mm Band Feed (Page 336).
• Made changes in 5.3.7 Nozzle Bi-D Adjustment (Page 339).
• Made changes in 5.3.8 Print Head Slant Adjustment (PF) (Page 340).
• Made changes in 5.3.9 Print Head Slant Adjustment (CR) (Page 343).
• Made changes in 5.3.10 Ink Mark Sensor Level Adjustment (Page 346).
• Made changes in 5.3.11 Auto Uni-D Adjustment (Page 347).
• Made changes in 5.3.12 Auto Bi-D Adjustment (P.G. 0.8/1.6) (Page 348).
• Made changes in 5.3.13 Ink Mark Sensor Adjustment for Auto Nozzle Check (Page 349).
• Made changes in 5.3.14 Skew Check (Page 351).
• Made changes in 5.3.15 Platen Position Adjustment (Page 352).
• Made changes in 5.3.16 980mm Band Feed Adjustment (Page 354).
• 5.3.22 Colorimetric Calibration (Color ID) (Page 359) have been added.
• Made changes in 5.4.1 Auto Bi-D Adjustment (Page 375).
• Made changes in 5.4.2 Manual Bi-D Adjustment (Page 376).
• Made changes in 5.5.1 Check Nozzle (Page 380).
• Made changes in 5.5.2 Check Alignment (Page 381).
• Made changes in 5.5.3 Print Adjustment Check Pattern (Page 382).
• Made changes in 5.5.4 Check Cutting (Page 383).
• 5.8 Model Setting (when replacing the Main Board) (Page 390) have been added.
C December 15, 2006 Revised Contents
[Chapter 1]
• Table 1-28. Button Functions (Page 35) was modified.
[Chapter 4]
• 4.2.5.8 CARRIAGE UNIT (Page 261) was added.
[Chapter 7]
• 7.2 Circuit Diagrams (Page 405) was revised.
D June 15, 2007 Revised Contents
[All chapters]
• T.B.D. items have been determined.
[Chapter 2]
• Figure 2-2. Carriage Mechanism (Page 159) was modified.
• Figure 2-3. Carriage Mechanical Unit and PG Adjustment Unit (Page 161) was modified.
[Chapter 3]
• Remedy (Page 188) was revised.
[Chapter 4]
• REASSEMBLY was added in 4.2.7.1 PRINT HEAD (Page 281)
[Chapter 5]
• 5.1.4 Required Adjustments by Part or Unit (Page 308) was changed.
• 5.1.6 Tools for Adjustments (Page 313) was changed.
• A misdescription was corrected in 5.2.3 Paper Thickness Sensor Position Adjustment (Page 318)
• A misdescription was corrected in 5.3.6 Cutter Pressure Adjustment (Page 338)
• Required Tool was added in 5.3.16 980mm Band Feed Adjustment (Page 354)
• “Tiny mode” was changed to “F/W update mode” in 5.3.18 NVRAM Back Up and Write (Page 356)
• A misdescription was corrected in 5.3.21 Rear Sensor Adjustment (Page 358)
• 5.8 Model Setting (when replacing the Main Board) (Page 390) was changed.
E September 12, 2007 Revised Contents
[All chapters]
• Information on Stylus Pro 7880/7880C/7450/9880/9880C/9450 has been added.
EPSON Stylus Pro 7400/7450/7800/7880/7880C/9400/9450/9800/9880/9880C Revision E
Contents
Chapter 1 Product Description 1.6.4 Network Interface .................................................................................... 149
1.6.5 Received Buffer Full Operation .............................................................. 150
1.1 Product Description ............................................................................................ 12 1.6.6 Interface Selection ................................................................................... 150
1.1.1 Features ...................................................................................................... 12
1.7 Optional Units and Consumables ..................................................................... 151
1.1.2 Difference between 8 color and 4 color machines ..................................... 15
1.7.1 Ink Cartridge ............................................................................................ 151
1.2 Basic Specifications ............................................................................................ 16 1.7.2 Cleaning Cartridge ................................................................................... 152
1.2.1 Print Specifications .................................................................................... 16 1.7.3 Conversion Cartridge ............................................................................... 152
1.2.2 Character Specifications ............................................................................ 17 1.7.4 Maintenance Tank ................................................................................... 153
1.2.3 Operability Specifications ......................................................................... 17
1.2.4 Paper Specifications ................................................................................... 18
Chapter 2 Operating Principles
1.2.5 Mechanism Specifications ......................................................................... 20
1.2.6 Electrical Related Information ................................................................... 24 2.1 Overview .......................................................................................................... 155
1.2.7 Reliability .................................................................................................. 24
2.2 Print Mechanism Components ......................................................................... 156
1.2.8 Environmental Conditions ......................................................................... 26
2.2.1 Print Mechanism (Print Head) ................................................................. 157
1.2.9 Overall Dimensions ................................................................................... 27
2.2.2 Carriage (CR) Mechanism ....................................................................... 159
1.2.10 Accessories/Options/Consumables .......................................................... 29
2.2.3 Paper Feed Assembly .............................................................................. 168
1.3 External View and Parts Names ......................................................................... 32 2.2.4 Cleaning Mechanism ............................................................................... 171
1.4 Control Panel ...................................................................................................... 34 2.2.5 Ink Supply Mechanism ............................................................................ 173
1.4.1 Buttons and Functions ............................................................................... 34 2.2.6 Others ....................................................................................................... 174
1.4.2 Panel Display ............................................................................................. 37 2.3 Outline of Main Board ..................................................................................... 175
1.4.3 Job Information .......................................................................................... 46
2.4 Outline of Power Supply Circuit Board ........................................................... 177
1.4.4 Panel Setting .............................................................................................. 48
1.4.5 Maintenance Mode .................................................................................. 105 2.5 Colorimetric Calibration (Color ID) Overview ................................................ 178
1.4.6 SERVICEMAN MODE ........................................................................... 111
1.4.7 MIB Function ........................................................................................... 142
1.4.8 Function to Prevent Irregular Printing ..................................................... 142
1.4.9 Initialization ............................................................................................. 143
1.4.10 Default Setup Values ............................................................................. 143
1.5 Controller .......................................................................................................... 144
1.6 Interface ............................................................................................................ 145
1.6.1 USB interface ........................................................................................... 145
1.6.2 IEEE1394 Interface ................................................................................. 146
1.6.3 Optional Interface .................................................................................... 147
8
Chapter 3 Troubleshooting Chapter 5 Adjustment

3.1 Overview .......................................................................................................... 180 5.1 Overview .......................................................................................................... 307
3.1.1 Preliminary Check ................................................................................... 180 5.1.1 Precautions ............................................................................................... 307
3.1.2 Troubleshooting Procedure ...................................................................... 180 5.1.2 Adjustment Workflow ............................................................................. 307
3.2 Troubleshooting based on Panel Messages ...................................................... 181 5.1.3 Parts and Units that Require Adjustments ............................................... 307
3.2.1 List of Panel Messages ............................................................................ 181 5.1.4 Required Adjustments by Part or Unit .................................................... 308
3.2.2 Remedies for Warning Messages ............................................................ 187 5.1.5 Description of Adjustments ..................................................................... 310
3.2.3 Remedies for Error Messages .................................................................. 190 5.1.6 Tools for Adjustments ............................................................................. 313
3.2.4 Remedies for Service Call Errors ............................................................ 197 5.1.7 Adjustment Program Basic Operations ................................................... 314
3.3 Troubleshooting based on Printed Result ......................................................... 212 5.2 Mechanical Adjustment .................................................................................... 315
5.2.1 Ink Mark Sensor Height Adjustment ....................................................... 315
5.2.2 Cutter Position/Height Adjustment ......................................................... 316
Chapter 4 Disassembly & Assembly 5.2.3 Paper Thickness Sensor Position Adjustment ......................................... 318
4.1 Overview .......................................................................................................... 217 5.2.4 CR Timing Belt Tension Adjustment ...................................................... 320
4.1.1 Precautions ............................................................................................... 217 5.2.5 PF Timing Belt Tension Adjustment ....................................................... 321
4.1.2 Recommended Tools ............................................................................... 219 5.2.6 CR Encoder Sensor Adjustment .............................................................. 322
4.1.3 Recommended Screws ............................................................................. 220 5.2.7 PF Encoder Sensor Adjustment ............................................................... 323
5.2.8 Air Leak Check ........................................................................................ 324
4.2 Disassembly Procedure .................................................................................... 221
5.2.9 PG Adjustment ........................................................................................ 327
4.2.1 Basic Operations ...................................................................................... 223
4.2.2 Consumables ............................................................................................ 225 5.3 Basic Adjustment ............................................................................................. 331
4.2.3 Removing the Panel Unit and Housing ................................................... 229 5.3.1 RTC&USB ID&IEEE1394 ID ................................................................ 331
4.2.4 Removing the Circuit Boards .................................................................. 241 5.3.2 Head Rank ID .......................................................................................... 332
4.2.5 Removing the Carriage Mechanism ........................................................ 249 5.3.3 Input Serial Number ................................................................................ 333
4.2.6 Removing the Paper Feed Mechanism .................................................... 266 5.3.4 T&B&S (Roll Paper) ............................................................................... 334
4.2.7 Removing the Ink System Mechanism .................................................... 281 5.3.5 T&B&S + 980mm Band Feed ................................................................. 336
5.3.6 Cutter Pressure Adjustment ..................................................................... 338
5.3.7 Nozzle Bi-D Adjustment ......................................................................... 339
5.3.8 Print Head Slant Adjustment (PF) ........................................................... 340
5.3.9 Print Head Slant Adjustment (CR) .......................................................... 343
5.3.10 Ink Mark Sensor Level Adjustment ....................................................... 346
5.3.11 Auto Uni-D Adjustment ........................................................................ 347
5.3.12 Auto Bi-D Adjustment (P.G. 0.8/1.6) .................................................... 348
5.3.13 Ink Mark Sensor Adjustment for Auto Nozzle Check .......................... 349
5.3.14 Skew Check ........................................................................................... 351
5.3.15 Platen Position Adjustment ................................................................... 352
5.3.16 980mm Band Feed Adjustment ............................................................. 354
5.3.17 Initial Ink Charge Flag ON/OFF ........................................................... 355
5.3.18 NVRAM Back Up and Write ................................................................ 356
5.3.19 Initial Ink Charge ................................................................................... 357
9
5.3.20 Cleaning ................................................................................................. 357 Chapter 6 Maintenance

5.3.21 Rear Sensor Adjustment ........................................................................ 358
5.3.22 Colorimetric Calibration (Color ID) ...................................................... 359 6.1 Overview .......................................................................................................... 394
6.1.1 Product Life Information ......................................................................... 395
5.4 Advanced Adjustment ...................................................................................... 375
6.1.2 Required Maintenance Items ................................................................... 396
5.4.1 Auto Bi-D Adjustment ............................................................................. 375
5.4.2 Manual Bi-D Adjustment ........................................................................ 376 6.2 Lubrication ....................................................................................................... 397
5.4.3 Destination Setting ................................................................................... 378
5.4.4 PF Micro Feed Adjustment (Bi-D) .......................................................... 379 Chapter 7 Appendix
5.5 Check Results ................................................................................................... 380
7.1 Connectors ........................................................................................................ 401
5.5.1 Check Nozzle ........................................................................................... 380
5.5.2 Check Alignment ..................................................................................... 381 7.2 Exploded Diagrams .......................................................................................... 406
5.5.3 Print Adjustment Check Pattern .............................................................. 382 7.3 ASP List (Parts List) ......................................................................................... 462
5.5.4 Check Cutting .......................................................................................... 383 7.3.1 ASP List for Stylus Pro 7400/7800 ......................................................... 462
5.5.5 Print Image ............................................................................................... 384 7.3.2 ASP List for Stylus Pro 9400/9800 ......................................................... 465
5.6 Reset Counters .................................................................................................. 385 7.3.3 ASP List for Stylus Pro 7450/7880/7880C .............................................. 469
5.6.1 Reset PG Switching Counter ................................................................... 385 7.3.4 ASP List for Stylus Pro 9450/9880/9880C .............................................. 472
5.6.2 Reset PF Motor Counter .......................................................................... 385
5.6.3 Reset When CR Unit Change .................................................................. 386
5.6.4 Reset When Cleaning Unit Change ......................................................... 386
5.6.5 Reset When PrintHead Change ............................................................... 387
5.6.6 Reset When Cutter Solenoid Change ...................................................... 387
5.6.7 Reset Pump Counter ................................................................................ 388
5.6.8 Reset Ink Information .............................................................................. 388
5.7 Installing Firmware .......................................................................................... 389
5.8 Model Setting (when replacing the Main Board) ............................................. 390
5.9 Writing MAC Address ..................................................................................... 392
10
CHAPTER
1
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
1.1 Product Description Super-high definition

Super-high resolution of 2880 x 1440 dpi
Smallest droplet size: 3.5 picoliter
1.1.1 Features Variable droplet technology can produce multiple different sizes per print line
Large sheet Low running cost
Table 1-1. Large sheet Independent ink cartridges for each color with large capacity of 110 ml
Model name Large sheet Optional ink cartridge with larger capacity of 220ml can be used
Stylus Pro 7400 610 mm (Approx. 24 inches), A1+ response Media handling
Stylus Pro 7450
Various types of media can be used
Built-in automatic cutting system and a manual media cutter
Stylus Pro 7800
Accurate automatic loading of cut sheet media
Stylus Pro 7880 Borderless printing (full-bleed print on all four sides) with roll paper
Stylus Pro 7880C Up to 1.5 mm thick paper can be used
Stylus Pro 9400 1118 mm (Approx. 44 inches), B0 + response Compatibility with other large sheet printers
Stylus Pro 9450
Upper compatibility with;
Stylus Pro 9800

Stylus Pro 7400 • Stylus Pro 4000 • Stylus Pro 4400 • Stylus Pro 4800
Stylus Pro 9880 Stylus Pro 7800 • Stylus Pro 7000 • Stylus Pro 7500 • Stylus Pro 7600
Stylus Pro 9880C Stylus Pro 9400 • Stylus Pro 9000 • Stylus Pro 9500 • Stylus Pro 9600
Stylus Pro 9800 • Stylus Pro 10000 • Stylus Pro 10600
Stylus Pro 7880C • Stylus Pro 7600 • Stylus Pro 7800 • Stylus Pro 9000
Stylus Pro 9450
• Stylus Pro 9400 • Stylus Pro 9500 • Stylus Pro 9600
Stylus Pro 9880
Stylus Pro 9880C • Stylus Pro 9800 • Stylus Pro 10000 • Stylus Pro 10600
The latest RIP

Genuine: NorthFlight Plus ver. 3
Others: Stylus Rip Profeshinal 3
Product Description Product Description 12

High-speed throughput
Stylus Pro 7400/7800/9400/9800:
Table 1-2. Throughput
Throughput
Resolution Stylus Pro 7800 / Stylus Pro 9800 /
Ink type Paper Image quality Dot Size Mode
(dpi) Stylus Pro 7400 Stylus Pro 9400
(Time for printing on A1 cut sheet) (Time for printing on B0 cut sheet)
Pigment Plain paper Economy VSD1 360 x 360 Bi-D MF 320CPS 2.2 Minutes 5.1 Minutes
8 color
Fast VSD1 360 x 360 Bi-D FD 320CPS 4.2 Minutes 10.9 Minutes
Quality VSD2 720 x 360 Bi-D MW 240CPS 5.0 Minutes 13.6 Minutes
High quality VSD3 720 x 720 Bi-D FOL 240CPS 9.9 Minutes 29.0 Minutes
Matte paper Fast VSD1 720 x 360 Bi-D FOL 320CPS 4.2 Minutes 10.9 Minutes
Quality VSD2 720 x 720 Bi-D FOL 240CPS 9.9 Minutes 29.0 Minutes
High quality VSD3 1,440 x 720 Bi-D FD4 pass 240CPS 14.3 Minutes 42.5 Minutes
Super fine detail VSD3 1,440 x 720 Bi-D FD8 pass 240CPS 25.7 Minutes 78.1 Minutes
Glossy photo paper, Quality VSD2 720 x 720 Bi-D FOL 240CPS 9.9 Minutes 29.0 Minutes
FA paper
High quality 1440 VSD3 1,440 x 720 Bi-D FD4 pass 240CPS 14.3 Minutes 42.5 Minutes
High quality 2880 VSD3_HR 2,880 x 1,440 Bi-D 4 pass 240CPS 26.9 Minutes 81.7 Minutes
Pigment Plain paper Economy VSD1 360 x 360 Uni-D band 320CPS 1.8 Minutes 4.3 Minutes
4 color
Fast VSD1 360 x 360 Bi-D MW 320CPS 2.7 Minutes 6.6 Minutes
Matte paper Fast VSD1 360 x 720 Bi-D FD 320CPS 3.9 Minutes 10.4 Minutes
FA paper

Stylus Pro 7450/7880/7880C/9450/9880/9880C:

Table 1-3. Throughput
Throughput
Resolution Stylus Pro 7400/7450/7800/ Stylus Pro 9400/9450/9800/
Ink type Paper Image quality Dot Size Mode
(dpi) 7880/7880C 9880/9880C
(Time for printing on A1 cut sheet) (Time for printing on B0 cut sheet)
Pigment Plain paper Economy VSD1 360 x 360 Bi-D MF 320CPS 2.0 Minutes 4.6 Minutes
8 color
Fast VSD1 360 x 360 Bi-D FD 320CPS 3.8 Minutes 9.7 Minutes
Quality VSD2 720 x 360 Bi-D MW 240CPS 4.5 Minutes 12.1 Minutes
Matte paper Fast VSD1 720 x 360 Bi-D FOL 320CPS 3.8 Minutes 9.7 Minutes
High quality 2880 VSD3_HR 2,880 x 1,440 Bi-D FD8 pass 240CPS 24.5 Minutes 73.6 Minutes
FA paper
High quality 2880 VSD3_HR 2,880 x 1,440 Bi-D 4 pass 240CPS 24.5 Minutes 73.6 Minutes
Pigment Plain paper Economy VSD1 360 x 360 Uni-D band 320CPS 1.7 Minutes 4.0 Minutes
4 color
Fast VSD1 360 x 360 Bi-D MW 320CPS 2.0 Minutes 4.6 Minutes
Matte paper 1 (Fast) VSD1 360 x 720 Bi-D FD 320CPS 3.2 Minutes 8.0 Minutes
2 (POP Print) VSD2 720 x 720 Bi-D FOL 1POL 240CPS 4.5 Minutes 12.2 Minutes
3 (Quality) VSD2 720 x 720 Bi-D FOL 3POL 240CPS 6.1 Minutes 17.1 Minutes
4(-) VSD3 1,440 x 720 Bi-D 4 pass 1POL240CPS 7.2 Minutes 20.6 Minutes
5 (High quality) VSD3 1,440 x 720 Bi-D 4 pass 3POL240CPS 8.7 Minutes 25.1 Minutes
Glossy photo paper, 1 (POP Print) VSD2 720 x 720 Uni-D FOL 1POL 240CPS 6.5 Minutes 19.2 Minutes
FA paper
2 (Quality) VSD2 720 x 720 Uni-D FOL 3POL 240CPS 9.2 Minutes 27.5 Minutes
3(-) VSD3 1,440 x 720 Uni-D 4 pass 1POL240CPS 11.1 Minutes 33.5 Minutes
4 (High quality) VSD3 1,440 x 720 Uni-D 4 pass 3POL240CPS 13.6 Minutes 41.4 Minutes

1.1.2 Difference between 8 color and 4 color machines

8 color machine 4 color machine
Item
Stylus Pro 7800/7880/7880C/9800/9880/9880C Stylus Pro 7400/7450/9400/9450
Ink configuration LLk, Lm, Lc, Lk, Pk (Mk), C, M, Y Mk, M, C, Y
Ink Type PX-P/K3 ink PX-Pink
with following improvements: Rick color reproduction
Consistent gray balance Extremely wide color gamut
Accurate color control Lightfastness and ozone-proof has
Minimized metamerism improved
Extremely fine blends and photographic
transitions
The maximum density level is raised
Glossiness has improved

1.2 Basic Specifications Ink configuration

As for 4-color models, two each ink cartridges are installed for every color.
As for 8-color models, the standard of black is Photo Black. Matt Black is
1.2.1 Print Specifications optional and user-replaceable.
Print method: On-demand Ink Jet Method
Table 1-5. Ink Configuration
Nozzle configuration:
Ink Cartridge
Table 1-4. Nozzle Configuration Left Slot Right Slot
Mode
Mode Ink Number of Nozzles 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th
8 color machine Black Photo Black / Matte Black * 180 column column column column column column column column
(Stylus Pro 7800/9800)
Light Light Black 180 8 Color mode
(Stylus Pro 7800/ LLk Lm Lc Lk Pk / Mk C M Y
Light Black 180 9800)
Color Cyan 180 8 Color mode
Magenta 180 (Stylus Pro 7880/ LLk VLm Lc Lk Pk / Mk C VM Y
7880C/9880/9880C)
Light Cyan 180
4 Color mode
Light Magenta 180 (Stylus Pro 7400/ MK MK M M C C Y Y
Yellow 180 7450/9400/9450)
8 color machine Black Photo Black / Matte Black * 180

(Stylus Pro 7880/7880C/
Light Light Black 180 Print direction:
9880/9880C)
Light Black 180 Bidirectional with logic seeking (high speed return and high speed skip only)
Color Cyan 180 Resolution:
Maximum 2880 x 1440 dpi
Vivid Magenta 180
Control code
Light Cyan 180
ESC/P Raster Photographic Driver
Vivid Light Magenta 180
Paper feed method:
Yellow 180 Friction feed (roll and cut sheet)
4 color machine Black Matte Black 360 (180 x 2) Line spacing:
(Stylus Pro 7400/7450/ 1/6 inch (default). Programmable in 1/1440-inch increments
Color Cyan 360 (180 x 2)
9400/9450)
Magenta 360 (180 x 2) Paper path:
Roll paper or cut sheets with manual insertion
Yellow 360 (180 x 2)
Paper feed speed:
Note "*": Photo Black and Matte Black can be changed by the user. 245 ± 10 milliseconds per 1/4-inch line
Nozzle pitch: 0.141mm (1/180 inch) for each color
Product Description Basic Specifications 16

Printing speed 1.2.2 Character Specifications

Text print mode
Character code:
• Maximum 320 CPS (characters per second)
(1 CPS = 2.54 mm/s) Alphanumeric characters extension graphics (PC437)
• Maximum 10 CPI (characters per inch) Multilingual (PC850)
Graphic print mode Typeface:
Table 1-6. Graphics Modes (Stylus Pro 7400/7450/7800/7880/7880C) EPSON original typeface
Alphanumeric characters Courier
Horizontal Definition Printable number of Printing
Printing range
(dpi) dots speed
360 617.6mm (24.31inch) 8,753 320cps
1.2.3 Operability Specifications
720 617.6mm (24.31inch) 17,506 240cps
Initialize time when power supply is switched ON:
1440 617.6mm (24.31inch) 35,013 210cps
Within 60 seconds (Excluding TLC etc Wait Time)
2880 617.6mm (24.31inch) 70,027 210cps
Initial charging time:
Note : The printing ranges shown in the table include max. 8mm (bleeding width for printing Less than 9 minutes 30 seconds
off both left and right edges) (* Time from lowering the lever to completion of initial charging)
Table 1-7. Graphics Modes (Stylus Pro 9400/9450/9800/9880/9880C)
Horizontal Definition Printable number of Printing
Printing range
(dpi) dots speed
360 1125.6mm (44.31inch) 15,953 320cps
720 1125.6mm (44.31inch) 31,906 240cps
1440 1125.6mm (44.31inch) 63,813 210cps
2880 1125.6mm (44.31inch) 127,627 210cps
Note : The printing ranges shown in the table include max. 8mm (bleeding width for printing
off both left and right edges)

1.2.4 Paper Specifications 1.2.4.2 Cut Sheet

The allowable cut sheet paper dimensions are shown in the table below.
1.2.4.1 Roll Paper
Paper size *:
The allowable roll paper dimensions are shown in the table below.
Paper size *: Table 1-9. Cut Sheet Sizes
Core Model Paper size
Table 1-8. Roll Paper Sizes
Paper width Stylus Pro 7400/7450/7800/7880/7880C 203mm~610mm
Core Model Paper size
Stylus Pro 9400/9450/9800/9880/9880C 203mm~1,118mm
2-inch core Stylus Pro 7400/7450/7800/7880/7880C 203mm~610mm (W) x ~45m (H)
Paper length Stylus Pro 7400/7450/7800/7880/7880C 279mm~1,580mm
Stylus Pro 9400/9450/9800/9880/9880C 203mm~1,118mm (W) x ~45m (H)
Stylus Pro 9400/9450/9800/9880/9880C 279mm~1,580mm
3-inch core Stylus Pro 7400/7450/7800/7880/7880C 203mm~610mm (W) x ~220m (H)
Stylus Pro 9400/9450/9800/9880/9880C 203mm~1,118mm (W) x ~220m (H) Note "*": Auto nozzle check cannot be carried out on paper with a width less than 210mm.
Paper thickness:
Note : The core sizes are their interior diameters.
Paper length more than 279 mm up to 728 mm:
Note "*": Auto nozzle check cannot be carried out on paper with a width less than 210mm. 3.15 to 59 mil (0.08 to 1.50 mm)
Roll paper size: Paper length exceeding 728 mm up to 1580 mm:
2 Inch core: Outer diameter within 103mm/ 3.15 to 19.67 mil (0.08 to 0.50 mm)
1 roll set possible Plain paper: 3.15 to 4.33 mil (0.08 to 0.11 mm)
3 Inch core: Outer diameter within 150mm/ Paper basis mass:
1 roll set possible
Special paper: 64 to 260 gf/m2
Paper thickness: Plain paper: 64 to 90 gf/m2
Special paper: 3.15 to 19.67 mil (0.08 to 0.50 mm)
NOTE • Basically, portrait printing only.
Plain paper: 3.15 to 4.33 mil (0.08 to 0.11 mm)
• Do not use curled, folded, or deckle-edge paper.
Paper basis mass: • For best result, use paper under the following conditions:
Special paper: 64 to 260 gf/m2 Temperature: 59 to 77 ºF (15 to 25 ºC)
Plain paper: 64 to 90 gf/m2 Humidity: 40 to 60 % RH
NOTE • Do not use curled, folded, or deckle-edge paper.

• Be sure to use the Type 3 adapter included in the package when using the 3-
inch core roll paper.
• For best result, use paper under the following conditions:
Temperature: 59 to 77 ºF (15 to 25 ºC)
Humidity: 40 to 60 % RH

1.2.4.3 Selectable Paper Size

The following paper sizes can be selected in the driver for Roll paper/cut sheet. *1
Table 1-10. Selectable Paper Size

Paper Size Size (W x H) Paper Size Size (W x H)
Letter 8 1/2 x 11 in B4 257 x 364 mm
US B 11 x 17 in 11 x 17 in B3 364 x 514 mm
US B 17 x 24 in 17 x 24 in B2 515mm x 728mm
US C 17 x 22 in 17 x 22 in B1 728 mm x 1,030 mm
US D 22 x 34 in 22 x 34 in B1 (Landscape) 728 mm x 1,030 mm
*2
US E 34 x 44 in 34 x 44 in B0 1,030 mm x 1,456 mm
A4 210 x 297 mm Super B0 1,118 mm x 1,580 mm
A3 297 x 420 mm 30 x 24 in 30 x 24 in
Super A3 / B 329 x 483 mm 3.5 x 4.5 in*3 3.5 x 4.5 in
A2 420 x 59 4mm 8 x 10 in 8 x 10 in
A1 594 x 841 mm 11 x 14 in 11 x 14 in
Super A1 24 x 36 in 16 x 20 in 16 x 20 in
A0 841 mm x 1,189 mm 60 x 90 cm 60 x 90 cm
Super A0 914 mm x 1,292 mm 40 x 60 cm 40 x 60 cm
B5 182 x 257 mm 30 x 40 cm 30 x 40 cm
Note : The sizes in bold type are for the Stylus Pro 9400/9450/9800/9880/9880C.
Note "*1": Basically, load cut sheet on the printer in portrait orientation. And the paper grain
direction should run vertically for best result.
"*2": When using media other than paper loading it in landscape orientation, the allowable
media thickness is 3.15 to 59 mil (0.08 to 1.5 mm).
"*3": The printer does not support this sized media. Note that the sizes given in the table
are printable area sizes, not media sizes.

1.2.5 Mechanism Specifications 3: When printing off both left and right edges of the media, the bleed on both sides is set to
3 mm as the automatic skew detection function can sense 3 mm or more horizontal shift
1.2.5.1 Printable Area of the media during printing. If the printer detects that the bleeding width (from left or
right edge of media to the platen edge) is less than 3 mm, it reduces the bleed print
Table 1-11. Printable Area amount to avoid printing on the platen.
Roll paper
Item Model Dimension
/Cut Sheet
Roll paper *1 Stylus Pro 7400/7450/7800/ 203mm~610mm
7880/7880C
Stylus Pro 9400/9450/9800/ 203mm~1,118mm
PW 9880/9880C
(Paper width) Cut Sheet Stylus Pro 7400/7450/7800/ 203mm~610mm
7880/7880C
Stylus Pro 9400/9450/9800/ 203mm~1,118mm
9880/9880C
Paper Feed Direction

PL Roll paper All models Maximum 202m
(Paper length) Cut Sheet All models 279mm~1,580mm
TM Roll paper All models 3mm / 15mm / 35mm*2
(Top margin) Cut Sheet All models 3mm
BM Roll paper All models 3mm / 15mm Printable Area
(Bottom margin) Cut Sheet All models 14mm
LM Roll paper All models 0mm / 3mm / 15mm
(Left margin) Cut Sheet All models 0mm / 3mm
RM Roll paper All models 0mm / 3mm / 15mm
(Right margin) Cut Sheet All models 0mm / 3mm
Note "*1": The printer automatically detects paper width when the paper is set if the automatic
detection function is set to ON.
"*2": Some types of roll paper have exceptional TM of over 15mm.
Note • Images that exceed the detected paper width, or exceed the specified printing range in
the size settings, are not printed.
(If the paper width detection settings are OFF, the printer may print to the platen.)
*At this time, a rainbow phenomenon is not generated.
Figure 1-1. Printable Area
• The margin settings can be changed using the panel as shown below for roll paper.
TM, BM 15mm LM, RM 3mm/ TM, BM, LM, RM 3mm/ TM, BM, LM, RM 15mm/
TM 35mm BM 15mm LM, RM 3mm
*In the special conditions below, it is possible to set the left and right margins (LM,
RM) to zero.

1.2.5.2 Borderless Printing Specifications BORDERLESS PRINTING MODE
BORDERLESS PRINTING WIDTH The following borderless printing modes are supported by command transmission from
the driver.
The printer is capable of printing off both left and right edges of roll or cut sheet
media with widths shown in the table below. Table 1-13. Borderless Printing Mode
Table 1-12. Paper Width Mode Operation
Size Right/left borderless Left and right margins can be set to zero. In this case the upper and
Stylus Pro 7400/7450/ Stylus Pro 9400/9450/ (default) *1 lower margins are set by the roll paper margin settings.
regular 7800/7880/7880C 9800/9880/9880C
inches mm 4 sides borderless/ Cuts the top and bottom edges in the way as described below to
size
Single Cut *1, *2, *3 create a printout without margins on all four sides:
10” 254mm --- { { • The top edge of the first page is cut off leaving “minimum cut
--- 300mm --- { { margin”.during the printing.
• No margin is created between pages and the printer cuts on the
13” 329mm A3+ { {
boundary to separate the pages.
16” 406.4mm --- { { • The bottom edge of the last page is cut off after the printing is
complete.
17” 431.8mm --- { {
4 sides borderless/ Cuts the top and bottom edges in the way as described below to
--- 515mm B2 { {
Double Cut *1, *2, *3 create a printout without margins on all four sides.
--- 594mm A1 { { • The top edge of the first page is cut off leaving “auto refresh
24” 609.6mm --- { { margin” during the printing.
• Each time printing one page is complete, the bottom edge is cut
--- 728mm B1 --- { off and the paper is fed a little (create a minimum cut margin
36” 914.4mm --- --- { between pages), and the top edge of the next page is cut off
during printing. This mode is more accurate than the Single Cut
44” 1,117.6mm --- --- { mode as it cuts the paper twice to separate pages.
Note • The borderless printing is not guaranteed for all types of media, and it cannot be made Note "*1": When the roll paper cutter is OFF and cut line printing is ON, a cut line is printed on
properly under some conditions. See “Borderless printing guarantee conditions (p.22)” each cut position including the one for cutting the top edge.
for more information. "*2": After the 4 sides borderless cut, the actual printed size is approximately 2mm smaller
• Print data extend off the borderless printable area is automatically cut off. in the vertical direction.
"*3": When roll paper borderless print for 4 sides is performed on the media types shown
below, irregular coloring may occur when the edges are cut.
• Double Weight Matte Paper
• Single Weight Matte Paper
• Enhanced Matte Paper
• Textured Fine Art Paper
• Ultra Smooth Fine Art Paper

BORDERLESS PRINTING SETTING PROCEDURES BORDERLESS PRINTING GUARANTEE CONDITIONS
Table 1-14. Borderless Printing Setting Borderless printing guarantee conditions

Borderless 4 sides borderless 4 sides borderless Environmental:
Right/left borderless Temperature: 59 to 77ºF (15 to 25 ºC), Humidity: 40 to 60 % RH
print mode Single Cut Double Cut
Media type *3: Photo type media (roll paper),
Printer
POP • poster type media (roll paper) *1, *2
operation
Media size *3
• Photo type media: 10”, 300mm, 13”, 16”, 17”, 24”, 36”, 44”
• POP • poster type media: A1, B1, B2
NOTE "*1": There are no borderless printing guarantees for cut sheet paper.
"*2": Borderless printing is not guaranteed if a number of outer layers of the
roll surface have stretched due to moisture absorption.
Driver Borderless print • Borderless print • Borderless print "*3": Borderless printing on media and sizes other than those listed above are
setting • Single Cut • Double Cut guaranteed the same way as the Stylus Pro 7600/9600 do. However, if
Remarks Defined as default • As the top edge of the • As the top edge of the media that has been stretched by humidity and other environmental
first page is cut by first page is cut by conditions is used, it is possible that borders on the right and left hand
interrupting the printing interrupting the printing sides may occur.
operation, off-registration operation, off-registration Bleeding print width for printing off both left and right edges
may occur causing may occur causing
irregular color on the irregular color on the The bleeding print width for the left and right edges can be selected among the
printed image depending printed image depending following settings using the printer driver.
on the print job. on the print job.
Left (opposite home side) = 1.5mm/ Right (home side) = 1.5mm
• As this mode cuts the • The cutting position is set
paper on the boundary of to a line 1 mm inside from
Left (opposite home side) = 3.0mm/ Right (home side) = 3.0mm (Default)
pages, slight amount of the actual top and bottom Left (opposite home side) = 5.0mm/ Right (home side) = 3.0mm *1, *2
image of the previous or edges allowing for cutter
the next page may be left position deviation. So the NOTE "*1": If humid environmental conditions have caused the media to stretch,
on the top or bottom edge length of the printout “Left (opposite home side) = 5.0mm/ Right (home side) = 3.0mm”
of the printout due to becomes about 2mm selection is recommended to prevent left and right edge margins
cutter position deviation. smaller than the specified occurring.
size.
"*2": The “Left (opposite home side) = 5.0mm/ Right (home side) = 3.0mm”
setting shifts the center position of the image 1 mm away from that of
the print data.

1.2.5.3 Cut Specifications 1.2.5.4 Paper Set Lever

Both automatic and manual cut are available on this printer. Table 1-15. Paper Set Lever
Lever Position Description
C A U T IO N There are some types of media which are not allowed to be cut
automatically. Be sure not to perform the automatic cutting with Backward Position for paper setting
them, or may result in damaging the printhead. (Paper holding is released, and paper can be set.)
Forward Ready-to-print position
(Paper is fixed, and it becomes ready to be printed.)
ROLL PAPER AUTOMATIC CUT
This function is enabled by setting “Roll Auto Cut” in the Panel Setting menu to ON.
Mechanical condition
Distance between the cutting position and paper setting position:L0 = 187mm
Distance between the cutting position and cutter mark: L1 = 34mm
Minimum cut length: L2 = 127mm
Sheet edge standby location: L3 = 130mm
ROLL PAPER MANUAL CUT
The automatic cutting prohibited media can be cut manually following the procedure
described below.
1. Press the [Paper Select ] button to select the [Roll Auto Cut Off ] and press
the [Enter ] button.
2. Paper is automatically fed to the cutter guide, then the printer will go offline. At
this point, “PAUSE” will be displayed on the panel.
3. If required, fine adjustments on the cut position can be performed using the [Paper
feed ( )] buttons.
4. The user can then use the manual cutter unit and cut the paper along the cutter
guide.
5. After cutting the paper, cancel the pause status (press the [Pause] button). The
paper will back feed and the printer will go back online.
C H E C K For manual cutting of roll paper, use the manual cutter available as
P O IN T an option.

1.2.6 Electrical Related Information 1.2.7 Reliability

Rated voltage: 100 to 240 VAC 1.2.7.1 Main Body Life
Input voltage range: 90 to 264 VAC Stylus Pro 7400/7450/7800/7880/7880C:
Rated frequency range: 50 to 60 Hz 6,300,000 carriage movement cycles
(Approx. 20,000 pages of A1-size plain paper in “Quality” (Bi-D FOL) mode)
Input frequency range: 49 to 61 Hz
Stylus Pro 9400/9450/9800/9880/9880C:
Rated current: 1.0 to 0.5 A
3,700,000 carriage movement cycles
Power consumption (Approx. 20,000 pages of B0-size plain paper in “Quality” (Bi-D FOL) mode)
Operating:
• Stylus Pro 7400/7450/7800/7880/7880C: 50 W
• Stylus Pro 9400/9800: 55 W 1.2.7.2 Print Head Life
• Stylus Pro 9450/9880/9880C: 58 W
Monochrome: 8 billion segment/nozzle
Power off mode: Less than 6 W
(Shifting time 15 minutes) Color: 8 billion segment/nozzle
When power switch is OFF:
Less than 1 W
Insulation resistance: More than 10 M ohms 1.2.7.3 Maintenance Tank Life-span Guide
(500 VDC between AC line and chassis) Stylus Pro 7800/7880/7880C:
Approx. 1,300 sheets
Dielectric strength: AC1.0 kV rms 1minute or AC1.2 kVrms 1 second
(A1+ size plain paper, Quality mode, Continuous printing)
(between AC line and chassis)
Leakage: Less than 0.25 mA [Adapts Japan National Electronics
Stylus Pro 7400/7450:
Development Incorporated Association “Personal
(A1+ size plain paper, Quality mode, Continuous printing)
Computer Industry Standard” (PC-11-1988)].
Energy conservation: Stylus Pro 9800/9880/9880C
International Energy Star Program compliant CR HP side: Approximately 1,000 sheets
(B0+ size plain paper, Quality mode, Continuous printing)
(Measure for harmonic component suppression guideline)
Anti HP side:Approximately 7,800 sheets
Electromagnetic interference standards compliance (B0+ size plain paper, Quality mode, Continuous printing)
VCCI class B
Stylus Pro 9400/9450
CR HP side: Approximately 1,700 sheets
Anti HP side:Approximately 26,000 sheets

1.2.7.4 Cutter Life-span 1.2.7.6 MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures)

Table 1-16. Cutter Life-span 20,000 POH (with no malfunction of electric parts and fans)
Stylus Pro 7400/7450/7800/ Stylus Pro 9400/9450/9800/ Table 1-18. Conditions
7880/7880C 9880/9880C
Paper type Stylus Pro 7400/7450/7800/ Stylus Pro 9400/9450/9800/
When performing 4 stage cut When performing 4 stage cut Item
on 24” standard roll paper on 44” standard roll paper 7880/7880C 9880/9880C
Coated paper Approximately 2000 sheets Approximately 2000 sheets Environment Normal room temperature and humidity
Film Approximately 1000 sheets Approximately 1000 sheets Printing Duty • Approx. 18% • Approx. 32%
• Power supply ON time: • Power supply ON time:
11.0 hours/day 11.0 hours/day
• Operation (printing) time: • Operation (printing) time:
1.2.7.5 Replacement Parts Life-span 2.0 hours/day 3.5 hours/day
Table 1-17. Replacement Parts Life-span

Stylus Pro 7800/ Stylus Pro Stylus Pro 9800/ Stylus Pro
Replacement parts 1.2.7.7 MPBF (Mean Pages Between Failure)
7880/7880C*1 7400/7450*1 9880/9880C*2 9400/9450*2
RTC backup battery Approx. from 5 to 10 years or more Stylus Pro 7400/7450/7800/7880/7880C:
More than 22 sheets of A1 by continuous printing
Cleaning unit
• Cap assembly Stylus Pro 9400/9450/9800/9880/9880C:
Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx. More than15 sheets of B0 by continuous printing
• Pump assembly
17,000 sheets 25,000 sheets 11,000 sheets 18,000 sheets
• Flashing box
NOTE: Without running a cleaning, no dot missing, and no skew.
• Wiper
CR Motor Approx. 20,000 sheets Table 1-19. Conditions
• Driven pulley Item All Models
• Carriage unit Printing mode • 720 x 720dpi FOL, Bi-D
• Tubes • 7 sheets/day x 3days
• FFC • 7 sheets/day x 22 sheets/day
Note "*1": A1 size plain paper, "Quality mode, Continuous printing) Print ratio Single color 5%, and single color 30%
"*2": B0 size plain paper, "Quality mode, Continuous printing) Environment Under the following three kinds of
environmental conditions:
• Temperature: 10 °C, Humidity: 20%
• Normal room temp. and humidity
• Temperature: 35 °C, Humidity: 20%

1.2.8 Environmental Conditions 1.2.8.2 Vibration Resistance

Operating: 0.15 G, 10 to 55 Hz in X, Y, Z direction
1.2.8.1 Temperature/Humidity
Store: 0.50 G, 10 to 55 Hz in X, Y, Z direction
Table 1-20. Temperature/Humidity
Condition Temperature*1 Humidity*2 1.2.8.3 Shock Resistance
Operating 10 το 35 °C 20 to 80 % Operating: 1G within 1 millisecond in X, Y, Z direction
Storage –20 το 40 °C 20 to 85 % Store: 2G within 2 milliseconds in X, Y, Z direction
Transporting –20 το 60 °C 5 to 85 % NOTE • Check that the printhead is capped when storing the printer for a long
period of time.
Note "*1": 40°C is for less than 1 month, 60°C is for less than 120 hours) • When transporting the printer, check that the printhead is capped, all ink
"*2": Should be no condensation and be within the range shown on the graph below. cartridges are removed, and the ink cartridges covers are closed and fixed.
• If the printhead are not capped, turn the power back ON with the ink
Humidity (%) cartridges installed, and then turn the power OFF again after confirming
the capping operation is complete.
• If the printer is left under an ambient temperature of minus 15°C, ink inside
the printhead and ink cartridges will freeze.
If this happens, move the printer, or heat the room so that the ambient
temperature is 25°C, and leave the printer under the temperature for
approximately 3 hours to melt the ink.
Temperature (°C)
Figure 1-2. Allowable Range of Temperature and Humidity

1.2.9 Overall Dimensions

1.2.9.1 Stylus Pro 7400/7450/7800/7880/7880C Overall Dimensions
Dimensions of Unit Mass
Conditions Width (W) x Depth (D) x Height (H) (mm) Mass
Conditions
Printer body 1,178 x 501 x 560 Stylus Pro 7400/7800 Stylus Pro 7450/7880/7880C
Rearward paper eject 1,178 x 745 x 1,180 Main body
Approx. 48.9kg Approx. 49.1kg
(without base mounted)*
Frontward paper eject 1,178 x 1,035 x 1,180
Base Approx. 10.5kg
Note • For “rearward paper eject”, the paper exit tray is brought down toward the rear.
• For “frontward paper eject”, the paper exit tray is brought down toward the front. Note "*": Excluding ink cartridges and papers
501 745
1,178
(When no base is mounted)
(When no base is mounted)

560
1,181
1,033
Figure 1-3. External Dimension of the Stylus Pro 7400/7450/7800/7880/7880C

1.2.9.2 Stylus Pro 9400/9450/9800/9880/9880C Overall Dimensions

Outer dimensions Mass
Width (W) x Depth (D) x Height (H) (mm) Conditions Mass
Conditions
Stylus Pro 9400/9800 Stylus Pro 9450/9880/9880C Main body (without base mounted)* Approx. 90.2kg
Printer body 1,702 x 667 x 1,196 1,702 x 678 x 1,196 Base Approx. 22.5kg
Rearward paper eject 1,702 x 681 x 1,196 Note "*": Excluding ink cartridges and papers
Frontward paper eject 1,702 x 849 x 1,196
Note • For “rearward paper eject”, the paper exit tray is brought down toward the rear.
• For “frontward paper eject”, the paper exit tray is brought down toward the front.
1,702 667
1,196
838
Figure 1-4. External Dimension of the Stylus Pro 9400/9450/9800/9880/9880C

1.2.10 Accessories/Options/Consumables
Accessories/Options (Stylus Pro 7400/7800/9400/9800)
Table 1-21. Accessories/Options
Item Part No. Stylus Pro 7800 Stylus Pro 7400 Stylus Pro 9800 Stylus Pro 9400
Standard accessories Power cord --- { { { {
Specialized Stand (base unit) --- { --- --- ---
2/3 inch Dual Roll Feed Spindle (24”) --- { { --- ---
2/3 inch Dual Roll Feed Spindle (44”) --- --- --- { {
Test roll paper (MC matte paper: Shared) --- { { { {
Roll Paper Belt --- { { { {
Ink Cartridge (110ml)*1 --- { { { {
Maintenance Tank*2 --- { { { {
Instruction Manual --- { { { {
Printer Software CD-ROM (Printer driver, maintenance utilities) --- { { { {
Application CD-ROM (Bundled software) --- { { { {
Guarantee Issuance Invoice --- { { { {
Business Card Holder --- { { { {
Individual Packaging --- { { { {
Options common with Specialized Stand (base unit) C12C84408 { { --- ---
other models 2/3 inch Dual Roll Feed Spindle (24”) C12C811161 { { --- ---
2/3 inch Dual Roll Feed Spindle (44”) C12C811151 --- --- { {
2/3 inch Dual Roll Feed Spindle (High Tension) (24”) C12C811155 { { --- ---
2/3 inch Dual Roll Feed Spindle (High Tension) (44”) C12C811152 --- --- { {
Manual Cutter Unit (24”) C12C815231 { { --- ---
Manual Cutter Unit (44”) C12C815182 --- --- { {
Auto Take-Up Reel Unit C12C815251 --- --- { {
Auto Cutter Spare Blade C12C815241 { { { {
EpsonNet 10/100 Base Tx Int. Print Server 5 C12C82434 { { { {
Note "*1": Stylus Pro 7800, Stylus Pro 9800 (1 of each color Pk, Mk, Lk, LLk, C, M, Lc, Lm, Y)
Stylus Pro 7400, Stylus Pro 9400 (2 of each color Mk, C, M, Y)
"*2": Stylus Pro 7400/7800: 1 tank,
Stylus Pro 9400/9800: 2 tanks

Accessories/Options (Stylus Pro 7450/7880/7880C/9450/9880/9880C)

Table 1-22. Accessories/Options
Stylus Pro 7800/ Stylus Pro Stylus Pro 9800/ Stylus Pro
Item Part No.
7880/7880C 7400/7450 9880/9880C 9400/9450
Standard accessories Power cord --- { { { {
2/3 inch Dual Roll Feed Spindle (24”) --- { { --- ---
2/3 inch Dual Roll Feed Spindle (44”) --- --- --- { {
Test roll paper (MC matte paper: Shared) --- { { { {
Roll Paper Belt --- { { { {
Ink Cartridge (110ml)*1 --- { { { {
Maintenance Tank*2 --- { { { {
Instruction Manual --- { { { {
Printer Software CD-ROM (Printer driver, maintenance utilities) --- { { { {
Application CD-ROM (Bundled software) --- { { { {
Guarantee Issuance Invoice --- { { { {
Business Card Holder --- { { { {
Individual Packaging --- { { { {
Conversion cartridge kit --- { --- { ---
Special option Conversion cartridges (C, M, Y) --- { { { {
Options common with Specialized Stand (base unit) C12C84408 { { --- ---
other models 2/3 inch Dual Roll Feed Spindle (24”) C12C811161 { { --- ---
2/3 inch Dual Roll Feed Spindle (44”) C12C811151 --- --- { {
2/3 inch Dual Roll Feed Spindle (High Tension) (24”) C12C811155 { { --- ---
2/3 inch Dual Roll Feed Spindle (High Tension) (44”) C12C811152 --- --- { {
Manual Cutter Unit (24”) C12C815231 { { --- ---
Manual Cutter Unit (44”) C12C815182 --- --- { {
Auto Take-Up Reel Unit C12C815251 --- --- { {
Auto Cutter Spare Blade C12C815241 { { { {
Roll paper fixation holder --- { { { {
EpsonNet 10/100 Base Tx Int. Print Server 5 C12C82434 { { { {
Note "*1": Stylus Pro 7880/7880C/9880/9880C (1 of each color Pk, Mk, Lk, LLk, C, VM, Lc, VLm, Y)
Stylus Pro 7450/9450 (2 of each color Mk, C, M, Y)
"*2": Stylus Pro 7450/7880/7880C: 1 tank,
Stylus Pro 9450/9880/9880C: 2 tanks

Consumables
Ink cartridge (110 ml/220 ml)
Table 1-23. Ink Cartridges of Stylus Pro 7800/9800 Table 1-25. Ink Cartridges of Stylus Pro 7880/7880C/9880/9880C
Part Number Part Number
Cartridge Cartridge
110 ml (Standard) 220 ml (Option) 110 ml (Standard) 220 ml (Option)
Photo Black (Pk) C13T562130 C13T563130 Photo Black (Pk) C13T602100 C13T603100
Matte Black (Mk) C13T566830 C13T567830 Matte Black (Mk) C13T611800 C13T612800
Light Black (Lk) C13T562730 C13T563730 Light Black (Lk) C13T602700 C13T603700
Light Light Black (LLk) C13T562930 C13T563930 Light Light Black (LLk) C13T602900 C13T603900
Cyan (C) C13T562230 C13T563230 Cyan (C) C13T602200 C13T603200
Magenta (M) C13T562330 C13T563330 Vivid Magenta (VM) C13T602300 C13T603300
Light Cyan (Lc) C13T562530 C13T563530 Light Cyan (Lc) C13T602500 C13T603500
Light Magenta (Lm) C13T562630 C13T563630 Vivid Light Magenta (VLm) C13T602600 C13T603600
Yellow (Y) C13T562430 C13T563430 Yellow (Y) C13T602400 C13T603400
Table 1-24. Ink Cartridges of Stylus Pro 7400/9400 Table 1-26. Ink Cartridges of Stylus Pro 7450/9450
Part Number Part Number
Cartridge Cartridge
110 ml (Standard) 220 ml (Option) 110 ml (Standard) 220 ml (Option)
Matte Black (Mk) C13T566830 C13T567830 Matte Black (Mk) C13T611800 C13T612800
Cyan (C) C13T566230 C13T567230 Cyan (C) C13T611200 C13T612200
Magenta (M) C13T566330 C13T567330 Magenta (M) C13T611300 C13T612300
Yellow (Y) C13T566430 C13T567430 Yellow (Y) C13T611400 C13T612400
Special paper for paper type and size.

Maintenance tank

1.3 External View and Parts Names

EXTERNAL VIEW
Stylus Pro 7400/7800/9400/9800
Optional Interface Card Slot Cover
Roll Paper Spindle Roll Paper

Cover
Paper Feed Slot Paper Lever IEEE1394 Interface

Connector
Releases paper
USB Interface
Connector
AC Inlet
Sets paper
Control Panel
Ink Cartridge
Compartment (left)
Ink Cartridge
Compartment (right)
Front Cover
Maintenance Tank
Stylus Pro 7400/7800: only one on the right side
Stylus Pro 9400/9800: one each on the left and right side
Figure 1-5. External View and Parts Names (Stylus Pro 7400/7800/9400/9800)
Product Description External View and Parts Names 32

Stylus Pro 7450/7880/7880C/9450/9880/9880C
Roll Paper Spindle Network Interface Roll Paper

Connector Cover
Paper Feed Slot Paper Lever

USB Interface
Releases paper Connector
AC Inlet
Sets paper
Control Panel
Ink Cartridge
Compartment (left)
Ink Cartridge
Compartment (right)
Front Cover
Maintenance Tank
Stylus Pro 7450/7880/7880C: only one on the right side
Stylus Pro 9450/9880/9880C: one each on the left and right side
Figure 1-6. External View and Parts Names (Stylus Pro 7450/7880/7880C/9450/9880/9880C)
Product Description External View and Parts Names 33

1.4 Control Panel 1.4.1.1 LED

The following table describes the LED displays and status.
1.4.1 Buttons and Functions Table 1-27. LED
LED Color Displays Status
Power Pause Paper check Ink check LED Paper Feed Enter
LED LED LED Power Green ON The power is ON.
Flashing*1 Receiving data or executing power off sequence
OFF The power is OFF.
Pause Yellow ON*2 Temporarily stopping the operation (The yellow light also
turns on when an error occurs).
Flashing*1 ---
OFF Ready for printing.
Paper Red ON Impossible to make a print due to the paper status
Check
Flashing*1 • A paper feeding or ejecting error is occurring
• The Paper Near-End warning is occurring
• A maintenance call error is occurring.
Power Pause LCD Paper Source Paper Feed Menu
OFF The papers are in normal condition without an error or
Figure 1-7. Panel Design warning.
Ink Red ON An ink-related error is occurring
Check
Flashing*1 An ink-related warning is occurring
OFF The inks are in normal condition without an error or
Message warning.
Roll Paper Margin Note "*1": Alternately turns On and Off every 500 ms. In the case of maintenance call error,
Roll Paper Counter
Custom Paper No.
they light for 100 ms at intervals of five seconds.
Paper Source "*2": When a printer error occurs, printing operation is disabled and the Pause LED turns
ON.
Note : When a service call error occurs, the all LEDs flash.
Platen Gap setting Ink Counter Maintenance Tank Counter

(One bar is displayed on Stylus
Pro 7400/7450/7800/7880/7880C)
Figure 1-8. LCD Panel
Product Description Control Panel 34

1.4.1.2 Buttons
Table 1-28. Button Functions
Functions Function at the Function
Button
Normal One Press Hold Down for Three Seconds*1 panel setting (+ Power On)
Power Turns the power ON or OFF *2 --- Power OFF ---

Pause Stops or restarts the printer operation*3 Reset Interrupts panel Maintenance
Waiting for paper initialization trigger*3 setting mode
Menu During printing When the paper thickness sensor detects less than 0.8mm. Moves to the next ---
Changes the panel display to the Status Menu*3 Runs a head cleaning*4 menu item
When Not printing When the paper thickness sensor detects 0.8mm or more
Shifts the printer into the Panel Setting Mode *3 Runs a cleaning after a cleaning unavailable error is
removed.
* When the paper thickness sensor detects 0.8mm or more
during printing.
Does not function
Paper Select During printing Execute the Cutter Replacement Sequence*5 Moves to the ---
Does not function previous menu
When Not printing item
Changes the paper type
Paper Feed *6 When roll paper is set When roll paper is set Increases the ---
Back-feeds the roll paper Performs high-speed back-feeding of the roll paper setting value
*Does not work when roll paper is not set *Does not work when roll paper is not set
When releasing the paper set lever
Increases suction of the Paper Suction fan
Paper Feed *6 When roll paper is set When roll paper is set Decreases the ---
Feeds the roll paper Performs high-speed feeding of the roll paper setting value
*Does not work when roll paper is not set *Does not work when roll paper is not set
When releasing the paper set lever
Decreases suction of the Paper Suction fan
When A4 to A3+ sized cut sheet is manually loaded
Feeds the cut sheet
When a cut sheet is set
Ejects the cut sheet
Continued to next page

Table 1-28. Button Functions (continued)

Functions Function at the Function
Button
Normal One Press Hold Down for Three Seconds*1 panel setting (+ Power On)
Enter Ejects a cut sheet when it is loaded after printing When paper is loaded during printing with no error. Accepts the ---
*Does not function under conditions other than above. change of
Roll paper: Cuts and ejects the paper
setting
Cut sheet: Ejects the paper
Executes the
During drying ink on paper selected
Stops drying ink and ejects the paper operation
*Does not function under conditions other than above. Saves the setting
Pause + Paper Select Enables or disables the Roll Paper Counter function when the --- --- ---
printer is in “Ready” mode.*7
Menu + Paper Feed + --- --- --- SERVICEMAN
Pause MODE
Menu + Paper Select + --- --- --- F/W UPDATE
Paper Feed + Paper Feed MODE
Note "*1": In actual operation, two seconds are enough. (It does not mean that the printer works immediately after the two seconds.)
"*2": The printer is always turned OFF regardless of operation status.
"*3": The printer starts to function within 3 seconds after the switch is released.
"*4": The cleaning is conducted when the printer is idling during printing.
"*5": The Cutter Replacement Sequence can be executed in “Ready” status, and even when a warning error or Paper Out error is occurring.
"*6": During two seconds after the button is released, the printer feeds the paper at 5cps. Then the feeding speed is increased to 52 cps after a lapse of the two seconds.
The maximum back-feed amount that can be performed by pressing the button one time is less than 37 cm.
"*7": This works when REMAINING PPR SETUP in the Maintenance mode has been set to ROLL and the Roll Paper Counter setting has been made.

1.4.2 Panel Display

1.4.2.1 Panel Display (LCD and LED)
Note : Explanation of marks used in the following table
{: Functions
X: Does Not function
---: The display is in accordance with the display of printer status under operation.
Table 1-29. Panel Display

LED Status Panel Button Function
Priority
Printer Status Messages on the LCD Paper

Paper Cleaning Reset
Power Pause Ink Paper Enter ejection Paper feed Menu Pause
Select (3 sec.) (3 sec.)
(3 sec.)
Printable (idle status)/ READY
Low ON ON ON ON { X { { { { { {
Data processing
Printing PRINTING Flashing OFF OFF --- X X X X { { { {
Unable to print UNABLE TO PRINT
MAKE SURE PAPAR IS ON ON --- --- X X X X X X X X
LOADED
Unable to execute UNABLE TO OPERATE
sequence UNABLE TO EXECUTE THE --- ON --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
SELECTED OPERATION
Maintenance tank nearly MAINTENANCE TANK
--- --- Flashing --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
full NEARLY FULL
Ink low*1 INK LOW --- --- Flashing --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
Paper out PAPER OUT
ON ON --- ON --- X X X { { X {
LOAD PAPER
Maintenance request MAINTENANCE REQUEST
--- --- --- Flashing*2 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
XXXX
Paper low PAPER LOW --- --- --- Flashing --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
Ink drying*3 INK DRYING
Flashing OFF --- OFF X X { X { X { {
NNNN SEC
Paper initializing PLEASE WAIT ON OFF --- OFF X X X X X X X {
High Pause PAUSE ON ON --- --- --- X X X X { { {

Table 1-29. Panel Display (continued)

Priority LED Status Panel Button Function

(3 sec.)
In hexadecimal dump PRINTING
Low Flashing OFF --- OFF X X X X X { { X
mode
Printing of internal data PRINTING Flashing OFF --- OFF X X X X X { { {
Initial cutting CUTTING PAPER
ON OFF --- OFF X X X X X X X {
PLEASE WAIT
Waiting for paper PRESS PAUSE BUTTON
ON ON --- OFF { X { X *4 X X { {
initialization trigger
Cleaning unavailable CLEANING ERROR
ON ON --- ON X X X X X X X {
REMOVE THICK PAPER
Initializing operation*5 PLEASE WAIT Flashing OFF --- OFF X X X X X X X {
Cleaning failure CLEANING ERROR
ON ON --- Flashing X X X X X X { {
PRESS PAUSE BUTTON
Ink mark sensor SENSOR ERROR
SN gain error LOAD DIFFERENT PAPER ON ON --- Flashing --- X X X X X X {
Paper recognition error
Paper eject error PAPER EJECT ERROR
REMOVE PAPER FROM ON ON --- Flashing --- X X X X X X {
PRINTER
Roll paper out PAPER OUT
ON ON --- ON --- X X X X { X {
LOAD PAPER
Borderless printing BORDERLESS ERROR
unavailable LOAD CORRECT SIZE ON ON --- Flashing X X X { X X X {
PAPER
Paper recognition PAPER ERROR
ON ON --- Flashing --- X X { X X X {
LOAD PAPER PROPERLY
Paper skew/ PAPER SKEW
ON ON --- Flashing --- X X { X X X*6 {
Cut sheet loading error LOAD PAPER PROPERLY
Paper cut error*7 PAPER CUT ERROR
REMOVE UNCUT PAPER ON ON --- Flashing --- X X { X X X {
Command error COMMAND ERROR

High Flashing ON Flashing Flashing X X X X X X X {
CHECK DRIVER SETTINGS



(3 sec.)
IK command error MISMATCH ERROR
MAKE SURE THAT THE INK
Low Flashing ON Flashing Flashing X X X X X X { {
CARTRIDGE AND DRIVER
SETTINGS MATCH
Wrong roll paper path PAPER SETTING ERROR
ON ON --- ON { X X X X X X {
LOAD ROLL PAPER
Wrong cut sheet path PAPER SETTING ERROR
ON ON --- ON { X X X X X X {
LOAD CUT SHEET
Cleaning*8 CLEANING
Flashing OFF --- --- X X X X X X X {
PLEASE WAIT
Executing ink sequence PLEASE WAIT Flashing OFF --- OFF X X X X X X X {
Executing ink sequence POWER CLEANING
(Confirming to run a YOU MUST MOVE INK
Flashing OFF --- OFF { X X X { X X X
Timer Cleaning) LEVERS WHEN CLEANING
NO EXECUTE? YES
Confirming to execute an PRESS PAUSE BUTTON TO
initial ink charge*9 START CHARGING INK.
PLEASE DO NOT LEAVE Flashing OFF --- --- X X X X X X { X
OPERATION IS NEEDED
WHILE INK IS CHARGING
Initial charging CHARGING INK
Flashing OFF --- --- X X X X X X X {
NN%
Cutting by cut switch CUTTING PAPER
Flashing OFF --- OFF X X X X X X X {
PLEASE WAIT
Conversion cartridge CONVERSION CRTG LIFE
near end of service life CONVERSION CRTG NEAR Flashing ON ON OFF --- X X X X X { X
END OF SERVICE LIFE
Conversion cartridge life CONVERSION CRTG LIFE
error REPLACE CONVERSION Flashing ON ON OFF --- X X X X X X X
CRTG WITH A NEW ONE.
Ink out*10 INK OUT
High ON ON ON OFF --- X X X { X X {
INSTALL NEW CARTRIDGE



(3 sec.)
PK/MK error INK CARTRIDGE ERROR
Low ON ON ON OFF --- X X X X X { {
CHECK CARTRIDGE
Wrong cartridge INK CARTRIDGE ERROR
ON ON ON OFF --- X X X X X { {
CHECK CARTRIDGE
Wrong destination INK CARTRIDGE ERROR
ON ON ON OFF --- X X X X X { {
CHECK CARTRIDGE
Unusable cartridge INK CARTRIDGE ERROR
INSTALL CORRECT ON ON ON OFF --- X X X X X X {
CARTRIDGE
Incorrect logo error INK CARTRIDGE ERROR
INSTALL CORRECT ON ON ON --- --- X X X X X { {
CARTRIDGE
Ink cartridge failure INK CARTRIDGE ERROR
CSIC contact error INSTALL CORRECT ON ON ON OFF --- X X X { X X {
CARTRIDGE
No ink cartridge NO CARTRIDGE
ON ON ON --- --- X X X { X X {
INSTALL INK CARTRIDGE
Maintenance tank full MAINT TANK FULL
(Left) REPLACE THE
(Stylus Pro 9400 and LEFT SIDE ON ON ON --- --- X X X X X X {
Stylus Pro 9800) MAINTENANCE
TANK

(Right) REPLACE THE
(Stylus Pro 9400 and RIGHT SIDE ON ON ON --- --- X X X X X X {
Stylus Pro 9800) MAINTENANCE
TANK
(Stylus Pro 7400 and REPLACE THE
High Stylus Pro 7800) MAINTENANCE ON ON ON --- --- X X X X X X {
TANK



(3 sec.)
Remaining capacity of MAINT TANK NEAR FULL
the left Maintenance REPLACE THE
Low Tank is insufficient LEFT SIDE ON ON Flashing --- X X X X X X X {
(Stylus Pro 9400/9800) MAINTENANCE
TANK
the right Maintenance REPLACE THE
Tank is insufficient RIGHT SIDE ON ON Flashing --- X X X X X X X {
(Stylus Pro 9400/9800) MAINTENANCE
TANK
the Maintenance Tank is REPLACE THE
insufficient MAINTENANCE ON ON Flashing --- X X X X X X X {
(Stylus Pro 7400/7800) TANK
Releasing left ink lever INK LEVER

*10 LOWER THE
LEFT INK ON ON ON --- --- X X X X X X {
LEVER
Releasing right ink lever INK LEVER

*10 LOWER THE
RIGHT INK ON ON ON --- --- X X X X X X {
LEVER
Printer cover open COVER OPEN

ON ON --- --- --- X X X X X X {
CLOSE COVER
Releasing paper set lever LEVER RELEASED
ON ON --- ON --- X X { X X X {
LOAD PAPER
Releasing paper set lever LEVER RELEASED
in operation LOWER THE
PAPER SET ON ON --- ON --- X X X X X X {
LEVER
Replacing ink cartridge INK CARTRIDGE

High ON ON ON OFF --- X X X X X X {



(3 sec.)
Paper jam PAPER JAM
Low ON ON OFF Flashing X X X X X X X X
REMOVE PAPER
No maintenance tank NO MAINTENANCE TANK
(Left) INSTALL THE
(Stylus Pro 9400/9800) LEFT SIDE ON ON ON --- --- X X X X X X {
MAINTENANCE
TANK
(Right) INSTALL THE
(Stylus Pro 9400/9800) RIGHT SIDE ON ON ON --- --- X X X X X X {
MAINTENANCE
TANK
(Stylus Pro 7400/7800) INSTALL THE
MAINTENANCE ON ON ON --- --- X X X X X X {
TANK
Resetting RESETTING
ON ON ON ON X X X X X X X X
PLEASE WAIT
F/W updating UPDATING FIRMWARE OFF OFF OFF OFF X X X X X X X X
F/W update completed FIRMWARE UPDATE
OFF OFF OFF OFF X X X X X X X X
successfully COMPLETE
F/W update failure F/W INSTALL ERROR
UPDATE FAILED Flashing Flashing Flashing Flashing X X X X X X X X
RESTART THE PRINTER
Executing power off POWER OFF
Flashing ON --- --- X X X X X X X X
sequence PLEASE WAIT
Type B option I/F error I/F CARD ERROR
Flashing Flashing Flashing Flashing X X X X X X X X
CHECK CARD TYPE
Restart request PRINTER ERROR
High Flashing Flashing Flashing Flashing X X X X X X X X
RESTART THE PRINTER



(3 sec.)
CR unreleased error CARRIAGE LOCKED
Low RELEASE THE CARRIAGE Flashing Flashing Flashing Flashing X X X X X X X X
LOCK
Service call SERVICE CALL ERROR
High Flashing Flashing Flashing Flashing X X X X X X X X
NNNNNNNNN
Confirming to execute a INK CARTRIDGE ERROR
--- black ink replacement BK INK CHANGE ON ON ON --- { X X X { X { {
sequence NO EXECUTE? YES
Note "*1": If INK LOW and INK OUT errors occur at the same time, the corresponding indicators flashes Note • icon is displayed with error messages.
for “LOW” state, and turns ON for “OUT” state.
• When the printer is in an error status, the PG setting and Roll Paper Counter are not
"*2": The LED lights for 100 ms at intervals of 5 seconds. displayed in order to display instruction messages to recover from the error.
"*3": The counter counts down every one second while drying ink.
• A request to reboot the printer due to a paper jam is indicated only by the flashing of the
"*4": The [Paper Feed ] button is available for feeding paper while performing automatic loading Paper Check LED.
of a cut sheet media.
"*5": EPSON logo and a progress bar are displayed while running the power-on initialization
• See “3.2.1 List of Panel Messages” (p.181) for more information on the error display.
sequence.
"*6": Returning the printer forcedly to its normal state from a cut sheet loading error can be made by
pressing the [Pause] button.
"*7": When a cut error occurs for the first time after replacing the cutter, the printer runs the Cutter
Replacement Sequence. See “1.4.4.33 Cutter Replacement” (p.98) for more information.
"*8": With the Stylus Pro 7800/7880/7880C/9800/9880/9880C, an error of the
maintenance tank on the anti-home side during cleaning does not interrupt the
cleaning operation. The error message is displayed when the cleaning is complete.
When the printer detects a cleaning flag at power-on, it displays “Maintenance Tank Full” error
for the anti-home side tank, and the remaining capacity is displayed after finishing the required
cleaning.
"*9": The message is displayed immediately before the printer executes the initial ink charge to
inform the user that the charging operation cannot be made without the assistance of an
attendant. If an error has occurred before the initial ink charge, the confirming message is
displayed after the error is removed. The printer displays the message only for the first initial
ink charge after power-on. (If the charging operation is interrupted by an error, and restarted
without turning the power OFF, the message is not displayed.)
"*10":When the Ink Lever is released for replacing the cartridge after “INK OUT” error occurs, the
“INK OUT” and “INK LEVER” messages displayed alternately at intervals of three seconds.

1.4.2.2 Icons on the LCD Platen Gap Setting

Paper Source The platen gap setting made by the PLATEN GAP function in the panel setting menu
is indicated. It does not appear when using the CUSTOM PAPER setting.
An icon corresponds to the selected media type (roll or cut sheet) is displayed.
Table 1-32. Platen Gap Location Setting Icon
Table 1-30. Paper Source Icon
Platen Gap Location Setting LCD
Paper type LCD
Widest
Roll paper auto cut ON
Wider
Roll paper auto cut OFF
Wide
Cut sheet
Narrow
Custom Paper No.
The user-defined paper setting number created by the CUSTOM PAPER function in Roll Paper Margin
the panel setting menu is displayed. See “1.4.4.31 EDM Status” (p.91) for more Margin setting for roll paper is indicated. It does not appear when the setting is default.
information on the CUSTOM PAPER.
Table 1-33. Roll Paper Margin Icon
Table 1-31. User Paper Setting No. Icon Platen Gap Location Setting LCD
User Paper
LCD TOP/BOTTOM 15mm
Setting No.
1 TOP 35mm /BOTTOM 15mm
2 3mm
15mm
…
9
Roll Paper Counter
10
The remaining amount of the roll paper is indicated. This icon appears when REMAINING
PPR SETUP in the Maintenance mode has been set to ROLL and the Roll Paper Counter
setting has been made.
Roll paper counter icon:

Ink Counter and Maintenance Tank Counter Table 1-34. Ink and Maintenance Tank Counter Icons
The remaining amount of ink in each cartridge and the free space of the Remaining Ink
Maintenance Tank
Icon
Maintenance Tanks are indicated. Free Space
100 to 81 %
80 to 61 %
60 to 41 %
40 to 21 %
Light Light Black (Matte Black) Maintenance Tank Left Side

Light Magenta/Vivid Light Magenta 20 % or less 20 % or less
(Matte Black) Maintenance Tank Right Side (Until the Ink Low status occurs) (Until the Near-Full status occurs)
Light Cyan (Magenta) This is not displayed on
Stylus Pro 7400/7450/7800/
Light Black (Magenta) 7880/7880C Ink Low Maintenance Tank Near Full
Photo Black/Matte Black (Cyan)
Cyan (Cyan)
Magenta/Vivid Magenta (Yellow) Ink Out Maintenance Tank Full
Yellow (Yellow)
Cartridge error Maintenance tank error
Note : Ink names within parenthesis are for Stylus Pro 7400/7450/9400/9450
No cartridge No maintenance tank
Figure 1-9. Ink and Maintenance Tank Counter Icons

Paper Suction 1.4.3 Job Information

The suction power to attract paper can be adjusted when the Paper Set Lever is Job Definition
released, and when a paper is detected by the Rear Manual Feed sensor and the PE Each print job is defined as a “Job”* and the printer stores a variety of information
sensor. The suction level is indicated by an icon as shown below. on each job as job history. The following flowchart shows the storing procedure
Table 1-35. Paper Suction Icon inside the printer.
Suction Power Icon NOTE: As cleaning can be executed during printing, it is not defined as a job.
High 168%
Stores the job information Stores the job information
Middle 60% Ready status
Low 0%
The job finished normally Count Start The job is canceled

JS
C H E C K When rewinding roll paper to align its top edge with the guide line,
P O IN T setting the suction power to its maximum makes the work easier
and accurately.
Printing
Count End Count End
JE (Cancel) JE (Cancel)
Figure 1-10. Storing Job Information

Job Information Note "*1": Currently reserved as 00h 00h fixed.

The job information (68 bytes x 10 jobs) is stored on the NVRAM on the main "*2": As the printer is not equipped with a parallel I/F, 01h is reserved.
board and can be checked by JOB INFORMATION in the panel setting menu. The
information includes the following items. NOTE: The saving values for each item when printing internal adjustment
patterns are as shown below.
Table 1-36. Job Information
Parameter Information Remarks Table 1-37. Job Information for Adjustment Pattern Printings
xx1 The Quantity of 0 to 10 Character User
Pattern Type Use I/F Document Name
Saved Job Code Name
Information
Nozzle Check Pattern Print FFh 00h Printer Nozzle Check
xx2 Saving No. 0 to 9
Status Print FFh 00h Printer Status Sheet
xx3, xx4 ID No. 1 to 65535 (0 not used.)
Job Information Print FFh 00h Printer Job Information
xx5 Using I/F 01 to 05 (Parallel* / USB / OptionIF1 / OptionIF2*
User Paper Setting Print FFh 00h Printer Custom Paper
/ IEEE1394) *1
FF: not use Bi-D Adjustment FFh 00h Printer Head Alignment
xx6 Job Status 01 to 05 (Pending / Printing / Complete / Cancel / Uni-D Adjustment FFh 00h Printer Head Alignment
Abort) Paper Thickness Detection FFh 00h Printer Detect Paper Thickness
xx7~xx8 Character String Currently reserved as 00h 00h fixed. Cutter Position Adjustment FFh 00h Printer Cutter Position
Code
xx9~xx24 User name (16 byte) In case of less than maximum length, fill
<SP>(20h).
xx25~xx56 Document name *2
(32byte)
xx57~xx72 Host name Saves 16-byte out of 32-byte sent from the driver
xx73 Media ID Media ID specified by the driver
xx74 Impression value 01-02, the value is 2 when DP=ON is specified in
the job.
xx75~xx90 Ink used [xxx.xx ml] Reply in the order of ink cartridge
alignment
xx91~xx94 Paper Used H:xxxx mm W:xxxx mm
xx95~xx100 Print Start Tim YYMMDDhhmmss, Time of JS
xx101~xx106 Time Used for Print YYMMDDhhmmss, Time of JE (Time of
Complete/Cancel/Abort)
xx107 Ink set information Same as IK
xx108 Paper path Same as PP
xx109~xx110 Page number ---

1.4.4 Panel Setting Exiting from the Panel Setting Mode

Any one of the following operations returns the printer to “ready for printing”
1.4.4.1 Outline status.
Entering the Panel Setting Mode Press the [Pause] button.
The printer can go into the Panel Setting mode by the [Menu ] button when it is Press the [Paper Select ] button while the top menu is displayed.
in “Ready” status, and even when a warning error, Paper Out error, or ink cartridge When the INITIALIZE SETTINGS in the PRINTER SETUP menu is
error (except the cartridge destination error) is occurring. Printing operation is executed and finished.
disabled while the printer is in the mode. When any one of items in the TEST PRINT menu is executed and finished.
Using the Panel Setting Menu When the BK INK CHANE (changing black ink between Photo black and
1. When the [Menu ] button is pressed under the condition described above, Matte black) in the MAINTENANCE menu is executed and finished. (Stylus
the top menu of the Panel Setting menu is displayed. Pro 7800/7880/7880C/9800/9880/9880C)
2. Use the [Paper Feed ( ) ] buttons to select (highlight) the menu item. When the CUTTER REPLACEMENT in the MAINTENANCE menu is
When a target item is highlighted, press the [Menu ] button to display the executed and finished.
menu screen of the selected item. NOTE: While the printer running or executing the selected function in the Panel
3. Select an item in the menu screen using the [Paper Feed ( ) ] buttons and Setting menu, it cannot be returned to the ready status.
press the [Menu ] button. A list of selectable settings is displayed.
4. A setting displayed with * (asterisk) is the current setting. Use the [Paper Feed
( ) ] buttons to change the setting.
5. After highlighting your choice, press the [Enter ] button to accept the
setting or execute the function. If you press the [Enter ] button when the
current setting (with asterisk) is highlighted, nothing happens.
6. To back to the previous screen, press the [Paper Select ] button.

Panel display Printer Setup menu

NOTE: Pressing the [Pause] button returns the printer to the ready
status regardless which menu screen is displayed. MENU
PRINTER SETUP PRINTER SETUP PRINTER SETUP
Top menu TEST PRINT ROLL PAPER COUNTER PAPER SIZE CHECK
PRINTER STATUS PLATEN GAP PAPER SKEW CHECK
READY PAGE LINE TIME OUT
MENU
PRINTER SETUP PRINTER SETUP PRINTER SETUP
TEST PRINT PLATEN GAP PAPER SKEW CHECK
PRINTER STATUS PAGE LINE TIME OUT
INTERFACE CUTTER ADJUSTMENT
MENU PRINTER SETUP PRINTER SETUP

[ ] PRINTER SETUP PLATEN GAP TIME OUT
TEST PRINT PAGE LINE CUTTER ADJUSTMENT
PRINTER STATUS INTERFACE REFRESH MARGIN
PRINTER SETUP PRINTER SETUP

MENU PAGE LINE CUTTER ADJUSTMENT
[ ] TEST PRINT INTERFACE REFRESH MARGIN
PRINTER STATUS CODE PAGE AUTO NOZZLE CHECK
CUSTOM PAPER
PRINTER SETUP PRINTER SETUP
INTERFACE REFRESH MARGIN
CODE PAGE AUTO NOZZLE CHECK
MENU
[ ] ROLL PAPER MARGIN AUTO CLEANING
PRINTER STATUS
CUSTOM PAPER
MAINTENANCE PRINTER SETUP PRINTER SETUP
CODE PAGE AUTO NOZZLE CHECK
ROLL PAPER MARGIN AUTO CLEANING
PAPER SIZE CHECK QUIET CUT
MENU
[ ] CUSTOM PAPER
MAINTENANCE PRINTER SETUP PRINTER SETUP
HEAD ALIGNMENT ROLL PAPER MARGIN AUTO CLEANING
PAPER SIZE CHECK QUIET CUT
PAPER SKEW CHECK INITIALIZE SETTINGS
MENU
[ ] CUSTOM PAPER PRINTER SETUP
MAINTENANCE AUTO CLEANING
HEAD ALIGNMENT QUIET CUT
INITIALIZE SETTINGS
Note : The “Roll paper counter” item appears when REMAINING PPR SETUP in the
Maintenance mode has been set to ROLL.

Test Print menu Printer Status menu
MENU
MENU
PRINTER SETUP [ / ] TEST PRINT [ / ] PRINTER STATUS
TEST PRINT PRINTER STATUS
TEST PRINT NOZZLE CHECK [ ] MAINTENANCE TANK
PRINTER STATUS VERSION
PRINTER STATUS STATUS SHEET
CUSTOM PAPER PRINTABLE PAGES USAGE COUNT
JOB INFORMATION
INK LEVEL CLEAR USAGE COUNT
TEST PRINT
[ ] PRINTER STATUS PRINTER STATUS
NOZZLE CHECK [ ] [ ] USAGE COUNT
VERSION
STATUS SHEET
PRINTABLE PAGES CLEAR USAGE COUNT
JOB INFORMATION
INK LEVEL JOB HISTORY
TEST PRINT PRINTER STATUS PRINTER STATUS

[ ] STATUS SHEET [ ] [ ] CLEAR USAGE COUNT
PRINTABLE PAGES
JOB INFORMATION INK LEVEL JOB HISTORY
CUSTOM PAPER MAINTENANCE TANK TOTAL PRINTS
TEST PRINT PRINTER STATUS PRINTER STATUS

[ ] STATUS SHEET [ ] [ ] JOB HISTORY
INK LEVEL
JOB INFORMATION MAINTENANCE TANK TOTAL PRINTS
CUSTOM PAPER USAGE COUNT SERVICE LIFE
PRINTER STATUS
[ ] JOB HISTORY
TOTAL PRINTS
SERVICE LIFE

Custom Paper menu Maintenance menu
MENU MENU
PRINTER STATUS [ / ] CUSTOM PAPER nn CUSTOM PAPER MAINTENANCE
CUSTOM PAPER PAPER NUMBER (1-10) MAINTENANCE CUTTER REPLACEMENT
MAINTENANCE PLATEN GAP HEAD ALIGNMENT BK INK CHANGE
THICKNESS PATTERN POWER CLEANING
CUSTOM PAPER nn CUSTOM PAPER nn MAINTENANCE

[ ] PAPER NUMBER (1-10) [ ] CUT METHOD CUTTER REPLACEMENT
PLATEN GAP PAPER FEED ADJUST BK INK CHANGE
THICKNESS PATTERN DRYING TIME POWER CLEANING

[ ] PLATEN GAP [ ] PAPER FEED ADJUST BK INK CHANGE
THICKNESS PATTERN DRYING TIME POWER CLEANING
CUT METHOD PAPER SUCTION CLOCK SETTING

[ ] THICKNESS PATTERN [ ] DRYING TIME POWER CLEANING
CUT METHOD PAPER SUCTION CLOCK SETTING
PAPER FEED ADJUST M/W ADJUSTMENT CONTRAST ADJUSTMENT
CUSTOM PAPER nn MAINTENANCE

[ ] DRYING TIME POWER CLEANING
PAPER SUCTION CLOCK SETTING
M/W ADJUSTMENT CONTRAST ADJUSTMENT
Note : A custom paper number which is currently selected is indicated at the “nn” position. Note : Stylus Pro 7400/7450/9400/9450 are not equipped with the BK Ink Change menu.
The number does not appear when custom paper is not used.

Head Alignment menu
MENU
CUSTOM PAPER
MAINTENANCE HEAD ALIGNMENT
HEAD ALIGNMENT PAPER SELECT
ALIGNMENT
HEAD ALIGNMENT
[ ] PAPER SELECT
ALIGNMENT

1.4.4.2 Panel Setting Mode Items List

Table 1-38. Panel Setting Mode Items List
Top menu (Panel display) Item menu Panel display Set value (Underline: Default) Ref.
---, 5.0~20~99.5m p.60
ROLL PAPER LENGTH
ROLL PAPER ---, 15~60~300ft
Remaining paper detection function (Roll paper)
COUNTER 1~2~15m
ROLL LENGTH ALERT
3~7~50ft
PG setting PLATEN GAP NARROW, STANDARD, WIDE, WIDER, WIDEST p.61
Page line PAGE LINE ON, OFF p.63
Stylus Pro 7400/7800/9400/9800 p.63
AUTO, USB, IEEE1394, OPTIONAL I/F CARD
IF switching INTERFACE
Stylus Pro 7450/7880/7880C/9450/9880/9880C
AUTO, USB, NETWORK
Code Page Switching CODE PAGE PC437, PC850 p.64
ROLL PAPER DEFAULT, TOP/BOTTOM 15mm, TOP 35/ /BOTTOM 15mm, p.65
Roll Paper Margin Setting
MARGIN 3mm, 15mm
Printer Setting Menu
PAPER SIZE p.67
(PRINTER SETUP) Paper Width Detection ON, OFF
CHECK
PAPER SKEW p.67
Skew Error Detection ON, OFF
CHECK
Job Time Out Setting TIME OUT OFF, 30sec, 60sec, 180sec, 300sec p.68
CUTTER p.68
Cutter Position Adjustment EXEC
ADJUSTMENT
Auto Margin Refresh REFRESH MARGIN ON, OFF p.70
AUTO NOZZLE p.70
Auto Nozzle Check Pattern for Each Job OFF, ON
CHECK
Cleaning when nozzle checked AUTO CLEANING ON, OFF p.71
Super Low Speed Cut Mode QUIET CUT OFF, ON p.71
INITIALIZE p.72
Printer Setup Value Initialization EXEC
SETTINGS
Nozzle Check Pattern Print NOZZLE CHECK PRINT p.72
Test Print Menu Status Print STATUS SHEET PRINT p.75
(TEST PRINT) Job Information Print JOB INFORMATION PRINT p.79
User Paper Print CUSTOM PAPER PRINT p.81

Table 1-38. Panel Setting Mode Items List (continued)

Stylus Pro 7400/7800 p.82
SN0xxxx.ICBS
Printer Status Menu SW0xxxx.ICBS
Firmware Version VERSION
(PRINTER STATUS) Stylus Pro 9450/9880/9880C
TN0xxxx-y.yy.ICBS
Stylus Pro 7450/7880/7880C
TW0xxxx-y.yy.ICBS
1st row LIGHT LIGHT BLACK xxxxxxPAGES p.82
2nd row LIGHT MAGENTA xxxxxxPAGES
3rd row LIGHT CYAN xxxxxxPAGES
Printing Page per Ink
4th row LIGHT BLACK xxxxxxPAGES
Cartridge PRINTABLE PAGES
5th row PHOTO BLACK (MATTE BLACK) xxxxxxPAGES
6th row CYAN xxxxxxPAGES
7th row MAGENTA xxxxxxPAGES
8th row YELLOW xxxxxxPAGES
1st row LIGHT LIGHT BLACK xxxxxxPAGES p.82
2nd row VIVID LIGHT MAGENTA xxxxxxPAGES
Printing Page per Ink 3rd row LIGHT CYAN xxxxxxPAGES
Printer Status Menu Cartridge 4th row LIGHT BLACK xxxxxxPAGES
PRINTABLE PAGES
(PRINTER STATUS) (Stylus Pro 7880/7880C/ 5th row PHOTO BLACK (MATTE BLACK) xxxxxxPAGES
9880/9880C) 6th row CYAN xxxxxxPAGES
7th row VIVID MAGENTA xxxxxxPAGES
1st row MATTE BLACK xxxxxxPAGES p.82
2nd row MATTE BLACK 2 xxxxxxPAGES
3rd row MAGENTA xxxxxxPAGES
Remaining Ink Display
4th row MAGENTA 2 xxxxxxPAGES
(Stylus Pro 7400/7450/ PRINTABLE PAGES
5th row CYAN xxxxxxPAGES
9400/9450)
6th row CYAN 2 xxxxxxPAGES
8th row YELLOW 2 xxxxxxPAGES


LIGHT LIGHT BLACK XXXXXXX p.84
1st row (XXXXXXX is any of the following)
(0%, nn%, E* F, E** F, E*** F, E**** F, E*****F)
LIGHT MAGENTA XXXXXXX
2nd row (XXXXXXX is any of the following)
(0%, nn%, E* F, E** F, E*** F, E**** F, E*****F)
LIGHT CYAN XXXXXXX
3rd row (XXXXXXX is any of the following)
(0%, nn%, E* F, E** F, E*** F, E**** F, E*****F)
LIGHT BLACK XXXXXXX
4th row INK LEVEL (XXXXXXX is any of the following)
(0%, nn%, E* F, E** F, E*** F, E**** F, E*****F)
PHOTO BLACK (MATTE BLACK) XXXXXXX
5th row (XXXXXXX is any of the following)
(0%, nn%, E* F, E** F, E*** F, E**** F, E*****F)
CYAN XXXXXXX (XXXXXXX is any of the following)
6th row
(0%, nn%, E* F, E** F, E*** F, E**** F, E*****F)
MAGENTA XXXXXXX (XXXXXXX is any of the following)
7th row
(0%, nn%, E* F, E** F, E*** F, E**** F, E*****F)
YELLOW XXXXXXX (XXXXXXX is any of the following)
8th row
(0%, nn%, E* F, E** F, E*** F, E**** F, E*****F)
Printer Status Menu
LIGHT LIGHT BLACK XXXXXXX p.84
(PRINTER STATUS)
(0%, nn%, E* F, E** F, E*** F, E**** F, E*****F)
VIVID LIGHT MAGENTA XXXXXXX
(0%, nn%, E* F, E** F, E*** F, E**** F, E*****F)
LIGHT CYAN XXXXXXX
3rd row (XXXXXXX is any of the following)
(0%, nn%, E* F, E** F, E*** F, E**** F, E*****F)
LIGHT BLACK XXXXXXX
(Stylus Pro 7880/7880C/ INK LEVEL
(0%, nn%, E* F, E** F, E*** F, E**** F, E*****F)
9880/9880C)
PHOTO BLACK (MATTE BLACK) XXXXXXX
(0%, nn%, E* F, E** F, E*** F, E**** F, E*****F)
6th row
(0%, nn%, E* F, E** F, E*** F, E**** F, E*****F)
VIVID MAGENTA XXXXXXX (XXXXXXX is any of the
7th row following)
(0%, nn%, E* F, E** F, E*** F, E**** F, E*****F)
8th row
(0%, nn%, E* F, E** F, E*** F, E**** F, E*****F)


MATTE BLACK XXXXXXX p.84
(0%, nn%, E* F, E** F, E*** F, E**** F, E*****F)
MATTE BLACK 2 XXXXXXX
(0%, nn%, E* F, E** F, E*** F, E**** F, E*****F)
MAGENTA XXXXXXX (XXXXXXX is any of the following)
3rd row
(0%, nn%, E* F, E** F, E*** F, E**** F, E*****F)
MAGENTA 2 XXXXXXX (XXXXXXX is any of the following)
(Stylus Pro 7400/7450/ 4th row INK LEVEL
(0%, nn%, E* F, E** F, E*** F, E**** F, E*****F)
9400/9450)
5th row
(0%, nn%, E* F, E** F, E*** F, E**** F, E*****F)
CYAN 2 XXXXXXX (XXXXXXX is any of the following)
6th row
(0%, nn%, E* F, E** F, E*** F, E**** F, E*****F)
Printer Status Menu 7th row
(0%, nn%, E* F, E** F, E*** F, E**** F, E*****F)
(PRINTER STATUS) YELLOW 2 XXXXXXX (XXXXXXX is any of the following)
8th row
(0%, nn%, E* F, E** F, E*** F, E**** F, E*****F)
LEFT XXXXXXX (XXXXXXX is any of the following) p.86
Maintenance Tank Count Left
MAINTENANCE (0%, nn%, E* F, E** F, E*** F, E**** F, E*****F)
(Stylus Pro 7800/7880/
TANK RIGHT XXXXXXX (XXXXXXX is any of the following)
7880C/9800/9880/9880C) Right
(0%, nn%, E* F, E** F, E*** F, E**** F, E*****F)
MAINTENANCE XXXXXXX (XXXXXXX is any of the following) p.86
Maintenance Tank Count (Stylus Pro 7400/7450/9400/9450)
TANK (0%, nn%, E* F, E** F, E*** F, E**** F, E*****F)
Consumables usage Ink INK xxxxx.xml p.86
USAGE COUNT
counters Paper PAPER xxxxx.xcm
Ink CLEAR USAGE INK EXEC p.87
Clear the usage counters
Paper COUNT PAPER EXEC
Job History (10 jobs) JOB HISTORY No.0~No.9 p.87
TOTAL PRINT p.88
Total Print Pages nnnnnn (6 digits at maximum) pages
PAGES


Cutter XXXXXXX (XXXXXXX is any of the following) p.88
Cutter Life
(0%, nn%, E* F, E** F, E*** F, E**** F, E*****F)
CR MOTOR XXXXXXX (XXXXXXX is any of the following) p.88
CR Motor Life Monitor
(0%, nn%, E* F, E** F, E*** F, E**** F, E*****F)
PF MOTOR XXXXXXX (XXXXXXX is any of the following) p.89
PF Motor Life Monitor
(0%, nn%, E* F, E** F, E*** F, E**** F, E*****F)
HEAD UNIT XXXXXXX (XXXXXXX is any of the following) p.89
Commodity Life Head Unit Life Monitor Consumables life
(0%, nn%, E* F, E** F, E*** F, E**** F, E*****F)
Printer Status Menu
CLEANING UNIT XXXXXXX p.90
(PRINTER STATUS)
Cleaning Unit Life Monitor (XXXXXXX is any of the following)
(0%, nn%, E* F, E** F, E*** F, E**** F, E*****F)
PRESSURE MOTOR XXXXXXX p.90
Pressurization Pump Monitor (XXXXXXX is any of the following)
(0%, nn%, E* F, E** F, E*** F, E**** F, E*****F)
ENABLED, DISABLED p.91
EDM Status EDM STATUS LAST_UPLOADED:
(NotUploaded), MM/DD/YY_HH:MM_GMT
Paper select PAPER NUMBER (1~10) STANDARD, 1~10 p.92
PG setting PLATEN GAP NARROW, STANDARD, WIDE, WIDER, WIDEST
Paper Thickness Detection Pattern Print THICKNESS PATTERN PRINT
Select Paper Thickness Number THICKNESS NUMBER (1~15) 1~15
User Paper Setting Menu STANDARD, THIN PAPER, THICK PAPER and FAST,
Select Cutting Method CUT METHOD
(CUSTOM PAPER) THICK PAPER and SLOW
Paper Feed Adjustment Setting PAPER FEED ADJUST -0.70%~0%~0.70%
Ink Drying Time (Pass delay) DRYING TIME 0.0 sec.~10.0 sec.
Paper Suction PAPER SUCTION STANDARD, -1, -2, -3, -4
Print Adjustment (MW) M/W ADJUTMENT STANDARD, 1, 2
Execute sequence CUTTER REPLACEMENT EXEC p.98
OPEN FRONT COVER TO
Cover Open SEE CUTTER REPLACEMENT –
Cutter Replacement LABEL
SEE LABEL TO REPLACE
Cutter Replacement –
Maintenance Menu CUTTER
(MAINTENANCE) Cutter Close CLOSE FRONT COVER –
K Ink Replacement Execute Sequence BK INK CHANGE EXEC p.99
Powerful Cleaning POWERFUL CLEANING EXEC p.99
Date Setting DATE SETTING YY/MM/DD HH:MM p.99
CONTRAST p.99
Contrast Adjustment -20[dec]~0~+20[dec]
ADJUSTMENT


PAPER p.100
Paper Thickness (in 0.1mm units) *1 STANDARD, 0.1mm~1.5mm
THICKNESS
UNI-D
BI-D 2 COLOR
BI-D ALL
AUTO
BI-D #1
BI-D #2
BI-D #3
#1 C 1~5~9
: :
#1 LLK 1~5~9
#2 C 1~5~9
UNI-D : :
#2 LLK 1~5~9
Gap Adjustment Menu
#3 C 1~5~9
(GAP ADJUSTMENT)
Select and Print Adjustment Pattern ALIGNMENT : :
#3 LLK 1~5~9
#1 LC 1~5~9
MANUAL #1 LM 1~5~9
BI-D 2 #2 LC 1~5~9
COLOR #2 LM 1~5~9
#3 LC 1~5~9
#3 LM 1~5~9
#1 C 1~5~9
#1 M 1~5~9
BI-D 2 #2 C 1~5~9
COLOR #2 M 1~5~9
#3 C 1~5~9
#3 M 1~5~9


#1 MK/PK 1~5~9 p.100
: :
#1 LLK 1~5~9
#2 MK/PK 1~5~9
BI-D ALL : :
#2 LLK 1~5~9
#3 MK/PK 1~5~9
: :
Gap Adjustment Menu MANUAL #3 LLK 1~5~9
Select and Print Adjustment Pattern (continued) ALIGNMENT (continued)
(GAP ADJUSTMENT) (continued) #1 C 1~5~9
: :
#1 M2 1~5~9
#2 C 1~5~9
BI-D ALL : :
#2 M2 1~5~9
#3 C 1~5~9
: :
#3 M2 1~5~9
Network Setting NETWORK SETUP DISABLE, ENABLE p.104
IP Adress Setting IP ADDRESS SETTING AUTO, PANEL
IP Adress IP Adress
000,000,000,000~192,168,192,16
Network Setting Menu Network Setting Subnet Mask IP,SM,DG SETTING Subnet Mask
8~255,255,255,255
Default Gateway Default Gateway
Bonjour BONJOUR ON, OFF
Initialized Network Setting INIT NETWORK SETTING EXECUTE

1.4.4.3 Roll Paper Counter Setting the Warning Length of Roll Paper
When the Roll Paper length is set, an asterisk (*) is displayed beside the set
This menu appears when REMAINING PPR SETUP in the Maintenance mode has been set to
value for two seconds and then the Roll Length Alert screen appears. The alert
ROLL. The menu allows you to specify the length of roll paper within the range from 15 ft. (5.0
menu allows you to set a length to be informed as a warning when remaining
m) to 300 ft. (99.5 m) in increments of 1 ft. (0.5 m) using the [Paper Feed ( ) ] buttons.
length of roll paper becomes the set value. It can be set within the range from
If you hold down one of the buttons for two seconds, the length is increased or
3 ft. (15 m) to 50 ft. (15 m) in 1 ft. (1 m) increments.
decreased in 10 ft. (10 m) increments.
When the alert setting is accepted, an asterisk (*) appears beside the set value
Roll Paper Counter Menu for two seconds and then the screen returns to the Printer Setup menu screen.
Setting the Length of Roll Paper
PRINTER SETUP
ROLL PAPER COUNTER ROLL LENGTH ALERT
ROLL PAPER LENGTH PLATEN GAP
Setting
Setting PAGE LINE 15m
99.5m
ROLL PAPER LENGTH ROLL LENGTH ALERT

Setting
99.0m
Setting 14m
PRINTER SETUP
ROLL PAPER COUNTER ROLL PAPER LENGTH ROLL LENGTH ALERT
PLATEN GAP
Setting Setting
PAGE LINE 20.0m 2m
ROLL PAPER LENGTH

ROLL LENGTH ALERT
Setting
5.0m Setting
1m
Note 1: If the unit is changed, the roll paper length setting and the Roll Paper Counter are reset
ROLL PAPER LENGTH
to their default.
Setting
---
Note 1: If the unit is changed, the roll paper length setting and the Roll Paper Counter are reset
to their default.

1.4.4.4 Platen Gap Table 1-39. Platen Gap Settings

This function allows you to select a gap between the printhead and paper (platen) from Paper thickness Actual PG location
PH command Panel SN command: m2
the five options (narrow, standard, wide, wider, widest). The platen gap set in the sensor (mm)
Custom Paper menu for the user-defined paper type (other than standard) has the 0.3mm or more 00H-08H Narrow Minimum 04 Small 1.2
higher priority than that made by this Platen Gap menu. If, however, the paper 0.8mm or less Small 03 Small 1.2
thickness sensor detects the paper as over 0.81mm, the platen gap is automatically set Middle 02 Small 1.2
to the Widest. The table below shows the details of the five option. Big 01 Middle 1.6
Maximum 05 Big 2.1
Table 1-39. Platen Gap Settings
Standard Minimum 04 Small 1.2
Paper thickness Actual PG location
PH command Panel SN command: m2 Small 03 Small 1.2
sensor (mm)
Middle 02 Middle 1.6
0.3mm or less 00H*-08H Narrow Minimum 04 Minimum 0.8
Big 01 Big 2.1
Small 03 Minimum 0.8
Maximum 05 Maximum 2.6
Middle 02 Small 1.2
Wide* Minimum 04 Small 1.2
Big 01 Middle 1.6
Small 03 Middle 1.6
Maximum 05 Big 2.1
Middle 02 Big 2.1
Standard Minimum 04 Minimum 0.8
Big 01 Maximum 2.6
Small 03 Small 1.2
Middle 02 Middle 1.6
Wider* Minimum 04 Middle 1.6
Big 01 Big 2.1
Small 03 Big 2.1
Middle 02 Maximum 2.6
Wide* Minimum 04 Small 1.2
Big 01 Maximum 2.6
Small 03 Middle 1.6
Middle 02 Big 2.1
Widest Minimum 04 Big 2.1
Big 01 Maximum 2.6
Small 03 Maximum 2.6
Wider* Minimum 04 Middle 1.6
Big 01 Maximum 2.6
Small 03 Big 2.1
09H-12H --- --- --- Maximum 2.6
Big 01 Maximum 2.6
0.81mm or more --- --- --- --- Maximum 2.6
Widest Minimum 04 Big 2.1 Note "*": Only in this case, SN command is ignored. When paper thickness is 0.15mm, it is
Small 03 Maximum 2.6 operated with minimum Bi-D value and minimum SN (PG).
Middle 02 Maximum 2.6 Note : The platen setting is automatically reset at power-OFF and returns to the “Standard” (default)
Big 01 Maximum 2.6 when the printer is turned ON.
09H-10H --- --- --- Maximum 2.6

The following 5 positions are available in the actual platen gap setting. Platen Gap Setting menu
Table 1-40. Actual Platen Gap Setting
PLATEN GAP
Position Gap width Use NARROW
Setting
STANDARD
Maximum 2.6mm For thick paper WIDE
Big 2.1mm Reduce the smearing on the printed image of thin paper.
Middle 1.6mm For certain easy-rubbed thin paper (Default) PRINTER SETUP
PLATEN GAP PLATEN GAP
Small 1.2mm For thin paper (Default)
PAGE LINE NARROW
Setting
Minimum 0.8mm For thin film (Film, glossy media) INTERFACE STANDARD
WIDE
Platen Gap Determining Sequence

The following flowchart shows the sequence to determine the platen gap. PLATEN GAP
STANDARD
Setting
WIDE
Start
WIDER
Is custom paper set?

PLATEN GAP
WIDE
Setting
WIDER
Received by WIDEST
RM command?
PLATEN GAP
PG used by custom paper
PG used by RM command PG used by media ID WIDE
setting Setting
WIDER
WIDEST
Printer reflects PG set

value
Determination by thick
paper sensor
End

1.4.4.5 Page Lines 1.4.4.6 Interface

This menu allows you to print or not print a page lines (cutoff lines). The page line, a This menu allows you to switch the interface setting between auto-detection, USB,
black solid line with 1 dot width, cannot be printed on cut sheet media (only for roll IEEE1394, and optional interface.
paper). This setting, however, is ignored when a print job is made by the printer driver
Interface menu
(printer driver settings has the priority). If the paper width setting of the printer driver
is narrower than that of roll paper loaded on the printer, a vertical page line is printed Stylus Pro 7400/7800/9400/9800
on the paper as the right edge of the paper size specified by the driver.
The page line is printed in the same resolution with the image. PRINTER SETUP
PAGE LINE
INTERFACE INTERFACE
NOTE: The vertical page line is not printed when the print job is sent without
CODE PAGE AUTO
specifying the paper size (horizontal page lines can be printed.) Setting
USB
IEEE1394
Page Line menu
PRINTER SETUP INTERFACE

PLATEN GAP AUTO
PAGE LINE PAGE LINE Setting
USB
INTERFACE ON IEEE1394
Setting
OFF
INTERFACE
USB
PAGE LINE Setting
IEEE1394
ON OPTION I/F CARD
Setting
OFF
INTERFACE
USB
Setting
IEEE1394
OPTION I/F CARD

Stylus Pro 7450/7880/7880C/9450/9880/9880C 1.4.4.7 Code Page

The Code Page for the printer can be switched between PC437 (extended graphics) and
PRINTER SETUP PC850 (multilingual).
PAGE LINE
INTERFACE Code Page menu
CODE PAGE Setting
PRINTER SETUP
INTERFACE
CODE PAGE CODE PAGE
ROLL PAPER MARGIN PC437
Setting
PC850
Setting
CODE PAGE
PC437
Setting
PC850
Setting

1.4.4.8 Roll Paper Margin If the width of image is larger than that of the specified printable area, the extended
width of the image is clipped off from its right side. In such case, a vertical page line is
Margin setting for roll paper can be selected from the following settings:
not printed.
DEFAULT: Left/Right=3 mm. Top and bottom are
depends on media type
Roll Paper Width X
TOP/BOTTOM 15 mm: Left/Right=3 mm, Top/Bottom=15 mm
TOP 35/BOTTOM 15 mm: Left/Right=3 mm, Top=35 mm, Bottom=15 mm Clipped Area
X*
15 mm: 15 mm for all four sides.
3 mm: 3 mm for all four sides.
Note that the margins specified by this setting are created without reducing or
X X
enlarging image size. Printable Area
When “3 mm” is selected
Vertical and horizontal page lines are printed along the specified page size.
When “15mm”, or “Top/Bottom15mm” is selected
Vertical and horizontal page lines are printed along a line 12 mm outside of all X
four edges or top and bottom edges of the specified page size.
See “Fig 1-11 Roll Paper Margin (1)” (p.65).
When “TOP 35/BOTTOM 15 mm” is selected Cut Position or Border
Vertical and horizontal page lines are printed along a line 12 mm outside of
Figure 1-12. Roll Paper Margin (2)
the top edge of the specified page size.
See “Fig 1-11 Roll Paper Margin (1)” (p.65).
Note "*": Top margin of roll paper can be set with “Set the paper top margin” (SN command).
Roll Paper Width X When the printer receives the command, it determines the top margin as follows:
• When the “Roll Paper Margin” is set to other than Default
Vertical
X* Line The printer creates a top margin according to the panel setting.
• When the “Roll Paper Margin” is set to Default
The printer creates a top margin according to the SN command.
If a top margin information is not included in the SN commands, the printer adopts
X X the default top margin setting.
Printable Area
Cut Position or Border
Figure 1-11. Roll Paper Margin (1)

Note 1: Using the Borderless Print function, left and right margins can be set to 0. Roll Paper Margin menu
2: When the following patterns are printed, left and right margins are fixed to 3mm.
PRINTER SETUP
CODE PAGE
Adjustment Patterns Menu Command
ROLL PAPER MARGIN ROLL PAPER MARGIN
Nozzle Check Pattern Test Printing Menu NC Command PAPER SIZE CHECK DEFAULT
Setting
TOP/BOTTOM 15mm
Auto Nozzle Check Pattern ↑ ↑ TOP 35/BOTTOM 15mm
Status Print ↑ SS Command
Job Information Print ↑ ↑
ROLL PAPER MARGIN
User Paper Print ↑ ↑
DEFAULT
Setting
Paper Thickness Detection Pattern User Paper Setting Menu ↑ TOP/BOTTOM 15mm
TOP 35/BOTTOM 15mm
Cutter Position Adjustment PRINTER SETUP ↑
Auto Nozzle Check for each job ↑ ↑
Manual Uni-D GAP Adjustment Menu DT/DC Command ROLL PAPER MARGIN
TOP/BOTTOM 15mm
Manual Bi-D K ↑ ↑ TOP 35/BOTTOM 15mm
Setting
Manual Bi-D ↑ ↑ 15mm
F/W ROM Version Print --- VI Command
ROLL PAPER MARGIN

TOP 35/BOTTOM 15mm
Setting
15mm
3mm
ROLL PAPER MARGIN

TOP 35/BOTTOM 15mm
Setting
15mm
3mm

1.4.4.9 Page Size Check 1.4.4.10 Paper Skew Check

The printer automatically detects the width of loaded media if this function is set to When this is set to “ON”, the printer automatically detects that a paper is loaded or fed
ON. Disabling this (setting it to OFF) is not recommended especially when performing at an angle and causes a paper skew error. If this is set to OFF, the error does not occur
a Borderless printing because the printer performs a print job even if the specified print and printing is continued even if the paper is loaded at an angle or skewed during
size (width) is bigger than the width of the loaded paper and result in printing directly printing causing a off-paper printing. Although this menu is disabled when “cut sheet”
on the platen. is selected as paper source, the printer can detect a skewed cut sheet when starting
When paper initializing or print starting, for distance between grid roller and #1 nozzle, printing if the Paper Size Check function is set to ON. If a cut sheet is skewed during
paper is fed unconditionally. The print starts from the position. (No back-feed with printing, however, it cannot be detected.
other sequences) Although the paper that is under grid roller will be wasteful, place
Paper Skew Check menu
emphasis on printing even for low reflection paper.
Cut sheets and auto loading have same specification.
The above paper width detection OFF sequence is just for the first page in case of roll PRINTER SETUP
PAPER SIZE CHECK
paper. Paper auto cutting is not checked whether it cuts off or not. PAPER SKEW CHECK PAPER SKEW CHECK
If this function is set to OFF, the Paper Skew Check for a cut sheet at the time it is TIME OUT ON
Setting
loaded is not performed. OFF
Paper Size Check menu
PRINTER SETUP PAPER SKEW CHECK

ROLL PAPER MARGIN ON [ ]
PAPER SIZE CHECK PAPER SIZE CHECK Setting
OFF
PAPER SKEW CHECK ON
Setting
OFF
PAPER SIZE CHECK

ON
Setting
OFF

1.4.4.11 Time Out 1.4.4.12 Cutter Adjustment

This menu allows you to select a time period for job time out from five options. When This menu is provided to adjust a position to cut top and bottom edges of media to
a transmission of print job from the host is interrupted for the set time period, the produce a full-bleed print on all four sides (Borderless print). So, the menu is enabled
printer judges that the job is finished and ejects the paper. only when the “Roll Auto Cut ON” is selected as paper source.
This setting is ignored when the host sends a duplex print job with the interface When you press the [Enter] button with the EXECUTE highlighted, the printer prints a
specified. cutter position adjustment pattern and cuts the pattern at its center. The adjustment can
be made simply by entering a number printed with the most accurately cut block
Time Out menu
pattern into the entry screen.
PRINTER SETUP If you select this menu with the paper source set to other than the “Roll Auto Cut ON”,
PAPER SKEW CHECK the printer stops to operate displaying a message "Commanded Function Can Not Be
TIME OUT TIME OUT Executed” for three seconds, and then returns to the Printer Setup menu screen.
CUTTER ADJUSTMENT OFF
Setting
30sec Cutter position adjustment pattern
60sec
The pattern is comprised of 17 two-toned blocks as shown in the figure below. The
blocks of exactly the same size are neatly aligned and the boundary of the two
colors on them is slightly shifted by each block. They are cut off at their horizontal
TIME OUT
OFF center. The difference in color between the upper and lower portions of each block
Setting
30sec makes it easier to find out which one is most accurately cut on the boundary of the
60sec two colors.
<Stylus Pro 7800/9800>

TIME OUT
30sec
Setting
60sec
180sec
<Stylus Pro 7400/9400>
TIME OUT
60sec
Setting
180sec
300sec
Figure 1-13. Cutter position adjustment pattern
TIME OUT
60sec
Setting
180sec
300sec

Cutter Adjustment menu
PRINTER SETUP
TIEM OUT
CUTTER ADJUSTMENT CUTTER ADJUSTMENT PRINTING
REFRESH MARGIN EXECUTE
CUTTER ADJUSTMENT
Setting
17
CUTTER ADJUSTMENT
Setting
16
CUTTER ADJUSTMENT
Setting
2
CUTTER ADJUSTMENT
Setting
1

1.4.4.13 Refresh Margin 1.4.4.14 Auto Nozzle Check

This function is used to feed paper by the amount of “minimum cut length” and cut it The printer automatically checks nozzles for clogging before starting each print job
before starting the next print job after making a 4-side borderless print. Ink smudges or when this is set to ON with the “1.4.4.15 Auto Cleaning” (p.71) also set to ON. This
printed image left on the top edge of the paper due to the 4-side borderless printing are function is useful when performing a lot of print jobs taking many hours or a day and
cut off to “refresh” the top edge for the next job. the user has no time to check the nozzle clogging.
A JS command triggers the “Auto Nozzle Check”. The printer does not perform the
Refresh Margin menu
check if the print job does not include the JS command. When the printer runs out of
paper at the time of the “Auto Nozzle Check”, it causes “Paper Out” error and waits
PRINTER SETUP paper for being loaded.
CUTTER ADJUSTMENT
REFRESH MARGIN REFRESH MARGIN Auto Nozzle Check menu
AUTO NOZZLE CHECK ON
Setting
OFF
PRINTER SETUP
REFRESH MARGIN
AUTO NOZZLE CHECK AUTO NOZZLE CHECK
AUTO CLEANING OFF
REFRESH MARGIN Setting
ON
ON
Setting
OFF
AUTO NOZZLE CHECK

OFF
Setting
ON

1.4.4.15 Auto Cleaning 1.4.4.16 Quiet Cut

The printer automatically runs a head cleaning when this is set to ON. If the “Auto The “Quiet Cut” enables the slowest cutting mode (20 CPS). The default is OFF. This
Nozzle Check” is also set to ON, the printer prints an Auto Nozzle Check pattern to is effective to cut thick media and reduces cutting noise and paper dust.
examine the pattern and runs the cleaning depending on the result before starting each For cutting operation to create a 4-side borderless print, however, this setting cannot be
job. If you perform the Nozzle Check function in the TEST PRINT of the Panel Setting used because the slower the cutting speed is the more likely to cause off-registration.
menu with the Auto Cleaning set to ON, the automatic cleaning sequence; printing an
Quiet Cut menu
Auto Nozzle Check pattern, examining the pattern, and running a head cleaning, is
performed. If the Auto Cleaning is set to OFF when you conduct the Nozzle Check, a
pattern for manual nozzle check is printed. When performing the Nozzle Check using PRINTER SETUP
AUTO CLEANING
the printer driver or utility, automatic cutting operation after printing the check pattern QUIET CUT QUIET CUT
is performed according to the Auto Cut setting of the printer. INITIALIZE SETTINGS OFF
Setting
ON
NOTE: If the width of media loaded in the printer is smaller than that of A4-size,
the Auto Nozzle Check pattern is printed but not examined automatically.
Table 1-41. Nozzle Check and Cleaning Settings QUIET CUT

OFF
Auto Nozzle Nozzle Check Setting
Nozzle Check in ON
Auto Cleaning Nozzle Check Check Before by command
Test Print menu
Each Job “NC” m1 = 80h
OFF OFF Manual None Manual
ON OFF Auto None Auto
OFF ON Manual None Manual
ON ON Auto Execute Auto
Auto Cleaning menu
PRINTER SETUP
AUTO NOZZLE CHECK
AUTO CLEANING AUTO CLEANING
QUIET CUT ON
Setting
OFF
AUTO CLEANING
ON
Setting
OFF

1.4.4.17 Initialize Settings 1.4.4.18 Printing Nozzle Check Pattern (Test Print Menu)
This function allows you to return all settings in the PRINTER SETUP menu to their The nozzle check pattern printed by executing the Nozzle Check in the TEST PRINT
default except the Roll Paper Counter (both the roll paper settings and the usage menu has two types; one for automatic checking and the other one for manual
counter). checking. Switching between the automatic and manual nozzle checking is made by
The table below shows the target setting items and their default. the Auto Cleaning setting. Both patterns are printed with the following information; the
firmware version, available capacity of the Maintenance Tank, and usage counters for
Table 1-42. Printer Setup Value Initialization paper and ink.
Setting Item After Initialization
Auto Nozzle Check pattern.
PLATEN GAP STANDARD
Order of colors (Stylus Pro 7800 and Stylus Pro 9800: from left)
PAGE LINE ON Photo Black / Matte Black→Cyan→Magenta→Yellow→Light Light Black→
INTERFACE AUTO Light Magenta→Light Cyan→Light Black
CODE PAGE PC437
ROLL PAPER MARGIN DEFAULT
PAPER SIZE CHECK ON
PAPER SKEW CHECK ON
TIME OUT OFF Version :SW<Z><xxxx>.IBCS
CUTTER ADJUSTMENT (Manufacture setting) MaintenanceTank Left:<yyy>% MaitenanceTank Right:<yyy>%
Cur.InkCount :<aaaaa.a>ml Pre.InkCount :<bbbbb.b>ml C-P:<ccccc.c>ml
REFRESH MARGIN ON
Cur.PaperCount:<ddddd.d>cm Pre.PaperCount:<eeeee.e>cm C-P:<fffff.f>cm
AUTO NOZZLE CHECK ON
AUTO CLEANING ON Figure 1-14. Auto Nozzle Check Pattern (Stylus Pro 9800)
QUIET CUT OFF
Initialize Settings menu Matte Black→Cyan→Magenta→Yellow→Matte Black→Cyan→
Magenta→Yellow
PRINER SETUP
AUTO CLEANING
QUIET CUT
INITIALIZE SETTINGS INITIALIZE SETTINGS PLEASE WAIT
EXECUTE
Version :SW<Z><xxxx>.IBCS
MaintenanceTank Left:<yyy>% MaitenanceTank Right:<yyy>%
Figure 1-15. Auto Nozzle Check Pattern (Stylus Pro 9400)

Order of colors (Stylus Pro 7880/7880C/9880/9880C: from left) Manual Nozzle Check pattern
Photo Black / Matte Black→Cyan→Vivid Magenta→Yellow→Light Light Order of colors (Stylus Pro 7800 and Stylus Pro 9800: from left)
Black→Vivid Light Magenta→Light Cyan→Light Black Photo Black / Matte Black→Cyan→Magenta→Yellow→Light Black→Light
Cyan→Light Magenta→Light Light Black
Version :TW<Z><xxxx>-<y.yy>.IBCS MaintenanceTank Left:<yyy>% MaitenanceTank Right:<yyy>%
MaintenanceTank Left:<yyy>% MaitenanceTank Right:<yyy>% Cur.InkCount :<aaaaa.a>ml Pre.InkCount :<bbbbb.b>ml C-P:<ccccc.c>ml
Cur.InkCount :<aaaaa.a>ml Pre.InkCount :<bbbbb.b>ml C-P:<ccccc.c>ml Cur.PaperCount:<ddddd.d>cm Pre.PaperCount:<eeeee.e>cm C-P:<fffff.f>cm
Figure 1-18. Manual Nozzle Check Pattern (Stylus Pro 9800)
Order of colors (Stylus Pro 7450/9450: from left) Matte Black x 2→Magenta x 2→Cyan x 2→Yellow x 2
Matte Black→Cyan→Magenta→Yellow→Matte Black→Cyan→
Magenta→Yellow
MaintenanceTank:<yyy>%
Version :TW<Z><xxxx>-<y.yy>.IBCS
MaintenanceTank Left:<yyy>% MaitenanceTank Right:<yyy>% Figure 1-19. Manual Nozzle Check Pattern (Stylus Pro 9400)

Order of colors (Stylus Pro 7880/7880C/9880/9880C: from left) Explanation of information printed under the pattern
Photo Black / Matte Black→Cyan→Magenta→Yellow→Light Black→Light <Z>: 0 (other than “0” indicates special specification)
Cyan→Light Magenta→Light Light Black
<xxxx>: Firmware version
<y.yy>: Network Firmware version
I: Number of colors (four or eight) used for printing
Version :TW<Z><xxxx>-<y.yy>.IBCS B: Business system setting
MaintenanceTank Left:<yyy>% MaitenanceTank Right:<yyy>% C: Custom version setting
Cur.InkCount :<aaaaa.a>ml Pre.InkCount :<bbbbb.b>ml C-P:<ccccc.c>ml S: Development stage
<yyy>: Available space in the Maintenance Tank
<aaaaa.a>: Ink consumption counter detected immediately before
Figure 1-20. Manual Nozzle Check Pattern (Stylus Pro 9880)
printing the pattern. (5.1-digit)
<bbbbb.b>: Ink consumption counter detected immediately before
Order of colors (Stylus Pro 7450/9450: from left) printing the previous pattern. (5.1-digit)
Matte Black x 2→Magenta x 2→Cyan x 2→Yellow x 2 <ccccc.c>: Value obtained by subtracting <bbbbb.b> from <aaaaa.a>
(5.1-digit)
<ddddd.d>: Paper consumption counter detected immediately before
printing the pattern (5.1-digit)
Version :TW<Z><xxxx>-<y.yy>.IBCS <eeeee.e>: Paper consumption counter detected immediately before
MaintenanceTank:<yyy>% printing the previous pattern (5.1-digit)
<fffff.f>: Value obtained by subtracting <eeeee.e> from <ddddd.d>.
(5.1-digit)
Figure 1-21. Manual Nozzle Check Pattern (Stylus Pro 9450) NOTE • “-” is printed instead of ink or paper counter value if the corresponding
value does not exits.
• When printing the check pattern on Premium Glossy Photo Paper or
Premium Semigloss Photo Paper, the top margin is automatically set to 20
mm regardless of the margin setting made by the panel setting menu to
ensure proper print of the pattern.

1.4.4.19 Printing Status Sheet Type B : Installed

- Current Setting +-----------------+- Printer Status -+----------------
The “Status Sheet” in the TEST PRINT menu allows you to print a Status Sheet (a list Platen Gap :Standard |Version :SW0xxxx.IBCS
of information on current panel settings and ink cartridges). Page Line :On |Total Prints :xxxxxx PG
The following two items are required to print the sheet. Interface :Auto |Use Ink :xxxxxx.xml
Code Page :PC437 |Use Paper :xxxxxx.xcm
Print paper size: A4 Margine :Default |Mainte Tank Left :E[*****]F
Paper Size Check :ON |Mainte Tank Right :E[*****]F
Font: Built-in font (Print all in alphanumeric characters) Paper Align Check :ON |Cutter Life :E[*****]F
Time Out :30sec |CR Motor :E[*****]F
Procedure: Refresh Margin :ON |PF Motor :E[*****]F
1. Press the [Menu ] button on the control panel to enter the panel setting Auto Nozzle Check :OFF |Head :E[*****]F
Auto Cleaning :ON |Cleaner :E[*****]F
menu. Quiet Cut :OFF |Pressure Motor :E[*****]F
2. Press the [Paper Feed ] to display "TEST PRINT” menu. - Ink Cartridge --+-----------------+------------------+-----------------
Manufacturer :INK by EPSON INK by EPSON INK by EPSON
3. Press the [Menu ] button to select the “TEST PRINT” and highlight the Ink Type : Pigment Pigment Pigment
“STATUS SHEET” using the [Paper Feed ] button. Ink Color : Light Light Black Light Magenta Light Cyan
4. Press the [Menu ] button again to select “PRINT”. Ink Capacity : 110ml 110ml 110ml
Ink Left : E[*****]F E[*****]F E[*****]F
5. Press the [Enter ] button to execute status sheet printing. Production Date : `02/03 `02/03 `02/03
Expire Date : `03/10 `03/10 `03/10
Ink Life : 6 month 6 month 6 month
Passed : 2 month 2 month 2 month
Printable Sheet : 120 pages 120 pages 120 pages
------------------+------------------+-----------------+-----------------
Ink Type : Pigment Pigment Pigment
Ink Color : Light Black Photo Black Cyan
Ink Capacity : 110ml 110ml 110ml
Ink Left : E[*****]F E[*****]F E[*****]F
Production Date : `02/03 `02/03 `02/03
Expire Date : `03/10 `03/10 `03/10
Passed : 2 month 2 month 2 month
Printable Sheet : 120 pages 120 pages 120 pages
------------------+------------------+-----------------+-----------------
Manufacturer :INK by EPSON INK by EPSON
Ink Type : Pigment Pigment
Ink Color : Magenta Yellow
Ink Capacity : 110ml 110ml
Ink Left : E[*****]F E[*****]F
Production Date : `02/03 `02/03
Expire Date : `03/10 `03/10
Ink Life : 6 month 6 month
Passed : 2 month 2 month
Printable Sheet : 120 pages 120 pages
------------------+------------------+-----------------+-----------------
Figure 1-22. Status Sheet of the Stylus Pro 9800

Type B : Installed - Current Setting +-----------------+- Printer Status -+----------------

- Current Setting +-----------------+- Printer Status -+---------------- Platen Gap :Standard |Version :TW0xxxx-y.yy.IBCSxxxx
Platen Gap :Standard |Version :SN0xxxx.IBCS Page Line :On |Total Prints :xxxxxx PG
Page Line :On |Total Prints :xxxxxx PG Interface :Auto |Use Ink :xxxxxx.xml
Interface :Auto |Use Ink :xxxxxx.xml Code Page :PC437 |Use Paper :xxxxxx.xcm
Code Page :PC437 |Use Paper :xxxxxx.xcm Margine :Default |Mainte Tank Left :E[*****]F
Margine :T/B15mm |Mainte Tank :E[*****]F Paper Size Check :ON |Mainte Tank Right :E[*****]F
Paper Size Check :ON |Cutter Life :E[*****]F Paper Align Check :ON |Cutter Life :E[*****]F
Paper Align Check :ON |CR Motor :E[*****]F Time Out :30sec |CR Motor :E[*****]F
Time Out :30sec |PF Motor :E[*****]F Refresh Margin :ON |PF Motor :E[*****]F
Refresh Margin :ON |Pressure Motor :E[*****]F Auto Nozzle Check :OFF |Head :E[*****]F
Auto Nozzle Check :OFF |Head :E[*****]F Auto Cleaning :ON |Cleaner :E[*****]F
Auto Cleaning :ON |Cleaner :E[*****]F Quiet Cut :OFF |Pressure Motor :E[*****]F
Quiet Cut :OFF | - Ink Cartridge --+-----------------+------------------+-----------------
- Ink Cartridge --+-----------------+------------------+----------------- Manufacturer :INK by EPSON INK by EPSON INK by EPSON
Manufacturer :INK by EPSON INK by EPSON INK by EPSON Ink Type : Pigment Pigment Pigment
Ink Type : Pigment Pigment Pigment Ink Color : Light Light Black Vivid Light Magenta Light Cyan
Ink Color : Matte Black Matte Black 2 Magenta Ink Capacity : 110ml 110ml 110ml
Ink Capacity : 110ml 110ml 110ml Ink Left : E[*****]F E[*****]F E[*****]F
Ink Left : E[*****]F E[*****]F E[*****]F Production Date : `02/03 `02/03 `02/03
Production Date : `02/03 `02/03 `02/03 Expire Date : `03/10 `03/10 `03/10
Expire Date : `03/10 `03/10 `03/10 Ink Life : 6 month 6 month 6 month
Ink Life : 6 month 6 month 6 month Passed : 2 month 2 month 2 month
Passed : 2 month 2 month 2 month Printable Sheet : 120 pages 120 pages 120 pages
Printable Sheet : 120 pages 120 pages 120 pages ------------------+------------------+-----------------+-----------------
------------------+------------------+-----------------+----------------- Manufacturer :INK by EPSON INK by EPSON INK by EPSON
Manufacturer :INK by EPSON INK by EPSON INK by EPSON Ink Type : Pigment Pigment Pigment
Ink Type : Pigment Pigment Pigment Ink Color : Light Black Photo Black Cyan
Ink Color : Magenta 2 Cyan Cyan 2 Ink Capacity : 110ml 110ml 110ml
Ink Capacity : 110ml 110ml 110ml Ink Left : E[*****]F E[*****]F E[*****]F
Ink Left : E[*****]F E[*****]F E[*****]F Production Date : `02/03 `02/03 `02/03
Production Date : `02/03 `02/03 `02/03 Expire Date : `03/10 `03/10 `03/10
Expire Date : `03/10 `03/10 `03/10 Ink Life : 6 month 6 month 6 month
Ink Life : 6 month 6 month 6 month Passed : 2 month 2 month 2 month
Passed : 2 month 2 month 2 month Printable Sheet : 120 pages 120 pages 120 pages
Printable Sheet : 120 pages 120 pages 120 pages ------------------+------------------+-----------------+-----------------
------------------+------------------+-----------------+----------------- Manufacturer :INK by EPSON INK by EPSON
Manufacturer :INK by EPSON INK by EPSON Ink Type : Pigment Pigment
Ink Type : Pigment Pigment Ink Color : Vivid Magenta Yellow
Ink Color : Yellow Yellow 2 Ink Capacity : 110ml 110ml
Ink Capacity : 110ml 110ml Ink Left : E[*****]F E[*****]F
Ink Left : E[*****]F E[*****]F Production Date : `02/03 `02/03
Production Date : `02/03 `02/03 Expire Date : `03/10 `03/10
Expire Date : `03/10 `03/10 Ink Life : 6 month 6 month
Ink Life : 6 month 6 month Passed : 2 month 2 month
Passed : 2 month 2 month Printable Sheet : 120 pages 120 pages
Printable Sheet : 120 pages 120 pages ------------------+------------------+-----------------+-----------------
------------------+------------------+-----------------+-----------------
Figure 1-23. Status Sheet of the Stylus Pro 7400 Figure 1-24. Status Sheet of the Stylus Pro 9880

- Current Setting +-----------------+- Printer Status -+----------------

Explanation of information printed on the status sheet
Platen Gap :Standard |Version :TW0xxxx-y.yy.IBCSxxxx
Page Line :On |Total Prints :xxxxxx PG Type B Whether optional Type-B I/F is mounted or not *1
Interface :Auto |Use Ink :xxxxxx.xml Current Setting Setting content of "PRINTER SETUP" menu in Panel Setting menu. *2
Code Page :PC437 |Use Paper :xxxxxx.xcm
Version Network firmware version
Margine :T/B15mm |Mainte Tank :E[*****]F
Paper Size Check :ON |Cutter Life :E[*****]F Total Print Total number of printed sheets
Paper Align Check :ON |CR Motor :E[*****]F Ink usage counter value (total cumulative amount of ink used
Time Out :30sec |PF Motor :E[*****]F Use Ink
for printing, flushing and cleaning)
Refresh Margin :ON |Pressure Motor :E[*****]F
Auto Nozzle Check :OFF |Head :E[*****]F Paper usage counter value (total cumulative amount (length)
Use Paper
Auto Cleaning :ON |Cleaner :E[*****]F of paper used for printing)
Quiet Cut :OFF | Available space in the Maintenance Tank (Left)
- Ink Cartridge --+-----------------+------------------+----------------- Mainte Tank Left
(Stylus Pro 7800/7880/7880C/9800/9880/9880C) *3
Available space in the Maintenance Tank (Right)
Ink Type : Pigment Pigment Pigment Printer Status Mainte Tank Right
Ink Color : Matte Black Matte Black 2 Magenta (Stylus Pro 7800/7880/7880C/9800/9880/9880C) *3
Ink Capacity : 110ml 110ml 110ml Available space in the Maintenance Tank
Mainte Tank
Ink Left : E[*****]F E[*****]F E[*****]F (Stylus Pro 7400/7450/9400/9450) *3
Production Date : `02/03 `02/03 `02/03 Cutter Life Remaining life of the cutter *4
Expire Date : `03/10 `03/10 `03/10
Ink Life : 6 month 6 month 6 month CR Motor Remaining life of the CR motor *4
Passed : 2 month 2 month 2 month PF Motor Remaining life of the PF motor *4
Printable Sheet : 120 pages 120 pages 120 pages Head Remaining life of the Printhead *4
------------------+------------------+-----------------+-----------------
Manufacturer :INK by EPSON INK by EPSON INK by EPSON Cleaner Remaining life of the Cleaning Unit *4
Ink Type : Pigment Pigment Pigment Pressure Motor Remaining life of the Pressure motor *4
Ink Color : Magenta 2 Cyan Cyan 2 Manufacture Name of the manufacturer
Ink Capacity : 110ml 110ml 110ml
Ink Left : E[*****]F E[*****]F E[*****]F Ink Type Ink type name
Production Date : `02/03 `02/03 `02/03 Ink Color Name of the ink color
Expire Date : `03/10 `03/10 `03/10 Ink Capacity Capacity of the ink cartridge
Passed : 2 month 2 month 2 month Ink Left Remaining amount of ink *5
Printable Sheet : 120 pages 120 pages 120 pages Ink Cartridge *6 Production Date The year and month of manufacture
------------------+------------------+-----------------+----------------- Expire Date Expire date of warranty
Manufacturer :INK by EPSON INK by EPSON
Ink Type : Pigment Pigment Ink Life Guaranteed period for use after unpacking
Ink Color : Yellow Yellow 2 Passed Time having elapsed after unpacking
Ink Capacity : 110ml 110ml Number of sheets which can be printed with the remaining
Ink Left : E[*****]F E[*****]F Printable Sheet
ink (calculated value)
Production Date : `02/03 `02/03
Expire Date : `03/10 `03/10
Ink Life : 6 month 6 month
Passed : 2 month 2 month
Printable Sheet : 120 pages 120 pages
------------------+------------------+-----------------+-----------------
Figure 1-25. Status Sheet of the Stylus Pro 7400

Note "*1": Only Stylus Pro 7400/7800/9400/9800.

"*2": In Stylus Pro 7880/7880C/7450/9880/9880C/9450's case, the network firmware
version is printed.
"*3": Available space in the Maintenance Tank is indicated as shown below.
100 to 81% E∗∗∗∗∗F

80 to 61% E∗∗∗∗ F
60 to 41% E∗∗∗ F
40 to 21% E∗∗ F
20 to 10% E∗ F
Less than 10% nn%
0% (Maintenance tank full) 0%
"*4": Remaining lives of the cutter, CR motor, PF motor, Head unit, Cleaning unit and
Pressure motor are indicated as shown below.
100 to 81% E∗∗∗∗∗F

80 to 61% E∗∗∗∗ F
60 to 41% E∗∗∗ F
40 to 21% E∗∗ F
20 to 1% E∗ F
Less than 1% F F
"*5": Remaining amount of ink is indicated as shown below.
100 to 81% E∗∗∗∗∗F

80 to 61% E∗∗∗∗ F
60 to 41% E∗∗∗ F
40 to 21% E∗∗ F
20% ~ just before near end E∗ F
After near end ~ just before ink end nn%
0% (ink end) 0%
"*6": The ink cartridge information is displayed based on the information stored in the
CSIC of the ink cartridge.

1.4.4.20 Printing Job Information - Job No.0 - User Name: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Host Name: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Doc Name : XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX I/F Type: Unknown
A job history report (up to 10 jobs) stored on the printer can be printed using the “Job Job State : Processing Start: 00/00/00 00:00:00 End: 00/00/00 00:00:00
Information” in the TEST PRINT menu. Paper Used: W xxxxxmm * H xxxxxmm Page Count: xxxxx
Ink Used : LLK xxx.xxml LM xxx.xxml LC xxx.xxml LK xxx.xxml
PK xxx.xxml C xxx.xxml M xxx.xxml Y xxx.xxml
The “job” includes the following operations; - Job No.1 - User Name: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Host Name: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
A print job sent by a host computer Job State : Processing Start: 00/00/00 00:00:00 End: 00/00/00 00:00:00
Paper Used: W xxxxxmm * H xxxxxmm Page Count: xxxxx
Printing an adjustment pattern Ink Used : LLK xxx.xxml LM xxx.xxml LC xxx.xxml LK xxx.xxml
(includes Gap Adjustment, Nozzle Check, Cutter Adjustment, and Paper - Job No.2 - User Name: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Host Name: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Thickness patterns) Doc Name : XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX I/F Type: Unknown
Job State : Processing Start: 00/00/00 00:00:00 End: 00/00/00 00:00:00
Printing a Status Sheet or Job Information Paper Used: W xxxxxmm * H xxxxxmm Page Count: xxxxx
The following two items are required to print the Job Information. For more - Job No.3 - User Name: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Host Name: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
information, see “1.4.3 Job Information (p.46)”. Doc Name : XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX I/F Type: Unknown
Print paper size: A4 Paper Used: W xxxxxmm * H xxxxxmm
Ink Used : LLK xxx.xxml LM xxx.xxml
Page Count: xxxxx
LC xxx.xxml LK xxx.xxml
Font: Built-in font (Print all in alphanumeric characters) PK xxx.xxml C xxx.xxml M xxx.xxml Y xxx.xxml
- Job No.4 - User Name: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Host Name: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
NOTE • 2-byte characters in user name and document name is “?”. Job State : Processing Start: 00/00/00 00:00:00 End: 00/00/00 00:00:00
• “-” is printed if the corresponding value does not exits. Ink Used : LLK xxx.xxml LM xxx.xxml LC xxx.xxml LK xxx.xxml
• “?” is printed if the corresponding value is unknown. - Job No.5 - User Name: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Host Name: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Figure 1-26. Job information print pattern


- Job No.0 - User Name: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Host Name: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX - Job No.0 - User Name: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Host Name: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Doc Name : XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX I/F Type: Unknown Doc Name : XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX I/F Type: Unknown
Job State : Processing Start: 00/00/00 00:00:00 End: 00/00/00 00:00:00 Job State : Processing Start: 00/00/00 00:00:00 End: 00/00/00 00:00:00
Paper Used: W xxxxxmm * H xxxxxmm Page Count: xxxxx Paper Used: W xxxxxmm * H xxxxxmm Page Count: xxxxx
Ink Used : LLK xxx.xxml VLM xxx.xxml LC xxx.xxml LK xxx.xxml Ink Used : MK xxx.xxml MK2 xxx.xxml M xxx.xxml M2 xxx.xxml
PK xxx.xxml C xxx.xxml VM xxx.xxml Y xxx.xxml C xxx.xxml C2 xxx.xxml Y xxx.xxml Y2 xxx.xxml
Figure 1-27. Job information print pattern Figure 1-28. Job information print pattern
(Stylus Pro 7880/7880C/9880/9880C) (Stylus Pro 7400/7450/9400/9450)

1.4.4.21 Printing Custom Paper Information Paper No.1

Custom Name : XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
User-defined paper settings stored on the printer using the CUSTOM PAPER menu Platen Gap : Standard Drying Time : 10.0 sec Suction : Standard
can be printed out by executing the “Custom Paper” in the TEST PRINT menu. Cut Method : ThickPaperFast M/W Adj. : Standard
The following two items are required to print the Custom Paper information. Ppr Thick. : 0.2mm Ppr Feed Adj. : -0.70 %
Paper No.2
Print paper size: A4 Platen Gap : Standard Drying Time : 10.0 sec Suction : Standard
Font: Built-in font (Print all in alphanumeric characters) Cut Method : ThickPaperFast M/W Adj. : Standard
Ppr Thick. : 0.2mm Ppr Feed Adj. : -0.70 %
NOTE: “?” is printed out for the settings made by two-byte characters. Paper No.3
Platen Gap : Standard Drying Time : 10.0 sec Suction : Standard
Cut Method : ThickPaperFast M/W Adj. : Standard
Paper No.4
Paper No.5
Paper No.6
Paper No.7
Paper No.8
Paper No.9
Paper No.10
Figure 1-29. Custom Paper Information

1.4.4.22 Firmware Version 1.4.4.23 Printable Pages

The “Version” in the PRINTER STATUS menu displays the version of the installed The “Printable Pages” in the PRINTER STATUS menu displays estimated pages that
firmware on the LCD panel. can be printed with the remaining ink per cartridge.
The estimation is performed as follows:
Table 1-43. Firmware Version Display
Remaining amount of ink after printing ÷ Amount of ink used to print a page
Model Display
Stylus Pro 7400/7800 VERSION Note • A whole number which can be specified by the printer driver is displayed as the result
of the calculation.
SN0xxxx.IBCS
• “---” is displayed if the corresponding value cannot be obtained.
Stylus Pro 9400/9800 VERSION
SW0xxxx.IBCS Printable Pages menu
Stylus Pro 7450/7880/7880C VERSION Stylus Pro 7800/9800
TN0xxxx-y.yy.IBCS
PRINTER STATUS
Stylus Pro 9450/9880/9880C VERSION
VERSION PRINTABLE PAGES
TW0xxxx-y.yy.IBCS PRINTABLE PAGES LIGHT LIGHT BLACK
INK LEVEL nnnnnnn PAGES
Note • SW0 and SN0:0 are firmware versions for special destination
• xxxx: version of firmware (last 4 characters)
• y.yy: Network firmware version PRINTABLE PAGES PRINTABLE PAGES
• I: “4” is displayed for the four-color model, and “8” is displayed for the eight-color LIGHT MAGENTA PHOTO BLACK *
model. nnnnnnn PAGES nnnnnnn PAGES
• B: Business system setting

In accordance with the result of calculation of the following printer conditions, a
character to be displayed (1 to F) is determined. PRINTABLE PAGES PRINTABLE PAGES
If all bits are 0, “0” is displayed. LIGHT CYAN CYAN
nnnnnnn PAGES nnnnnnn PAGES
• Bit0: Restraint on graphic print function
0: Restraint on graphic print function is not available.
1: Restraint on graphic print function is available.
• Bit1: Credit function PRINTABLE PAGES PRINTABLE PAGES
0: Credit function is not available. LIGHT BLACK MAGENTA
1: Credit function is available. nnnnnnn PAGES nnnnnnn PAGES
• Bit2: Credit counter
0: Credit No. is 0 or credit function is OFF.
1: Credit No. is 1 or more with credit function ON.
• Bit3: Reserved PRINTABLE PAGES
YELLOW
• C: If a special setting is made for custom operation, the custom number is displayed. nnnnnnn PAGES
If a custom operation is not set, “0” is displayed.
• S: Not displayed on the mass-produced machines Note "*": “MATTE BLACK” is displayed if it is installed instead of the “PHOTO BLACK”.

Stylus Pro 7880/7880C/9880/9880C Stylus Pro 7400/7450/9400/9450
PRINTER STATUS PRINTER STATUS

VERSION PRINTABLE PAGES VERSION PRINTABLE PAGES
PRINTABLE PAGES LIGHT LIGHT BLACK PRINTABLE PAGES MATTE BLACK
INK LEVEL nnnnnnn PAGES INK LEVEL nnnnnnn PAGES
PRINTABLE PAGES PRINTABLE PAGES PRINTABLE PAGES PRINTABLE PAGES

VIVID LIGHT MAGENTA PHOTO BLACK * MATTE BLACK 2 CYAN
nnnnnnn PAGES nnnnnnn PAGES nnnnnnn PAGES nnnnnnn PAGES

LIGHT CYAN CYAN MAGENTA CYAN 2

LIGHT BLACK VIVID MAGENTA MAGENTA 2 YELLOW
PRINTABLE PAGES PRINTABLE PAGES

YELLOW YELLOW 2
nnnnnnn PAGES nnnnnnn PAGES

1.4.4.24 Ink Level Ink Level Menu

The “Ink Level” in the PRINTER STATUS menu displays remaining amount of ink Stylus Pro 7800/9800
per ink cartridge.
PRINTER STATUS
Table 1-44. Ink Level Display PRINTABLE PAGES INK LEVEL
INK LEVEL LIGHT LIGHT BLACK
Remaining Ink Level Panel display Ink Check LED MAINTENANCE TANK E*****F
100 to 81 % E∗∗∗∗∗F OFF
80 to 61 % E∗∗∗∗ F OFF
60 to 41 % E∗∗∗ F OFF INK LEVEL INK LEVEL
40 to 21 % E∗∗ F OFF LIGHT MAGENTA PHOTO BLACK *
E*****F E*****F
20 % or less E∗ F OFF
(Until the Ink Low error occurs)
Ink Low status nn% Flashing
(Until the Ink Out error occurs) INK LEVEL INK LEVEL
LIGHT CYAN CYAN
Ink Out 0% ON E*****F E*****F
Note • The remaining counter is converted to percentage after the Ink Low error occurs.
• An amount of ink consumed for performing initial ink charge for newly attached ink
cartridges is not included in the 100 % amount. The remaining amount of ink after the INK LEVEL INK LEVEL
initial ink charge is regarded as full status (100 %) and then the ink usage counter starts. LIGHT BLACK MAGENTA
E*****F E*****F
INK LEVEL
YELLOW
E*****F
Note "*": MATTE BLACK” is displayed if it is installed instead of the “PHOTO BLACK”.

Stylus Pro 7880/7880C/9880/9880C Stylus Pro 7400/7450/9400/9450
PRINTER STATUS PRINTER STATUS

PRINTABLE PAGES INK LEVEL PRINTABLE PAGES INK LEVEL
INK LEVEL LIGHT LIGHT BLACK INK LEVEL MATTE BLACK
MAINTENANCE TANK E*****F MAINTENANCE TANK E*****F
INK LEVEL INK LEVEL INK LEVEL INK LEVEL

VIVID LIGHT MAGENTA PHOTO BLACK * MATTE BLACK 2 CYAN
E*****F E*****F E*****F E*****F

LIGHT CYAN CYAN MAGENTA CYAN 2
E*****F E*****F E*****F E*****F

LIGHT BLACK VIVID MAGENTA MAGENTA 2 YELLOW
E*****F E*****F E*****F E*****F
INK LEVEL INK LEVEL

YELLOW YELLOW 2
E*****F E*****F

1.4.4.25 Maintenance Tank Counter 1.4.4.26 (Ink and Paper) Usage Counter
The “Maintenance Tank” in the PRINTER STATUS menu displays available space in The “Usage Count” in the PRINTER STATUS menu displays a cumulative amount of
the Maintenance Tank. consumed ink or paper.
NOTE: Maintenance Tank total capacity = 1300 g Ink usage counter

A cumulative amount of ink consumed by the following operations is displayed by
Table 1-45. Available Space of the Maintenance Tank the milliliter.
Free space Panel display Ink Check LED Performing print jobs (regardless of completion/interruption of the jobs)
100 to 81 % E∗∗∗∗∗F OFF
Flashing operations
Cleaning operations
80 to 61 % E∗∗∗∗ F OFF
60 to 41 % E∗∗∗ F OFF NOTE • The printer sums up the amount of ink consumed by IR command.
40 to 21 % E∗∗ F OFF • “---” is displayed if the corresponding value cannot be obtained.
20 to 10 % E∗ F OFF Paper usage counter
Less than 10 % nn % Flashing A cumulative amount of paper used for printing (includes automatic paper feed
amount, not includes the amount of manual feed) is displayed by the centimeter.
Maintenance tank full 0% ON
NOTE • The printer sums up paper feed amounts performed by JS to JE commands.
Warning • “---” is displayed if the corresponding value cannot be obtained.
If the remaining capacity of the tank becomes less than 10 %, the printer causes
“Maintenance Tank Near Full” error flashing the Ink Check LED.
Error
A “Maintenance Tank Full” error occurs when the available capacity becomes 0 %
and the Ink Check LED lihgts.
Counter clear
It is cleared by replacing maintenance tank.

1.4.4.27 Clear Usage Counter 1.4.4.28 Job History

Clear Usage Count - INK The “Job History” displays job history report (up to 10 jobs) stored on the printer.
Resets the “Ink usage counter” to 0.
Job No.
Clear Usage Count - PAPER A number assigned to each job report in reverse chronological order. The number
Resets “Paper usage counter” to 0. of the latest job is 0.
Clear Usage Count menu Paper usage
A total area of paper consumed for each job is displayed (height x width = cm2)
PRINTER STATUS
USAGE COUNT [ / ] NOTE: The printer sums up paper feed amounts performed by JS to JE
CLEAR USAGE COUNT CLEAR USAGE COUNT commands.
JOB HISTORY INK EXEC [ ] Executes
PAPER EXEC the operation Ink usage
An amount of ink consumed for each job is displayed by the milliliter.
NOTE • The printer sums up the amount of ink consumed by IR command, or JS to
CLEAR USAGE COUNT JE commands.
[ ] INK EXEC [ ] Executes • If IR or JS/JE commands are not specified in the job, ink usage is not
PAPER EXEC the operation counted.
• "---" is displayed if the corresponding value cannot be obtained.
Job History menu
PRINTER STATUS
CLEAR USAGE COUNT JOB HISTORY
JOB HISTORY NO.0
TOTAL PRINTS INK xml
PAPER xxxxxxxcm2
JOB HISTORY
NO.1
INK xml
PAPER xxxxxxxcm2
JOB HISTORY
NO.8
INK xml
PAPER xxxxxxxcm2
JOB HISTORY
NO.9
INK xml
PAPER xxxxxxxcm2

1.4.4.29 Total Prints CR Motor life

The “Total Prints” displays a cumulative number of printed pages by decimal number Calculation method
up to 6-digit. The life of the CR motor is regarded as that of the Ink Supply Tube because a
malfunction of the tube due to its wear can cause a serious failure of the CR
motor. The guaranteed life of the Ink Supply Tube is defined by the number of
Carriage movement cycles, so the remaining amount of the CR motor life is
1.4.4.30 Service Life obtained based on the Carriage movement cycles.
Cutter life
Table 1-46. Reference Values
Calculation method
Model CR Movement Cycles
The cutter life is guaranteed for 2,000 times of cutting operations. Each
cutting operation is counted as one time regardless of the paper size.The Stylus Pro 7400/7450/7800/7880/7880C 1,820,000
remaining life is indicated based on the usage counter and the guaranteed Stylus Pro 9400/9450/9800/9880/9880C 3,150,000
2,000 times of life.
Panel Display (remaining ratio of the life)
100 to 81 % E∗∗∗∗∗F
100 to 81 % E∗∗∗∗∗F
80 to 61 % E∗∗∗∗ F
80 to 61 % E∗∗∗∗ F
60 to 41 % E∗∗∗ F
60 to 41 % E∗∗∗ F
40 to 21 % E∗∗ F
40 to 21 % E∗∗ F
20 to 1 % E∗ F
20 to 1 % E∗ F
less than 1 % E F
less than 1 % E F
Maintenance call
Maintenance call
Not occurs due to the following reasons.
Occurs when the remaining life becomes less than 4%.
• The cut result shows the degree of cutter consumption.
Fatal error
• No fatal accident is caused.
A service call error occurs when the remaining life becomes 0 to inform that
• The user can replace cutters easily.
the Ink Supply Tube must be checked for any damage.
Fatal error
Counter clear
Not occurs
Cleared by executing the “Reset When CR Unit Change” in the Adjustment
Counter clear Program.
Cleared by replacing the cutter using the “Cutter Replacement” in the
MAINTENANCE menu. C H E C K These values are intended to assist service personnel only.
P O IN T Do not explain the meaning of the display to users.
C H E C K This life counter should be used as a guideline. As the actual life of
P O IN T the cutter varies depending on various factors, it must be replaced
on the basis of observed conditions.

PF Motor life Head Unit life

Calculation method Calculation method
The PF motor and any other parts or components in the paper feed mechanism The total life of the unit is calculated by multiplying the guaranteed number of
are not required to be replaced within the lifespan of the printer. This counter shots for each color nozzle by 180 nozzles. The printer counts the shooting
can be used to troubleshoot a problem when the printer is used beyond its number of times by each color rounding the value by 220 per every page, and
service life. The remaining ratio is obtained based on a cumulative travel calculates the remaining ratio of the unit life based on the total life and the
distance of the PF motor. maximum cumulative shots among the all color nozzles.
Panel Display (remaining ratio of the life) Panel Display (remaining ratio of the life)
100 to 81 % E∗∗∗∗∗F 100 to 81 % E∗∗∗∗∗F

80 to 61 % E∗∗∗∗ F 80 to 61 % E∗∗∗∗ F
60 to 41 % E∗∗∗ F 60 to 41 % E∗∗∗ F
40 to 21 % E∗∗ F 40 to 21 % E∗∗ F
20 to 1 % E∗ F 20 to 1 % E∗ F
less than 1 % E F less than 1 % E F
Maintenance call Maintenance call

Does not occur because the service is not required within the lifespan of the Does not occur for the head unit.
printer. Fatal error
Fatal error Does not occur for the head unit.
Does not occur because the failure mode is not fatal. Counter clear
Counter clear Cleared by executing the “Reset When PrintHead Change” in the Adjustment
Cleared by executing the “Reset PF Motor Counter” in the Adjustment Program.
Program. Continuity of counter
Continuity of counter Continues to count even after the remaining life becomes 0% until the full-
Continues to count even after the remaining life becomes 0% until the full- digit of 32 bits counter reaches the maximum positive integers.
digit of 32 bits counter reaches the maximum positive integers.
C H E C K These values are intended to assist service personnel only.
C H E C K These values are intended to assist service personnel only. P O IN T Do not explain the meaning of the display to users.

Cleaning Unit life Pressure Motor life

Calculation method Calculation method
The life of the cleaning unit is judged by the life of the pump motor. When The life of the Pressure Pump Unit is judged by the life of the Pressure Pump.
replacing the cap assy., pump assy., flashing box, and the wiper, the cleaning Replace the Pressure Pump Unit when the Pressure Motor life error occurs.
unit must be replaced together with them. Panel Display (remaining ratio of the life)
100 to 81 % E∗∗∗∗∗F
100 to 81 % E∗∗∗∗∗F 80 to 61 % E∗∗∗∗ F
80 to 61 %d E∗∗∗∗ F 60 to 41 % E∗∗∗ F
60 to 41 % E∗∗∗ F 40 to 21 % E∗∗ F
40 to 21 % E∗∗ F 20 to 1 % E∗ F
20 to 1 % E∗ F less than 1 % E F
less than 1 % E F
Maintenance call
Maintenance call Occurs when the remaining life ration becomes less than 4%.
Occurs when the remaining life ration becomes less than 4%. Fatal error
Fatal error A service call error occurs when the remaining life becomes 0 because a
A service call error occurs when the remaining life becomes 0 because a paper pressurizing failure can occur.
suction failure can occur. Counter clear
Counter clear Cleared by executing the “Reset Pump Counter” in the Adjustment Program.
Cleared by executing the “Reset When Cleaning Unit Change” in the
Adjustment Program. C H E C K These values are intended to assist service personnel only.
C H E C K These values are intended to assist service personnel only.

Service Life Menu 1.4.4.31 EDM Status
PRINTER STATUS C H E C K Stylus Pro 7450/7880/7880C/9450/9880/9880C only.

JOB HISTORY P O IN T
TOTAL PRINTS
SERVICE LIFE SERVICE LIFE
CUTTER
E*****F
By executing this mode, the EDM status can be confirmed. The following information
is displayed according to the data acquired from the EDM Agent.
SERVICE LIFE
CR MOTOR
1st line: Validity (enabled/disabled) of EDM is displayed. If the data cannot be
E*****F acquired, "INITIALIZING" is displayed.
2nd line: When the EDM is enabled, the lastly uploaded time is displayed.
3rd line: When the EDM is enabled, the lastly uploaded time is displayed.
SERVICE LIFE When the EDM is enabled but it is not updated, "ENABLED (NOT UPLOADED)" is
PF MOTOR
E*****F
displayed.
PRINTER STATUS
TOTAL PRINTS
SERVICE LIFE EDM STATUS
SERVICE LIFE EDM STATUS INITIALIZING
HEAD UNIT
E*****F
EDM STATUS
SERVICE LIFE DISABLED
CLEANING UNIT
E*****F
EDM STATUS
SERVICE LIFE
ENABLED
PRESSURE MOTOR
LAST UPLOADED:
E*****F
MM/DD/YY HH:MM GMT
EDM STATUS
ENABLED
(NOT UPLOADED)
MM/DD/YY HH:MM GMT

1.4.4.32 Custom Paper Custom Paper setting handling

This function allows the user to store the user-defined paper settings up to 10. Once the Paper setup Operation
paper setting is made, the user can retrieve the setting just by specifying the assigned
Standard When each setting item values are set by commands, the printer follows
number. The user can refer to, save, delete or set the Custom Paper also by the
the command settings.
“EPSON Service Utility”.
1 to 10 User-defined paper setting is used regardless of settings specified by
Setting Method commands.
1. Enter the Custom Paper menu in the panel setting mode. Note : When the Custom Paper is set to 1 to 10, the setting (PG position) is prioritized and PG
2. Select a number for the paper setting. (Standard, 1 - 10) settings made using commands or printer setting menu are ignored. And the Platen Gap
3. Select the PG (Platen Gap). Setting icon does not appear on the LCD panel. See “Platen Gap Setting (p.44)”.
4. Print the paper thickness detection pattern Custom Paper setting items
(It is not printed when the “Standard” is selected.)
5. Check the printed patterns and select the number of the pattern with the least Table 1-47. Custom Paper Settings
displacement. Item Details Setting value
6. Select the cutting method. PLATEN Platen gap (gap between SN m1 = 01h
7. Enter paper feed adjustment value. GAP paper and the printhead) Widest m2=05h (2.6 mm)
8. Enter the ink drying time for each pass. can be selected from the Wider m2=01h (2.1 mm)
9. Select the paper suction. five options. Wide m2=02h (1.5 mm)
10. Select the MW (Micro Wave) print quality setting. Standard m2=03h (1.2 mm)
Narrow m2=04h (0.8 mm)
NOTE • In despite of paper number, it is possible to set paper related setting
independently. CUT There are four preset SN m1 = 80h SN m1 = 81h
METHOD settings for cutting Standard m2 = 03h *1 m2 = 65h
• For details of the pattern, see “Paper thickness detection pattern (p.97)”.
operation to be easily Thin Paper m2 = 02h m2 = 49h
• When “STD” is selected for paper number, above 3.-10. are not displayed selected for the target Thick Paper, Fast m2 = 01h m2 = 7Eh
and cannot be set. paper type. Thick Paper, Slow m2 = 06h m2 = 65h
• “PRINTING” is displayed during printing the detection pattern.
PAPER Paper feed amount can be -0.7% ≤ ±0% ≤ 0.7% SN m1 = 04h
• The default display for paper thickness number selection is the number FEED selected. The printer At 0% SN m2 = 65h
corresponding to paper thickness when gap adjustment is performed. ADJUST recognizes this setting as -At 70% SN m2 = 1Fh
• The Platen Gap may be automatically set to Wider or Standard depends on the absolute value. At 70% SN m2 = ABh
the result of detection by the paper thickness sensor.
DRYING Time period for drying ink 0 to 10000 msecs (in increments of 100 msecs) *2
TIME can be specified in the 0000h to 01F4h
range of 0 to 10,000 ms.
The Carriage stops at its
anti-home side during the
specified time period.
(DR m1=40h)

Table 1-47. Custom Paper Settings (continued)

Item Details Setting value
PAPER Paper suction level to SN m1 = 05h
SUCTION ensure stable paper feeding Standard m2 = 33h (100%)
can be selected from five -1 m2 = 2Bh (84%)
options. “-1” is suitable for -2 m2 = 22h (66%)
thin paper (film, etc.). It is -3 m2 = 1Ah (50%)
normally better to decrease -4 m2 = 12h (34%)
(-2, -3, or -4) according to
the paper thickness.
MW Micro-weave mode can be See “ M/W Setting List (p94)” for the information
ADJUST- adjusted. on the selectable MW modes.
MENT Decrease the value to put
print speed above the
quality, and increase it to
put the quality above the
speed.
Note "*1": The parameters for the Cut Method differs between the panel setting and the printer
driver. The table below shows the parameters set by the printer driver.
Cut Method SN m1=80h (Cut Method) SN m1=81h (Cutting Pressure)
Standard m2=00h (Main unit table) m2=00h (Main unit table)
Thin Paper m2=02h (Medium speed rough edge) m2=49h (Duty:70% 300gf)
Thick Paper, Fast m2=01h (Standard second level) m2=7Eh (Duty:125% 700gf)
Thick Paper, Slow m2=06h (Low speed rough edge) m2=65h (Duty:100% 500gf)
"*2": The EX1B command sends the value in 1-msec units and the media table area in the
printer also records in 1-msec units. However, with the printer utility or the panel
setting, the unit is 100 msec. So even when the value is specified in 1-msec or 10-
msec, the panel displays the value in 100-msec unit rounding it down to the nearest
hundredth of a millisecond.
Note • The values set by EX 1B commands are the same as the parameters shown in the table.
• When invalid parameters are set by EX 1B commands, they are automatically changed
to the following settings:
• PLATEN GAP: Standard m2=03h (1.2 mm)
• CUT METHOD: Standard m2=03h m2=65h
• PAPER FEED ADJUST: 0% SN m2 = 65h
• DRYING TIME: 0sec
• PAPER SUCTION: Standard m2=33h (100%)
• MW ADJUSTMENT: n2:00h

M/W Setting List

Table 1-48. M/W (Print Mode) Settings
Raster
M/W mode setting
resolution Dot size setting Mode ID
Color ESC (i Bit/ Output Panel UNIT
setting OL DS range Remarks Restrictions
number Pixel resolution setting No.
Color Horizontal Vertical
n1 n2 ESC (D ESC (e No.
No. resolution resolution
VSD1/VSD2/
00h --- 360 x 180 2 DMW 360 x 180 --- --- Standard /1/2 10 8 360 180 0 ---
VSD3_N
00h --- 720 x 180 VSD3_HR 1 DMW 720 x 180 --- --- Standard /1/2 20 8 720 180 0 ---
360x360 M/F setting
01h 10h 360 x 360 VSD1 (ECO) 1 M/F 360 x 360 --- is recommended to Standard /1/2 30 8 360 360 1 ---
this setting
Supports driver of
00h 00h 360 x 360 VSD1 (ECO) 1 M/F 360 x 360 --- Standard /1/2 30 8 360 360 1 ---
conventional model
01h 00h 360 x 360 VSD1 2 FD+36POL 360 x 360 --- --- Standard /1/2 40 8 360 360 0 ---
01h 00h 720 x 360 VSD1 2 FOL+36POL 720 x 360 --- --- Standard /1/2 60 8 720 360 0 ---
01h 10h 720 x 720 VSD2 2 FOL+21POL 720 x 720 --- --- 1 80 8 720 720 0 ---
01h 00h 720 x 720 VSD2 2 FOL+48POL 720 x 720 0±3 --- Standard 81 8 720 720 1 ---
01h 20h 720 x 720 VSD2 2 FOL+46POL 720 x 720 0±5 --- 2 82 8 720 720 2 ---
8 01h 00h 1440 x 720 VSD3_N 2 FOL+11POL 1440 x 720 --- --- Standard 90 8 1440 720 0 ---
01h 10h 1440 x 720 VSD3_N 2 FOL+28POL 1440 x 720 --- --- 1 91 8 1440 720 1 ---
01h 20h 1440 x 720 VSD3_N 2 FOL+11POL 1440 x 720 --- --- 2 92 8 1440 720 2 ---
01h 30h 1440 x 720 VSD3_N 2 FOL+90POL 1440 x 720 --- Equivalent to 8 pass --- 93 8 1440 720 3 ---
01h 00h 2880 x 1440 VSD3_HR 1 FOL+6POL 2880 x 1440 --- --- Standard /1/2 A0 8 2880 1440 0 ---
Not supported by Borderless
01h 00h 1440 x 1440 VSD3_N 2 FOL+6POL 1440 x 1440 --- Standard /1/2 B0 8 1440 1440 0
standard driver print is N/A
Borderless
print is N/A,
Not supported by
01h 00h 2880 x 2880 VSD3_HR 1 FOL 2880 x 2880 --- Standard /1/2 C0 8 2880 2880 0 Upper and
standard driver
lower margin
enlarge
Borderless
Not supported by print is N/A,
01h 10h 2880 x 2880 VSD3_HR 1 FOL 2880 x 2880 --- standard driver / Standard /1/2 C1 8 2880 2880 1 Upper and
Monochrome only lower margin
enlarge

Table 1-48. M/W (Print Mode) Settings(continued)

Raster
M/W mode setting
resolution Dot size setting Mode ID
Color ESC (i Bit/ Output Panel UNIT
setting OL DS range Remarks Restrictions
number Pixel resolution setting No.
Color Horizontal Vertical
n1 n2 ESC (D ESC (e No.
No. resolution resolution
VSD1/VSD2/
00h --- 360 x 180 2 DMW 360 x 180 --- --- Standard /1/2 10 4 360 180 0 ---
VSD3_N
00h --- 720 x 180 VSD3_HR 1 DMW 720 x 180 --- --- Standard /1/2 20 4 720 180 0 ---
360x360 BAND
setting is
01h 10h 360 x 360 VSD1 (ECO) 1 BAND 360 x 360 --- Standard /1/2 30 4 360 360 1 ---
recommended to this
setting
Supports driver of
00h 00h 360 x 360 VSD1 (ECO) 1 BAND 360 x 360 --- Standard /1/2 30 4 360 360 1 ---
conventional model
4 01h 00h 360 x 720 VSD1 2 FD+72POL 360 x 720 --- H720 adjustment Standard /1/2 50 4 360 720 0 ---
01h 10h 360 x 720 VSD1 2 FD+72POL 360 x 720 --- For CAD line drawing Standard /1/2 51 4 360 720 1 ---
01h 10h 720 x 720 VSD2 2 FOL+72POL 720 x 720 --- --- 1 80 4 720 720 0 ---
01h 20h 720 x 720 VSD2 2 FOL+146POL 720 x 720 0±4 --- 2 81 4 720 720 1 ---
01h 00h 720 x 720 VSD2 2 FOL+148POL 720 x 720 0±4 --- Standard 82 4 720 720 2 ---
01h 10h 1440 x 720 VSD3_N 2 FOL+41POL 1440 x 720 --- --- 1 90 4 1440 720 0 ---
01h 00h 1440 x 720 VSD3_N 2 FOL+99POL 1440 x 720 --- --- Standard 91 4 1440 720 1 ---
01h 20h 1440 x 720 VSD3_N 2 FOL+100POL 1440 x 720 --- --- 2 92 4 1440 720 2 ---
01h 30h 1440 x 720 VSD3_N 2 FOL+178POL 1440 x 720 --- Correspond to 8 pass --- 93 4 1440 720 3 ---
Note 1: The printer switches to M/F or BAND VSD1 mode when none of the modes shown in
the table matches with the job.
2: Dot size control specification
Dot name Replacement dot

Micro Dot VSD2-M
Normal Dot VSD2-L
Normal Dot 2
VSD1 (ECO) VSD1-L
3: When specifying the dot sizes shown in the above table, the raster data should be
binary.

Custom Paper menu
* When the Custom Paper No.1 to

* The "nn" indicates the specified number.
10 are used. PAPER NUMBER
[ ] CUSTOM PAPER nn
Setting PAPER NUMBER PAPER NUMBER
10 [ ]
PLATEN GAP
Setting
THICKNESS PATTERN STANDARD
STANDARD, 1 to 10
PAPER NUMBER CUSTOM PAPER nn

[ ]
Setting PAPER NUMBER
1 PLATEN GAP PLATEN GAP
NARROW [ ]
* When the "Standard" THICKNESS PATTERN
Setting
STANDARD
is specified.
MENU WIDE
PRINTER STATUS CUSTOM PAPER NARROW, STANDARD, WIDE, WIDER, WIDEST
CUSTOM PAPER PAPER NUMBER PAPER NUMBER CUSTOM PAPER nn
MAINTENANCE PLATEN GAP
STANDARD THICKNESS PATTERN THICKNESS PATTERN [ ]
CUT METHOD PRINT PRINTING
CUSTOM PAPER nn [ ]
THICKNESS NUMBER
THICKNESS PATTERN [ ]
CUT METHOD CUT METHOD 1
Setting
PAPER FEED ADJUST STANDARD
THIN PAPER [ ]
1 to 15
THICK PAPER, FAST Setting
STANDARD / THIN PAPER / THICK PAPER, FAST / THICK PAPER, SLOW
CUSTOM PAPER nn
CUT METHOD
PAPER FEED ADJUST PAPER FEED ADJUST
DRYING TIME [ ]
Setting
0.00%
* When a value other than the selectable values in the
panel setting is specified using the printer utility, the
-0.70% ~ 0% ~ 0.70%
CUSTOM PAPER nn value is indicated instead of the "-0.70%" or "0.70%".
PAPER FEED ADJUST The asterisk (*) does not appear at that time.
DRYING TIME DRYING TIME
PAPER SUCTION
[ ]
Setting
0.0sec
0.0sec ~ 10.0sec
CUSTOM PAPER nn
DRYING TIME
PAPER SUCTION PAPER SUCTION
[ ]
M/W ADJUSTMENT
Setting
STANDARD
STANDARD, -1, -2, -3, -4

CUSTOM PAPER nn
DRYING TIME
PAPER SUCTION
M/W ADJUSTMENT M/W ADJUSTMENT
STANDARD [ ]
1 Setting
2
STANDARD, 1, 2

Paper thickness detection pattern

Printing specifications
Head speed 240cps

Pattern height 64 Dot
Dot size VSD2 Large
A4 narrow side width
Color Black
Print direction Uni-D
9mm (64dot)
9mm (64dot)
Pattern interval Upper row: Regular intervals
Lower row: One of the 16 lines reflects the current PG setting. The gap
between the line and the upper line becomes the center value.
The gaps between the other 15 lines and their corresponding
upper lines are changed from the center value by a set
amount and the all gaps are different from each other.
10mm 9.0mm(64dot)
Other When printing from the edge of the paper, feed 90mm of roll paper or feed amount
50mm of cut sheet before starting printing.
Pattern numbers and paper thickness

Figure 1-30. Paper thickness detection pattern
Number during pattern printing 1 2 3 ... ... 15
Paper thickness (mm) 0.1 0.2 0.3 ... ... 1.5

Shifting amount of the lower lines 1.4.4.33 Cutter Replacement

The following illustrates and explains the shifting amount of the lower lines
The “Cutter Replacement” in the MAINTENANCE menu displays instructions for
printed on the pattern assuming that the shift amount is “x” micrometers when
replacing the cutter on the LCD panel in accordance with operations made by the user.
the paper thickness is changed by 0.1mm.
Procedure for replacing the cutter
Head 1. Enter the “Cutter Replacement” menu using the panel.
(You can also access the menu just by holding down the [Paper Select ]
button for three seconds)
Paper thickness when adjusting gap + 0.1mm 2. Open the front cover following the instruction displayed on the LCD.
Paper thickness when adjusting gap
3. Follow the next instruction to replace the cutter.
4. Close the front cover when the instruction is displayed.
Paper thickness when adjusting gap - 0.1mm
NOTE: The cutter replacing work can be interrupted by the following
errors. The printer displays the error message for three seconds
A B C D
and returns to the MAINTENANCE” menu screen.
Figure 1-31. Shifting Amount of the Lower Lines on the Pattern • Ink end.
Note : AB: Gap adjustment value when paper thickness is +0.1mm • Ink cartridge model wrong.
AC: Present gap adjustment value • CSIC contact error.
AD: Gap adjustment value when paper thickness is -0.1mm • Ink cartridge failure.
Given that the gap regularly corresponds to the change in paper thickness; • No ink cartridge.
X* = AC - AB = AD - AC • When thick paper is set.
Correcting improper cutter installation
* The “x” value is 240 cps or 14.42 micron meters in VSD2 mode. The printer runs a cutter failure confirmation sequence (displays confirmation
The value is saved on the NVRAM, and is left changeable. messages or instructions to inform the user to check the cutter) under the following
Example) Gap adjustment when paper thickness is 0.2mm conditions.
When a cutting error is detected for the first time after replacing the cutter.
Pattern Gap between the Upper Pattern Gap between the Upper
When a cutting error is detected for the first time after a paper jam-related
number and Lower lines number and Lower lines
service call error occurs.
1 +2X 9 -6X
When a cutting error is detected for the first time after the printer runs the
2 +1X 10 -7X cutter failure confirmation sequence. If the sequence is carried out two times
3 ±0 11 -8X in a row, a cutting error message is displayed until the corrective action is
4 -1X 12 -9X taken.
5 -2X 13 -10X
6 -3X 14 -11X
7 -4X 15 -12X
8 -5X 16 -13X

1.4.4.34 BK Ink Change 1.4.4.36 Clock Setting

This menu is provided for the Stylus Pro 7800/7880/7880C/9800/9880/9880C. The This menu allows the user to set current date and time to correct the time difference.
printer displays instructions for replacing the Photo or Matte black cartridge with the The set time is compared to the absolute control time maintained by the RTC power
other one on the LCD panel in accordance with operations made by the user. source, and the printer maintains the set time by keeping the difference between them.
The set time is used for the Job Information.
NOTE: The Stylus Pro 7400/7450/9400/9450 are not equipped with this
function. However, replacing the Matte black cartridge with Photo black This time setting is disabled if the time synchronization is adopted by the TypeB
one is available. (the printers display a confirmation message when the interface. And it is also disabled when the NTP is using the time synchronization
Photo black is inserted.) Note that the panel display and the status sheet (when date and time is entered, an error message is displayed for three seconds and the
do not reflect the ink change. The name of the black ink remains as printer returns to the MAINTENANCE menu screen.)
“Matte black” even after replacing it with Photo black.
1.4.4.37 Contrast Adjustment

1.4.4.35 Power Cleaning The contrast of the LCD panel can be adjusted by this menu. The adjustable range is
plus or minus 20 levels from the center value. The level decreases or increases by 1
The “Power Cleaning” is a function to clean the printhead more powerfully than level each time the [Paper Feed ( )] button is pressed.
normal head cleaning. As this includes cleaning the choke, an operator is required to
move the ink lever in accordance with the panel message.
Power Cleaning Triggers
“Power Cleaning” is displayed on the LCD when any one of the following
conditions are met.
After executing manual cleaning three times in a row.
When the printer is turned On after a lapse of 20 days or longer from the last
Power Cleaning.
When the printer is turned On after an interval of one month or longer.
NOTE: If a “Maintenance Tank Near Full” or “Ink Low” error occurs after
performing the cleaning, press the [Enter ] button. The printer displays
the error message for three seconds and then returns to the menu screen.
If the Maintenance Tank error occurs during the cleaning, the cleaning is
interrupted and cannot be continued unless taking a corrective action
(replacing the tank or etc.).

1.4.4.38 Head Alignment (Bi-D Adjustment, Uni-D Adjustment) Adjustment Method

This function allows the user to make the Bi-D and Uni-D adjustments in accordance The printer calculates the Uni-D and Bi-D correction values based on the “Head
with the thickness of paper to be used. The adjustments can be carried out Alignment” result, Platen Gap setting and the paper thickness.The correction
automatically by selecting the “Auto” in the “Alignment” menu. When the “Auto” is values are classified by five Platen Gap settings (0.8mm/1.2mm/1.5mm/2.1mm/
selected, the printer prints an adjustment pattern, checks the pattern, and make the 2.6mm) and stored on the NVRAM to create a table to be referred to from that
adjustments according to the detected result automatically. time. The setting table is rewritten each time the adjustments are made.
The table below shows how the printer stores the settings.
Procedure
1. Set the paper. Table 1-49. Storing the Correction Values
2. Select the “Head Alignment” menu from the panel. Paper Paper PG by
3. Select the “Standard” in the “Paper Thickness” menu if the paper is EPSON Thickness Thickness PG Settings adjustment Saved as Remarks
paper with thickness of 0.2 or 1.2 mm. If the paper does not fit the Sensor Input pattern
requirements, the thickness can be entered in increments of 0.1 mm. Less than Standard --- PG1.2 or Depends on *1
4. Select “Auto” or “Manual” in the “Alignment” menu. 0.8 mm PG1.6mm the condition
5. Select the pattern from “Uni-D”, Bi-D 2 Color”, and “Bi-D All” and execute 0.8 mm or --- PG 2.6 mm For PG2.6 mm *3
it. “Printing” will be displayed on the LCD. more
6. Check the printed adjustment pattern and enters the number of the line or Less than 0.1 - 0.8 mm NARROW PG 0.8 mm For PG0.8 mm ---
block with the least displacement for each color. 0.3 mm STANDARD PG 1.2 mm For PG1.2 mm ---
7. Repeat Step 5 to 6 until the all three adjustments are completed.
WIDE PG 1.6 mm For PG1.5 mm ---
NOTE: For details on the adjustment patterns, see “Head Alignment
WIDER PG 2.1 mm For PG2.1 mm ---
adjustment patterns (p. 103)”.
WIDEST PG 2.6 mm For PG2.6 mm ---
0.9 - 1.5 mm --- PG 2.6 mm For PG2.6 mm *2
0.3 mm or 0.1 - 0.8 mm NARROW PG 1.2 mm For PG1.2 mm ---
more STANDARD PG 1.2 mm For PG1.2 mm ---
Less than
0.8 mm WIDE PG 1.6 mm For PG1.5 mm ---
WIDER PG 2.1 mm For PG2.1 mm ---
WIDEST PG 2.6 mm For PG2.6 mm ---
0.9 - 1.5 mm --- PG 2.6 mm For PG2.6 mm *2
0.8 mm or 0.0 - 1.5 mm --- PG 2.6 mm For PG2.6 mm *3
more

Note "*1": [When performing Auto or Manual Bi-D Adjustment]

• The printer compares the default settings and the user-defined settings, and
performs the following operations if it detects no difference between them.
• Prints the adjustment pattern with PG 1.6-mm setting.
• Stores the obtained correction values on the “For PG 1.6 mm” area. And creates
correction values for PG 0.8, 1.2, 2.1, and 2.6 by adding offset values to the
values for PG 1.6 mm and stores them on the corresponding area.
performs the following operations if it detects they are different from each other.
• Prints the adjustment pattern with PG 1.2-mm setting and stores the obtained
correction values on the “For PG 1.2 mm” area.
[When performing Auto Uni-D Adjustment]]
performs the following operations if it detects no difference between them.
• Prints the adjustment pattern with PG 1.2-mm and PG 1.6 mm settings.
• Stores the obtained correction values on the “For PG 1.2 mm” and “For PG 1.6
mm” areas. And copies the PG 1.2 values into the “For PG 0.8 mm” area, and PG
16 values into the “For PG 2.1” and “For PG 2.6” areas.
performs the following operations if it detects they are different from each other.
Prints the adjustment pattern with PG 1.2-mm setting and stores the obtained
[When performing Manual Uni-D Adjustment]
• Prints the adjustment pattern with PG 1.2-mm setting and stores the obtained
"*2": Even when the paper thickness sensor detects thin paper (Less than 0.8mm), if the
paper thickness input is 0.8mm or more, PG2.6mm is designated.
"*3": When the paper thickness sensor detects thick paper (0.8mm or more), regardless of
PG setting and paper thickness input, PG2.6mm is designated. In such case, the Auto
Bi-D adjustment cannot be made because the gap between the Ink-mark sensor and
the platen goes beyond the recommended range.
Note • The paper thickness is stored to adjust a paper thickness setting command PH in
increments of 0.1 mm.
• As the printer can find an appropriate setting by paper thickness from the memory,
entering the paper thickness first can reduce the subsequent operations.
• It is saved into saving place for paper thickness 0.0mm.
• It is saved into saving place for paper thickness 0.3mm.

Head Alignment menu

PAPER THICKNESS
Setting
1.5mm
PAPER THICKNESS
Setting
0.1mm
MENU ALIGNMENT AUTO
CUSTOM PAPER UNI-D
MAINTENANCE HEAD ALIGNMENT BI-D 2 COLOR
HEAD ALIGNMENT PAPER THICKNESS PAPER THICKNESS BI-D ALL
ALIGNMENT
Setting
STANDARD
ALIGNMENT AUTO
UNI-D
HEAD ALIGNMENT BI-D 2 COLOR
PAPER THICKNESS BI-D ALL
ALIGNMENT ALIGNMENT
AUTO
MANUAL
ALIGNMENT AUTO
BI-D 2 COLOR
BI-D ALL
BI-D #1 PRINTING
ALIGNMENT
AUTO
MANUAL ALIGNMENT MANUAL
(1) ALIGNMENT AUTO
UNI-D
BI-D 2 COLOR BI-D ALL
(4) BI-D #1
BI-D ALL
BI-D #2
ALIGNMENT MANUAL (2) PRINTING

UNI-D ALIGNMENT AUTO
BI-D 2 COLOR BI-D #1
(5) BI-D #2
BI-D ALL
BI-D #3
After printing the
pattern, shifts to another
ALIGNMENT MANUAL (3) corresponding
UNI-D adjustment item screen. ALIGNMENT AUTO
BI-D 2 COLOR BI-D #1
(6) BI-D #2
BI-D ALL
BI-D #3
*Characters in the round brackets indicate color names displayed on the Stylus Pro 7400/9400.
Adjustment Value (UP) Adjustment Value (UP) Adjustment Value (UP)
UNI-D #1 C (C2) UNI-D #3 LLK (MK2) BI-D 2 COLOR #1 LC (C) BI-D 2 COLOR #3 LM (M) BI-D ALL #1 MK (C) BI-D ALL #3 LLK (MK2)
(1) (2) (3)
(4) (5) (6)
5 5 5 5 5 5
(4) (4) (5) (5) (6) (6)
Adjustment Value (DOWN) Adjustment Value (DOWN) Adjustment Value (DOWN)

Head Alignment adjustment patterns Adjustment pattern printing of each adjustment item
Adjustment pattern print specifications
Number of printing 9 Patterns (1 for each color)
Adjustment pattern Bi-D 2-COLOR (#1, #2, #3) patterns
height Bi-D All (#1, #2, #3) Print direction Bar: Going back and forth every 4dot
Uni-D (#1, #2, #3) Block
AUTO BI-D 2-COLOR Upper patterns: Leftward
Lower patterns: Rightward
AUTO Uni-D All (#1, #2, #3)
Pattern interval Leftward: equal interval
AUTO Uni-D (#1, #2, #3)
Rightward: Print No.5 to be always current setup value.
Others When printing from the edge of the paper, 100 mm of roll paper or Position is shifted in fixed quantities, with No. 5 as
50 mm of cut sheet is fed before starting printing. the standard.
Print mode for each adjustment pattern Relationship between number and amount of shift during pattern printing
Table 1-50. Each adjustment item Print pattern number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Parameter Amount of shift
Adjustment item –4 –3 –2 –1 0 +1 +2 +3 +4
n/1440inch (VSD1, VSD2, VSD4)
Head speed (CPS) Dot size
Bi-D #1 320 VSD1(Large Line/Middle Block)
#2 240 VSD2(Large Line/Large Block)
#3 240 VSD3(Large Line/Large Block)
Uni-D #1 320 VSD1 (Large)
#2 240 VSD2 (Large)
#3 240 VSD3 (Large)

1.4.4.39 Network Setup

C H E C K Stylus Pro 7450/7880/7880C/9450/9880/9880C only.
P O IN T
By executing this mode, you can perform the settings of Subnet mask, Default gateway, and the IP Address of the network interface equipped for this printer.
MENU NETWORK SETUP NETWORK SETUP

MAINTENANCE NETWORK SETUP DISABLE
HEAD ALIGNMENT ENABLE
NETWORK SETUP
䋫
NETWORK SETUP NETWORK SETUP
NETWORK DISABLE
IP ADDRESS SETTING ENABLE
BONJOUR
NETWORK SETUP IP ADDRESS SETTING

NETWORK AUTO
IP ADDRESS SETTING PANEL
BONJOUR
NETWORK SETUP BONJOUR NETWORK SETUP IP ADDRESS SETTING

IP ADDRESS SETTING OFF IP ADDRESS SETTING AUTO
BONJOUR ON IP,SM,DG SETTING PANEL
INIT NETWORK SETTING BONJOUR
BONJOUR NETWORK SETUP IP ADDRESS SUBNET MASK DEFAULT GATEWAY

OFF IP ADDRESS SETTING
ON IP,SM,DG SETTING
BONJOUR
NETWORK SETUP INIT NETWORK SETTING

IP ADDRESS SETTING OFF
BONJOUR ON
INIT NETWORK SETTING

1.4.5 Maintenance Mode Panel display (Level structure of Maintenance Mode)
MAINTENANCE MODE (1)

OUTLINE
HEX DUMP
HEX DUMP
LANGUAGE
Start Up REMAINING PPR SETUP
PRINT Executes
the operation LIGHT LIGHT BLACK
The printer starts up in the Maintenance mode when it is turned ON with the MANUFACTURER
MAINTENANCE MODE EPSON
[PAUSE] button pressed. HEX DUMP
LANGUAGE
Operation LANGUAGE
REMAINING PPR SETUP
ENGLISH
Setting
FRENCH
LIGHT LIGHT BLACK
1. Confirm that the top menu of the Maintenance mode is displayed on the LCD ITALIAN
COLOR
MAINTENANCE MODE
panel. LANGUAGE
LIGHTLIGHT BLACK
REMAINING PPR SETUP
2. Highlight the target item using the [Paper Feed ( ) ] buttons and press the REMAINING PPR SETUP
OFF
UNIT Setting
ROLL
[Menu ] button to display the menu screen for the selected item. LIGHT LIGHT BLACK
3. Highlight the target item using the [Paper Feed ( ) ] buttons and press the MAINTENANCE MODE INK TYPE
REMAINING PPR SETUP PIGMENT
[Menu ] button to display the setting items or values. UNIT
UNIT
METER
4. Use the [Paper Feed ( ) ] button to change the numerical value. A setting CUT PRESSURE Setting
FEET/INCH
item with an asterisk (*) on its right side is the current setting. MAINTENANCE MODE
LIGHT LIGHT BLACK
INK CAPACITY
5. Press the [Enter ] button to accept the change or execute the operation. UNIT
CUT PRESSURE 110ml
CUT PRESSURE
Nothing happens If you select the item with the asterisk. SS CLEANING Setting
100%
6. Use the [Paper Select ] button to return to the previous menu and the top
MAINTENANCE MODE LIGHT LIGHT BLACK
screen. CUT PRESSURE INK LEVEL
SS CLEANING
Termination SS CLEANING
PWR ON ROLL PPR FEED
EXEC Executes
E*****F
the operation
Turn the printer OFF and turn it back ON in the normal way.
MAINTENANCE MODE LIGHT LIGHT BLACK
SS CLEANING PRODUCTION DATE
PWR ON ROLL PPR FEED YY/MM
ON
DEFAULT PANEL Setting
OFF
MAINTENANCE MODE
PWR ON ROLL PPR FEED LIGHT LIGHT BLACK
DEFAULT PANEL
DEFAULT PANEL EXPIRATION DATE
EXEC Executes
INK INFO MENU YY/MM
the operation
MAINTENANCE MODE
INK INFO MENU LIGHT LIGHT BLACK
DEFAULT PANEL
LIGHT LIGHT BLACK INK LIFE
INK INFO MENU
LIGHT MAGENTA NN MONTHS
LIGHT CYAN
(1)
LIGHT LIGHT BLACK
INK AGE
NN MONTHS

MAINTENANCE MODE SETUP ITEMS

Table 1-51. Maintenance Mode Setup Items
Top Menu Panel Display Item Menu 1 Panel Display Item Menu 2 Panel Display Setting Values
Hexadecimal Dump Printing HEX DUMP – – – PRINTING Print *1
ENGLISH, FRENCH, ITALIAN, GERMAN,
Panel Display LANGUAGE – – – –
SPANISH, PORTUGUESE, DUTCH
Paper Remaining Setting REMAINING PPR SETUP – – – – OFF, Roll paper ON
Unit Switching UNIT – – – – METER, FEET/INCH
Cutting Pressure CUTTING PRESSURE – – – – 0% - 100% - 150%
Supersonic Cleaning SS CLEANING – – – – EXEC
Roll Paper Feed at Power ON PWR ON ROLL PPR FEED – – – – ON, OFF
Initialize Panel Setting DEFAULT PANEL – – – – EXEC
Manufacture logo MANUFACTURE "EPSON"
Ink color COLOR LIGHT LIGHT BLACK (MATTE BLACK)
Ink type INK TYPE PIGMENT / DYE
Ink information 1st row Ink capacity INK CAPACITY 110ml / 220ml
8-color equipment:
Light Gray E*****F, E**** F, E*** F, E** F, E* F,
LLK Ink remaining INK LEVEL
(Matte Black) E F
(4- color equipment :
MK) Product date PRODUCTION DATE <YY>/<MM>
Expiry date EXPIRATION DATE <YY>/<MM>
Ink life after open INK LIFE <MM> MONTHS
Passed time after open INK AGE <MM> MONTHS
Ink Information Menu INK INFO MENU Stylus Pro 7800/9800
LIGHT MAGENTA
Ink information 2nd Ink color COLOR Stylus Pro 7880/7880C/9880/9880C
row
VIVID LIGHT MAGENTA
8-color equipment :
(MATTE BLACK)
LM Light Magenta Ink type INK TYPE PIGMENT / DYE
Stylus Pro 7880/ (Matte Black) Ink capacity INK CAPACITY 110ml / 220ml
7880C/9880/9880C E*****F, E**** F, E*** F, E** F, E* F,
Ink remaining INK LEVEL
VLM E F
(4-color equipment : Product date PRODUCTION DATE <YY>/<MM>
MK2)

Table 1-51. Maintenance Mode Setup Items(continued)

Ink color COLOR LIGHT CYAN (MAGENTA)
Ink Information 3rd
row Ink capacity INK CAPACITY 110ml / 220ml
8-color equipment: Light Cyan E*****F, E**** F, E*** F, E** F, E* F,
LC (Magenta) E F
(4-color equipment: Product date PRODUCTION DATE <YY>/<MM>
M)
Ink color COLOR LIGHT BLACK (MAGENTA)
Ink Information 4th
8-color equipment: Light Black E*****F, E**** F, E*** F, E** F, E* F,
Ink Information Menu INK INFO MENU Ink remaining INK LEVEL
LK (Magenta) E F
M2)
Ink color COLOR PHOTO BLACK, MATTE BLACK (CYAN)
Ink Information 5th
8-color equipment: Matte Black or E*****F, E**** F, E*** F, E** F, E* F,
PK or MK Matte Black (Cyan) E F
C)

Table 1-51. Maintenance Mode Setup Items(continued)

Ink color COLOR CYAN (CYAN)
Ink Information 6th Ink capacity INK CAPACITY 110ml / 220ml
row
Cyan E*****F, E**** F, E*** F, E** F, E* F,
8-color equipment: C Ink remaining INK LEVEL
(Cyan) E F
(4-color equipment:
C2) Product date PRODUCTION DATE <YY>/<MM>
Ink Information 7th MAGENTA
row Ink color COLOR Stylus Pro 7880/7880C/9880/9880C
8-color equipment: VIVID MAGENTA
Stylus Pro 7800/9800 (YELLOW)
M Magenta Ink type INK TYPE PIGMENT / DYE
Ink Information Menu INK INFO MENU
Stylus Pro 7880/ (Yellow) Ink capacity INK CAPACITY 110ml / 220ml
7880C/9880/9880C E*****F, E**** F, E*** F, E** F, E* F,
VM E F
Y) Expiry date EXPIRATION DATE <YY>/<MM>
Ink color COLOR YELLOW (YELLOW)
Ink Information 8th Ink capacity INK CAPACITY 110ml / 220ml
row
Yellow E*****F, E**** F, E*** F, E** F, E* F,
8-color equipment: Y Ink remaining INK LEVEL
(Yellow) E F
(4-color equipment:
Y2) Product date PRODUCTION DATE <YY>/<MM>
Note "*1": During executing hexadecimal dump mode, “Hexadecimal Dump Executing” is
displayed.

HEX DUMP UNIT
Print data received by the printer is printed out in hexadecimal notation. Using this Switches the unit of length used in the panel display and pattern printing between meter
function, users can check that data has been sent correctly from the computer to the and feet/inch.
printer.
METER: Meter (m)
On the printout, 16 bytes of print data in hexadecimal are indicated on the left followed
by the corresponding ASCII characters. If the hex number has no corresponding ASCII FEET/INCH: Feet (ft)/Inches (in)
characters, such as control code, “.” (period) is indicated instead of ASCII characters. The table below lists the items to which the unit change is reflected.
The data is output (printed) in a 16-byte unit. If the last data is less than 16 bytes, it is
not printed unless you press the [Pause] button. Table 1-52. Reflection of the Unit of Length Change
Message
Panel setting is not available in the hex dump mode. Item
Meter Feet/Inch
To terminate the mode, stop printing by pressing [Pause] button and shut the power off.
Panel LCD Display Roll paper remaining value xxm xxxft
LANGUAGE Roll paper length xx.xm xxxft

Roll paper length warning xxm xxft
The user interface language can be selected from English, French, Italian, German,
Paper counter xxxxx.xcm xxxxft xxin
Spanish, Portuguese and Dutch.
Job information display xxxxxxxcm2 xxxxxx.xsqft
(Paper used amount)
REMAINING PPR SETUP
Nozzle Check Pattern Current Paper Count xxxxx.xcm xxxxft xxin
Enables or disables the roll paper remaining amount detection function. Prev Paper Count xxxxx.xcm xxxxft xxin
OFF: Disables the detection function. Status Sheet Use Paper xxxxxx.xcm xxxxft xxin
The ROLL PAPER COUNTER of the PRINTER SETUP menu in the Panel Job Information Print Paper used (Vertical) xxxxxx.xcm xxxxft xxin
Setting mode disappears.
Paper used (Horizontal) xxxxxx.xcm xxxxft xxin
ROLL: Enables the function.
The ROLL PAPER COUNTER of the PRINTER SETUP menu appears and CUT PRESSURE
the roll paper remaining amount can be checked there.
The default Cut Pressure is set as 100% at the factory. It can be changed in the range of
0 through 150%. The percentage is referred to as the absolute level for the printer, so
the Cut Pressure values specified in the following items are multiplied by the
percentage.
Remote command SN m1=81h
CUSTOM PAPER (Panel Setting mode)

SS (SUPERSONIC) CLEANING INK INFO MENU
Executes a supersonic cleaning. (Executes CL3.) Displays the ink information recorded on the CSIC.
Table 1-53. Ink Information

Item Explanation
Specifies the paper feeding operation at power-On when the Auto Roll Cut is Off. EPSON logo Displays the manufacturer of each ink cartridge.
ON: Feeds the specified amount of paper at power-ON
Ink color Displays the ink color for each ink cartridge.
OFF Not performs feeding operation at power-ON.
(This allows you to save paper.) Ink type Displays the ink type (Dye/Pigment) for each ink cartridge.
Capacity spec. Displays the cartridge capacity for each ink cartridge.
NOTE: Enabling this function can cause a direct print on the platen.
Ink remaining Displays the remaining amount of ink in each ink cartridge.
Product date Displays the product date as <YY>/<MM> for each ink cartridge.
DEFAULT PANEL
Expiry date Displays the ink expiry date for each ink cartridge.
Resets the settings or information in the following menu items to their default or Ink life after open Displays the expiration date after opening the package for each ink
factory default. cartridge.
• Printer Setup menu ⇒ Resets the settings to their default. Passed time after open Displays the elapsed time after opening the pack for each ink
(Except the settings in the ROLL PAPER cartridge.
COUNTER)
• Custom Paper settings ⇒ Deletes the all settings.
• Head Alignment settings ⇒ Resets the settings to their factory default.
• Maintenance menu ⇒ Returns “Clock Setting” to the absolute time
controlled by RTC power.
• Printer Status menu ⇒ Resets the all status information.
• Rear AD adjustment value ⇒ Returns to their factory default.

1.4.6 SERVICEMAN MODE Startup

The printer starts up in the SERVICEMAN MODE when it is turned ON with the
OUTLINE [Pause], [Paper Feed ], and [Menu ] buttons hold down.
Operation
The SERVICEMAN MODE, consists of the SELF TESTING, the VIEW COUNTER,
and the MAINT INFO, is intended to be used by a service personnel for servicing the 1. Confirm that the top menu of the SERVICEMAN MODE is displayed on the
printer. LCD panel.
2. Highlight the target menu item using the [Paper Feed ( ) ] button and
“1.4.6.1 Self Testing Menu (SELF TESTING)” (p.112) press the [Menu ] button to display the menu screen for the selected item.
“1.4.6.2 Counter Display Menu (VIEW COUNTERS)” (p.129) 3. Repeat Step 2 procedure for each sub menu screen until you reach the final
screen of the selected menu. Some menu have five steps, so the operation is
“1.4.6.3 Maintenance Information Menu (MAINT INFO)” (p.131)
required to perform for four times at maximum.
NOTE: If the SELF TESTING has been selected when you enter the mode, the 4. Highlight the target item in the final screen and press the [Enter] button to
printer can receive a special remote command or command set at the conduct a self test, perform the adjustment, or print a pattern.
factory and setting it or responding to it is available. However, if an 5. Use the [Paper Select ] button to return to the previous screen.
operation is required to perform by the command, or if the command is a Termination
print data or firmware file, the operation of the printer is not guaranteed. Turn the printer OFF and turn it back ON in the normal way.

1.4.6.1 Self Testing Menu (SELF TESTING)

This self testing menu is mainly intended to adjust the printer mechanism and correct adjustment parameters in the firmware.
Table 1-54. Self Testing Menu Items

1st Screen 2nd Screen 3rd Screen 4th Screen 5th Screen
Panel Panel Panel
Panel Display Description Panel Display Description Description Description
Display Display Display
F/W Firmware version --- --- --- ---
BOOT BOOT version --- --- --- ---
NVRAM version
Param 1 --- --- --- ---
(Guaranteed range for power failure)
Version Version display
NVRAM version
Param 2 (Non-guaranteed range for power --- --- --- ---
failure)
DipSW Dip switch status --- --- --- ---
Key Key operation check --- --- --- ---
Panel Panel function check LCD LCD check --- --- --- ---
LED LED check --- --- --- ---
CR Origin CR origin sensor --- --- --- ---
Paper Paper thickness sensor --- --- --- ---
Lever Paper lever sensor --- --- --- ---
HeadSlide PG origin sensor --- --- --- ---
TEST Pump Pump phase sensor --- --- --- ---
InkLvr Left and right ink lever --- --- --- ---
Cover Front cover sensor --- --- --- ---
Presence or absence of the Maintenance
MainteTank --- --- --- ---
Tank*1
Sensor Sensor check
INK NOT Presence or absence of the ink cartridges --- --- --- ---
EdgeAD Edge sensor AD --- --- --- ---
Edge2AD IM sensor AD --- --- --- ---
RearAD Rear sensor AD --- --- --- ---
Head Temp Head temperature --- --- --- ---
Drv. Temp Driver temperature --- --- --- ---
Ink Press Pressure Sensor --- --- --- ---
Presence or absence of the take-up reel
TAKE UP --- --- --- ---
machine*2
CR CR encoder --- --- --- ---
Encoder Encoder check
PF PF encoder --- --- --- ---
Note "*1": “Anti-home side” or “Home side” is displayed with the “Maintenance Tank” on the Stylus Pro 9400/9450/9800/9880/9880C. They are not displayed on the Stylus Pro 7400/7450/7800/7880/7880C.
"*2": Not displayed for the Stylus Pro 7400/7450/7800/7880/7880C.

Table 1-54. Self Testing Menu Items(continued)

Panel Panel Panel
Paper (ALL) All paper suction fan --- --- --- ---
Paper (Duty) Change the paper suction level --- --- --- ---
Paper1 Paper suction fan1 --- --- --- ---
Fan Check the fan operation
Paper2 Paper suction fan2 --- --- --- ---
Paper3 Paper suction fan3 *3 --- --- --- ---
Head Drv. Cooling fan for the heatsink --- --- --- ---
WasteInk Waste ink counter *4 --- ---
WasteInk2 Waste ink counter 2 *5 --- ---
Wiper Wiping times --- ---
Rubing Ruling times --- ---
Paper Set Lever releasing
Lever --- ---
frequency
Front cover opening/closing
Cover --- ---
frequency
Left and right ink lever
Ink Lever --- ---
operating frequency
TEST
CR Motor CR motor reciprocating times --- ---
PF Motor PF motor travel distance --- ---
Print
Elec. Electric Maintenance Counter display Number of printed pages --- ---
Number
Cleaning Cleaning times --- ---
Fire A Discharged amount of ink (A) --- ---
Fire B Discharged amount of ink (B) --- ---
Fire C Discharged amount of ink (C) --- ---
Fire D Discharged amount of ink (D) --- ---
Fire E Discharged amount of ink (E) --- ---
Fire F Discharged amount of ink (F) --- ---
Fire G Discharged amount of ink (G) --- ---
Fire H Discharged amount of ink (H) --- ---
Cut Cutting times --- ---
Cutter Solenoid operating
Cut Sole --- ---
frequency
"*3": Not displayed for the Stylus Pro 7400/7450/7800/7880/7880C.
"*4": Home side
"*5": Anti-home side


Panel Panel Panel
Error0 Error 0 --- ---
Elec. Electric Error Serious errors are displayed Error3 Error 3 --- ---
Cut Adj. Adjusts the cut pressure --- --- --- --- --- ---
Cutter Sol. Cutter solenoid --- --- --- ---
TEST
Pump Motor Pump motor --- --- --- ---
Actuator 2 Actuator 2
Regulator Sol. Regulator solenoid --- --- --- ---
Ink Press Motor Pressure Motor --- --- --- ---
Edge Sns Lvl Measure the Edge sensor --- --- --- --- --- ---
Auto Uni D Auto Uni-D --- --- --- ---
Auto Bi-D PG
Auto Bi-D PG1.6 --- --- --- ---
Auto Gap Adj. Auto gap adjustment 1.6
Auto Bi-D PG
Auto Bi-D PG0.8 --- --- --- ---
0.8
Fan Suction fan function check --- --- --- --- --- ---
Adjusts the Paper Thickness
Paper --- --- --- --- --- ---
sensor
RearAD Rear AD adjustment --- --- --- --- --- ---
Check Nozzle Check the head nozzles Output Pattern Prints a pattern --- --- --- ---
Cutter Check the cut position --- --- --- --- --- ---
Adjustment Adjust the sensitivity of the
IM Sensor --- --- --- --- --- ---
Ink-mark sensor
Platen Pos. Platen position adjustment --- --- --- --- --- ---
Platen Pos. Chk. Platen position check --- --- --- --- --- ---
Corrects the Rear sensor
Rear Sens. Pos. --- --- --- --- --- ---
position
CR Head Slant CR Head Alignment --- --- --- --- --- ---


Panel Panel Panel
PF Head Bid Bi-D adjustment
--- --- --- ---
PF Head Slant PF head alignment Adj. (PG1.2 VSD1)
PF Head Slant Adjust the PF head alignment --- --- --- ---
Print Print --- ---
ALL ALL
Input Value can be input --- ---
Print Print
VSD1 VSD1
Input Value can be input
Print Print
Uni-D Uni-D VSD2 VSD2
Print Print
VSD3 VSD3
Print Print
VSD1 VSD1
Gap Adj. Gap adjustment
Print Print
Bi-D PG1.6 Bi-D PG1.6 VSD2 VSD2
Adjustment Print Print
VSD3 VSD3
Print Print
VSD1 VSD1
Print Print
Bi-D PG0.8 Bi-D PG0.8 VSD2 VSD2
Print Print
VSD3 VSD3
Check Skew Paper skew check – – --- --- --- ---
Feed Adj. + Paper feed amount and top/
– – --- --- --- ---
T&B bottom margins adjustment
Adjusts the position of the
IM Tresh. – – --- --- --- ---
Ink-mark sensor
Prints the adjustment
Adj.Variable – – --- --- --- ---
parameters
Pump Cnt. Pump counter check – – --- --- --- ---

TEST MENU Panel Function Check

This function allows you to check the operation of the buttons, LCD and LEDs on the
Version Display
panel. To exit the panel function check, press the [Pause] switch twice.
The versions of the following items can be checked. Button operation check
Firmware version When a button is pressed, the corresponding button name shown in the table below
Refer to “1.4.4.22 Firmware Version” (p.82) for the display. is displayed if the button works normally.
BOOT version Switch LCD
The version is displayed as shown below. Pause Printable
SWTddym Paper Select Paper
SNTddym Paper Feed PaperRoad +
*Explanation Paper Feed PaperRoad -
• SWT: Stylus Pro 9400/9450/9800/9880/9880C Menu PanelSet
• SNT: Stylus Pro 7400/7450/7800/7880/7880C Enter Enter
• dd: Date is expressed by two decimal digits
• y: The last digit of the year is expressed by decimal number LCD check
• m: Month is expressed by one hexadecimal digit All over the LCD is lighted up to visually check the LCD for dot missing.
NVRAM version LED check
NVRAM version stored in each of the guaranteed and non-guaranteed areas for
The four LEDs light by turns displaying the corresponding LED name shown in
power failure are displayed.
the table below on the LCD panel.
DIP switch
LED LCD
Displays the DIP switch status.
Power source Power
Pause Printable
Paper Paper
Ink Ink

Sensor Check Encoder Check

The status of the following sensors can be checked. The travel of each motor for CR shaft (Carriage) and PF shaft (Paper Feed) can be
confirmed by the slid (encoder) value which is displayed in encoder pulse.
Table 1-55. Sensor Statuses
Sensor Name Remark
CR origin sensor --- Fan Operation Check
Paper thickness sensor Explanation of the displayed number
The operation of each fan is can be checked.
• 00: Paper thickness is 0.3mm or less
• 10: Paper thickness is 0.4mm to 0.8mm NOTE 1: “Paper3” (paper suction fan 3) is not displayed on the Stylus Pro 7400/
• 11: Paper thickness is more than 0.9mm 7450/7800/7880/7880C.
• 01: Paper Set Lever is released 2: Paper suction fan located at the Carriage home side is referred to as
Paper lever sensor --- Paper suction fan 1. “Fan 2” is the center one, and the one at the anti-
home side is “Fan 3”.
PG origin sensor ---
Pump phase sensor ---
Left and right ink lever sensor ---
Front cover sensor ---
Presence or absence of the The anti-home side tank is not displayed on the Stylus
Maintenance Tank Pro 7400/7450/7800/7880/7880C.
Presence or absence of the Ink The status is displayed by each color.
Cartridges • Slot number is displayed: Not installed
• Slot number is Not displayed: Installed
Edge sensor AD The displayed values are:
IM sensor AD • Difference between ON and OFF statuses
(Displayed on the center of the screen)
Rear sensor AD
• Values at ON status (Displayed on the right side)
Head temperature ---
Driver temperature ---
Pressure sensor ---
Presence or absence of the This is not displayed on the Stylus Pro 7400/7450/
Take-up reel machine 7800/7880/7880C.

Electric Actuator 2
Fatal errors of up to 7 maintenance items recorded as history can be checked. (CPU This allows you to check the operation of the Cutter Solenoid, Pump motor, Regulator
error is not recorded.) Solenoid, and Pressure motor. When you return to the menu screen after the checking
is completed, “Please Turn Off” is displayed on the LCD panel.
Counter display
The counters shown in the table below are displayed. The number is displayed in
hexadecimal. Edge Sensor Level Measurement
Table 1-56. Counter Display Items and Units Measures the platen level (reflecting amount) detected by the paper edge sensor. When
Maintenance Unit paper is on the rear sensor, the sensor detects the paper width and obtains information
Waste ink counter 0.02g for each paper type. If paper is not on the rear sensor, the sensor obtains information for
each paper type at previous paper width detection.
Waste ink counter 2 0.02g
Panel operations are disabled during executing the measurement. The measured result
Wiping times Number of times is displayed as shown in the table below.
Rubbing times Number of times
No measurement Minimum Minimum value Maximum Maximum value
Paper Set Lever releasing frequency Number of times paper measurement value detection position measurement value detection position
Front cover opening/closing frequency Number of times Threshold value at Paper presence at Paper absence at D/A value used at
OK/NG
paper detection paper detection paper detection paper detection
Left and right Ink Lever operating Number of times
frequency
The platen level measurement is conducted from the home side to the anti-home side.
CR motor reciprocating times Number of times When it is completed, the Carriage moves to the position where the highest level
PF motor travel distance millimeters (reflection) is detected and stops there for three seconds.
Number of printed pages Number of print
Cleaning times Number of times
Automatic Gap Adjustment
Discharged amount of ink Mega dot
(A to H columns) Makes Uni-D and Bi-D (PG 1.6mm/PG 0.8mm) adjustments.
Cutting times Number of times This function automatically prints adjustment patterns in Uni-D and Bi-D, and detects
Cutter Solenoid operating frequency Number of times the highest density point on the printed patterns to automatically reflects the Uni-D and
Bi-D correction values.
Serious errors display The correction value for the Bi-D (PG 0.8 mm) is copied for the Bi-D (PG 1.2 mm) and
the Bi-D (PG 1.6mm) correction value is copied for the Bi-D (PG 2.1mm/PG2.6mm)
Displays error codes of fatal errors. The latest error is 0 and 7 errors are recoreded
in 0 to 6.
Cutting Pressure Adjustment

Adjusts the cutter pressure of the cutter. The pressure can be set in increments of 1%.

ADJUSTMENT Paper Thickness Sensor Adjustment

The sensor can be adjusted.
Paper Suction Function
The meaning of the displayed numbers is as follows:
Operation check 00: Paper thickness 0.3mm or less
The two or three paper suction fans can be checked individually if they work 10: Paper thickness is within 0.4mm to 0.8mm
normally. Selected fan operates for the set time period and repeats the operation 11: Paper thickness is 0.9mm or more
until the [Pause] button is pressed.
01: Paper Set Lever is released
Stylus Pro 7400/7450/7800/7880/7880C
Fan selection Operating Time
Rear AD Adjustment
FAN 1, 2 100 ms
↓ Detects and set the best resistance value of the rear sensor.
FAN 1 only 1,800 ms After the detection, the D/A adjustment value, ON-OFF difference, and ON level are
↓ displayed in that order from the left. When a detection error occurs due to failure of the
FAN 1, 2 100 ms sensor or circuit, or absence of paper, the error is displayed on the LCD.
↓
FAN 2 only 1,800 ms
Stylus Pro 9400/9450/9800/9880/9880C

Fan selection Operating time
FAN 1, 3 100 ms
↓
FAN 1 only 1,800 ms
↓
FAN 1, 2 100 ms
↓
FAN 2 only 1,800 ms
↓
FAN 2, 3 100 ms
↓
FAN 3 only 1,800 ms
Suction adjustment
Each fan’s suction level can be adjusted in increments of 2%.

Head Nozzle Check • Horizontal alignment check

The pattern is printed in the order of E, F, G, H, D, C, B, and A row from the
This function allows you to check the nozzles by a printed pattern if they discharge ink left.
normally. Load paper on the printer before executing the check.
If a “Ink Low” or “Ink Out” status is detected, the printer requires to replace the ink Print mode:
cartridge before printing the pattern. 360dpi, Uni-D, 320cps, VSD1, Large
360dpi, Uni-D, 320cps, VSD2, Large
NOTE: The pattern is printed even if the initial ink charge is not performed yet. 360dpi, Uni-D, 320cps, VSD3, Large and Middle is printed alternately
Head nozzle check pattern

Items to be checked
• Discharging conditions (dot missing, broken lines, meandering) Figure 1-33. Horizontal Alignment Check Pattern
• Satellite
• Timing Fence
• Horizontal alignment •Vertical alignment check
• Vertical alignment First the pattern is printed in the order of E, F, G, H, D, C, B, and A row
from the left while the Carriage moves from its home to the anti-home end.
Pattern (See Table 1-57 (p.121) for details on which color is discharged from And while the Carriage is returning to the home, the pattern is printed in the
which nozzles) reverse order.
• Ink discharging check Print mode: 360dpi, Bi-D, 320cps, VSD1
The pattern is printed in the order of E, F, G, H, D, C, B, and A row from the 360dpi, Bi-D, 320cps, VSD2
left. 360dpi, Bi-D, 320cps, VSD3
Print mode: 360dpi, Uni-D, VSD1, 320cps, Small (Large, middle, and small dot sizes used in that order in each
mode.)
Printed
Description
Information
Version Firmware version currently installed on the printer
Maintenance Tank Available capacity of the Maintenance tank Home to Anti-home side Anti-home to Home side
HeadRank ID Head rank ID stored on the printer
Figure 1-34. Vertical Alignment Check Pattern
Color ID Colorimetric calibration values stored on the printer
Figure 1-32. Head Nozzle Check Pattern

Nozzle Rows and Ink Colors Platen Position Adjustment

Table 1-57. Nozzle Rows and Ink Colors The position of each ink pad on the platen can be detected and adjusted.
Ink Color
Nozzle
Row Stylus Pro 7880/7880C/ Stylus Pro 7400/7450/
9880/9880C 9400/9450
A Light Light Black Light Light Black Matte Black
Print mode: 360dpi, Uni-D, 320cps, VSD1, Large
B Light Magenta Vivid Light Magenta
C Light Cyan Light Cyan Magenta Figure 1-35. Platen Position Adjustment Pattern
D Light Black Light Black
E Photo Black, Matte Photo Black, Matte Black Cyan
Black Enter the shift length obtained by the pattern with “-” (minus) mark if the pad is shifted
F Cyan Cyan toward the home side, or put “+” (plus) mark if it is shifted toward the anti-home side.
G Magenta Vivid Magenta Yellow
Pattern
H Yellow Yellow
Anti-home side Home side

Ink Pad
Cut Position Check
Performs a cut operation with default setting to be checked if the cut position is
accurate or not.
Ink-mark Sensor Sensitivity Check

An amount of light emitted from the Ink-mark sensor for the loaded paper can be Ribs on Platen
adjusted. The result is displayed as shown in the table below.
PW1: GAIN I/O D/A correction value A/D correction value A/Dcorrection value(2)
PW2: GAIN I/O D/A correction value A/D correction value ---

Platen Position Check Rear Sensor Position Adjustment

The position of each ink pad on the adjusted platen can be checked. Rear sensor position setting in the firmware can be adjusted to detect cut sheet length
accurately (to ensure the maximum printable area on the bottom of the sheet).
Load A3-size cut sheet paper in portrait orientation. A horizontal black 1-dot width line
is printed at the position 14 mm away from the bottom edge. Measure the distance
between the line and the bottom edge, and enter the actual length as a correction value.
When this item is selected, the printer requires to load a cut sheet paper even if a cut
Print mode: 360dpi, Uni-D, 320cps, VSD1, Large
sheet is already set in the printer.
Figure 1-36. Platen Position Adjustment Pattern
Rear Senor Position
Check if the printed lines correspond to left and right edges of each ink pad.
Allowable Range
(Minus setting side)
Pattern
Ink Pad
Print mode: 360dpi, Uni-D, 320cps, VSD1, Small
Figure 1-37. Rear Sensor Position Adjustment
Ribs on Platen

CR Head Alignment PF Head Alignment

This function allows you to check by a printed pattern if the CR head is tilted or not. The alignment of the PF head can be adjusted by a printed pattern that consists of
A mechanical adjustment is required if the CR head is judged as tilted. waved Bi-D patterns.
Bi-D adjustment (reference row)
Checking the CR Head for tilting
Bi-D adjustment VSD1 reference row can be adjusted.
Overlapping of adjacent colors
indicates the CR head's tilting status. PF Head Alignment adjustment
Observe the printed pattern and judge if the PF head is tilted or not. A mechanical
Home to anti-home direction printing
discharging ink from every fouth nozzles adjustment is required if the PF head is judged as tilted.
Anti-home to home direction printing Checking the PF Head for tilting

discharging ink from every fouth nozzles
Guide line for the check point
Home to anti-home direction printing

discharging ink from the all 180 nozzles
Anti-home to home direction printing

discharging ink from the all 180 nozzles
A G A G A G
Nozzle Row
Print mode: 360dpi, Bi-D, 240cps, VSD2, Small
Figure 1-38. CR Head Alignment Check Pattern The tilting status can be judged
by these gaps.
Print mode: 360dpi, Bi-D, 320cps, VSD1, Small

Table 1-58. Nozzle Row and Ink Color
Ink Color Figure 1-39. PF Head Alignment Check Pattern
Nozzle Row Stylus Pro 7880/7880C/ Stylus Pro 7400/7450/
9880/9880C 9400/9450
A Light Light Black Light Light Black Matte Black
G Magenta Vivid Magenta Yellow

Gap Adjustment Gap adjustment (Uni-D)

A Uni-D pattern is printed. Enter a number of the most neatly printed lines.
The Uni-D and Bi-D (PG 0.8/PG 1.6mm) can be adjusted.
The adjustments can be made by entering a number printed with the adjustment Uni-D: VSD1 Pattern Title
patterns.
Correction values for Bi-D (PG 0.8 mm) are copied for Bi-D (PG 1.2 mm) and those
Pattern Pattern Pattern
for Bi-D (PG 1.6 mm) are copied for Bi-D (PG 2.1 mmm/PG 2.6 mm).
Gap adjustment (All Items)
The Uni-D and Bi-D (PG 1.6mm/PG 0.8mm) adjustment patterns are printed at the
Information
same time and the correction values can be entered on the same screen.
C: AVE___ M: AVE___ Y: AVE___ Lk: AVE___ Lc: AVE___ Lm: AVE___ LLk: AVE___
Note : Number of Uni-D pattern blocks aligned within the paper width differ between the
wide and narrow models:
Uni-D pattern (VSD1) Prints Figure 1-42 in VSD1 mode
The Stylus Pro 9400/9450/9800/9880/9880C: three pattern blocks for each waveform
The Stylus Pro 7400/7450/7800/7880/7880C: two pattern blocks for each waveform
Figure 1-41. Gap Adjustment (Uni-D) Pattern
-4 -2 0 2 4 -4 -2 0 2 4 -4 -2 0 2 4 -4 -2 0 2 4 -4 -2 0 2 4 -4 -2 0 2 4 -4 -2 0 2 4
Bi-D pattern (PG1.6: VSD1) Prints Figure 1-44 in PG1.6 : VSD1 mode
Print mode:
VSD1: 360dpi, Uni-D, 320cps, VSD1, Large
Bi-D pattern (PG0.8: VSD2) Prints Figure 1-44 in PG0.8 : VSD2 mode Figure 1-42. Closeup of the Uni-D Pattern
Bi-D pattern (PG0.8: VSD3) Prints Figure 1-44 in PG0.8 : VSD3 mode Table 1-59. Pattern Title
Waveform Pattern Title
S/N: ___________ Sign: ___________ DATA: ___________ VSD1 Uni-D: VSD1
VSD2 Uni-D: VSD2
VSD3 Uni-D: VSD3
The serial number is printed if it is stored on the NVRAM.
If it is not stored, only the underline is printed.
Figure 1-40. Gap Adjustment (All Items) Pattern List

Table 1-60. Information Gap adjustment (Bi-D)

Model Information Printed with the Patterns
A Bi-D (PG 1.6mm/PG 0.8mm) pattern is printed. Enter a number of the most
Stylus Pro 7800/9800 C: AVE__ M: AVE__ Y: AVE__ LK: AVE__ LC: AVE__ LM: AVE__ LLK: AVE__
neatly printed lines.
Stylus Pro 7880/ C: AVE__ VM: AVE__ Y: AVE__ LK: AVE__ LC: AVE__ VLM: AVE__ LLK:
7880C/9880/9880C AVE__
Stylus Pro 7400/ Bi-D: PG1.6 VSD1 Pattern Title
C: AVE__ Y: AVE__ Y - 2: AVE__ M: AVE__ M - 2: AVE__ PK: AVE__ PK - 2: AVE__ Information
7450/9400/9450
PK: AVE___ C: AVE___ M: AVE___ Y: AVE___
Pattern Pattern Pattern
Lk: AVE___ Lc: AVE___ Lm: AVE___ LLk: AVE___
Note : Number of Bi-D pattern blocks aligned within the paper width differ between the wide
and narrow models:
The Stylus Pro 9400/9450/9800/9880/9880C: three pattern blocks for each waveform
The Stylus Pro 7400/7450/7800/7880/7880C: two pattern blocks for each waveform
Figure 1-43. Gap Adjustment (Bi-D) Pattern
20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36
20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36
Print mode:
VSD1: 360dpi, Bi-D, 320cps, VSD1, Large
Figure 1-44. Closeup of the Bi-D Pattern

Table 1-61. Pattern Title Paper Skew Check

PG Waveform Pattern Title Loaded paper is fed by the set amount (one bus) at one time. Positions of the paper
1.6 mm VSD1d Bi-D: PG1.6 VSD1 edge before and after the feeding is detected by sensors and checked if they are the
VSD2d Bi-D: PG1.6 VSD2 same or not.
VSD3 Bi-D: PG1.6 VSD3 Specify a paper feeding amount (length) after the printer finishes a paper initialization
operation. The left edge of the paper is detected by the Edge sensor and the difference
0.8 mm VSD1 Bi-D: PG0.8 VSD1
from the value detected before feeding is displayed.
VSD2 Bi-D: PG0.8 VSD2 If a paper detection error before or after the feeding occurs, or if the Rear sensor detects
VSD3 Bi-D: PG0.8 VSD3 that the paper is not on it during the feeding, a paper error is displayed on the LCD. In
such case, press any of the buttons to exit the menu.
Table 1-62. Information NOTE 1: A criterion for judging if paper is skewed or not is determined in the
Printing firmware according to the left edge position detected by the Edge sensor.
Model Information Printed with the Patterns
Position 2: If the Paper Check LED flashes or lights with paper loaded, a paper
Stylus Pro 7800/9800 PK: AVE____ C: AVE____ M: AVE____ Y: AVE____ detection error is occurring. Release and reset the Paper Set Lever to clear
Above the
Stylus Pro 7880/7880C/
PK: AVE____ C: AVE____ VM: AVE____ Y: AVE____ the error.
9880/9880C
pattern 3: If “99.999 mm” is displayed as the result, check the following items and retry
Stylus Pro 7400/7450/
9400/9450
C: AVE____ C-2: AVE____ Y: AVE____ Y-2: AVE____ the operation. They can cause the invalid result.
Stylus Pro 7800/9800 LK: AVE____ LC: AVE____ LM: AVE____ LLK: AVE____ • Position of left or right edge of paper changed 3 mm or more.
Stylus Pro 7880/7880C/ • The distance between the K nozzle row and the right edge of paper
Below the LK: AVE____ LC: AVE____ VLM: AVE____ LLK: AVE____
9880/9880C when the Carriage is in its home is less than 142.0 mm. (the paper is
pattern
Stylus Pro 7400/7450/ too close to the home side.)
M: AVE____ M-2: AVE____ MK: AVE____ MK-2: AVE____
9400/9450 • The Paper Set Lever is released or the front cover is opened while
feeding paper.

Band Feed and Top & Bottom Margins Adjustment Table 1-63. Positions of Printed Lines
360dpi-based On a millimeter 360dpi-based On a millimeter
An amount (length) of paper feeding at a time (Band feed), and the top, bottom, and
Intervals basis Intervals basis
side margins can be adjusted.
A band is printed on each top and bottom sides of paper. By entering the interval 4251 Approx. 300 12755 Approx. 900
between the two bands, the PF encoder resolution set in the firmware is automatically 5669 Approx. 400 14173 Approx. 1000
adjusted. 7086 Approx. 500 --- ---
The top and bottom adjustment can be made by entering measured distances between
Edge sensor and printhead, between the cutter and printhead, and between Edge sensor
and printhead.
Adjustment Items
Band feed adjustment: adjusts paper feed
amount
T & B adjustment
• Top margin
Between Edge sensor and printhead (paper
feed direction)
• Bottom margin
Between cutter and printhead (Carriage
moving direction)
• Left and right margin
Between Edge sensor and printhead (paper
feed direction)
Figure 1-45. Between Edge sensor and printhead (paper feed direction)
Table 1-63. Positions of Printed Lines

360dpi-based On a millimeter 360dpi-based On a millimeter
Intervals basis Intervals basis
0 0 8583 Approx. 600
1417 Approx. 100 9921 Approx. 700
2834 Approx. 200 11338 Approx. 800

Ink-mark Sensor Position Adjustment

The position of the Ink-mark sensor can be adjusted and checking the sensor for
detecting ability can be made.
[PG=1.2]
[Count] MK:5 C :0 M :0 Y :0 LLk:0 Lm:0 LC:0 Lk:0
[Position] MK : ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0),
( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0)
[Position] C : ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0),
( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0)
[Position] M : ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0),
[PG=1.2] ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0)
Multi-Sensor Position Adjust PG0.8mm PG1.2mm PG2.1mm PG2.6mm [Position] Y : ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0),
Horizontal [mm] : -1.3 -1.3 0.0 0.0 ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0)
Vertical [mm] : 0.4 0.4 0.0 0.0 [Position] LLk : ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0),
( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0)
Print mode: 360dpi, Bi-D, 320cps, VSD1, Large [Position] Lm : ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0),
( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0)
Figure 1-46. Ink-mark Sensor Position Adjustment Pattern [Position] Lc : ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0),
( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0)
[Position] Lk : ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0),
( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0)
Print mode: 360dpi, Bi-D, 320cps, VSD1, Large
Figure 1-48. Ink-mark Sensor Operation Check Pattern
[PG=1.2] Adjustment Parameters Printing

[Position] MK : ( 1, 3), ( 9, 3), ( 5, 13), ( 1, 22), ( 9, 22), ( 0, 0), Adjustment parameters can be printed out.
( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0)
[Position] C : ( 1, 3), ( 9, 3), ( 5, 13), ( 1, 22), ( 9, 22), ( 0, 0),
( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0)
[Position] M : ( 1, 3), ( 9, 3), ( 5, 13), ( 1, 22), ( 9, 22), ( 0, 0), Pump Counter Check
( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0)
[Position] Y : ( 1, 3), ( 9, 3), ( 5, 13), ( 1, 22), ( 9, 22), ( 0, 0),
( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0) Diagnoses if the Pump Counter value is within the allowable range.
[Position] LLk : ( 1, 3), ( 9, 3), ( 5, 13), ( 1, 22), ( 9, 22), ( 0, 0),
( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0) Below the specification value: OK
[Position] Lm : ( 1, 3), ( 9, 3), ( 5, 13), ( 1, 22), ( 9, 22), ( 0, 0), Above the specification value: NG
( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0)
[Position] Lc : ( 1, 3), ( 9, 3), ( 5, 13), ( 1, 22), ( 9, 22), ( 0, 0),
( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0)
[Position] Lk : ( 1, 3), ( 9, 3), ( 5, 13), ( 1, 22), ( 9, 22), ( 0, 0),
( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0), ( 0, 0)
Print mode: 360dpi, Bi-D, 320cps, VSD1, Large
Figure 1-47. Ink-mark Sensor Operation Check Pattern

1.4.6.2 Counter Display Menu (VIEW COUNTERS) Cutter Life Counter

This menu displays the counter value of each unit/part.
Displays cutter life counter value. Cutter life counter is counted every cut operation.
Table 1-64. Counter Display Menu Cutter life counter value is initialized (initial value 0) when replacing cutter.
Top menu 1st hierarchy
Panel Display Item Panel Display Item
VIEW COUNTERS Counter CUTTER Cutter life counter value Cutter Life Cumulative Counter
display menu CUTTER TOTAL Cutter life cumulative counter value
Displays cutter life cumulative counter value. Cutter life cumulative counter value is
TOTAL PAGES Total printouts counter value
counted every cut operation. Cutter life cumulative counter value is not initialized.
CR MOTOR CR motor life counter value
CR TOTAL CR motor cumulative counter value
PF MOTOR PF motor life counter value
PRESSURE Pressure Pump motor life counter
Total Printouts Counter
MOTOR
Displays total printouts counter value. Total printouts counter value is counted every
NOZZLE A Head unit life counter value
paper eject operation.
(A row - H row)
…
NOZZLE H
FL BOX Flashing box counter value
CR Motor Life Counter
CLEANER Cleaning unit life counter value
SPONGE Sponge counter value display for left and Displays CR motor life counter value. CR motor life counter value is counted every CR
right borderless reciprocating.
PG PG switching counter value
CR Motor Cumulative Counter
Displays CR motor life cumulative counter value. CR motor life cumulative counter
value is counted every CR reciprocating. It is not initialized by clearing carriage related
information counter.
PF Motor Life Counter
Displays PF motor life counter value. PF motor counter life counter value counts PF
feed amount.

Pressure Motor Life Counter
Displays life counter of the Pressure Pump motor.
Head Unit Life Counter Value Display (A Row - H Row)
Displays life counter of each nozzle from A row to H row. Head unit life counter is
counted every ink discharging.
Flashing Box Counter Value Display
Displays flashing box counter value. The flushing box counter counts each time of
flushing.
Cleaning Unit Life Counter Value Display
Displays cleaning unit life counter value. The cleaning unit life counter counts each
time of cleaning.
Sponge Counter Value Display for Left and Right Borderless
Displays sponge count value for left and right borderless.
PAPER EJECTION SWITCHING COUNTER VALUE DISPLAY
Displays paper ejection switching counter value. The Paper Eject Switching Counter
counts each time the paper eject switching movement occurs.
PG Switching Counter Value Display
Displays PG switching counter value. The PG switching counter counts each time the
PG switching movement occurs.

1.4.6.3 Maintenance Information Menu (MAINT INFO)

All the life counters, and other various information on usage conditions stored on the NVRAM can be displayed on the LCD panel.
Table 1-65. MAIN INFO Menu Items

Top menu 1st hierarchy 2nd hierarchy
Settings Unit
Item Item Description Item Description
E1 Date and time maintained by the RTC <YY><MM><DD><HH> Date and time
E2 Date and time of initializing the RTC <YY><MM><DD><HH> Date and time
E3 Temperature of the printhead <nn> °C
E4 Date when the power is ON for the first time <YY><MM><DD> Date
E5 Cumulative total energized time period <nnnnnnnnnn> hour
E6 Cumulative total time of Energy Star non-sleep mode <nnnnnnnnnn> sec
E7 Cumulative total energized time of the Paper Suction fans <nnnnnnnnnn> sec
Uptime and E8 Cumulative total time of opening/closing the front cover <nnnnnnnnnn> Number of times
MENU E Environmental E9 Reserved --- ---
conditions E10 Head temp. is lower than 15 degrees C when starting printing <nnnnnnnnnn> Number of times
E11 Head temp. is within 15 to 20 degrees C when starting printing <nnnnnnnnnn> Number of times
MAINT INFO
E15 Head temp. is higher than 35 degrees C when starting printing nnnnnnnnnn Number of times
E16 The highest head temp. when starting printing <nn> °C
E17 The lowest head temp. when starting printing <nn> °C
R1 Reserved --- ---
R2 Cumulative total cycles of the carriage movements (240 CPS) <nnnnnnnnn> Number of times
R3 Cumulative total cycles of the carriage movements (350 CPS) <nnnnnnnnn> Number of times
R4 Reserved --- ---
R5 Date when carriage durable parts are replaced <YY><MM><DD> Date
MENU R Carriage R6 Reserved --- ---
Cumulative total cycles of the carriage movements (240 CPS) after replacing the durable
R7 <nnnnnnnnn> Number of times
carriage parts.
Cumulative total cycles of the carriage movements (350 CPS) after replacing the durable
R8 <nnnnnnnnn> Number of times
carriage parts
R9 Reserved --- ---

Table 1-65. MAIN INFO Menu Items (continued)

Settings Unit
Cumulative waste ink counter L (Ink pad)*2 <nnnnnnn.n> g
S1
Cumulative waste ink counter R (Ink pad)*2 <nnnnnnn.n> g
Cumulative waste ink counter L (Flushing box) <nnnnnnn.n> g
S2
Cumulative waste ink counter R (Flushing box) <nnnnnnn.n> g
S3 Number of executions of manual cleaning <nnnnnnnnn> Number of times
S4 Number of executions of cleaning (CL1) <nnnnnnnnn> Number of times
S9 Number of executions of cleaning (CL6) <nnnnnnnnn> ---
S10 Time and date of the last cleaning (CL5) <YY><MM><DD><HH> Date and time
S11 Number of executions of cleaning (TCL1) <nnnnnnnnn> Number of times
S12 Number of executions of cleaning (TCL2) <nnnnnnnnn> Number of times
S13 Number of executions of cleaning other than home <nnnnnnnnn> Number of times
S14 Number of executions of initial ink charge*1 <nnnnnnnnn> Number of times
MAINT INFO MENU S Ink System
S15 Number of replacements of the black ink 1 (from PK to MK) <nnnnnnnnn> Number of times
S16 Time and date of the last ink replacement 1 <YY><MM><DD><HH> Date and time
S17 Time and date of the last but one ink replacement 1 <YY><MM><DD><HH> Date and time
S18 Number of replacements of the black ink 2 (from MK to PK) <nnnnnnnnn> Number of times
S19 Time and date of the last ink replacement 2 <YY><MM><DD><HH> Date and time
S20 Time and date of the last but one ink replacement 2 <YY><MM><DD><HH> Date and time
Number of replacements of the Maintenance Tank (L)*2 <nnnnnnnnn> Number of times
S21
Number of replacements of the Maintenance Tank (R)*2 <nnnnnnnnn> Number of times
Time and date of the replacement of the Maintenance Tank (L)*2 <YY><MM><DD><HH> Date and time
S22
Time and date of the replacement of the Maintenance Tank (R)*2 <YY><MM><DD><HH> Date and time
Time and date of the last replacement of the Maintenance Tank (L)*2 <YY><MM><DD><HH> Date and time
S23
Time and date of the last replacement of the Maintenance Tank (R)*2 <YY><MM><DD><HH> Date and time
Time and date of the last but one replacement of the Maintenance Tank (L)*2 <YY><MM><DD><HH> Date and time
S24
Time and date of the last but one replacement of the Maintenance Tank (R)*2 <YY><MM><DD><HH> Date and time
S25 Number of executions of borderless ink pad cleaning sequence <nnnnnnnnn> Number of times
S26 Time and date of the last borderless ink pad cleaning <nnnnnnnnn> Date and time
Note • The number of executions of the initial ink charge is counted when CL1 is performed at the beginning of the charging sequence.
• The “L” (anti-home side) and “R” (home side) are displayed on the Stylus Pro 9400/9450/9800/9880/9880C only. They are not displayed on the Stylus Pro 7400/7450/7800/7880/7880C.


Settings Unit
A1 Cumulative amount of ink consumed Slot 1 EPSON ink <nnnnnnnnnn> ml
A2 Cumulative amount of ink consumed Slot 1 Non-EPSON ink <nnnnnnnnnn> ml
MAINT INFO MENU A Ink 1
A17 Number of replacements of the ink cartridge Slot 1 110 ml <nnnnnnnnnn> Number of times
Note : The slot number is assigned in ascending order from the left of the printer.


Settings Unit
B1 Date and time of ink replacement (Slot 1) <YY><MM><DD> Date and time
B2 Ink vendor name (Slot 1) <xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx> Character string
B3 Date and time of the last ink replacement (Slot 1) <YY><MM><DD> Date and time
B4 The previous ink vendor name (Slot 1) <xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx> Character string
B5 Date and time of the last but one ink replacement (Slot 1) <YY><MM><DD> Date and time
B6 The second previous ink vendor name (Slot 1) <xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx> Character string
MAINT INFO MENU B Ink 2


Settings Unit
MAINT INFO MENU B Ink 2


Settings Unit
P1 Number of settings of roll paper --- <nnnnnnnnn> Number of times
P2 Number of settings of cut sheet (manual feed) --- <nnnnnnnnn> Number of times
P3 Printable length Paper width 1 <nnnnnnnnn> mm
P4 Number of ejections of paper Paper width 1 <nnnnnnnnn> Number of times
MAINT INFO MENU P Paper info
P23 Printable length Other width <nnnnnnnnn> mm
P24 Number of ejections of paper Other width <nnnnnnnnn> Number of times
Note • The “Paper width” is the width specified by “ESC(S)” command. However, if paper width detected by sensors is narrower than the specified width, the detected width is adopted.
• When a print job does not include the ESC(S) command, it is counted in the “Other width.


Settings Unit
MAINT INFO MENU P Paper info
P45 Printable length Other width <nnnnnnnnn> mm
P46 Number of ejections of paper Other width <nnnnnnnnn> Number of times
Note • The “Paper width” is the width specified by “ESC(S)” command. However, if paper width detected by sensors is narrower than the specified width, the detected width is adopted.
• When a print job does not include the ESC(S) command, it is counted in the “Other width.


Settings Unit
M1 Number of times the print mode is specified 1 2880-1440 4PASS Uni-D <nnnnnnnnn> Number of times
M2 Number of times the print mode is specified 2 1440-720 4PASS Uni-D <nnnnnnnnn> Number of times
M3 Number of times the print mode is specified 3 720-720 FOL Uni-D <nnnnnnnnn> Number of times
M4 Number of times the print mode is specified 4 720-360 FOL Uni-D <nnnnnnnnn> Number of times
M5 Number of times the print mode is specified 5 360-720 MW Uni-D <nnnnnnnnn> Number of times
M6 Number of times the print mode is specified 6 Other mode Uni-D <nnnnnnnnn> Number of times
M7 Number of times the print mode is specified 7 2880-1440 4PASS Bi-D <nnnnnnnnn> Number of times
M8 Number of times the print mode is specified 8 1440-720 4PASS Bi-D <nnnnnnnnn> Number of times
M9 Number of times the print mode is specified 9 720-720 FOL Bi-D <nnnnnnnnn> Number of times
M10 Number of times the print mode is specified 10 720-360 FOL Bi-D <nnnnnnnnn> Number of times
M11 Number of times the print mode is specified 11 360-720 MW Bi-D <nnnnnnnnn> Number of times
M12 Number of times the print mode is specified 12 Other mode Bi-D <nnnnnnnnn> Number of times
M13 Number of times the borderless print is specified 1 2880-1440 4PASS Uni-D <nnnnnnnnn> Number of times
M14 Number of times the borderless print is specified 2 1440-720 4PASS Uni-D <nnnnnnnnn> Number of times
MAINT INFO MENU M Print mode
M15 Number of times the borderless print is specified 3 720-720 FOL Uni-D <nnnnnnnnn> Number of times
M16 Number of times the borderless print is specified 4 720-360 FOL Uni-D <nnnnnnnnn> Number of times
M17 Number of times the borderless print is specified 5 360-720 MW Uni-D <nnnnnnnnn> Number of times
M18 Number of times the borderless print is specified 6 Other mode Uni-D <nnnnnnnnn> Number of times
M19 Number of times the borderless print is specified 7 2880-1440 4PASS Bi-D <nnnnnnnnn> Number of times
M20 Number of times the borderless print is specified 8 1440-720 4PASS Bi-D <nnnnnnnnn> Number of times
M21 Number of times the borderless print is specified 9 720-720 FOL Bi-D <nnnnnnnnn> Number of times
M22 Number of times the borderless print is specified 10 720-360 FOL Bi-D <nnnnnnnnn> Number of times
M23 Number of times the borderless print is specified 11 360-720 MW Bi-D <nnnnnnnnn> Number of times
M24 Number of times the borderless print is specified 12 Other mode Bi-D <nnnnnnnnn> Number of times
Number of executions of full-bleed print on all four
M25 --- --- <nnnnnnnnn> Number of times
sides with one cut.
Number of executions of full-bleed print on all four
M26 --- --- <nnnnnnnnn> Number of times
sides with double cut.
Note : The print modes are detected and counted at the time of starting a print job. They are counted even if the job is cancelled in the middle of the printing.


Settings Unit
01 Number of changes of the platen gap setting <nnnnnnnnn> Number of times
02 Number of changes of roll paper margin setting <nnnnnnnnn> Number of times
03 Number of executions of cutter position adjustment <nnnnnnnnn> Number of times
04 Date and time of the last cutter position adjustment <YY><MM><DD> Date and time
05 Number of times that the nozzle check pattern is printed <nnnnnnnnn> Number of times
06 Date and time of the last nozzle check pattern printing <YY><MM><DD> Date and time
07 Number of executions of Bi-D adjustment (BK) <nnnnnnnnn> Number of times
08 Date and time of the last Bi-D adjustment (BK) <YY><MM><DD> Date and time
09 Number of executions of Bi-D adjustment (All Colors) <nnnnnnnnn> Number of times
010 Date and time of the last Bi-D adjustment (All Colors) <YY><MM><DD> Date and time
011 Number of executions of Uni-D adjustment <nnnnnnnnn> Number of times
210 Date and time of the last Uni-D adjustment <YY><MM><DD> Date and time
013 Number of executions of Auto Bi-D adjustment (BK) <nnnnnnnnn> Number of times
Panel Setting 014 Date and time of the last Auto Bi-D adjustment (BK) <YY><MM><DD> Date and time
MAINT INFO MENU 0
Info 015 Number of executions of Auto Bi-D adjustment (All Colors) <nnnnnnnnn> Number of times
016 Date and time of the last Auto Bi-D adjustment (All Colors) <YY><MM><DD> Date and time
017 Number of executions of Auto Uni-D adjustment <nnnnnnnnn> Number of times
018 Date and time of the last Auto Uni-D adjustment <YY><MM><DD> Date and time
019 Number of changes of the cut pressure <nnnnnnnnn> Number of times
020 Number of changes of the cut method <nnnnnnnnn> Number of times
021 Number of corrections of paper feed amount <nnnnnnnnn> Number of times
022 Number of changes of paper suction level <nnnnnnnnn> Number of times
023 Number of changes of print adjustment <nnnnnnnnn> Number of times
024 Number of executions of auto nozzle check <nnnnnnnnn> Number of times
025 Number of executions of cleaning after auto nozzle check <nnnnnnnnn> Number of times
026 Date and time of the last auto nozzle check <YY><MM><DD> Date and time
027 Number of corrections made by auto feed amount adjustment <nnnnnnnnn> Number of times
028 Date and time of the last auto feed amount adjustment <YY><MM><DD> Date and time
Note : The number of executions of auto nozzle check is counted at the beginning of the sequence. Retries when dot missing is detected are not counted.


Settings Unit
F1 Service call error type ever occurred 1 <xxxxxxxx> Error code
F2 Date and time of occurrence of the error 1 <YY><MM><DD> Date and time
MAINT INFO MENU F Fatal error


Settings Unit
N1 Normal error type ever occurred 1 <xxxxxxxx> Error code
N2 Date and time of occurrence of the error 1 <YY><MM><DD> Date and time
N3 Normal error type ever occurred 2 <xxxxxxxx> Error code
N5 Normal error type ever occurred 3 <xx> Error code
MAINT INFO MENU N Normal error
N21 Number of occurrences of roll paper set error <nnnnnnnnn> Number of times
N22 Number of occurrences of cut sheet set error <nnnnnnnnn> Number of times

1.4.7 MIB Function 1.4.8 Function to Prevent Irregular Printing

The Stylus Pro 7400/7450/7800/7880/7880C and the Stylus Pro 9400/9450/9800/9880/ Forced cancel of print job
9880C are compatible with the two types of MIB described in the tables below. This
When the printer receives 16KB DC1 at the beginning of each job, it performs a
allows you to see the printer information (spec, status, consumables) obtained from the
special initialization operation.
MIB on a computer via a network. The Local MIB is used when the printer is in Type-
Refer to “1.4.9 Initialization” (p.143) for more details.
B Level 3 Packet Mode.
Skip reading of irregular data
Compatible MIB
Unprintable characters
Global MIB Characters including ASCII code in text print mode.
Name Contents Table 1-66. Unprintable Hexadecimal Code (Control Character Code)
Host Resource MIB Device information etc. Code Character Code Character Code Character Code Character
Printer MIB Printer information (function/commodity/status) 00h NULL 08h BS 10h DLE 1Ah SUB
EPSON Printer Private MIB Printer information (DeviceID/StatusReply letter
01h SOH 09h HT 11h DC1 1Bh ESC
strings etc.)
02h STX 0Ah NL (LF) 12h DC2 1Ch FS
03h ETX 0Bh VT 13h DC3 1Dh GS
Local MIB
04h EOT 0Ch NP (FF) 16h SYN 1Eh RS
Name Contents 05h ENQ 0Dh CR 17h ETB 1Fh US
Type-B Local MIB Type-B I/F setting /information 06h ACK 0Eh SO 18h CAN 7Fh DEL
EMAP Local MIB Corresponding MIB information 07h BEL 0Fh SI 19h EM --- ---
Note : 0Ah, 0Ch, 0Dh, 11h, and 1Bh are ESCP command supported by the printer. The printer
judges the command at the same time and decides whether to print it.
Job time out
Refer to “1.4.4.11 Time Out” (p.68).
Preventing the remaining data from being printed on the second cut sheet
If the print data size is larger than the maximum data size that can be printed
on a single sheet (manual feed), the remaining data that cannot be printed on
the first sheet is not printed on the second sheet.
The remaining print data (graphic data) is ignored, and the next new print data
is printed from the top of the second paper.

1.4.9 Initialization 1.4.10 Default Setup Values

The printer performs initialization operation by the following method. 1.4.10.1 Operation Default Setting
1.4.9.1 Hardware Initialization Default Status
Default setup values in initialization operation are as follows. The parameters for
The following are the initialization operation performed when turning the power items that may be saved for panel setup, default setup, and remote commands are
on. used as default values.
Initialization operation Page position: Sets current paper position as page start position
• Initializes printer mechanism. Line feed: 1/6”
• Clears input data buffer.
• Clears print buffer. Right margin: 1st character
• Sets default values. Left margin: 3mm
Character pitch: 10CPI
1.4.9.2 Software Initialization Print mode: Text mode (non-raster graphics mode)
The default command (ESC @) also initializes the printer. Cut Sheet Eject
Initialization operation When at power introduction it is judged by the printer that there is both cut sheet
• Clears print buffer. setting and also there is paper remaining in the paper path, the paper is fed and
• Sets default values. ejected. The printer is at standby “READY”.
Cancel enhancement data (DC1x16kbyte) initializes the printer. NOTE: For details, refer to “Mechanical Design Specifications”.
Initialization operation
• Clears print buffer.
• Sets default values.
• Immediate cut only when some printing remains on the paper.
1.4.9.3 Panel Initialization

This printer is initialized when pushing the [Pause] switch for more than 3 seconds, or
printer recognized the *INIT signal.
Initialization operation
• Ejects a paper. (For roll paper, paper is cut by skipping print part when
Paper Source = Auto Cut in panel setting, paper is not cut when Paper
Source = Cutter Off)
• Caps the print head.
• Clears input data buffer.
• Clears print buffer.
• Sets default values.

1.5 Controller
CPU: SH7709S 144 MHz
Code ROM: 2 MB
Font ROM: None
RAM:
Stylus Pro 7400/7450/7800/7880/7880C: 64 MB
Stylus Pro 9400/9450/9800/9880/9880C: 128 MB
Interface
Stylus Pro 7400/7800/9400/9800
• IEEE1394
• USB (HS, FS)
• Type-B Interface
Stylus Pro 7450/7880/7880C/9450/9880/9880C
• USB (HS, FS)
• Netowork Interface
OS: Hitachi HI7700 (µITRON 3.0 compatible)
Product Description Controller 144

1.6 Interface SIGNAL ASSIGNMENT AND SIGNAL DEFINITION OF INPUT CONNECTOR PIN
Table 1-67. Signal Assignment and Signal Definition of

1.6.1 USB interface Input Connector Pin (USB (FS))
Pin No. Signal name In/Out Function description
SPECIFICATION
1 VCC --- Cable power. Maximum power consumption is
Standard 100mA
Universal Serial Bus Specifications Revision 2.0 2 –Data Bi-directional Data
Universal Serial Bus Specifications Revision 1.1 3 +Data Bi-directional Data, pull up to +3.3V via 1.5K ohm resistor
Universal Serial Bus Device Class Definition for Printing Devices Version 4 Ground --- Cable ground
1.1
Bit rate
480 Mbp (High Speed Mode)
12 Mbp (Full Speed Device)
Data format: NRZI
Adaptable connector: USB Series B
Acceptable cable length: 5m
Device ID
<xx><xx> (Character strings may vary by Model Name.)
MFG:EPSON; Figure 1-49. Pin Assignment
CMD:ESCPL2,BDC;
MDL:<Model Name>;
CLS:PRINTER;
DES:EPSON<SP><Model Name>; (<SP>: space code)
Product Description Interface 145

1.6.2 IEEE1394 Interface SIGNAL ASSIGNMENT AND SIGNAL DEFINITION OF INPUT CONNECTOR PIN
C H E C K Stylus Pro 7400/7800/9400/9800 only. Table 1-68. Signal Assignment and Signal Definition of Input Connector Pin
P O IN T
Pin No. Signal name Function description
1 VP Cable power
2 VG Cable ground
3 TPB* Strobe on receive, data on transmit (differential pair)
FEATURES 4 TPB
IEEE Std.1394-1995,1394a-2000 compliant 5 TPA* Data on receive, strobe on transmit (differential pair)
6 TPA
400 Mbps
1 port (Standard 6-pin receptacle)
Power Class: POWER_CLASS=000
PROTOCOL
Node does not need power and does not repeat power
Bi-directional data communication between the IEEE 1394 equipped host and SB-2 (ANSI NCITS 325-1998) compliant
the printer EP-PPDT (Based on IEEE 1394.3 specification)
SPECIFICATIONS
Data transmission: Half-duplex, Data/Strobe differential
Synchronization: DS-Link bit level encoding
Encode/Decode: DS-Link bit level encoding
Connector: IEEE 1394-1995 compliant plug (6 contacts)

1.6.3 Optional Interface REPLY FOR OPTION COMMAND
C H E C K Stylus Pro 7400/7800/9400/9800 only. Table 1-69. Reply List

P O IN T
Option command
Command name Reply-A Reply-B
number
00h No-operation Accept None
01h Start Hardware Reset Accept Execute OK
Type-B interface (level 3, MIB, 1200mA type) is supported. 02h Start Software Reset Reject
03h Send Main System Type Accept
REPLY MESSAGE
04h Send Name Data Reject
Main-Type 05h Inquire Name Data Accept
Stylus Pro 7400/7800 06h Send Product Name Accept
MT48p,PW240cl10cpi,PRG(SN0xxxx)rev,AP800ma,SPD0fast,D4,GDI 07h Send Software Emulation Type Accept
Stylus Pro 9400/9800 08h Complete Buffered Data Accept Check Condition
MT48p,PW440cl10cpi,PRG(SW0xxxx)rev,AP800ma,SPD0fast,D4,GDI
09h Stop Procedure Reject Execute OK
NOTE: xxxx is F/W version.
0Ah Return Buffered Data Reject
Product-Name: <Model Name>
0Bh Send Entity Type Accept
Emulation-Type: ESCPL2-00 0Ch Send Status Accept
Entity-Type: EPSONLQ2 0Dh Quit Procedure Reject
0Eh Inquire ASCII Message Reject
0Fh Send ASCII Message Accept None
10h-13h --- Unknown None
14h Inquire Emergency Message Accept Execute OK
15h Send Emergency Reply Accept
16h-1Fh --- Unknown None
20h-FFh --- Reserved None

SUPPORTED MAIN COMMAND AND SENDING TIMING TYPE-B LEVEL 3 PACKET MODE
Table 1-70. Supported Main Command and Sending Timing Communication between Type-B I/F card and Printer corresponds to Type-B Level 3
(Packet Mode) Communication Specification. (IEEE P1284.4 (Draft 1.50) compliant)
Main command
Command name Sending timing
number Packet Mode Shifting
01h Start Software Reset • Init signal on the std. parallel To shift to Type-B Level 3 Packet Mode, a Type-B Level 3-compliant card must
• Type B I/F Option command: 01h have been installed (“D4” character must be added to Option Type character
• Panel Reset string). An error occurs if the card is not compatible with Type B Level 3.
• Cold start Supported Channel
04h Send Name Data Type B I/F Option command: 05h Assigning Service and Channel applies the chart below.
07h Inquire Software Emulation Changing Software Emulation type Table 1-71. Supported Channel
Type
Service Socket ID Use Initiator Max Data Size Credit
0Eh Inquire ASCII Message Writing to DBIN-register
1284.4
1284.4CTRL 00h --- 64byte 1 (Limited Mode)
14h Inquire Emergency Reply Reply for Emergency command control
15h Send Emergency Message Receive Emergency command SNMP/MIB
EPSON-MIB 04h I/F Card 556byte 1 (Limited Mode)
setting
SNMP/ Trap
EPSON-TRAP 05h Printer 556byte 1 (Limited Mode)
notification
EPSON-DATA Depends on received
SENDING BDC-ST CHARACTER STRINGS VIA DBIN-REGISTER Send print 32kbyte
(Include Out of 40h --- buffer
data (1Packet)
Band) (Unlimited Mode)
When ST of Type-B I/F sets “ON” State-Reply, BDC-ST is sent through DBINregister.
When State Reply is started, “Start” and “End” of BDC-ST characters are announced
by sending the Main command (0Eh).
NOTE: The BDC-ST is only sent when Type-B Lv2 is used.

Supported Packet 1.6.4 Network Interface

Apply the following communication packet.
C H E C K Only Stylus Pro 7450/7880/7880C/9450/9880/9880C.
Table 1-72. Supported Packet P O IN T
Packet description Channel
EPSONPackingCommand/Reply Packet Mode shifting Ch00
Init/Reply Initialization Ch00
Exit/Reply Exit from Packet Mode Ch00
INTERFACE
GetSocketID/Reply Acquisition of Socket ID Ch00
GetServiceName/Reply Acquisition of Service Name Ch00 Supports the wired LAN connection with RJ-45 connector for 100BASE-TX/
OPENChannel/Reply Open Channel Ch00 10BASE-T
CloseChannel/Reply Close Channel Ch00 100 Full/Half, 10 Full/Half (Auto, Fix mode) selectable
Credit/Reply Send Credit Ch40 Supports Auto MDI
DataPacket Printing data / reverse data Ch40
MessagePacket MIB PDU/Trap PDU etc. Ch04/05
NETWORK PROTOCOL
OutofBandPacket Job control information etc. Ch40 TCP/IP
Local MIB IP Address Acquisition/Name Resolution

According to Type-B Level 3 Packet Mode correspondence, it corresponds to Supports DNS, Dynamic DNS (via DHCP, D-DNS)
Local MIB (Type-B/EMAP). Supports acquisition of IP Addresses from DHCP Server
Refer to “1.4.7 MIB Function” (p.142) Supports IP Address generation by APIPA (Automatic Private IP Addressing)
Supports IP Address generation and name resolution by Bonjour
(Rendezvous)
Outputs print jobs to the printer via the protocol of Ipr, Port9100
Equipped with SNMP MIB
Equipped with Time synchronization function (supporting NTP)
Control IP printing access
Filters accessing by ranging IP Addresses for printing via TCP/IP protocol

SETTINGS (ENVIRONMENT/FUNCTION) 1.6.5 Received Buffer Full Operation

Network settings with EpsonNet Config (Win/Mac) via the wired LAN available If the receiving buffer free space becomes less than 32Kbytes when data is being
received from the USB interface or IEEE1394 interface, and there are no errors
Checking/setting the network status with EpsonNet Config (Win/Mac) via the occurring (including the pause status), the printer is limited to receiving data at 40byte/
wired LAN available sec, which prevents a host data transmission timeout. When the receiving buffer returns
Re-writing the network firmware with EpsonNet Config (Win/Mac) via the wired to above 36Kbytes of free space, receiving returns to normal.
LAN available
NOTE: This status is not occurred in Type-B Level 3 Packet Mode for Credit
Initializing the network settings to the default (factory default) from the control administration.
panel available
STATUS DISPLAY
Network status display with LEDs 1.6.6 Interface Selection
Network status sheet printing from the control panel available The printer has IEEE1394 interface, USB 2.0 interface, optional interface and Network
interface. These interfaces are selected manually by the default setting mode or
selected automatically.
Manual selection
One of 3 interfaces can be selected; IEEE1394 interface, USB 2.0 interface,
optional interface, Network interface.
Automatic detection
An interface used for the first print job after power-On is automatically determined
to be used from then. If the first job is interrupted in the middle of the data
transmission, and not restarted within 10 seconds, the printer goes back to idle
status and determines the interface which is used for the next job.
NOTE: This status is not implemented in Type-B Level 3 Packet Mode for
Channel administration. To move to idle status, close the
DataChannel.
Interface Selection and Interface State

When the printer is initialized or returned to the idle status (any interface is not
selected), the USB interface becomes non-NACK reply status, and the option
interface resets OFF-LINE bit of Main Status Register (MNSTS).

1.7 Optional Units and Consumables Stylus Pro 7880/7880C/9880/9880C

Photo black, Vivid magenta, Vivid light magenta, cyan, light cyan, yellow,
light black, matte black, light light black
1.7.1 Ink Cartridge Stylus Pro 7400/7450/9400/9450
Selection of ink types, detection of cartridges and the amount of remaining ink are Matte black, magenta, cyan, yellow
controlled by CSIC. Environmental requirements
Temperature: 10ºC ~ 40ºC
C H E C K When installing the pigment ink cartridges, shake them
P O IN T horizontally after unpacking them for about five seconds Relative temperature: 5% ~ 85% (without freezing)
beforehand to ensure the designed print quality.
C H E C K Ink in the cartridge will freeze if it is left under minus 10
To avoid wrong insertion, the shapes of ink cartridges of Stylus P O IN T
Pro 7400/7800/9400/9800 and Stylus Pro 7450/7880/7880C/ degrees C temperature. (Reference: Takes about three hours
9450/9880/9880C differ. to thaw ink frozen in minus 20 degrees C completely under 25
degrees C.)
SPECIFICATION
Storage temperature
Type: Pigment
Condition Temperature Remarks
Form: Special ink cartridge
During packed storage –30ºC to 40ºC Within 1 month for 40ºC
Ink capacity:
Loading printer –20ºC to 40ºC Within 1 month for 40ºC
110 ml
During transportation –30ºC to 60ºC • Within 1 month for 40ºC
220 ml
• Within 120 hours for 60ºC
Dimension:
110 ml / 220 ml
(W): 27.1 mm x (D): 185 mm x (H): 107 mm C A U T IO N If you remove an ink cartridge before it reaches the ink out state,
you should store it under the same ambient conditions as for the
Total mass: printer body in such a way that the ink discharge opening is
110 ml: Approx. 250 g protected from dust intrusion. The ink cartridge stored as such and
220 ml: Approx. 370 g installed again can be used if it is within the term of availability.
Available ink quantity:
110 ml: Over 103 ml Life: 2 years (Total time of before and after of installing
220 ml: Over 210 ml printer.)
Color: Insured date of printing quality:
Stylus Pro 7800/9800 Pigment 6 month (After printer is installed.)
Photo black, magenta, light magenta, cyan, light cyan, yellow, light black, Installation position:
matte black, light light black See “1.1.1 Features” (p.12) for the information on the installation position of each
ink cartridge.
Product Description Optional Units and Consumables 151

1.7.2 Cleaning Cartridge 1.7.3 Conversion Cartridge

Type: Exclusive cleaning cartridge Type: Exclusive cartridge for ink change
(not to be used as an ink cartridge)
Dimension:
110 ml / 220 ml Dimension:
(W): 27.1 mm x (D): 185 mm x (H): 107 mm 110 ml / 220 ml
(W): 27.1 mm x (D): 185 mm x (H): 107 mm
Capacity: 220 ml
Total mass: Approx. 370 g Capacity: None
Effective cleaning solution: Over 208 ml Total mass: Approx. 100 g
Operation environment condition Effective cleaning solution: None
Temperature: 10ºC ~ 40ºC Operation environment condition

Relative temperature: 5% ~ 85% (without freezing) Temperature: 10ºC ~ 40ºC
Storage temperature Relative temperature: 5% ~ 85% (without freezing)
Storage temperature
Condition Temperature Remarks
During packed storage –30ºC to 40ºC Within 1 month for 40ºC Condition Temperature Remarks
Loading printer –20ºC to 40ºC Within 1 month for 40ºC During packed storage –30ºC to 40ºC Within 1 month for 40ºC
During transportation –30ºC to 60ºC • Within 1 month for 40ºC Loading printer –20ºC to 40ºC Within 1 month for 40ºC
• Within 120 hours for 60ºC During transportation –30ºC to 60ºC • Within 1 month for 40ºC
Life: 2 years (includes time period before use)
Life: 2 years (includes time period before use)
Guaranteed number of insertions and removals:
Maximum 100 times

1.7.4 Maintenance Tank

The Stylus Pro 9400/9450/9800/9880/9880C have two Maintenance Tanks on their
lower left and right sides respectively. The Stylus Pro 7400/7450/7800/7880/7880C
have one Maintenance Tank on their lower right side. The tank can be replaced by the
user when it becomes full.
Type: Special maintenance tank for waste ink
Number of pieces:
Stylus Pro 9400/9450/9800/9880/9880C: Two tanks
Stylus Pro 7400/7450/7800/7880/7880C: One tanks
Dimension:
(W): 102.5 mm x (D): 235 mm x (H): 79.5 mm
Capacity: Approx. 1000 ml
Allowable amount of waste ink:
780 ml (excluding evaporated components)
Environmental requirements:
Condition Temperature Humidity Remarks

Operating 10ºC to 35ºC 20% to 80% ---
Storing –20ºC to 40ºC 20% to 85% ---
Transporting –20ºC to 60ºC 5% to 85% • Within 1 month for 40ºC

CHAPTER
2
OPERATING PRINCIPLES
2.1 Overview
This chapter explains the print mechanism and operating principles for the EPSON
Stylus Pro 7400/7450/7800/7880/7880C/9400/9450/9800/9880/9880C.
The explanation is composed as follows:
2.2 Print Mechanism Components (p.156)
2.2.1 Print Mechanism (Print Head) (p.157)
2.2.2 Carriage (CR) Mechanism (p.159)
2.2.3 Paper Feed Assembly (p.168)
2.2.4 Cleaning Mechanism (p.171)
2.2.5 Ink Supply Mechanism (p.173)
2.2.6 Others (p.174)
2.3 Outline of Main Board (p.175)
2.4 Outline of Power Supply Circuit Board (p.177)
Operating Principles Overview 155

2.2 Print Mechanism Components Table 2-1. Printer Mechanism Components

Drive Refer
Part Explanation
The major electrical parts used in the printer mechanism of this printer are as shown voltage to
below. Hereafter, we will explain each printer mechanism focusing on these parts. Ink Supply Mechanism (p.173)
Ink cartridge +5V, +3.3V CSIC ---
Table 2-1. Printer Mechanism Components
Maintenance Tank +5V, +3.3V CSIC p.172
Drive Refer
Part Explanation Others (p.174)
voltage to
Cover sensor
Print Mechanism (Print Head) (p.157) +3.3V Leaf switch p.174
(Front Cover open/close detection)
The number of nozzles: 180 MAIN board --- Printer control/drive circuit board p.175
Print head --- p.157
Nozzle x 8 colors
Radiator cooling fan +5V DC brushless fan ---
Head thermistor +3.3V Incorporated in the print head ---
Take-up motor +24V DC motor ---
Carriage (CR) Mechanism (p.159)
Power Supply Circuit Board --- --- p.177
CR motor +42V DC motor p.160
Transmission type photo-
CR HP sensor +3.3V p.160
interrupter
CR encoder sensor +5V Linear encoder (180LPI) p.160
Ink mark sensor
(Detection in a direction parallel to +3.3V/+5V Reflection type photo-interrupter p.160
the Carriage movement)
Transmission type photo-
PG HP sensor +3.3V p.162
interrupter
P EDGE sensor (Paper width
+3.3V/+5V Reflection type photo-interrupter p.163
detection)
Cutter Solenoid +24V DC solenoid p.167
Paper Feed Assembly (p.168)
PF motor +42V DC motor p.168
PF encoder sensor +5V Linear encoder (360LPI) ---
Paper suction fans +24V The number of DC blowers: 3 p.169
P Rear sensor
+3.3V/+5V Reflection type photo-interrupter p.170
(Paper presence detection)
P THICK 1/2 sensor Transmission type photo-
+3.3V p.170
(Paper thickness) interrupter
Release sensor (I/C lever detection) +3.3V Leaf switch ---
Cleaning Mechanism (p.171)
Pump motor +42V DC motor p.171
Ink pressure motor +42V Stepping motor ---
Regulator solenoid +24V DC solenoid ---
Operating Principles Print Mechanism Components 156

2.2.1 Print Mechanism (Print Head) Nozzle pitch: 0.141mm (1/180 inch) for each color
Stylus Pro 7400/7450/7800/7880/7880C/9400/9450/9800/9880/9880C employ a single Table 2-2. Relationship between Nozzle Rows and Colors
print head which incorporates both functions for black and color as the previous model; 8-Color Mode 4-Color Mode
Stylus Pro 7600/9600. Nozzle Row Stylus Pro 7880/ Stylus Pro 7400/7450/
The print head incorporates a thermistor. According to the temperature around the head Stylus Pro 7800/9800
7880C/9880/9880C 9400/9450
detected by the thermistor, the CPU on the Main Board controls the ink discharge
A Light gray Light gray Matte black
speed and the amount of ink to be discharged.
B Light magenta Vivid light magenta Matte black
Printing method: On-demand ink-jet
C Light cyan Light cyan Magenta
Nozzle configuration: D Gray Gray Magenta
180 nozzles x 8 rows = 1440 nozzles (See Figure 2-1)
E Photo black/Matte black Photo black/Matte black Cyan
Black: Stylus Pro 7800/7880/7880C/9800/9880/9880C
(8-color model): 540 nozzles F Cyan Cyan Cyan
(180 nozzles for each of Black1, Black2, and Black3) G Magenta Vivid Magenta Yellow
Stylus Pro 7400/7450/9400/9450 H Yellow Yellow Yellow
(4-color model): 360 nozzles
(180 nozzles for each of Black1 and Black2)
2.258mm 2.258mm 2.258mm 2.258mm
Color:

Stylus Pro 7800/7880/7880C/9800/9880/9880C 64/720inch 64/720inch 64/720inch 64/720inch
(8-color model): 900 nozzles 7.620mm 7.620mm 7.620mm
216/720inch 216/720inch 216/720inch
(180 nozzles for each of cyan, magenta (Vivid magenta), light
cyan, light magenta (Vivid light magenta) and yellow) B#180 F#180
D#180 H#180
Stylus Pro 7400/7450/9400/9450 A#180 C#180 E#180 G#180
B#179 D#179 F#179 H#179
(4-color model): 1080 nozzles A#179 C#179 E#179 G#179
B#178 D#178 F#178 H#178
(180 nozzles for each of cyan1, cyan2, magenta1, magenta2, A#178 C#178 E#178 G#178
yellow1, and yellow2)
D#3 F#3 H#3 0.041mm
A#3 B#3 G#3
0.071mm C#3 E#3 1/180inch
B#2 D#2 F#2 G#2 H#2
1/360inch A#2 C#2 E#2
B#1 D#1 F#1 H#1
A#1 C#1 E#1 G#1
31.89mm
41.66mm
Carriage Moving Direction
Figure 2-1. Nozzle Arrangement

Drive waveform:
The following table shows the outline of the waveforms of the six print modes.
Table 2-3. Printing Modes (Drive Waveforms)

Waveform Name Drive Frequency Print Resolution CR Speed
H360 x V360
VSD1 11.52 KHz ± 7% H360 x V720 320 CPS
H720 x V360
H360 x V360
VSD1d 11.52 KHz ± 7% H360 x V720 320 CPS
H720 x V360
H720 x V360
VSD2 8.64 KHz ± 7% 240 CPS
H720 x V720
H720 x V360
VSD2d 8.64 KHz ± 7% 240 CPS
H720 x V720
H720 x V720
VSD3 8.64 KHz ± 7% 240 CPS
H1440 x V720
VSD3_HR 8.64 KHz ± 7% H2880 x V1440 240 CPS

2.2.2 Carriage (CR) Mechanism Carriage
To ensure reliable and high-precision printing on wide-width paper (Stylus Pro 9400/
9450/9800/9880/9880C support B0 size, and Stylus Pro 7400/7450/7800/7880/7880C
P EDGE Sensor
support A1 size), the printer is equipped with a unique carriage mechanism which
enables stable and high-precision movement of the on-carriage head.
The carriage mechanism consists of the following components. Encoder Sensor and
Timing Fence
CR unit
CR motor
CR HP sensor
CR encoder sensor
PG HP sensor
P EDGE sensor
Ink mark sensor
Cutter Solenoid
PG HP Sensor
and Actuator
This section provides explanations on the following items.

Carriage Moving Unit
Platen Gap Adjustment Unit Ink Mark
CR HP Sensor
Cutter Solenoid/CR Lock Mechanism Sensor
and Flag
Figure 2-2. Carriage Mechanism

CARRIAGE MOVING UNIT Ink Mark Sensor

This is a diffuse reflectance photosensor which functions in the same way as the
The carriage is installed on the square pipe - CR shaft (guide rail) made of extruded multi sensor used on the previous models; Stylus Pro 4000/4400/4800. The sensor
aluminum via roller type bearings as the previous model; Stylus Pro 7600/9600. The located on the rear of the carriage unit performs emitting light and responding to
bearings contact/run on/across the CR shaft via steel rails incorporated on the CR shaft. the reflected light one at a time. Its white LED emits light against the paper or
This reduces the vibration and friction produced while moving the carriage and dedicated print pattern printed on paper and the photoreceiver (PTR1) of the
improves durability of the carriage mechanism. sensor reads the reflected light. According to the reflected light read by the sensor,
the printer performs corrective actions as necessary.
C A U T IO N Do not remove the carriage and the screws that secure the CR shaft Ink Mark Sensor Functions
(guide rails). These are adjusted and assembled to the nearest 1/100
• Auto Bi-D Adjustment
mm at the factory.
• Auto Uni-D Adjustment
• Missing dots detection (Auto Nozzle Check)
CR Motor
A DC motor moves the carriage across the CR shaft. The movement speed is
controlled by the control circuit on the main board. It receives carriage position
signals detected by the encoder sensor on the carriage and compares them with the
logical values to reflect the difference in the carriage control. The encoder sensor
sends the carriage position signals each time it detect the slits on the CR scale
(timing fence) which is attached parallel to the CR guide rail (Linear encoder
system). This feedback control ensures high printing accuracy.
To transmit the CR motor drive to the carriage, an easy-to-maintain, durable
timing belt is used.
The sensors used in the carriage moving unit are described below.
CR HP Sensor (Carriage Home Position)
This is a transmissive photosensor which is mounted on the right end of the printer
mechanism and detects the entry position of the flag (projection) provided on the
carriage as the carriage moving home position. Outputs from this sensor are
“OFF” in the HP range and “ON” outside the HP range.
CR Encoder Sensor (Linear Encoder)
This encoder is mounted on the back of the carriage and outputs pulses (2
channels) corresponding to the position of the slit on the CR scale (timing fence)
that is incorporated into the CR guide rail which are used for CR motor servo
control and PTS (Print Timing Signal) generation. The resolution is 1/180 inch.

PLATEN GAP ADJUSTMENT UNIT CR Guide Rail
In order to maintain the print precision, it is necessary to maintain the carriage (= head)
mounting position so that it is always a constant distance from the surface of the paper. Bearing (Roll Type)
Right Side of Carriage
In this printer, the print head nozzle surfaces and platen surface are variable
mechanisms so that the gap between the paper printing surface and the head nozzle
surface can be kept constant. Carriage
The carriage has a 2-body construction with a sub-carriage on which the print heads are
mounted attached to the carriage which forms the base. The sub-carriage moves in the Bearing (Roll Type)
vertical direction with respect to the paper surface. This movable system uses a cam (=
PG). When the sub-carriage is in the HP position (= right end), the pump motor and the
gear mounted on the cam shaft engage, the motor’s rotation (reverse) drives the cam
and the sub-carriage is positioned at the proper gap position.
In order to maintain the distance between the print head nozzle surface and the paper
properly, the thicknesses of the paper used are classified into 5 levels for PG setting,
namely, minimum PG (0.8 mm), small PG (1.2 mm), medium PG (1.6mm), large PG
(2.1 mm), and maximum PG (2.6 mm). Sub-carriage (Head Mounted)
The sensors used in the platen gap adjustment unit are explained below.
PG (Head SLID)
Slide Gear
PG HP Sensor
Right Side of Printer Mechanism
Actuator
Pump Motor Drive F

(CCW)
Figure 2-3. Carriage Mechanical Unit and PG Adjustment Unit

PG HP Sensor (Platen Gap HP Detection)

A shield is attached on the shaft of the PG slide gear (on the carriage) which works Start
with the pump motor. The sensor detects the edge of the shield to adjust height of
the print head. Sequence for moving to pseudo-vacuum position
It is shaped like a cam to realize five head positions relative to the mechanical
home position.
Yes
Sensor is OFF?
NOTE: Error number displayed when the total pulse count has exceeded 1000:
0001000C PG origin detection error (Service Call Error) No
Pump motor runs forward until PG_HP sensor turns
OFF
Table 2-4. Pulse Positions

No
Gap Pulse Count from Origin Sensor is OFF?
Position Application
Width (Converted to 2-2 Phase Excitation)
Yes
Maximum 2.6mm For thick paper 193
Large 2.1mm For paper which can be soiled 409 Pump motor runs forward until PG_HP sensor turns ON
if setting is for thin paper
Medium 1.6mm For particular thin paper 625 No
which can be easily scratched Sensor is ON?
Small 1.2mm For thin paper 841 Yes

Minimum 0.8mm For film type media 1057 Pump motor runs forward by 15 pulses
after PG_HP sensor turns ON
One round --- --- 1080
Pump motor runs forward until PG_HP sensor turns

OFF
No
Sensor is OFF?
Yes
Pump motor runs forward by 841 pulses
(to the “small PG” position)
Pump motor runs forward by 48 pulses

(to release the epicyclic gear)
End
Figure 2-4. Head Slide (PG Change) Initialization Sequence

P EDGE (Paper Width Detection) Sensor Carriage

This sensor, mounted at the left-bottom side of the carriage unit, detects paper
edges by moving the carriage.
It detects four points of paper edges, namely, left and right points on the front edge
and a front point on the left and right edges of the paper. Each position is
calculated from the difference in reflection value between the platen and the paper.
A reflective type photosensor is used. Each paper edge position (presence or
absence of paper) is determined by an A/D converted value of the output from the Left edge Right edge
photosensor.
During printing, the sensor monitors the left and right edges of the paper to detect
a skew. HP Side
Detecting distance up to the paper surface: P_EDGE sensor

=3mm to 10mm (Sensor Peak: 7 mm) Scanning to the opposite Scanning to the HP side
side from the HP side from the opposite side
C H E C K It must be ensured that the reflection value of the least

P O IN T reflective paper is greater than the reflection value of the Figure 2-5. Carriage Unit Paper Width Detection Sensor
platen.
The paper must be free from floating at the detection point.
If external light, such as sunlight, can enter the sensor due to
the construction, mis-detection must be prevented by LED ON/
OFF control. (Same as with Stylus Pro 7000)
In this printer, the P EDGE Sensor works also to detect the
paper front edge. (Same as the Stylus Pro 7600/9600)
NOTE: It is possible to turn this sensor ON/OFF by using PAPER SIZE CHECK
menu in 1.4.4 Panel Setting (p.48).
The following pages show paper size detection sequence (left and right edges and front
edge).

Paper size detection sequence (left and right edges) Note "*1":Printing area MAX position
Left and right edge detection start · Stylus Pro 9400/9800
Error display: 1,257.91mm + 7.0mm (Reserved width)
Set the paper correctly · Stylus Pro 7400/7800
Edge sensor LED lights up 759.91mm + 7.0mm (Reserved width)
Transition to this sequence is allowed only at paper initial. "*2":Printing area MIN position
C H E C K 137.31mm - 7.0mm (Reserved width)
P O IN T At inter-page skew checking, transition to Simplified detection Edge sensor sensitivity control "*3":A countermeasure for mis-detection of the
sequence for left and right edges (skew check) (p.166) takes place. edge sensor. The sensor may detect a tab
While monitoring the edge sensor, the CR on the platen as paper in spite of paper
Solid Line: Paper moves away from its home position toward absence. To ensure the paper detection,
Broken Line: Printable Area the printer judges that no paper is set if the
the max. printable position (320CPS)*1.
paper width is narrower than 182 mm (B5
size) - 3 mm.
No
Paper is detected?
Right edge Left edge
detection position detection position Yes
The CR moves toward its home by 2 mm (240CPS) from the position where the sensor
output has changed.
While monitoring the edge sensor output, the CR moves outward at 5 cps. The position
where paper absence is detected is judged to be the right edge position of the paper.
The CR moves toward its home by 2 mm (320CPS) from the position where was
detected as the paper edge.
While monitoring the edge sensor, the CR moves toward its home position (toward the
min. printable position) (320CPS)*2.
No
Paper is detected?
Yes
The CR moves toward the opposite direction of its home by 2 mm
(240CPS) from the position where the sensor output has changed.
While monitoring the edge sensor output, the CR moves toward the
home at 5 cps. The position where paper absence is detected is judged
to be the left edge position of the paper.
No
Paper width is 179 mm
(182 - 3)? *3
Edge sensor LED turns OFF.
Yes
Return Error
Figure 2-6. Paper Size Detection Sequence (left and right edges)

Paper size detection sequence (front edge) Front edge detection start Note "*1":Paper left upper detection
position = Paper left edge
Conditions: position + 27.5 mm
The CR moves onto Fl_Box. (320CPS)
For execution of this processing, the paper level threshold value must be "*2":PF maximum travel =
known. (Execute this processing after detection of the right and left edges.) The CR moves to the paper left upper detection position*1 - 260mm (Self-diagnostics
mode: - 340mm)
Error display: While monitoring the edge sensor output, the PF moves in
No change in sensor output
Set the paper correctly even when this travel has
the negative direction (picks up paper) (40CPS)
been exceeded is handled as
The PF stops if paper absence is detected*2
When the paper width detection function is turned off, use the paper size front an error.
position as the user paper setting position. (On the assumption that detection "*3":PF moving target position =
Paper is detected? No The 1st nozzle position
is not made by the edge sensors) (0.00 mm)
Yes
No change in sensor output
While monitoring the edge sensor output, the PF moves in the even when this position has
positive direction (feeds the paper forward) (5CPS) been passed is handled as
The position where paper presence is detected is judged to be an error.
the left front edge position of the paper* 2
"*4":Paper right upper detection
position = Paper right edge
The CR moves to the paper right upper detection position (320CPS)*4 position - 27.5mm
"*5":In the figure below, the left
No upper leading edge is
Paper absence is detected by edge sensor? handled as the paper size
front position. (On the
Yes
assumption that the paper
While monitoring the edge sensor output, the PF moves in front edge is not correctly
the positive direction (feeds the paper forward) (5CPS). perpendicular to the paper
PF stops if paper presence is detected. feed direction)
(Prevention of skew at leading edge)* 4
No Solid Line: Paper

Paper absence detected
Broken Line: Printable Area
Yes
While monitoring the edge sensor output, the PF moves
in the negative direction (picks up paper) (40CPS)
The PF stops if paper absence is detected*2
No
Paper is detected?
Yes
While monitoring the edge sensor output, the PF moves in the
positive direction (feeds the paper forward) (5CPS).
Left Upper
The position where paper absence is detected is
Leading Edge
judged to be the right front edge position of the paper*3 Right Upper detection
Leading Edge position
The upper right leading edge of paper is determined as the detection
front position of the paper size*5 position
Edge sensor LED turns OFF. Edge sensor LED turns OFF.
Return Error
Figure 2-7. Paper Size Detection Sequence (Front Edge)

Simplified detection sequence for left and right edges (skew check) Left and right edge detection start
When the paper width detection function is turned off, left and right edge No
Edge sensor LED lights up Paper is detected?
detection (skew check) is not carried out.
Yes
Error display: Edge sensor sensitivity control The CR moves toward the opposite direction of
1: Set the paper correctly its home by 2 mm (240CPS) from the position
2: PAPER NOT STRAIGHT Periodic flushing on the F1_Box where the sensor output has changed.
C H E C K Transition to this sequence is allowed only at inter-page skew Printing area MIN position While monitoring the edge sensor output, the
CR moves to the target position by 5CPS
P O IN T checking (at cut/eject, etc.) At paper initial, the printer moves to left The CR moves to the min. printable
The position where paper absence is detected is
and right edges detection sequence. position; + B5 size - 3 mm = 309.31mm
(320CPS)*1 judged to be the left edge position of the paper
Solid Line: Paper While monitoring the edge sensor Yes

Left edge position is
Broken Line: Printable Area output, the CR moves toward its home smaller than “the min. position -
to go to the target position (320CPS) set margin”?
Right edge Left edge No
detection position detection position
Bigger than the left Yes
edge position detected by paper
presence? *2
No
Previously determined paper width X mm No Skew error detection is
enabled?
The paper width determined by the previously executed Yes

left and right edge detection (at paper initial or skew
check) is added to the left edge position. The resultant
Edge sensor LED turns
position is regarded as the paper right edge position.
OFF.
Paper right edge Yes Error 1

position deflected by 3 mm from previously
determined position?
No
Paper left edge Yes
position deflected by 3 mm from previously
determined position?
No Edge sensor LED turns OFF.
Edge sensor LED turns OFF.
Error 2
Return
Note "*1":Min. printable position = 137.31mm - 7.0mm (Reserved width)
B5 size (182.0mm) - 3.0mm = 179.0mm
"*2":Paper presence position
Paper right edge position + 20 mm = 157.31 mm
Figure 2-8. Simplified Detection Sequence for Left and Right Edges (Skew Check)

Cutter Solenoid
Cutter Solenoid Carriage
This DC solenoid controls the cutting pressure of the roll paper cutter. It also
unlocks the carriage. Roll Paper
The function can be set to On or Off using the Panel buttons.
NOTE: See 1.2.5.3 Cut Specifications (p.23).
Cutter
Figure 2-9. Carriage Unit Cutter Solenoid

2.2.3 Paper Feed Assembly PF motor

The PF motor is a DC motor. The slit of the loop scale mounted on the Grid Roller
This printer uses friction feed to carry out highly precise feeding of roll paper and cut is read by the PF_ENC sensor and the output pulse is fed back to control the
sheets, and comprises a unique paper feed mechanism. motor. This feedback control ensures high printing accuracy.
The paper feed mechanism unit is configured from a grid roller (one piece The PF motor drive is transmitted to the grid roller via the PF timing belt and the
construction), and pressurizing and follower roller assemblies mounted on the back of reduction pulley.
the CR guide rail opposite the front surface.
Secondary Roller Assembly CR Guide Rail
Secondary Roller Assembly Grid Roller
Grid Roller
PF Motor
R = P THICK1 Sensor
L = P THICK2 Sensor
Center Frame
Platen
Reduction Sub Platen

Pulley
PF Motor Paper
Paper Guide L1, L2

Paper Set Lever
Figure 2-10. Paper Feed Assembly Figure 2-11. Paper Feed Mechanical Unit PF Rail Unit

Paper Suction Fans

Stylus Pro 7400/7450/7800/7880/7880C
The printer is equipped with suction fans in the front lower space. The space
behind the Paper Guide L is divided into 3 compartments (Stylus Pro 7400/7450/
7800/7880/7880C are divided into 2), and one fan is mounted in each
compartment. Paper on the Paper Guide L1 and L2 is firmly attracted to the guides
by air flow created by the fans. They work to draw air through holes on the sub-
platen in the backside of the paper path. This ensures stable paper feeding. The
firmware controls the fan speed (fan rotation duty control) according to the paper
type and printer’s operating statuses such as setting the paper or during printing.
NOTE: The number of the fans Stylus Pro 7400/7450/7800/7880/7880C: 2 fans

Stylus Pro 9400/9450/9800/9880/9880C: 3 fans Paper Suction Fans
Stylus Pro 9400/9450/9800/9880/9880C
Paper Suction Fans
Figure 2-12. Paper Feed Assembly (Paper Suction Fans)

The sensors used in the paper feeding mechanism are explained below.
P REAR sensor
This is a photo-reflective sensor located on the backside of the H Top Cover. It
detects paper absence by detecting the rear edge of the paper, and detects the
leading edge of paper when the paper is loaded to let the printer start the paper
setting operation such as attracting the paper to the paper guides.
Paper set lever, paper thickness detection (P THICK1, P THICK2)
P THICK1 Sensor: A transmissive photosensor located on the right side.
P THICK2 Sensor: A transmissive photosensor located on the left side.
In the paper feeding mechanism, there is a point where paper thickness threshold is
set to 0.3 to 0.4 mm (P THICK2 sensor) and a point where that is set to 0.6 to 0.7
mm (P THICK1 sensor). When the Paper Set Lever is set on those points, the two P Rear Sensor
sensors start to operate.
The paper thickness detection range for moving the Paper Set Lever is 0.34 to 2.05
mm (design value). By a combination of the two sensors, the printer can determine Figure 2-13. Paper Feed Assembly (P Rear Sensor)
to reduce the pressure of the Paper Set Lever according to the paper thickness.
“Thick paper state” occurs when the connections are open.
There is no error processing since this mechanism can not determine whether it
has broke down or not.
Since the mechanism is always in recognition of thick paper, printing on thin paper
is carry out with the platen gap kept large.
Table 2-5. Modes

Shield Plate Sensor Output
Paper Thickness
P THICK2 P THICK1 P THICK2 P THICK1
Below 0.3 mm Absent (Open) Absent (Open) L L
0.4mm to 0.6mm Present (Closed) Absent (Open) H L
0.7mm to 2.0mm Present (Closed) Present (Closed) H H
Pressure release (Hi-Up) Absent (Open) Present (Closed) L H
Connector not connected --- --- H H

2.2.4 Cleaning Mechanism Table 2-6. Pump Drive Modes

Major differences in the cleaning mechanism between the previous Stylus Pro 7600/ Suction Speed Pump Wheel Suction Motor Frequency
(Drive Mode) Revolving Speed Amount (2-2 phase conversion)
9600 and the Stylus Pro 7400/7450/7800/7880/7880C/9400/9450/9800/9880/9880C
are pressure pump and the number of flushing boxes and maintenance tanks. The Low speed (IS4) 0.55 rev/sec 0.3g/sec 182 Hz
pressure pump is newly employed for the Stylus Pro 7400/7450/7800/7880/7880C/ Standard (IS3) 1.92 rev/sec 1.1g/sec 634 Hz
9400/9450/9800/9880/9880C, and Stylus Pro 9400/9450/9800/9880/9880C are High speed (IS2) 3.12 rev/sec 1.3g/sec 1030 Hz
equipped with two flushing boxes and two maintenance tanks (each box and tank are
Super-high speed (IS1) 5.04 rev/sec 1.3g/sec 1664 Hz
installed on both left and right of the printer). The waste ink from the cleaning
mechanism is transported to the waste ink pad (Maintenance Tanks) through the tubes.
Note : The Motor Frequency values above, given only for information, are values when a 4-
The main components in the cleaning mechanism are explained below. phase, 48-pole stepping motor is driven in 2-2 phase. The same for the motor drive
Pressure Pump stepping count.
A case and film are welded at the Ink Pack side in the Ink Cartridge Case. By
blowing air into the section via the pump tube connected to each of the left and Pump assembly
Maintenance Tank
right Ink Cartridges, press the Ink Pack so that the ink inside the pack is supplied Flushing Boxes Pump Motor
to the print head mechanism.
Pump assembly (head cleaner)
When the head is in the capped position (valve closed), the pump motor creates a
vacuum that sucks ink from the nozzles. This is used for removing ink from the
nozzles and nozzle plate, initial ink charge, as well as cleaning. The waste ink is
transported to the waste ink pads through the tube.
Head cleaner
The head cleaner of the Stylus Pro 7800/7880/7880C/9800/9880/9880C employs a
Head
rubber only cleaner not like the rubber-and-felt combined cleaner used for the Cleaner
Stylus Pro 7600/9600. It wipes or rubs off ink and foreign materials from the
nozzle surface.
Pump motor (stepping motor)
The function of the pump motor differs according to its rotating direction as
follows:
Clockwise rotation: Releases the pump and resets the wiper
Drives the HD_SLIDE (head gap adjustment)
cam.
See “Platen Gap Adjustment Unit” (p.161).
Counter clockwise rotation: Drives the pump assembly (pump suction, wiper
reset)
Maintenance Tank
Figure 2-14. Cleaning Mechanism Components

Table 2-7. Explanation of Operation

Operation Explanation
Carriage (CR) Lock • This is the carriage stop position when the power is Off.
• The time when the carriage is in the standby position (home position)
with the power ON and with no paper loaded and no print data to
print.
Ink Initial Filling • This is the operation where the head is filled with ink for the first
time.
When the first ink cartridge is inserted (after all 4 cartridges (Stylus
Pro 7400/7450/9400/9450) or all 8 sets of two cartridges (Stylus Pro
7800/7880/7880C/9800/9880/9880C) have been inserted), the ink
initial filling operation is performed automatically (some operation
should be performed manually).
Cap Assembly
• The initial filling flag is set when the printer is shipped from the
CR Lock factory, then after this operation, the initial filling flag is reset. The
initial filling flag is also set after executing “Head Rank Input”.
Figure 2-15. Cleaning Mechanism Components
Flushing • In order to prevent the viscosity of the ink inside the head nozzles
Cap assembly from increasing, the ink inside the flushing box is flushed out.
When not printing, the print head (should) rest on the cap assembly to ensure that • Flushing is done when paper is set, when printing from the standby
the nozzles don't clog. Also, the print head is in the capped position during ink state, during continuous printing, during paper Eject, during paper
charging, cleaning, and so on. cutting, etc.
Flushing box Empty Suction • After ink is sucked up, the remaining ink inside the cap is sucked up
Flushing (dummy printing) is performed over the flushing box, and the flushed ink Operation and the ink adhering to the head nozzle surface is removed.
flows through the tube to the waste ink pads. • Through flushing, etc., the ink that has accumulated in the cap is
sucked up and discharged.
CR Lock Mechanism
Wiping Operation The carriage is moved from right to left along the rubber side of the
If the carriage moves from the printable area to beyond the capping (CR_HOME)
wiper (the right half of the wiper plate) incorporated in the pump unit so
position to the right, the carriage moving prevention lock is engaged.
that the head surface is rubbed with the rubber of the wiper.
The CR lock mechanism uses the cutter solenoid in common. When the cutter Purpose:
solenoid goes ON in the capping position, the CR lock is released. • After ink suction, removes the ink and other substances adhering to
Maintenance Tank (Waste ink absorber) the head surface.
• Ensures close contact of the cap.
NOTE: The Ink System Terms used in the above text are explained in the Capping In order to prevent the ink viscosity from increasing while it is being
following table. kept, a rubber cap is placed over the print head nozzles when entering a
shutdown operation.

2.2.5 Ink Supply Mechanism Pressure Pump

The Stylus Pro 7800/9800 have two Ink Holders (I/H) on left and right side of them
and each I/H carries 8 cartridges for 8 colors. A projection and unique marking are Ink Cartridge Ink Tube (x 8)
placed on each color ink cartridge case to prevent wrong insertion so that the correct Holder (x 4) To Each Color Head Damper
Print Head
cartridge is inserted in the right direction.
Explanation of valve mechanism mounted on the cartridge
The valve opens and closes when the ink cartridge lever is manually moved up or
down.
To print head
Ink cartridge
Damper (x8)
Ink Holder
(manual opening/
closing)
From the
Pressure Pump
Ink Cartridge (x 8) Ink Cartridge

Air Supply Vent Holder (x 4)
Figure 2-16. Valve Mechanism Figure 2-17. Ink Supply Mechanism
The ink flow is as shown below.
Each color’s ink cartridge → Each color's I/H (Ink Holder) → Each color’s ink tube →
Each color’s head dumper (carriage) → Print Head. The information in the NVRAM of
each color ink cartridge is sent through the CSIC Relay Board in each ink holder and
stored in memory on the CSIC Board.
The CSIC Board stores various pieces of information, such as ink colors and remaining
amount of ink. See “Ink Info Menu” (p.110).

2.2.6 Others Panel Unit
COVER SENSOR
In order to detect whether the front cover on the lower front of this printer is open or
closed, a cover sensor is mounted on the printer on the left side where the front cover
opens and closes.
This sensor carries out control of operating and stopping of the CR motor and PF motor
drive circuits via the MAIN board’s logic circuit after detecting the cover’s status. This
control is the same when the paper support level is in the release state.
Cover Sensor
Front Cover
CIRCUIT BOARD PLACEMENT
The panel unit is located on the right front of the printer and the AC inlet, power supply Figure 2-18. Cover Sensor Panel Unit
circuit board and the MAIN circuit board are mounted in the compartment on the
printer’s rear side.
MAIN Circuit Board Power Supply Circuit Board
AC Inlet
Figure 2-19. Circuit Board Layout

2.3 Outline of Main Board

CPU
SH-3
This section describes the operation of BOARD ASSY.,MAIN, which controls and HD6417709S
drives the printer mechanism of the printer. (IC14)
C594 MAIN Board : Stylus Pro 7400/7800/9400/9800 CN15

C699 MAIN Board : Stylus Pro 7450/7880/7880C/9450/9880/9880C SDRAM Press Motor
(IC2) A6628 (IC6)
CN16
NOTE: For details of each circuit, refer to Chapter 7. SDRAM
Pump Motor
(IC9)
Explanation of major elements SDRAM
Custom
L6203 (IC11) CN14
ASIC
(IC7) E05C25BB PF Motor
Table 2-8. Major Elements (IC21)
SDRAM A3958 (IC14) CN13
Name/Code Location Function (IC10)
CR Motor
SH-3 IC14 32 bit RISC-CPU Flash Memory Custom
HD6417709S • Drive clock frequency = 144 MHz (IC3) ASIC CR_FFC
E09A54RA
E05C25BB IC21 Custom ASIC (IC17,18) HEAD
1. Print data processing
• Rasterizer
CN6
• Head drive control
USB I/F 2.0
2. Mechanism control (motors and solenoids)
3. Sensor control CN5
4. USB2.0 I/F Type B I/F
E09A54RA IC17, 18 Custom ASIC
• Head drive voltage waveform generation IEEE1394 Controler
control TSB43AA82APGE (IC16) CN7
IEEE 1394 I/F
Flash Memory IC3 Flash Memory (16Mbit)
• For storage of control program (firmware) Figure 2-20. C594 MAIN Board Circuit Block Diagram
• Saving of various setting parameters and
control information
SD-RAM IC2/9 System memory*
IC7/10 256mbit x 16
L6203 IC11 PF Motor Drivers IC
• PWM constant current drive control
A3958 IC4 CR Motor Drivers IC
• PWM constant current drive control
A6628 IC6 Pump Motor/Pressure Motor Drivers IC
Note "*": Stylus Pro 7400/7450/7800/7880/7880C: IC2/9 only (64MByte)

Stylus Pro 9400/9450/9800/9880/9880C: IC2/9 and IC7/10 (128MByte)
Operating Principles Outline of Main Board 175

CPU
SH-3
HD6417709S
(IC14)
CN15
SDRAM Press Motor
(IC2) A6628 (IC6)
CN16
SDRAM
Pump Motor
(IC9)
Custom
SDRAM L6203 (IC11) CN14
ASIC
(IC7) E05C25BB PF Motor
(IC21)
SDRAM A3958 (IC14) CN13
(IC10)
CR Motor
Flash Memory Custom
(IC3) ASIC CR_FFC
E09A54RA
(IC17,18) HEAD
CN6
USB I/F 2.0
CN32
Network I/F
Figure 2-21. C699 MAIN Board Circuit Block Diagram
Operating Principles Outline of Main Board 176

2.4 Outline of Power Supply Circuit Board There are three control signals between the BOARD ASSY.,MAIN and the Power
Supply Circuit Board as shown in the table below.
The 100 V AC power from the wall outlet is supplied via the power cable, an accessory Table 2-10. Explanation of Operation
of Stylus Pro 7600/9600, into the Inlet of the printer and to the Power Supply Circuit
Board. Signal Name Function
The power switch constitutes a secondary power switch system. The secondary power REM_ON Operating Turned ON/OFF by BOARD ASSY.,MAIN.
switch system operates as follows: even with the power switch turned off, the Power (MAIN→ • When these terminals are shorted, the drive system
Supply Circuit Board is operating by a slight power as long as the power cable is Power Supply) power supplies 24 VDC and 42 VDC become inactive.
connected. Off • When these terminals are open (= H), the drive system
power supplies 24 VDC and 42 VDC become 0 VDC.
C A U T IO N Even after the power switch is turned off, the Power Supply Circuit • The 5 VDC power is not controlled with these
Board does not stop operating immediately, but power is kept on terminals.
until the ink system ending sequence is complete. AC_OFF Operating When each output from the Power Supply Circuit Board
Do not disconnect the power cable or do not shut off power by (MAIN← (= H) has become inactive because of turning off of the power
turning off any power switch other than that on the printer. Power Supply) switch or when the input voltage has dropped below the
rated voltage value, “H” signal is sent to the BOARD
ASSY.,MAIN.
The Power Supply Circuit Board is equipped with a fuse for overcurrent protection.
Off The power switch is turned on and the Power Supply
The rating of the fuse is: (= L) Circuit Board Unit starts operating so that each output
becomes active.
Table 2-9. Fuse Rating
“L” signal is sent to the BOARD ASSY.,MAIN.
Fuse Rating
POW_ON/OFF Operating Connected to the power switch on the Panel Unit.
250 VAC/6.3 A (Panel /MAIN→ • These terminals are shorted when the switch is ON.
Power Supply) The Power Supply Circuit Board becomes active.
Not operating • These terminals are open when the switch is OFF. The
Power Supply Unit keeps operating for several seconds
and then turns off.
Operating Principles Outline of Power Supply Circuit Board 177

2.5 Colorimetric Calibration (Color ID) Overview Main Unit

This printer employs “Colorimetric Calibration (Color ID)” to correct unit-to-unit
variations in color.
“Colorimetric Calibration (Color ID)” corrects not only the weight of ink droplets Printhead Main Board Supply Board
which differs according to the characteristic of individual printhead but variable factors
such as drive circuit and voltage, which provides a higher-accuracy calibration.
OVERVIEW
Characteristic of Variation of elements in Variation of
1. Printing/ Measuring the color of a correction pattern. individual printhead the drive control circuit reference
The calibration is performed by printing a correction pattern with a completed product for printhead voltage for
and measuring the color of the pattern using a calibrator. individual
printhead
2. Writing the correction value.
Write the correction value that was calculated from the value obtained by color Colorimetric Calibration
measurement to the NVRAM on the main board. Drive Control (Color ID)
Circuit for
3. Reflecting the correction value. Printhead
The printer driver reads the correction value stored in the NVRAM during printing,
and correct the dot generation amount for each dot size in the print data.
Correction of dot generation amount
Correction of weight of
ink droplets
Printing
Result
Figure 2-22. Colorimetric Calibration (Color ID) Image
Operating Principles Colorimetric Calibration (Color ID) Overview 178

CHAPTER
3
TROUBLESHOOTING
3.1 Overview W A R N IN G When handling the lithium battery used for backup of the RTC on
the Main Board, strictly follow the safety instructions given in
This section explains the basic procedure for troubleshooting problems on the printer “4.1.1 Precautions” (p.217).
quickly and efficiently.
3.1.1 Preliminary Check

Make sure to verify or perform the following basic items whenever servicing the C A U T IO N Before disassembling/reassembling the printer, be sure to turn
printer. the power switch OFF, confirm the panel display disappears
and unplug the power code.
1. There is no foreign material which interferes with the proper operation of the Always use the recommended tools for disassembling/
printer. reassembling, adjusting or servicing the printer.
2. Print out the status sheet following the procedure below. Always use the specified lubricant and adhesive.
1. Check that the printer is in “Ready” status, and press the [Menu ] button Be sure to perform the required adjustments.
and select TEST PRINT by pressing the [Paper Feed ] button.
2. Press the [Menu ] button again and press the [Paper Feed ] button to
select STATUS SHEET. 3.1.2 Troubleshooting Procedure
3. With the STATUS SHEET highlighted, press the [Menu ] button and Follow the flowchart given below to troubleshoot problems efficiently.
[Enter ] button to print the status sheet.
Check the information printed on the status sheet to find out possible causes of the Occurrence of Troubles
error; if the main units have reached their end of life, or if there is something
wrong with the user-defined panel settings. If it is the panel setting error, see Step
9.
3. Both outside and inside of the printer are free of significant dirt. Clean it if “Troubleshooting based on Panel Messages” “Troubleshooting based on Printed Result”
significant dirt is observed. (p.181) (p.212)
4. None of the parts or components of the printer are missing, chipped or damaged.
5. All of the harnesses are free of damages and properly connected to their
connectors correctly.
“Remedies for Warning “Remedies for Error “Remedies for Service Call
6. The cams and gears in the printer mechanism are engaged correctly showing no Messages” (p.187) Messages” (p.190) Errors” (p.197)
signs of wear.
7. When smudges appear on printed pages, clean the rubber rollers in the printer
mechanism if it solves the problem.
8. The rubber rollers in the printer mechanism are engaged correctly showing no
signs of wear.
9. Initialize the NVRAM on the BOARD ASSY.,MAIN (reset the user-defined panel
settings to their factory default) if necessary.
Execute the DEFAULT PANEL in the Maintenance mode.
Troubleshooting Overview 180

3.2 Troubleshooting based on Panel Messages

The printer runs diagnostic checks on itself according to various conditions detected by sensors. If an error condition is detected as a result of the self-diagnosis, the printer displays
the corresponding error message on its LCD panel.
This section explains the error messages and provides remedies for them.
3.2.1 List of Panel Messages

The panel messages displayed by the printer are listed in the table below in the order of ascending priorities.
NOTE: Messages in blue-colored rows are Warning messages, and those in yellow-colored rows are Service Call error messages.
Table 3-1. List of Panel Messages

LED Indication
Panel Message Printer Condition Reference Pages
Power Pause Ink Check Paper Check
MAINTENANCE TANK The Maintenance Tank is in near full state. --- --- Flashing --- p.187
NEARLY FULL
INK LOW The remaining amount of ink is low. *1 --- --- Flashing --- p.187
PAPER OUT The printer run out out of paper. ON ON --- ON p.190
LOAD PAPER
MAINTENANCE REQUEST A maintenance is required. --- --- --- Flashing*2 p.187
XXXX
PAPER LOW The remaining amount of loaded paper is low. --- --- --- Flashing p.189
CLEANING ERROR The printer cannot run a cleaning. ON ON --- ON p.190
REMOVE THICK PAPER
CLEANING ERROR The printer failed to run a cleaning. ON ON --- Flashing p.190
PRESS PAUSE BUTTON
SENSOR ERROR The Ink-mark sensor caused a SN gain error (paper type ON ON --- Flashing p.190
LOAD DIFFERENT PAPER identification error).
PAPER EJECT ERROR The printer failed to eject paper. ON ON --- Flashing p.190
REMOVE PAPER FROM
PRINTER
PAPER OUT The printer run out of roll paper. ON ON --- ON p.190
LOAD PAPER
BORDERLESS ERROR The printer cannot perform borderless printing (no margin on all ON ON --- Flashing p.191
LOAD CORRECT SIZE sides) with the loaded paper because of the paper size.
PAPER
Continued to the next page
Troubleshooting Troubleshooting based on Panel Messages 181

Table 3-1. List of Panel Messages (continued)

LED Indication
PAPER ERROR The paper is not loaded correctly. ON ON --- Flashing p.191
LOAD PAPER PROPERLY
PAPER SKEW The paper is loaded at an angle/Cut sheet loading error ON ON --- Flashing p.192
LOAD PAPER PROPERLY
PAPER CUT ERROR The printer failed to cut the paper. *3 ON ON --- Flashing p.192
REMOVE UNCUT PAPER
COMMAND ERROR The printer failed to receive a print data. Flashing ON Flashing Flashing p.192
CHECK DRIVER SETTINGS
MISMATCH ERROR An ink cartridge error Flashing ON Flashing Flashing p.192
MAKE SURE THAT THE INK
CARTRIDGE AND DRIVER
SETTINGS MATCH
PAPER SETTING ERROR The roll paper is not set correctly. ON ON --- ON p.193
LOAD ROLL PAPER
PAPER SETTING ERROR The cut sheet paper is not set correctly. ON ON --- ON p.193
LOAD CUT SHEET PAPER
CONVERSION CRTG LIFE The conversion cartridge reached near end of its life. Flashing ON ON OFF p.189
CONVERSION CRTG NEAR
END OF SERVICE LIFE
CONVERSION CRTG LIFE The conversion cartridge reached the end of its life. Flashing ON ON OFF p.193
REPLACE CONVERSION
CRTG WITH A NEW ONE
INK OUT The ink cartridge is empty. *4 ON ON ON OFF p.193
INK CARTRIDGE ERROR The black cartridge is wrong (Photo Black or Matte Black). ON ON ON OFF p.193
CHECK CARTRIDGE The product code of the ink cartridge is wrong. ON ON ON OFF p.193
INK CARTRIDGE ERROR Wrong destination ON ON ON OFF p.194
INSTALL CORRECT An ink cartridges that cannot be used with the printer is installed. ON ON ON OFF p.194
CARTRIDGE
INK CARTRIDGE ERROR The logo of the ink cartridge is wrong. ON ON ON --- p.194
CHECK CARTRIDGE
INK CARTRIDGE ERROR Cartridge failure or CSIC error ON ON ON OFF p.194
REPLACE CARTRIDGE


LED Indication
NO CARTRIDGE No ink cartridge is installed. ON ON ON --- p.194
MAINTENANCE TANK FULL The Maintenance Tank on the left side of the printer is full. ON ON ON --- p.194
REPLACE THE (Stylus Pro 9400/9450/9800/9880/9880C)
LEFT SIDE
MAINTENANCE
TANK
MAINTENANCE TANK FULL The Maintenance Tank on the right side of the printer is full. ON ON ON --- p.194
RIGHT SIDE
MAINTENANCE
TANK
MAINTENANCE TANK FULL The Maintenance Tank is full. ON ON ON --- p.194
MAINTENANCE
TANK
MAINTENANCE TANK NEAR FULL The Maintenance Tank on the left side of the printer is near full. ON ON Flashing --- p.194
LEFT SIDE
MAINTENANCE
TANK
MAINTENANCE TANK NEAR FULL The Maintenance Tank on the right side of the printer is near full. ON ON Flashing --- p.194
RIGHT SIDE
MAINTENANCE
TANK
MAINTENANCE TANK NEAR FULL The Maintenance Tank is near full. ON ON Flashing --- p.194
MAINTENANCE
TANK


LED Indication
INK LEVER The left ink lever is released.*4 ON ON ON --- p.194
LOWER THE
LEFT INK
LEVER
INK LEVER The right ink lever is released.*4 ON ON ON --- p.194

LOWER THE
RIGHT INK
LEVER
COVER OPEN The front cover is open. ON ON --- --- p.195

CLOSE COVER
LEVER RELEASED The paper set lever is released. ON ON --- ON p.195
LOAD PAPER
LEVER RELEASED The paper set lever is released during printing. ON ON --- ON p.195
LOWER THE
PAPER SET
LEVER
PAPER JAM A paper jam occurred. ON ON OFF Flashing p.196

REMOVE PAPER
INK CARTRIDGE The ink lever is released and no cartridge is installed yet. ON ON ON OFF p.196
INSTALL INK
CARTRIDGE
NO MAINTENANCE TANK The Maintenance Tank is not installed on the left side of the printer. ON ON ON --- p.196
INSTALL THE (Stylus Pro 9400/9450/9800/9880/9880C)
LEFT SIDE
MAINTENANCE
TANK
NO MAINTENANCE TANK The Maintenance Tank is not installed on the right side of the ON ON ON --- p.196
INSTALL THE printer.
RIGHT SIDE (Stylus Pro 9400/9450/9800/9880/9880C)
MAINTENANCE
TANK


LED Indication
NO MAINTENANCE TANK The Maintenance Tank is not installed on the printer. ON ON ON --- p.196
INSTALL THE (Stylus Pro 7400/7450/7800/7880/7880C)
MAINTENANCE
TANK
F/W INSTALL ERROR The printer failed to update the firmware. Flashing Flashing Flashing Flashing p.196
UPDATE FAILED
RESTART THE PRINTER
I/F CARD ERROR A type B optional interface error Flashing Flashing Flashing Flashing p.196
CHECK CARD TYPE
PRINTER ERROR Rebooting the printer is required. Flashing Flashing Flashing Flashing p.196
RESTART THE PRINTER
CARRIAGE LOCKED The Carriage is locked. Flashing Flashing Flashing Flashing p.196
RELEASE THE CARRIAGE
LOCK
Service Call Service Call Flashing Flashing Flashing Flashing See Table 3-2.
NNNNNNNNN
Note "*1": If INK LOW and INK OUT errors occur at the same time, the corresponding indicators flashes for “LOW” state, and turns ON for “OUT” state.
"*2": Lights for 100 ms at an interval of five seconds.
"*3": When this error occurs for the first time after replacing the cutter, the printer runs the cutter replacement sequence. See “1.4.4.33 Cutter Replacement” (p.98) for details about the sequence.
"*4": While releasing the ink lever for replacing ink cartridges, the INK OUT and INK LEVER messages are displayed alternately at intervals of three seconds.

Table 3-2. List of Service Call Errors Table 3-2. List of Service Call Errors
Error Code Description Reference Pages Error Code Description Reference Pages
00000101 The CR Motor reached its end of life. p.197 00010040 Printing position error p.208
00010000 PF Encoder check error p.198 00020000 NVRAM error p.208
00010001 The PF Motor is out of step. p.199 00020002 SDRAM error p.208
00010002 Overcurrent occurred on the PF Motor. p.199 00020003 Boot program sum error p.209
00010003 The PF Motor out of position time-out error p.200 0002000A Program load error p.209
00010004 CR Encoder check error p.200 0002000B The internal memory is insufficient. p.209
00010005 CR Motor is out of step. p.201 0Dxxxxxx An error code for debugging p.209
00010007 The CR Motor out of position time-out error p.201 0Exxxxxx A time-lag of the RTC timer p.210
00010008 Servo interrupt watchdog time-out error p.202 100000E0 CPU address error (load) p.210
00010009 System interrupt watchdog time-out error p.202 10000100 CPU address error (store) p.210
0001000A Carriage home position detection error p.202 10000180 CPU reserved command code exception error p.210
0001000C PG home position detection error p.203 100001A0 CPU slot undefined command exception error p.211
00010014 Failure of pressurizing p.203 100001C0 The AC power is shut off. p.211
0001001B Head driver (TG) temperature error p.204 100005C0 CPU DMA address error p.211
0001001D CR servo parameter error p.204 10000xxx CPU error p.211
0001001E PF servo parameter error p.205
00010020 CSIC reading/writing error p.205
00010023 RTC analyzing error p.205
00010026 RTC communication error p.206
00010027 Pressure pump micro air-leak error p.206
00010028 Head error p.206
0001002A CR ASIC ECU error p.206
0001002D The Cleaning Unit reached its end of life. p.206
00010035 Pump phase detection error p.207
00010036 Type-B board installation error p.207
00010037 Head thermistor error p.207
00010038 Transistor thermistor error p.207
0001003E Pressure Sensor failure p.207
0001003F The Pressure Motor reached its end of life. p.208

3.2.2 Remedies for Warning Messages MAINTENANCE REQUEST XXXX

When a Warning error occurs, the printer displays a Warning message instead of Description
“READY” or “PRINTING” messages, however, it does not interfere with printing
operation. A maintenance is required.
The Warning message does not disappear unless the cause of it is eliminated. LED Indication
The following tables explains the Warning messages and remedies. Paper Check LED: Lights for a moment at intervals of five seconds.
Displayed Code
MAINTENANCE TANK NEARLY FULL
The “NNNN” is a hexadecimal code which correspond to the bit numbers assigned
to error conditions as shown in the table below.
Item Description
Description The Maintenance Tank is in near full state Table 3-3. Bit Assignments
LED Indication Ink Check LED: Flashing Bit Assigned Error Condition Remark
Cause Remaining space of the Maintenance Tank became lower than 10 0 The waste ink tank reached its end of life. This does not occur on the printer.*
percent of its full capacity.
1 The CR Motor reached its end of life. The number of carriage movement
Remedy Replace the Maintenance Tank with a new one. cycles reached the specified value.
2 Ignores nozzle check error This does not occur on the printer.*
3 Battery exhaustion The RTC backup battery run down.
INK LOW 4 Dot missing detection device AGC error This does not occur on the printer.*
5 Head Unit reached its end of life. This does not occur on the printer.*
Item Description 6 The Cleaning Unit reached its end of life. The pump counter reached the
Description The remaining amount of ink is low. specified upper limit.
LED Indication Ink Check LED: Flashing 7 The date and time has not been set. ---
Cause The remaining amount of ink became lower than the specified value. 8 A momentary drop in voltage of the RTC ---
Remedy Replace the ink cartridge with a new one. backup battery
9 The Paper Feed Roller reached its end of This does not occur on the printer.*
life.
10 The Pressure Pump reached its end of life. The Pressure Pump counter reached
the specified upper limit.
11-31 Reserved ---
Note "*": The bit number is reserved.
Description
The most of the MAINTENANCE REQUEST errors indicate near-end of life
status of the part or unit.

Remedy
NNNN Cause of the Error Parts or Components need to be Replaced Remedies
0002 The number of carriage movement cycles reached the specified value. See “ Service Call 00000101 (p.197)”. See “ Service Call 00000101 (p.197)”.
Replace the RTC backup battery and execute the RTC initialization using the
0008 The RTC backup battery run down or is not installed. RTC backup battery
Adjustment Program.
PUMP CAP ASSY.
CLEANER, HEAD, A, ASP
BOX ASSY., FLUSHING (R) Replace the parts listed on the left column and execute the Reset When Cleaning
0040 The pump counter reached the specified upper limit.
BOX ASSY., FLUSHING (L) Unit Change using the Adjustment Program.
TUBE, INK, WASTE; R
TUBE, INK, WASTE; L
0080 The date and time has not been set. --- Execute the RTC initialization using the Adjustment Program.
0100 A momentary drop in voltage of the RTC backup battery --- Leave the printer for a while.
Replace the Pressure Pump Unit and execute the Reset Pump Counter using the
0400 The Pressure Pump counter reached the specified upper limit. Pressure Pump Unit
Adjustment Program.
C H E C K The parts which need to be replaced when “0040” (near-end of life of the Cleaning Unit) occurred
P O IN T
BOX ASSY., TUBE, INK,

FLUSHING (R) WASTE; R
TUBE, INK, WASTE; L
BOX ASSY., FLUSHING (L)
CLEANER, HEAD, A, ASP
PUMP CAP ASSY.

PAPER LOW
Item Description
Description The remaining amount of loaded paper is low.
LED Indication Paper Check LED: Flashing
Cause This occurs when the REMAINING PPR SETUP in the Maintenance
mode is set to “ROLL” and the counter becomes lower than the preset
near-end value.
Remedy Enter a value larger than the preset near-end value in the ROLL PAPER
COUNTER in the PRINTER SETUP menu.
CONVERSION CRTG LIFE

CONVERSION CRTG NEAR END OF SERVICE LIFE
Item Description
Description The conversion cartridge reached near end of its life.
LED Indication • Power LED: Flashing
• Pause LED: ON
• Ink Check LED: ON
Cause The remaining number of times that the Conversion Cartridge can be
used became less than 10 times.
Remedy Press the [Pause] button.

3.2.3 Remedies for Error Messages SENSOR ERROR

When an error occurs, the printer displays the error message instead of “READY” or LOAD DIFFERENT PAPER
“PRINTING” messages.
Description Remedy
The following tables explains the error messages and remedies.
The Ink-mark sensor caused a SN gain Release the Paper Set Lever to replace the
error paper with the correct one, and reset the lever
PAPER OUT The gain of the Ink-mark Sensor cannot be to its front position.
LOAD PAPER determined. Or press the [Pause] button.
Ink-mark Sensor paper type identification Release the Paper Set Lever to replace the
Description Remedy error paper with the correct one, and reset the lever
The printer run out of paper. Release the Paper Set Lever to load paper, The Ink-mark Sensor cannot recognize the to its front position.
The Paper Set Lever was set in the paper and reset the lever to its front position. paper. Or press the [Pause] button.
setting position with no paper loaded.
A posterior end of the cut sheet or roll
paper is detected in the middle of printing,
and the printing is interrupted. PAPER EJECT ERROR
REMOVE PAPER FROM PRINTER
Description Remedy
CLEANING ERROR
The printer failed to eject paper. Release the Paper Set Lever to remove the
REMOVE THICK PAPER paper, and reset the lever to its front position.
When the printer tried to eject the paper, it
detected that another paper is left in the
Description Remedy paper path.
The printer cannot run a cleaning. Release the Paper Set Lever to remove the The paper was ejected by releasing the
A paper which is thicker than 0.8 mm is paper, and reset the lever to its front position. Paper Eject Roller.
detected when the printer attempted to run a
cleaning.
PAPER OUT
LOAD PAPER
CLEANING ERROR
PRESS PAUSE BUTTON Description Remedy
The printer run out of roll paper. Release the Paper Set Lever to load paper,
Description Remedy The Paper Set Lever was set to its front and reset the lever to its front position.
The printer failed to run a cleaning. Press the [Pause] button. The printer returns position with no roll paper loaded when
The Ink-mark Sensor detected dot missing to “READY” state ignoring the dot missing roll paper is specified in the panel setting.
after running the auto cleaning. condition. A posterior end of the roll paper is
detected in the middle of printing, and the
printing is interrupted.

BORDERLESS ERROR PAPER ERROR

LOAD CORRECT SIZE PAPER LOAD PAPER PROPERLY
Description Remedy Description Remedy

The printer cannot perform borderless Release the Paper Set Lever to correct the The paper is not loaded correctly 1. Release the Paper Set Lever to remove the
printing (no margin on all sides) paper position, or replace the paper with a 1. The paper manually fed from the printer paper, and reset the lever to its front
The paper was not set in the position for borderless printing available one. Or feed rear was not detected by the P EDGE position. Or remove the paper from the rear
borderless printing when the printer received correct sized paper manually.When the paper Sensor. (this error is displayed as the of the printer if it is not nipped properly.
a borderless print data. This prevents the is reset, the printer automatically detects the PAPER ERROR, but is classified as a
printer from printing on the platen. paper width and performs the borderless cut-sheet manual feed error in the
The width of the set paper is not available
printing if the width is within the range of printer.)
for borderless printing. borderless printing. 2. The paper set position is incorrect for 2. Release the Paper Set Lever to reset the
To cancel the job, press the [Pause] button
The paper can be used for borderless performing a paper initialization paper correctly, and set the lever to its
and delete the job by the host computer. operation. front position.
printing, but it is not set correctly.
As the length of loaded cut-sheet paper
exceeds the upper limit for the printer, the
printer cannot eject the paper.
When finished to print on roll paper, the
paper was skewed and the left and right
ends of the paper went beyond the
printable area.
A paper whose width is less than 180 mm
is loaded.
3. When loading a cut-sheet, the printer 3. Release the Paper Set Lever to remove
detected that the paper is skewed. This the paper, and reset the lever to its front
error occurs when the cut-sheet loading position.
sequence is finished. Press the [Pause] button when the error
The error is more likely to occur when caused by a cut-sheet loading.
feeding paper manually, so the Pause
LED turns ON to indicate the user to
press the [Pause] button to continue the
job.

PAPER SKEW COMMAND ERROR

LOAD PAPER PROPERLY CHECK DRIVER SETTINGS

The paper is loaded at an angle/Cut sheet Release the Paper Set Lever to reset the paper Command Error Cancel the print job and press the [Pause]
loading error correctly, and set the lever to its front The inks specified by the printer driver are button for more than 3 seconds to reset the
The positions of left and right ends of the roll position. different from those installed on the printer.
paper change by 3 mm or more from when printer.
the printing is started to when finished the The print data is not supported by the
printing. printer.
There is something wrong with the
incoming command.
The printer specified by the printer driver Cancel the print job and press the [Pause]
PAPER CUT ERROR may be wrong. button for more than 3 seconds to reset the
REMOVE UNCUT PAPER printer. Verify that the printer specified by the
printer driver matches the printer connected
to the computer.
Description Remedy
The printer failed to cut the paper Release the Paper Set Lever to remove the
After paper cutting operation, the P EDGE paper, and reset the lever to its front position.
Sensor cannot detect the leading edge of MISMATCH ERROR
paper.
MAKE SURE THAT THE INK CARTRIDGE AND DRIVER
SETTINGS MATCH
Description Remedy
An ink cartridge command error Cancel the print job and press the [Pause]
The inks specified by the printer driver are button for more than 3 seconds to reset the
different from those installed on the printer.
printer. Note : If the [Pause] button is pressed less
The print data is not supported by the than 3 seconds, the printer starts to
printer. print.
There is something wrong with the
incoming command.

PAPER SETTING ERROR CONVERSION CRTG LIFE

LOAD ROLL PAPER REPLACE CONVERSION CRTG WITH A NEW ONE

The roll paper is not set correctly. If the loaded paper type is different from the The conversion cartridge reached the end Replace the conversion cartridge with a new
The paper path number specified by the panel setting, change the panel setting of its life. one.
remote command is different from the paper accordingly. The number of times that the Conversion Or press the [Pause] button to continue the
type set by the panel. Cartridge is used exceeded 100 times. black ink replacing operation.
The paper path sent by the remote command
is prioritized and the printer causes the error
according to the command if the paper path
setting of the printer does not match with that INK OUT
of the remote command.
Description Remedy
PAPER SETTING ERROR The ink cartridge is empty Replace the ink cartridge with a new one.
LOAD CUT SHEET PAPER All of the ink in the ink cartridge was used.
Description Remedy
The cut sheet paper is not set correctly. Press the [Pause] button to reset the panel
setting. In this case, the panel setting is
INK CARTRIDGE ERROR
The paper path number specified by the
remote command is different from the paper returned to the default set by the printer. CHECK CARTRIDGE
type set by the panel.
The paper path sent by the remote command Description Remedy
is prioritized and the printer causes the error The black cartridge is wrong (Photo Black Replace the black ink cartridge with the one
according to the command if the paper path or Matte Black). specified by the printer.
setting of the printer does not match with that Or press the [Pause] button and change the
A black ink cartridge different from that
of the remote command. black ink type setting of the printer.
specified in the printer is installed.
The product code of the ink cartridge is Replace the ink cartridge with a correct one.
wrong. Although the printer can recover from the
The product code of the installed ink error by pressing the [Pause] button, it is not
cartridge is wrong (except the photo black/ recommended because it results in mixing-up
matte black mismatching error) the different type of inks.

INK CARTRIDGE ERROR NO CARTRIDGE

INSTALL CORRECT CARTRIDGE INSTALL INK CARTRIDGE

Wrong destination Replace the ink cartridge with a correct one. No ink cartridge is installed. Install ink cartridges.
Ink cartridge intended to be used for another Or the printer can recover from the error by No ink cartridge is installed.
destination is installed. pressing the [Pause] button.
An ink cartridges that cannot be used with Replace the ink cartridge with the correct one.
the printer is installed.
The installed ink cartridges cannot be used MAINTENANCE TANK FULL
for the printer. REPLACE THE (LEFT (RIGHT) SIDE) MAINTENANCE TANK
Description Remedy
The Maintenance Tank is full. Replace the Maintenance Tank with a new
INK CARTRIDGE ERROR one.
The Maintenance Tank is full of waste ink.
CHECK CARTRIDGE
Description Remedy
The logo of the ink cartridge is wrong. Replace the ink cartridge with the correct one. MAINTENANCE TANK NEAR FULL
The installed ink cartridge is not the EPSON Or the printer can recover from the error by REPLACE THE (LEFT (RIGHT) SIDE) MAINTENANCE TANK
genuine one. pressing the [Pause] button.
Description Remedy
The Maintenance Tank is near full. Replace the Maintenance Tank with a new
The Maintenance Tank is full of waste ink. one.
INK CARTRIDGE ERROR
REPLACE CARTRIDGE
Description Remedy
INK LEVER
Cartridge failure or CSIC error Replace the ink cartridge with a new one. LOWER THE LEFT (RIGHT) INK LEVER
The memory chip on the ink cartridge is
damaged.
Description Remedy
The Ink Lever is released Lower the Ink Lever.
The Ink Lever is raised.

COVER OPEN LEVER RELEASED

CLOSE COVER LOWER THE PAPER SET LEVER

The front cover is open. Close the front cover. The paper set lever is released during
The front cover is open. If the cover is opened while the printer is printing.
performing a flushing operation before The Paper Set Lever is released while the
feeding paper, it stops the flushing printer is performing any of the following
operation and resumes the flushing and operations.
feeding the paper after the cover is closed. 1. Turning the power ON or OFF, or cleaning 1. Place the Paper Set Lever to its front
If the cover is opened while the printer is position.
performing the paper feeding operation,
2. Feeding paper, printing or ejecting paper 2. If you interrupt the paper feeding operation
the printer stops after feeding the paper to
by placing the Paper Set Lever to its front
the starting position. When the cover is
position, the printer performs paper set
closed, it starts to detect paper width and
sequence and the paper type is
enters into ready mode.
automatically determined by the paper
When the cover is opened while the printer
detection sensors (The P Rear Sensor and
is ejecting the paper, the printer causes
the P EDGE Sensor). During the paper set
PAPER EJECT ERROR (p.190).
sequence, the printer enters into a wait
If the cover is opened while the printer is state for paper setting initializing trigger.
cutting paper, the printer causes PAPER Pressing the [Pause] button backs the
CUT ERROR (p.192). printer to the paper set sequence operation.
When the cover is opened while turning (If you remove the paper without canceling
the power OFF, the printer turns OFF after the job (resetting the panel) and lower the
placing the cap on the printhead. Paper Set Lever, PAPER OUT (p.190)
error will occur after the printer recovers
from the LEVER RELEASED error.) If the
P EDGE Sensor is ON with the Paper Set
LEVER RELEASED Lever lowered, the printer detects the
LOAD PAPER condition during the paper set sequence
and judges that the paper is fed from the
front side. This causes a paper jam as the
Description Remedy printer then tries to back-feed the paper
The paper set lever is released. Lower the Paper Set Lever. and a paper jam error message will be
The Paper Set Lever is released. displayed on the panel. If this happens,
release the Paper Set Lever to remove the
paper and back the lever to its front
position.
3. During paper cutting operation 3. Cancel the cutting operation and remove
the paper, then back the Paper Set Lever to
its front position.

PAPER JAM F/W INSTALL ERROR

REMOVE PAPER UPDATE FAILED
RESTART THE PRINTER
Description Remedy
A paper jam occurred. Release the Paper Set Lever, open the front Description Remedy
A paper jam occurred. cover and remove the jammed paper. The printer failed to update the firmware. Turn the printer OFF and wait for a while to
Close the front cover and turn the printer The printer failed to update the firmware. turn it back ON. Then retry updating the
OFF. Leave the printer for a while and then firmware.
turn it ON.
I/F CARD ERROR
CHECK CARD TYPE
INK CARTRIDGE
Description Remedy
A type B optional interface error Turn the printer OFF and remove the Type-B
An unsupported interface card is installed. interface. Then turn the printer ON.
Description Remedy
The ink lever is released and no cartridge Install the ink cartridge (new one) indicated
is installed yet. on the LCD panel and lower the Ink Lever.
The Ink Lever is released, and no ink PRINTER ERROR
cartridge is installed.
RESTART THE PRINTER
Description Remedy
NO MAINTENANCE TANK Rebooting the printer is required. Turn the printer OFF and turn it back ON
INSTALL THE (LEFT (RIGHT) SIDE) MAINTENANCE TANK Rebooting the printer is required during after leaving it for a while.
recovering form an error.
Description Remedy
The Maintenance Tank is not installed on Install the Maintenance Tank.
the printer.
The Maintenance Tank is not installed on the
CARRIAGE LOCKED
printer. RELEASE THE CARRIAGE LOCK
Description Remedy
The Carriage is locked. Remove the clamping plate.
The clamping plate for transportation has not
been removed yet.

SERVICE CALL 3.2.4 Remedies for Service Call Errors

NNNNNNNNN The Service Call errors are displayed on the LCD panel to inform the user that an error
which requires a service by a service personnel is occurring.
The Service Call errors cannot be remedied by the user. See “3.2.4 Remedies for
This section explains each of the Service Call errors and the remedies.
Service Call Errors” (p.197) for the information on how to remedy each of the Service
Call errors.
C A U T IO N Be sure to return the Carriage to its home position when Service
Description Remedy Call errors other than those listed below occur.
Service Call The printer may be able to recover from the
CR or PF servo-related errors
An error that cannot be remedied by the error by turning the power OFF and back ON. CR home position detection error
user is detected. If the same error occurs again and the printer CPU-related errorData analyzing task error
Life end of a part or unit is detected which, cannot be used, troubleshoot the problem and
if it is used continuously, can adversely replace the defective parts or components.
affect the printer mechanism. SERVICE CALL 00000101
The printer becomes inoperative due to
unexpected operation or commands. Description
Life end of the CR Motor (includes the Ink Tubes)
Explanation
The number of Carriage movement cycles reached the specified upper limit.
Stylus Pro 7400/7450/7800/7880/7880C: 3,700,000 cycles
Stylus Pro 9400/9450/9800/9880/9880C: 6,300,000 cycles
If the printer is used continuously ignoring the error, it may cause the following
defective conditions.
The Ink Tubes become cracked causing leakage of ink
Malfunction of the Carriage due to wear of the internal part of the CR Motor

Remedy SERVICE CALL 00010000

1. Check the life count of the CR Motor in the “1.4.4 Panel Setting” (p.48).
Press the [Menu] button → PRINTER STATUS menu - Description
SERVICE LIFE → CR MOTOR. See Section 1.4.4.30 on page 88. PF Encoder check error
• When the life is still remaining Explanation
Replace the BOARD ASSY., MAIN (p.241). The printer causes this error and stops operation if it cannot detect the encoder
• When the life has expired or close to the end-of-life pulse signals at intervals of the specified time during the power-on initialization
Replace the CR MOTOR ASSY. (p.252). operation or while the PF Motor is driving.
2. As the lifespan of the CR Motor means the lifespan of the printer, the whole Possible Causes
printer mechanism checks and corresponding maintenance works must be
carried out. Especially, the following items should be carefully checked or The PF Encoder connector is disconnected.
performed. The PF Motor connector is disconnected.
• Check the Head FFC for any damage such as break, scratch, etc. The Encoder harness on the PF side is broken.
• Check the CR Timing Belt and the PF Timing Belt for any damage. The wiring of the A and B phases are wrong (opposite)
• Check if abnormal sounds are produced from the sliding surfaces of the The wiring of the motor is wrong (opposite)
Guide Rail and the bearings of the Carriage Unit (wear of the bearings). The PF Motor shorted out.
• Check if the paper dust or any other dust accumulates on the paper path.
The PF Motor is energized continuously and kept rotating abnormally.
If it does, clean it as indicated in “6.1.2 Required Maintenance Items”
(p.396). The fuse for the motor driver is blown. (on the Main Board)
• Refer to “6.2 Lubrication” (p.397) and lubricate the specified points if The Main Board is damaged. (+42V/+24V remote control is broken)
necessary. The Power Supply Board is damaged (42V is OFF)
Check Point
C H E C K Whenever the CR Motor Assy. is replaced, the corresponding 1. Make sure that the PF Encoder and the PF loop scale are free of dust or
P O IN T adjustment (including resetting the counter) must be carried
foreign materials.
out. See Chapter 5 on page 306.
2. Perform the Encoder check by the “1.4.6.1 Self Testing Menu (SELF
Do not reset the CR TOTAL counter (CR Motor cumulative TESTING)” (p.112).
life counter).
3. Make sure that the PF Timing Belt is normal and its tension is appropriate.
4. Make sure that the Grid Roller rotates smoothly without any abnormal load.
5. Make sure that the PF Motor is not shorted out.
If it does, replace the BOARD ASSY.,MAIN together with the PF Motor.
6. Make sure that the harnesses are connected correctly and not broken.
Remedy
1. Clean dirt or paper dust on the Loop Scale and check if it is damaged.
2. Reconnect the PF Encoder connector or the PF Motor connector securely.
3. Execute the PF Timing Belt Tension Adjustment (p.321).
4. Replace the PF Encoder Sensor (p.272).
5. Replace the PF MOTOR ASSY. (p.269).
6. Replace the BOARD ASSY., MAIN (p.241).

SERVICE CALL 00010001 SERVICE CALL 00010002

Description Description
The PF Motor is out-of-step. Overcurrent occurred on the PF Motor.
Explanation Explanation
The printer causes this error and stops operation if it cannot detect the specified- The printer causes this error and stops operation if an abnormal electric current
length encoder pulse signals within a fixed time period or when abnormally long beyond the prescribed range is detected at the PF Motor drive circuit on the
or short pulse signals are detected while the PF Motor is rotating. BOARD ASSY.,MAIN while the PF Motor is rotating or when a current beyond
the prescribed range is required to be supplied to the motor.
Check Point
1. Make sure that the PF Encoder and the PF loop scale are free of dust or Check Point
foreign materials. 1. Make sure that the PF Loop Scale is free of dust or foreign materials.
2. Perform the Encoder check by the “1.4.6.1 Self Testing Menu (SELF 2. Make sure that the PF Motor is not shorted out.
TESTING)” (p.112). If it does, replace the BOARD ASSY.,MAIN together with the PF Motor.
3. Make sure that the PF Timing Belt is normal and its tension is appropriate. 3. Visually check if there is a point where likely to cause a short of the PF Motor
4. Make sure that the Grid Roller rotates smoothly without any abnormal load. harness with the frame.
5. Make sure that the PF Motor is not shorted out. Remedy
If it does, replace the BOARD ASSY.,MAIN together with the PF Motor.
Remedy 3. Replace the BOARD ASSY., MAIN (p.241).


The PF Motor out of position time-out error CR Encoder check error
The printer causes this error and stops operation if it detects that the paper could The printer causes this error and stops operation if it cannot detect the encoder
not be moved to the target position within a fixed time period while the PF Motor pulse signals at intervals of the specified time during the power-on initialization
stopping operation. operation or while the CR Motor is driving.
Check Point Possible Causes
1. Make sure that the PF Encoder and the PF loop scale are free of dust or CR Encoder FFC is disconnected.
foreign materials. The CR Motor connector is disconnected.
2. Perform the Encoder check by the “1.4.6.1 Self Testing Menu (SELF The FFC of the encoder on the CR side is broken.
TESTING)” (p.112).
The wiring of the A and B phases are wrong (opposite)
3. Make sure that the PF Timing Belt is normal and its tension is appropriate.
The wiring of the CR Motor is wrong (opposite)
4. Make sure that the Grid Roller rotates smoothly without any abnormal load.
The CR Motor shorted out.
5. Make sure that the PF Motor is not shorted out.
If it does, replace the BOARD ASSY.,MAIN together with the PF Motor. The fuse for the motor driver is blown. (on the Main Board)
6. Make sure that the harnesses are connected correctly and not broken. Check Point
Remedy 1. Make sure that the Timing Fence is securely attached on the CR Encoder.
1. Clean dirt or paper dust on the Loop Scale and check if it is damaged. 2. Make sure that the CR Encoder and the Timing Fence are free of dust or
foreign materials.
3. Perform the Encoder check by the “1.4.6.1 Self Testing Menu (SELF
4. Make sure that the CR Timing Belt is normal and its tension is appropriate.
5. Make sure that the Carriage moves smoothly without any abnormal load.
6. Make sure that the CR Motor is not shorted out.
If it does, replace the BOARD ASSY.,MAIN together with the CR Motor.
Remedy
1. Reattach the Timing Fence for detecting the encoder securely and correctly.
2. Clean dirt or paper dust on the Timing Fence and check if it is damaged.
3. Reconnect the CR Encoder FFC or the CR Motor connector securely.
4. Execute the CR Timing Belt Tension Adjustment (p.320).
5. Replace the CR Encoder Sensor (p.255).
6. Replace the CR MOTOR ASSY. (p.252).


CR Motor is out of step. The CR Motor out of position time-out error
The printer causes this error and stops operation if it cannot detect the specified- The printer causes this error and stops operation if it detects that the Carriage
length encoder pulse signals within a fixed time period or when abnormally long could not be moved to the target position within a fixed time period while the CR
or short pulse signals are detected while the CR Motor is rotating. Motor stopping operation is performed.
Possible Causes Possible Causes
The connector of the Cutter Solenoid is disconnected. The Carriage movement cannot be finished due to the remaining pulses smaller
The fuse for the Solenoid is blown. (on the Main Board) than those generated by the motor out-of-step state.
CR Motor failure Check Point
The CR Motor driver is damage. (42 V is shorted)
1. Make sure that the Timing Fence is securely attached on the CR Encoder.
The temperature fuse of the Cutter Solenoid is blown (the Cutter Solenoid 2. Make sure that the CR Encoder and the Timing Fence are free of dust or
does not work and the Carriage cannot be unlocked.)
foreign materials.
Check Point 3. Perform the Encoder check by the “1.4.6.1 Self Testing Menu (SELF
1. Make sure that the Timing Fence is securely attached on the CR Encoder. TESTING)” (p.112).
2. Make sure that the CR Encoder and the Timing Fence are free of dust or 4. Make sure that the CR Timing Belt is normal and its tension is appropriate.
foreign materials. 5. Make sure that the Carriage moves smoothly without any abnormal load.
3. Perform the Encoder check by the “1.4.6.1 Self Testing Menu (SELF 6. Make sure that the CR Motor is not shorted out.
TESTING)” (p.112). If it does, replace the BOARD ASSY.,MAIN together with the CR Motor.
4. Make sure that the CR Timing Belt is normal and its tension is appropriate. 7. Make sure that the harnesses are connected correctly and not broken.
5. Perform the CR HP Sensor check by the “1.4.6.1 Self Testing Menu (SELF
Remedy
6. Make sure that the Carriage moves smoothly without any abnormal load. 1. Reattach the Timing Fence for detecting the encoder securely and correctly.
7. Make sure that the CR Motor is not shorted out. 2. Clean dirt or paper dust on the Timing Fence and check if it is damaged.
If it does, replace the BOARD ASSY.,MAIN together with the PF Motor. 3. Execute the CR Timing Belt Tension Adjustment (p.320).
8. Make sure that the harnesses are connected correctly and not broken. 4. Replace the CR Encoder Sensor (p.255).
Remedy
1. Reattach the Timing Fence for detecting the encoder securely and correctly.
2. Clean dirt or paper dust on the Timing Fence and check if it is damaged.
3. Reconnect the Cutter Solenoid connector securely and correctly.
7. Replace the CUTTER SOLENOID ASSY. (p.257).

SERVICE CALL 00010008 SERVICE CALL 0001000A

Servo interrupt watchdog time-out error Carriage home position detection error
The printer causes this error and stops operation if it detects a watchdog time-out The printer causes this error and stops operation if it cannot detect the Carriage
on the DC motor drive circuit (CPU or ASIC) while the CR or PF Motor is home position or cannot detect it within a fixed time period during the power-on
driving. initialization operation or while performing home position detecting operation
during printing.
Remedy
CPU or ASIC failure can be considered as the cause of the error, replace the Main Check Point
Board Assy. Replace the BOARD ASSY., MAIN (p.241). 1. Make sure that the CR HP Sensor is free of dust or foreign materials.
2. Perform the CR HP Sensor check by the “1.4.6.1 Self Testing Menu (SELF
SERVICE CALL 00010009 Remedy
1. Clean dirt or foreign materials on the CR HP Sensor and check if it is
Description
damaged.
System interrupt watchdog time-out error
2. Replace the CR HP Sensor (p.253).
Explanation 3. Replace the BOARD ASSY., MAIN (p.241).
The printer causes this error and stops operation if it detects an out-of-control state
or cache failure in the CPU or ASIC while the BOARD ASSY.,MAIN is
processing a print data.
Remedy
CPU or ASIC failure can be considered as the cause of the error, replace the Main
Board Assy. Replace the BOARD ASSY., MAIN (p.241).

SERVICE CALL 0001000C SERVICE CALL 00010014

PG home position detection error Failure of pressurizing
The printer causes this error and stops operation if it cannot detect the PG home The printer causes this error and stops operation if it detects an abnormal condition
position during the power-on initialization operation or while performing platen of the Pressure Sensor (air leak from the pressurizing mechanism) during the
gap changing operation after paper is set. power-on initialization operation or while performing ink supply operation.
The PG HP Sensor connector is disconnected. Pressure Motor failure
The Pump Motor connector is disconnected. The connector of the Pressure Motor, Regulator Solenoid or Pressure Sensor
The Pump Motor harness is broken. is disconnected.
PG HP Sensor failure The harness of the Pressure Motor, Regulator Solenoid or Pressure Sensor is
Pump Motor failure broken.
The PG drive gears are damaged. Regulator Solenoid failure (does not become ON)
The fuse for the motor driver is blown. (on the Main Board) Pressure Sensor failure
The Pressure Tube is disconnected.
Check Point
The fuse for the Solenoid or the motor driver is blown.
1. Make sure that the PG HP Sensor and the PG drive gears are free of dust or (on the Main Board)
foreign materials.
2. Measure the resistance value of the Pump Motor. (7.0 ± 10%[Ω]) Check Point
If the motor is shorted out, replace BOARD ASSY.,MAIN together with the 1. Measure the resistance value of the Pressure Motor. (7.0 ± 10%[Ω])
motor. If it does, replace the BOARD ASSY.,MAIN together with the Motor.
3. Make sure that the harnesses are connected correctly and not broken. 2. Make sure that the harnesses are connected correctly and not broken.
4. Make sure that there is no obstacle in the gear train made up of the Pump Remedy
Motor pinion gear, PG drive gear and etc.
1. Reconnect the connectors of the Pressure Motor, Regulator Solenoid or
Remedy Pressure Sensor securely.
1. Reconnect the PG HP Sensor connector or the Pump Motor connector 2. Connect the Pressure Tube.
securely. 3. Replace the PUMP ASSY., SUPPLY (p.305).
2. Replace the PG HP Sensor (p.254). 4. Replace the BOARD ASSY., MAIN (p.241).
3. Replace the PUMP CAP ASSY. (p.298).

SERVICE CALL 0001001B SERVICE CALL 0001001D

Head driver (TG) temperature error CR servo parameter error
The printer causes this error and stops operation if it detects an abnormal internal The printer causes this error and stops operation when it detects that a voltage
temperature of the printhead by the thermistor in the head while performing beyond the prescribed range is output to the CR Motor.
printing operation without firing ink from the nozzles.
Check Point
Possible Causes 1. Make sure that the CR Encoder and the Timing Fence are free of dust or
The printhead internal temperature rises because of a printing operation foreign materials.
without firing ink. 2. Perform the Encoder check by the “1.4.6.1 Self Testing Menu (SELF
A breakdown of the printhead TESTING)” (p.112).
Poor contact, short or disconnection of the tape electric wires 3. Make sure that the CR Timing Belt is normal and its tension is appropriate.
Main Board failure. (A/D of the CPU is damaged) 4. Make sure that the Carriage moves smoothly without any abnormal load.
5. Make sure that the CR Motor is not shorted out.
Remedy If it does, replace the BOARD ASSY.,MAIN together with the Motor.
1. Check if the printer can recover from the error by turning it OFF and back 6. Make sure that the harnesses are connected correctly and not broken.
ON.
2. Replace the PRINT HEAD (p.281).
Remedy
3. Replace the BOARD ASSY., MAIN (p.241). 1. Clean dirt or paper dust on the Timing Fence and check if it is damaged.

SERVICE CALL 0001001E SERVICE CALL 00010020

PF servo parameter error CSIC reading/writing error
The printer causes this error and stops operation when it detects that a voltage The printer causes this error and stops operation if it cannot load the information
beyond the prescribed range is output to the PF Motor. from the CSIC or write new information on the CSIC while running a power-ON/
OFF sequence or opening/closing the I/C Cover, or after finishing to print one
Check Point
page.
1. Make sure that the PF Encoder and the PF loop scale are free of dust or
foreign materials. Remedy
2. Perform the Encoder check by the “1.4.6.1 Self Testing Menu (SELF 1. Reconnect the CSIC FFC.
TESTING)” (p.112). 2. The memory chip on the ink cartridge is defective. (replace the ink cartridge)
3. Make sure that the PF Timing Belt is normal and its tension is appropriate. 3. Poor contact with the memory chip.
4. Make sure that the Grid Roller rotates smoothly without any abnormal load. • Replace the HOLDER ASSY., IC, RIGHT (p.289).
5. Make sure that the PF Motor is not shorted out. • Replace the HOLDER ASSY., IC, LEFT (p.293).
If it does, replace the BOARD ASSY.,MAIN together with the Motor. 4. Replace the BOARD ASSY., SUB; B (p.247).,
6. Make sure that the harnesses are connected correctly and not broken. Replace the BOARD ASSY., SUB; C (p.248).
Remedy
3. Replace the PF Encoder Sensor (p.272). SERVICE CALL 00010023
Description
RTC analyzing error
Explanation
The printer causes this error and stops operation when it detects that the absolute
date and time stored on the NVRAM is incorrect.
Remedy
1. Start up the printer in the Serviceman mode, and correct the date and time
setting using the “RTC & USB ID & IEEE1394 ID” Basic Adjustment menu
provided in the Adjustment Program.
2. Remove and reinstall the lithium battery.
3. Replace the lithium battery. Be sure to perform the RTC setting.


RTC communication error Head error
The printer causes this error and stops operation when it detects that the RTC The printer causes this error and stops operation when it detects an undefined NMI
circuit on the BOARD ASSY.,MAIN malfunctions (operates in test mode). in the CPU or the printhead is damaged.
Remedy Remedy
1. Turns the printer OFF and remove the lithium battery. Leave the printer for a Replace the PRINT HEAD (p.281).
few seconds and then reinsert the battery and turn the printer ON.
2. Repeat Step 1 until the printer stops causing the error at power-on.
3. Start up the printer in the Serviceman mode, and set the date and time using SERVICE CALL 0001002A
the “RTC & USB ID & IEEE1394 ID” Basic Adjustment menu provided in
the Adjustment Program. Description
CR ASIC ECU error
Possible Causes
SERVICE CALL 00010027 Malfunction of the firmware (invalid rewriting of the register)
The Main Board is damaged.
Description
Pressure pump micro air-leak error Remedy
Explanation 1. Installing Firmware (p.389)
The printer causes the error and stops operation if the Pressure Sensor becomes 2. Replace the BOARD ASSY., MAIN (p.241).
“LOW” state while performing a inspection of the Pressure Motor by
“1.4.6.1 Self Testing Menu (SELF TESTING)” (p.112).
This error occurs only when the printer is in the SELF TESTING mode. If a micro
SERVICE CALL 0001002D
air leak from the Pressure Motor is suspected because the motor works frequently
or constantly, the SELF TESTING function allows you to check it for micro air Description
leak before the printer causes a Service Call 00010014 for leakage of air. The Cleaning Unit reached its end of life.
Micro air leak from the Pressure Motor. The pump counter reached the prescribed upper limit (182,000P).
The Pressure Tube is disconnected. Remedy
The pressure inside the pressurizing mechanism dropped within 90 seconds Replace the Cleaning Unit and reset the life counter of the unit using the
after finishing the last pressurizing operation. Adjustment Program.
Remedy
1. Connect the Pressure Tube.
2. Replace the PUMP ASSY., SUPPLY (p.305).


Pump phase detection error Transistor thermistor error
A position of the pump cannot be detected after the Pump Motor rotates the
The transistor thermistor is faulty.
prescribed number of times, or the Pump Phase Sensor is faulty. Or the fuse for the
motor driver power is blown (on the Main Board). The temperature of the thermistor is lower than minus 20 degrees C or higher
than 100 degrees C.
Remedy
Check if the printer can recover from the error by turning it OFF and back ON. If Remedy
the error occurs again, replace the Pump Cap Assy. or replace the Main Board Replace the BOARD ASSY., MAIN (p.241).
Assy.
Replace the PUMP CAP ASSY. (p.298).
Replace the BOARD ASSY., MAIN (p.241). SERVICE CALL 0001003E
Description
Pressure Sensor failure
SERVICE CALL 00010036
Possible Causes
Description
The Pressure Sensor is ON when an ink pressurizing operation is not
Type-B board installation error
performed. (disconnection of the Pressure Sensor connector, malfunction of
Possible Causes the Pressure Sensor, or Main Board failure)
A Type-B board lower than level 2 is installed.
The inside pressure cannot be reduced to the same level as atmospheric
Remedy pressure. (valve failure, Regulator Solenoid failure, Pressure Tube failure, or
Remove the installed Type-B board. Main Board failure)
Remedy
1. Reconnect the Pressure Sensor connector securely.
2. Connect the Pressure Tube.
Description 3. Replace the PUMP ASSY., SUPPLY (p.305).
Head thermistor error 4. Replace the BOARD ASSY., MAIN (p.241).
Possible Causes
The head thermistor is faulty.
The temperature of the thermistor is lower than minus 20 degrees C or higher
than 100 degrees C.
The Head FFC is disconnected, or its contact is poor.
Remedy
1. Check the connection status of the Head FFC and correct it if necessary.
2. Replace the PRINT HEAD (p.281).

SERVICE CALL 0001003F SERVICE CALL 00020000

The Pressure Motor reached its end of life. NVRAM error
Possible Causes Explanation
The cumulative number of steps of the Pressure Motor reached the prescribed The printer causes this error and stops operation when it detects that parameters
upper limit. stored on the NVRAM are corrupted.
Remedy Possible Causes
Replace the PUMP ASSY., SUPPLY (p.305)., and reset the life counter of the NVRAM erasing or writing error (every 2-byte is checked)
Pressure Pump Unit using the Adjustment Program.
Remedy
Replace the BOARD ASSY., MAIN (p.241).

Description SERVICE CALL 00020002
Printing position error
Description
Possible Causes SDRAM error
Exact detection of printing positions is impossible due to dirt or scratches on Explanation
the Timing Fence or the CR Encoder. The printer causes this error and stops operation when it detects a bit error by the
Malfunction of the program SDRAM memory check performed during the power-on sequence.
Remedy Possible Causes
1. Replace the SCALE, CR (p.260). SDRAM reading/writing error
2. Replace the CR Encoder Sensor (p.255). SDRAM failure
3. Execute the CR Encoder Sensor Adjustment (p.322). The address/data bus on the Main Board is broken or its contact is poor.
4. Installing Firmware (p.389)
Remedy
Replace the BOARD ASSY., MAIN (p.241).

SERVICE CALL 00020003 SERVICE CALL 0002000B

Boot program sum error The internal memory is insufficient.
The printer causes this error and stops operation when it detects that the boot This error occurs when the cache area is judged as insufficient. The cache
program of the firmware is corrupted. This error occurs only when turning the insufficient condition is likely to be caused by using the work area of the memory
power ON. with unmatched interface mode settings or invalid commands. The printer stops
operation when the error occurs.
Possible Causes
Failed to install the program. Possible Causes
Malfunction of the program
Flash ROM failure
SDRAM failure Remedy
The address/data bus on the Main Board is broken or its contact is poor. 1. Check the interface mode setting
Remedy
SERVICE CALL 0DXXXXXX

SERVICE CALL 0002000A Description
An error code for debugging
Description
Program load error Possible Causes
Explanation Board failure
A sum check error on the program area of the RAM SDRAM failure
Cold soldering of the Flash ROM, ASIC, or CPU.
Possible Causes
Failed to generate commands for the printer
SDRAM failure
The address/data bus on the Main Board is broken or its contact is poor. Remedy
Remedy

SERVICE CALL 0EXXXXXX SERVICE CALL 10000100

A time-lag of the RTC timer CPU address error (misalignment of storing)
Explanation Possible Causes
This error occurs when the printer failed to communicate with the RTC chip on the Board failure
Main Board.
CPU cold soldering
0Exxyyzz: Malfunction of the program, Failed to generate commands for the printer
xx = Location where a compare error occurred
(00 = LTMR1, 01 = LTMR0, 02 = MIN counter) Remedy
yy = Setting value (writing value) 1. Installing Firmware (p.389)
zz = Setting result (a value read when comparing) 2. Replace the BOARD ASSY., MAIN (p.241).
Remedy
Start up the printer in the Serviceman mode, and set the date and time setting using
the “RTC & USB ID & IEEE1394 ID” Basic Adjustment menu provided in the
Adjustment Program.
Description
CPU reserved command code exception error
SERVICE CALL 100000E0 Possible Causes

Board failure
Description
CPU cold soldering
CPU address error (misalignment of loading)
Malfunction of the program, Failed to generate commands for the printer
Possible Causes
Remedy
Board failure
CPU cold soldering
Malfunction of the program, Failed to generate commands for the printer
Remedy

SERVICE CALL 100001A0 SERVICE CALL 100005C0

CPU slot undefined command exception error CPU DMA address error
CPU cold soldering Board failure
Malfunction of the program, Failed to generate commands for the printer CPU cold soldering
Remedy Malfunction of the program, Failed to generate commands for the printer
1. Installing Firmware (p.389) Remedy
2. Replace the BOARD ASSY., MAIN (p.241). 1. Installing Firmware (p.389)
SERVICE CALL 100001C0

SERVICE CALL 10000XXX
Description
The AC power is shut off. Description
Possible Causes CPU error
A power failure Possible Causes
The power code is disconnected. Board failure
Power Supply Board failure CPU cold soldering
Main Board failure Malfunction of the program, Failed to generate commands for the printer
The CPU detected NMI with “1” indicated for the NMIINO of the ASIC. Remedy
Remedy 1. Installing Firmware (p.389)
1. Turn the printer OFF to reconnect the power code and turn it ON. 2. Replace the BOARD ASSY., MAIN (p.241).
2. Replace the P/S BOARD ASSY. (p.243).

3.3 Troubleshooting based on Printed Result 2. Printing Nozzle Check Pattern (Test Print Menu) (p.72)
Print a nozzle check pattern. (Panel Setting → TEST PRINT → NOZZLE
This section describes the major print quality troubles and provides troubleshooting CHECK)
procedure for each of the trouble.
C H E C K Before performing the initial ink charge, be sure to check the
P O IN T available space of the Maintenance Tank by its counter as a
Table 3-4. Print Quality Troubles
large amount of ink will be discharged to the tank for the initial
Item Description Reference Pages ink charge. Have an another Maintenance Tank as a
1 Dot missing p.212 replacement if necessary.
2 Inconsistencies in density, blurring, or unexpected p.213 Also check the remaining amount of ink before the initial ink
colors charging. If the remaining amount is lower than 50%, replace
3 Smudges on the printed side p.213 the ink cartridge with a new one to perform the initial ink
charge.
4 Smudges on the backs of pages p.214
5 Horizontal white or black streaks p.214
If the dot missing still occurs after running the power cleaning, check the
6 Vertical bands p.215
following items.
7 Intrusion of air into the Ink Tube p.215
When the dot missing appears in all colors.
• Check if the printhead and the Cap Assy. are kept in absolute contact with
DOT MISSING one another during ink charging operation.
•
Check if the Cap Assy./Pump tubes are disconnected.
The printer has a function to detect dot missing by the Ink-mark Sensor and run a •
Check if the Cleaning Unit has reached its end of life.
cleaning automatically, however, if the function is set to disabled or the printer is not •
Check the Cap Assy. for any damage such as damage of the cap rubber.
used over a long period of time, the nozzles may not fire ink causing severe dot missing •
Check the Pump Unit for any damage such as crushing of the tubes.
symptom due to increased ink viscosity on the nozzle surfaces and inside the nozzles. •
Check if the printhead is defective.
Follow the procedure below to repair it. •
Check if the fuse on the Main Board is blown.
•
Check that the Head FFC connector is securely connected.
Run a printhead cleaning or perform an initial ink charging operation.
When the dot missing appears in particular colors.
1. Run a power cleaning. If the printer does not return to normal by this, run a
• Check the Head Cleaner for any dirt.
cleaning or perform the initial ink charge operation.
• Check the junctions of the ink cartridges, Ink Holder, tubes, dampers, and
Cleaning How to Run the Cleaning the printhead for any abnormality.
(Ink may be leaking by loosened fixing nuts, deformed or damaged O-ring.)
Power cleaning Panel setting menu or Maintenance menu:
• Check if the printhead is defective.
POWER CLEANING
• Perform the power cleaning again.
Adjustment Program: CL4
Cleaning Maintenance mode: SSCL
If the trouble still occurs even after performing all the troubleshooting described
above, replace the parts listed below and check if it returns the printer to normal.
Adjustment Program: SSCL
• PRINT HEAD (p.281)
Initial Ink Charging Adjustment Program: Initial Ink Charge
• BOARD ASSY., MAIN (p.241)
Troubleshooting Troubleshooting based on Printed Result 212

INCONSISTENCIES IN DENSITY, BLURRING, OR UNEXPECTED SMUDGES ON THE PRINTED SIDE

COLORS
When smudges caused by the head or etc. appear on printed side, perform the
When a print quality trouble such as inconsistencies in density, blurring images, following items.
unexpected colors, or etc. occurs, perform the following items.
1. If the smudges appear on the top or bottom margin of roll paper, expand the
1. Carry out the following adjustments. margin. (Set the ROLL PAPER MARGIN in the Panel Setting menu to “TOP/
1. Nozzle Bi-D Adjustment (p.339) BOTTOM 15 mm”.)
(Narrower margin setting (3 mm) for the high-density print job is likely to cause
2. Auto Bi-D Adjustment (P.G. 0.8/1.6) (p.348)
smudges on the margin because the paper deforms due to a lot of ink printed on it
3. Auto Uni-D Adjustment (p.347)
and its top or bottom edge sometimes contacts with the printhead.)
If any abnormality is found by Check Nozzle (p.380) and Check Alignment
2. For thin or soft paper that cannot go through the paper path smoothly, set the
(p.381), go to the next step.
PAPER SUCTION in the CUSTOM PAPER in the Panel Setting menu to “-4”.
2. If the print quality trouble appears only on a particular type of thick paper, input
3. When the smudges appear on a user-defined paper because the printed ink does
the paper type in the CUSTOM PAPER in the Panel Setting menu.
not dry fast
(Make a custom setting for the paper using the menu. Selecting appropriate paper
Correct the DRYING TIME setting in the CUSTOM PAPER of the Panel Setting
feeding amount, platen gap can avoid the trouble.)
menu. The DRYING TIME is a time period from when finishing printing to when
3. When the trouble occurs after replacing the BOARD ASSY.,MAIN starting cutting the paper. (Default is 0 second, and can be selected in 1-second
Load the NVRAM parameters from the previous Main Board. (p.356) unit up to 10 seconds)
4. If the trouble still occurs even after performing the troubleshooting described 4. When the above troubleshooting does not solve the problem, check the following
above, replace the part listed below. items.
PRINT HEAD (p.281) Check if the Pump Unit is damaged.

Check if dust, paper dust, or foreign materials that absorbed ink is adhering to
the side of the printhead.
5. Change the PG setting to the wider setting.
NOTE: This may deteriorate the print quality.

SMUDGES ON THE BACKS OF PAGES HORIZONTAL WHITE OR BLACK STREAKS

When ink smudges appear on the backs of pages, perform the following items. When white or black streaks appear on the printed images in the Carriage movement
direction, check the following items.
1. Check if the paper is completely flat and free of folding or curl. Change the paper
with new one if any abnormality is found. 1. Printing Nozzle Check Pattern (Test Print Menu) (p.72)
Execute the NOZZLE CHECK in the Panel Setting menu to check if dot missing
2. Check the paper path for ink smudges, and clean the path if ink stain or smudges
exist or not.
are found.
If dot missing is found, run a head cleaning or perform an initial ink charging as
Surface of the PF Roller
necessary following the procedure below.
Surface of the Front Paper Eject Guide
Surface of the Rear Paper Guide (includes the switching knob) Execute “Cleaning” (p.357) by the Adjustment Program.
Surface of the Paper Eject Roller Execute “Power Cleaning” (p.99) in the Panel Setting menu.
Execute “Initial Ink Charge” (p.357) by the Adjustment Program.
C A U T IO N If the PAPER SIZE CHECK and the PAPER SKEW CHECK in 2. Adjustment
the Panel Setting menu are set to OFF, and the user-defined paper If dot missing is not found, carry out the following adjustments and check the
size is incorrect, printing on the platen surface may occur. result.
Check Alignment (p.381)
If the trouble appear on all colors, perform “Power Cleaning” (p.99) or “Initial
Ink Charge” (p.357). If misalignment is found in light magenta color, perform
3. Check the Ink Pads for borderless printing for any abnormality and correct them if the “SSCL” (Super Sonic Cleaning).
necessary.
980mm Band Feed Adjustment (p.354)
Deformation Print Image (p.384)
Not securely attached
Ink is accumulating on/around them
C H E C K Be sure to clean the platen and sub platen if they have smudges.
P O IN T

VERTICAL BANDS
When bands (inconsistencies in density, or partly grainy) appear on the printed images
in the paper feeding direction, check the following items.
Bi-D Adjustment
Carry out the Bi-D Adjustment using any one of the following tools.
HEAD ALIGNMENT in the Panel Setting menu
Printer driver
Adjustment Program
If the bands still appear even after the adjustment, fine-tune the setting value (plus or
minus 0.1 to 0.2 mm) for the THICKNESS NUMBER in the CUSTOM PAPER in the
Panel Setting menu.
INTRUSION OF AIR INTO THE INK TUBE

If intrusion of air into the Ink Tubes can be confirmed visually, perform the following
cleaning.
Cleaning How to Run the Cleaning

Power cleaning Panel setting menu or Maintenance menu
POWER CLEANING
Adjustment Program: CL4

CHAPTER
4
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
4.1 Overview 4.1.1 Precautions

Before starting the disassembly or reassembly of the product, read the following
This section describes procedures for disassembling the main components of the
precautions given under the headings “WARNING” and “CAUTION”.
product. Unless otherwise specified, disassembled units or components can be
reassembled by reversing the disassembly procedure. For safety, do not disable the cover sensor switch function that
W A R N IN G
stops the CR and PF Motor drive while the FRONT COVER
C H E C K The disassembly/assembly procedures are provided based on the ASSY. is open.
P O IN T Wide models; Stylus Pro 9400/9450/9800/9880/9880C. The This printer is equipped with a lithium battery. When handling
procedures for the Narrow models; Stylus Pro 7400/7450/7800/ the lithium battery, the following precautions should be
7880/7880C are given under the heading “CHECK POINT” only followed.
when they differ from those of the Wide models. • When replacing the battery, replace only with a specified
type of battery. Using a different type of battery may cause
Procedures which, if not strictly observed, could result in personal injury are excess heat or explosion.
described under the heading “WARNING”. • Dispose of used batteries according to manufacture’s
instructions and local regulations. Contact your local
“CAUTION” signals a precaution which, if ignored, could result in damage to government agency for information about battery disposal
equipment. and recycling.
Important tips for procedures are described under the heading “CHECK POINT”. • When disposing of the battery, be sure to securely cover the
(+) end of it with tape to prevent combustion or explosion.
If the assembly procedure is different from the reversed disassembly procedure, • Do not recharge the battery.
the correct procedure is described under the heading “REASSEMBLY”. • Do not use the battery if it is discolored or damaged, or if any
Any adjustments required after reassembly of components or parts are described leakage of electrolyte is observed.
under the heading “ADJUSTMENT REQUIRED”. Be sure to perform the • Do not dismantle, solder or heat the battery. Doing so could
specified adjustments with reference to Chapter 5 “ADJUSTMENT”. result in leakage of electrolyte, heat generation, or explosion.
• Do not heat the battery or dispose of it in fire.
When you have to remove any parts or components that are not described in this
• If the electrolyte leaked from the battery contacts with your
chapter, refer to the exploded diagram in the Appendix.
skin or gets into your eyes, rinse it off with clean water and
see a doctor immediately.
The power switch is installed on the secondary side of the
power circuit, so power is always supplied unless the power
cord is unplugged. Unless otherwise stated, be sure to unplug
the power code before disassembling or assembling the printer
to prevent electric shock and damage to the circuit.
Always wear gloves for disassembly and reassembly to avoid
injury from sharp metal edges.
If ink gets in your eye, flush the eye with fresh water and see a
doctor immediately.
Never touch the ink or wasted ink with bare hands. If ink
comes into contact with your skin, wash it off with soap and
water immediately. If irritation occurs, contact a physician.
Disassembly & Assembly Overview 217

C A U T IO N Provide sufficient work space for disassembling and C A U T IO N When reassembling the printer, make sure to route the FFCs
reassembling. and other cables as specified in this chapter. Failure to do so
Locate the printer on a stable and flat surface. may cause an unexpected contact of the cables with sharp metal
Be extremely careful to avoid a personal injury when moving edges, or lead to lower the noise immunity.
or carrying it as the printer is extremely heavy in weight. When When the printer has to be operated with the covers removed,
removing/reinstalling the feet from/to the main unit, the work take extra care not to get your fingers or clothes caught in
should be done by the number of people indicated below. moving parts.
• Stylus Pro 7400/7800: 48.9 kg The cutter blade is razor-sharp. Be especially careful when
(two or more persons are required) handling the cutter.
• Stylus Pro 7450/7880/7880C: 49.1 kg Carbide blade employed for the cutter blade is hard but brittle.
(two or more persons are required) Be careful not to hit it against metal parts of the printer as it
• Stylus Pro 9400/9450/9800/9880/9880C: 90.2 kg can be easily damaged.
(four or more persons are required) When you have to remove any parts or components that are
The ink-path-related components or parts should be firmly and provided as after-service-parts but are not described in this
securely reinstalled on the printer to prevent the ink from chapter, carefully observe how they are installed and make
leakage. sure to remember it before removing them.
Use only recommended tools for disassembly, assembly or When you removed any parts or components that are secured
adjustment of the printer. with black acetate tape or two-sided tape, be sure to reinstall
When air duster is used on the repair and the maintenance and secure them with the tape as exactly the same as they were.
work, the use of the air duster products containing the
inflammable gas is prohibited.
Apply lubricants and adhesives as specified.
Be careful not to soil the printer or the floor with the leaked ink
when removing the ink-path-related components or parts.
Spread a sheet of paper or cloth on the floor in advance.
Do not touch electrical circuit boards with bare hands as the
elements on the board are so sensitive that they can be easily
damaged by static electricity. If you have to handle the boards
with bare hands, use static electricity discharge equipment such
as anti-static wrist straps.
When reassembling the printer, make sure to connect the
connectors of the electric components or parts correctly and
securely. Use extreme care when connecting FFCs (flexible flat
cables). Improper connection of the FFCs, such as inserting
them diagonally into the connectors, could cause short-
circuiting and lead to breakdown of the electric elements on the
boards.

4.1.2 Recommended Tools

Up
To protect this product from damage, use the tools indicated in the following table.
Table 4-1. Specified Tools

Name Epson Part Number Note
Rear
Left Phillips screwdriver, No. 1 Commercially available ---
Phillips screwdriver, No. 2 Commercially available 250 mm or longer shaft
length is recommended.
Flat-blade screwdriver Commercially available ---
Front
Right Hexagonal Box driver Commercially available 5mm
Long-nose pliers Commercially available ---
Nipper Commercially available ---
Tweezers Commercially available ---
Hexagonal wrench*1 Supplied with the dedicated stand ---
(Commercially available)
Ink cartridges*2 T56xxxx*3 ---
Black ink conversion kit TBD To replace the black ink
Down
Maintenance tank C12C890191 ---
Note *1: The hexagonal wrench is necessary only when removing the feet from the main unit.
Figure 4-1. Orientation Definition
*2: Eight ink cartridges are required for every servicing.
*3: “xxxx” varies depending on the ink cartridge.

4.1.3 Recommended Screws Table 4-2. Recommended Screws

Name Color Definition
The following table indicates the screws used in the EPSON Stylus Pro 7400/7450/
7800/7880/7880C/9400/9450/9800/9880/9880C Printers. C.B.P. M3x6 Silver Phillips Bind Head P-tite Screw
C.P.S.(S-P2) M3x5 Silver Phillips Pan Head S-tite Screw with Spring Lock Washers
Table 4-2. Recommended Screws and Plane Washer 2
Name Color Definition C.P.S.(S-P2) Silver Phillips Pan Head S-tite Screw with Spring Lock Washers
Protective Screw Silver Special Screw M2.6x6 and Plane Washer 2
C.B.S.(O) M4x8 Silver Phillips Bind Head S-tite Screw with Outside Toothed Lock C.B.P. M3x8 Silver Phillips Bind Head P-tite Screw
Washers C.P.P. M2.6x6 Silver Phillips Pan Head P-tite Screw
C.C.P. M3x8 Black Phillips Cup Head P-tite Screw C.C.P. M3x6 Silver Phillips Cup Head P-tite Screw
C.B.S. M3x8 Silver Phillips Bind Head S-tite Screw C.P.P. M1.4x5 Silver Phillips Pan Head P-tite Screw
C.B.P.(P1) M4x12 Silver Phillips Bind Head P-tite Screw with Plane Washer 1 C.B.S. M3x10 Silver Phillips Bind Head S-tite Screw
C.B.P. M4x12 Silver Phillips Bind Head P-tite Screw C.P.S.(S-P2) M3x6 Silver Phillips Pan Head S-tite Screw with Spring Lock Washers
C.F.P. M4x12 Silver Phillips Flat Head P-tite Screw and Plane Washer 2
C.C.S. M4x8 Silver Phillips Cup Head S-tite Screw C.B.P. M2.6x6 Silver Phillips Bind Head P-tite Screw
C.C.S. M3x12 Silver Phillips Cup Head S-tite Screw CONNECTING White Special Screw
SCREW, M7
C.B.S. M3x6 Silver Phillips Bind Head S-tite Screw
CONNECTING Gold Special Screw
C.B.S. M4x6 Silver Phillips Bind Head S-tite Screw SCREW
C.B. M3x6 Silver Phillips Bind Head Screw
Hex socket screw Silver Special Screw
C.T.S. M4x6 Black Phillips Truss Head S-tite Screw
Roll bearing R screw Silver Special Screw
14
C.C.S. M4x10 Silver Phillips Cup Head S-tite Screw
and Plane Washer 2
and Plane Washer 2
C.C. M3x6 Silver Phillips Cup Head Machine Screw
C.C. M4x45 Silver Phillips Cup Head Machine Screw
and Plane Washer 2

4.2 Disassembly Procedure

C A U T IO N Disassembling the frame and some components of the printer is
prohibited because they are assembled with precise
measurements in 1/100 mm unit at the factory. Parts or
components allowed to be disassembled/reassembled are listed
with there part numbers on “Parts List” in Appendix. If you
disassemble and reassemble any one of the prohibited parts or
components, which is not listed on the Parts List, the printer
could result in serious non-recoverable error that requires
repair at the factory.
When servicing on-site, do not disassemble any parts or
components that are not described in this chapter.
The disassembly flowchart is given on the next page.
Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedure 221

START
PANEL ASSY. (p.229) Maintenance Tank (p.226) Spindle (p.228) H TOP COVER ASSY. (p.230)
Maintenance Tank (p.226) Spindle (p.228) H TOP COVER ASSY. (p.230) Ink Cartridges (p.225)
H TOP COVER ASSY. (p.230) BOARD ASSY., SUB (p.245) Ink Cartridges (p.225) I/H COVER R ASSY. (p.231)
Cutter (p.227) CR HP Sensor (p.253) I/H COVER L ASSY. (p.231) R SIDE COVER ASSY. (p.232)
FRONT COVER ASSY. (p.239) PG HP Sensor (p.254) L SIDE COVER ASSY. (p.233) BOARD ASSY., SUB; B (p.247)
Front Sensor (p.240) P Thick1 Sensor, P Thick2 Sensor (p.275) BOARD ASSY., SUB; C (p.248) CR BELT (p.249)
P Rear Sensor (p.276) SCALE, CR (p.260) I/H COVER L ASSY. (p.231)
CR Encoder Sensor (p.255) PF MOTOR ASSY. (p.269) L SIDE COVER ASSY. (p.233)
Cutter (p.227) PF Encoder Sensor (p.272) CR MOTOR ASSY. (p.252)
CUTTER SOLENOID ASSY. (p.257) SCALE, PF (p.274) HOLDER ASSY., IC, RIGHT (p.289)
P Edge Sensor (p.279) IM (Ink Mark) Sensor (p.277) PUMP CAP ASSY. (p.298)
PRINT HEAD (p.281) HOLDER ASSY., IC, LEFT (p.293) CLEANER, HEAD (p.301)
VALVE ASSY., HEAD; C (p.285) BOX ASSY., FLUSHING (L) (p.304) BOX ASSY., FLUSHING (R) (p.302)
Ink Cartridges (p.225) I/H COVER R ASSY. (p.231) L SIDE COVER ASSY. (p.233)
I/H COVER L ASSY. (p.231) PUMP CAP ASSY. (p.298)
COVER, REAR (p.234) BOARD ASSY., MAIN (p.241) BOX ASSY., FLUSHING (R) (p.302)
P/S BOARD ASSY. (p.243) SCALE, CR (p.260)
INLETS ASSY. (p.244) PRINT HEAD (p.281)
PUMP ASSY., SUPPLY (p.305) CR BELT (p.249)
P GUIDE L ASSY. (p.236) FRONT COVER ASSY. (p.239) VACUUM FAN ASSY. (p.266) CARRIAGE UNIT (p.261)
Spindle (p.228) ROLL TOP COVER (p.237)
Note : Parts or units indicated in broken lines do not mean that they can be omitted to disassemble.
They also should be disassembled for disassembling the following parts or units in the flow.
Figure 4-2. Disassembly Process Flowchart

4.2.1 Basic Operations Protective Metal Plate CARRIAGE ASSY.
4.2.1.1 Protective metal plate

1. Open the FRONT COVER ASSY.
2. Remove the screw that secures the protective metal plate on the left side of the
CARRIAGE ASSY. and remove the plate.
One protective screw
Protective Screw
3. Close the FRONT COVER ASSY.
When the printer should be repacked for transportation, be sure to

screw the protective metal plate to the CARRIAGE ASSY. and use
protection materials.
C H E C K The disassembly procedures on the following pages are described

P O IN T on the assumption that the protective metal plate has already been
removed.
FRONT COVER ASSY.
Figure 4-3. Removing the Protective metal plate

4.2.1.2 Unlocking/Locking the CARRIAGE ASSY. Right Side of the Printer
UNLOCKING THE CARRIAGE ASSY.

CARRIAGE ASSY.
2. Press the CUTTER CAP and unlock the CARRIAGE ASSY. See Figure 4-4.
CUTTER CAP
Figure 4-4. Unlocking the CARRIAGE ASSY.
LOCKING THE CARRIAGE ASSY.
1. Move the CARRIAGE ASSY. rightward. The unit is locked when you hear it
clicks at its rightmost position. See Figure 4-5.
Figure 4-5. Locking the CARRIAGE ASSY.

4.2.2 Consumables
KNOB, I/C, LOCK LEVER; C593
4.2.2.1 Ink Cartridges
1. Open the I/H COVER R and the I/H COVER L. See Figure 4-7.
2. Raise the two KNOB, I/C, LOCK LEVER; C593 to unlock the Ink Cartridges. See
Figure 4-7.
2
C A U T IO N When removing the Ink Cartridges in the next step, the following
precautions must be followed.
Never touch the IC chips of the Ink Cartridges.Doing so may 2
cause a malfunction of the printer. 1
Never touch the ink supply port of the Ink Cartridges as ink 1
may leak from there.
I/H COVER L I/H COVER R
Figure 4-7. Unlocking the Ink Cartridges
Ink Supply
Port
IC Chip Ink Cartridges
Figure 4-6. Handling the Ink Cartridges
3. Remove the all Ink Cartridges from the left and right Cartridge Slots. See Figure
4-8.
Cartridge Slot
Figure 4-8. Removing the Ink Cartridges

4.2.2.2 Maintenance Tank

C A U T IO N When removing the Maintenance Tank in the next step, be sure not
to touch the IC chip on the tank. Doing so may cause a malfunction
of the printer.
Maintenance
Tank
C H E C K The Stylus Pro 9400/9450/9800/9880/9880C have two Maintenance
P O IN T Tanks, and the Stylus Pro 7400/7450/7800/7880/7880C have one
tank on its right side.
1. Pull out the Maintenance Tank while holding the printer, and remove the tank
putting your other hand on it not to tilt it.
IC Chip
Figure 4-9. Removing the Maintenance Tank

4.2.2.3 Cutter Cutter Cap

1. After turning the printer ON, press and hold the Paper Source button for 3
seconds or more to put the printer into the cutter replacement mode.
2. The CARRIAGE ASSY. will move to the cutter replacement position.
3. Open the FRONT COVER ASSY. 4-1
4-2
C A U T IO N Beware of the following items when performing the next step.
Push the boss on the Cutter lightly. Do not push it too much as
the blade edge may damage the printer’s internal components.
The Cutter may pop up if you push the Cutter too much and
release it suddenly as a spring is incorporated into the Cutter.
Be careful not to do that.
Be careful not to drop the Cutter or hit it against hard object
such as metal parts, or the cutter blade may chip.
4. Press down the boss on the Cutter lightly and turn the Cutter Cap clockwise. See Figure 4-10. Removing the Cutter (1)
Figure 4-10.
5. Remove the Cutter from the CARRIAGE ASSY. See Figure 4-11.
Cutter
Figure 4-11. Removing the Cutter (2)

4.2.2.4 Spindle ROLL TOP COVER Spindle
REMOVING THE IM SPINDLE
1. Open the ROLL TOP COVER.

2. Remove the Spindle. See Figure 4-13.
DISASSEMBLING THE SPINDLE
1. Remove the Spindle.

2. Remove the Adjustable Paper Stopper (black) from the Spindle together with the Figure 4-13. Removing the Spindle
Attachment. See Figure 4-14.
3. Release the two hooked tabs that secure the Attachment, and remove it from the Hooked
Adjustable Paper Stopper (black) and the Fixed Paper Stopper (gray). See Figure tabs
4-14.
Match the mark on the Attachment with the mark each on

the Adjustable Paper Stopper (black) and the Fixed Paper Stopper
(gray).
Adjustable Fixed Paper

Paper Stopper Stopper
(black) (gray)
Attachment
Figure 4-14. Disassembling the Spindle

Figure 4-12. Reinstalling the Attachment

4.2.3 Removing the Panel Unit and Housing Hooked tabs
4.2.3.1 PANEL ASSY.

1. Unlock the CARRIAGE ASSY. and move the unit to the center. See Section on
page 224.
C A U T IO N When performing the next step, be careful not to pull the PANEL
ASSY. too much as it is still connected to the printer with the FFC.
PANEL ASSY.
2. Release the two hooked tabs that secure the PANEL ASSY. from the inner side,
and remove the PANEL ASSY. See Figure 4-16. Figure 4-16. Hooked Tabs for Securing the PANEL ASSY.
First attach the two hooked tabs of the PANEL ASSY. to the R
SIDE COVER ASSY., and then push the front side edge of the
PANEL ASSY. into the R SIDE COVER ASSY.
R SIDE COVER ASSY.
Connector
FFC
Figure 4-17. Removing the PANEL ASSY.
Figure 4-15. Reinstalling the PANEL ASSY.
3. Disconnect the FFC from the PANEL ASSY. See Figure 4-17.

4.2.3.2 H TOP COVER ASSY.

2. Remove the four screws that secure the H TOP COVER ASSY.
Four C.B.S.(O) M4 x 8 screws
3. Slide the H TOP COVER ASSY. toward the front side and then lift it to remove it.
Put the left and right edges of the H TOP COVER ASSY. on the C.B.S.(O) 4x8 C.B.S.(O) 4x8
edge each of the L SIDE COVER ASSY. and the R SIDE COVER
ASSY.
3-2
L SIDE COVER R SIDE COVER

ASSY. ASSY.
3-1
H TOP COVER ASSY.
Edge
Edge
Figure 4-18. Reinstalling the H TOP COVER ASSY.
C.B.S.(O) 4x8 C.B.S.(O) 4x8
Figure 4-19. Removing the H TOP COVER ASSY.

4.2.3.3 I/H COVER R, I/H COVER L 4: C.B.S. 3x8
I/H COVER R ASSY.

I/H COVER R
1. Remove the Ink Cartridges. See Section 4.2.2.1 on page 225. ASSY.
2
2. Lower the KNOB, I/C, LOCK LEVER; C593 to the position shown in the figure.
See Figure 4-20. KNOB, I/C, LOCK
LEVER; C593
3. Remove the screw that secures the KNOB, I/C, LOCK LEVER; C593 and remove
it. See Figure 4-20.
One C.C.P. M3 x 8 screw (black)
3: C.C.P. 3x8 (Black)
4. Remove the two screws that secure the I/H COVER R ASSY. See Figure 4-20.
Two C.B.S. M3 x 8 screws
5. Release the two tabs that secure the I/H COVER R ASSY. and remove it. See
Figure 4-20. Tabs
Figure 4-20. Removing the I/H COVER R ASSY.
I/H COVER L ASSY. 4: C.B.S. 3x8
1. Remove the Ink Cartridges. See Section 4.2.2.1 on page 225.

I/H COVER L
2. Lower the KNOB, I/C, LOCK LEVER; C593 to the position shown in the figure. ASSY.
See Figure 4-21.
2
3. Remove the screw that secures the KNOB, I/C, LOCK LEVER; C593 and remove
it. See Figure 4-21.
KNOB, I/C, LOCK
One C.C.P. M3 x 8 screw (black) LEVER; C593
4. Remove the two screws that secure the I/H COVER L ASSY. See Figure 4-21.
3: C.C.P. 3x8 (Black)
5. Release the two tabs that secure the I/H COVER L ASSY. and remove it. See
Figure 4-21.
Tabs
Figure 4-21. Removing the I/H COVER L ASSY.

4.2.3.4 R SIDE COVER ASSY.

10: C.F.P. 4x12 PRESSURE LEVER
PRESSURE LEVER
KNOB
C A U T IO N Ink may leak from the Cleaning Unit while or after removing the R
SIDE COVER ASSY. Have a waste cloth beforehand to wipe out 6 8
the leaked ink. When the R SIDE COVER ASSY. must be removed
for many hours, set the Maintenance Tank to collect ink leaked
from the Cleaning Unit.
10: C.B.P. 4x12 6: C.B.P.(P1) 4x12

1. Remove the PANEL ASSY. See Section 4.2.3.1 on page 229.
2. Remove the Maintenance Tank. See Section 4.2.2.2 on page 226.
3. Remove the Spindle. See Section 4.2.2.4 on page 228.
4. Remove the H Top Cover Assy. See Section 4.2.3.2 on page 230.
5. Remove the I/H COVER R ASSY. See Section on page 231.
6. Move the PRESSURE LEVER KNOB to its rear end position, and remove the R SIDE COVER ASSY.
screw that secures the knob.
One C.B.P. (P1) M4 x 12 screw
7. Move the PRESSURE LEVER KNOB to its front end position and remove it. 10
8. Move the PRESSURE LEVER to its rear end position.
9. Remove the Side Cover Screw Cap.
C A U T IO N Never forget to reattach the Side Cover Screw Cap, or the printer
may malfunction due to noise occurred in the internal electric
circuits. The caps are necessary to prevent the noise.
10. Remove the eight screws that secure the R SIDE COVER ASSY. and remove it.
Three C.B.P. M4 x 12 screws 9
One C.F.P. M4 x 12 screw

10: C.B.P. 4x12
Four C.C.S. M4 x 8 screws
Make sure that there is no gap between the R SIDE COVER ASSY. Side Cover
and the frame, then screw the R SIDE COVER ASSY. Screw Cap 10: C.C.S. 4x8
Figure 4-22. Removing the R SIDE COVER ASSY.

4.2.3.5 L SIDE COVER ASSY.

C.F.P. 4x12
C A U T IO N Ink may leak from the Cleaning Unit while or after removing the L
SIDE COVER ASSY. Have a waste cloth beforehand to wipe out
the leaked ink. When the L SIDE COVER ASSY. must be removed
for many hours, set the Maintenance Tank to collect ink leaked
from the Cleaning Unit.
C H E C K The Stylus Pro 9400/9450/9800/9880/9880C have two Maintenance

C.B.P. 4x12
P O IN T Tanks, and the Stylus Pro 7400/7450/7800/7880/7880C have one
tank on its right side.
L SIDE COVER ASSY.

1. Remove the Maintenance Tank. See Section 4.2.2.2 on page 226.
3. Remove the H Top Cover Assy. See Section 4.2.3.2 on page 230.
4. Remove the I/H COVER L ASSY. See Section on page 231.
5. Remove the Side Cover Screw Cap. 6
C A U T IO N Never forget to reattach the Side Cover Screw Cap, or the printer
may malfunction due to noise occurred in the internal electric
circuits. The caps are necessary to prevent the noise.
6. Remove the eight screws that secure the L SIDE COVER ASSY. and remove it.
Three C.B.P. M4 x 12 screws
One C.F.P. M4 x 12 screw
Four C.C.S. M4 x 8 screws 5
Make sure that there is no gap between the L SIDE COVER ASSY.
and the frame, then screw the L SIDE COVER ASSY. C.B.P. 4x12
Side Cover
C.C.S. 4x8 Screw Cap
Figure 4-23. Removing the L SIDE COVER ASSY.

4.2.3.6 COVER, REAR Right Rear of the Printer

C.C.S 3x12
1. Remove the two screws that secure the COVER, CONNECTOR, UPPER; B and
remove it. See Figure 4-24.
Two C.C.S. M3 x 12 screws
2. Remove the two screws that secure the COVER, I/F and remove it together with
the GROUND PLATE, IF. See Figure 4-25.
COVER, CONNECTOR, UPPER; B
Figure 4-24. Removing the COVER, CONNECTOR, UPPER; B
GROUND PLATE, IF
COVER, I/F
C.B.S 3x6
Figure 4-25. Removing the COVER, I/F and the GROUND PLATE, IF

3. Open the ROLL TOP COVER.

4. Remove the 14 screws that secure the COVER, REAR.
Ten C.B.S. M4 x 6 screw
One C.B.S. M3 x 6 screw
One C.B. M3 x 6 screw COVER, REAR
Two hex socket screws
C H E C K The Stylus Pro 7400/7450/7800/7880/7880C use ten screws to secure

P O IN T the COVER, REAR. 3
Six C.B.S. M4 x 6 screws 5
One C.B.S. M3 x 6 screw Guide

One C.B. M3 x 6 screw Pins
Two hex socket screws
5. Close the ROLL TOP COVER. 6

6. Release the COVER, REAR from the two guide pins and remove the COVER,
REAR.
C.B. 3x6
6
C.B.S. 3x6
C.B.S. 4x6
Hex socket screw
Figure 4-26. Removing the COVER, REAR

4.2.3.7 P GUIDE L ASSY.

C A U T IO N Hold the P GUIDE L ASSY. with your hand while removing the
screws in the next step, as it may slip off the printer.
1. Remove the four screws that secure the P GUIDE L ASSY. and remove it.
Four C.T.S. M4 x 6 screws (black)
P GUIDE L ASSY.
C.T.S 4x6 (Black)
Figure 4-27. Removing the P GUIDE L ASSY.

4.2.3.8 ROLL TOP COVER Left Side of the Printer

2. Remove the two screws that secure the ROLL TRAY L ASSY. and remove it. See
Figure 4-28. ROLL TRAY L C.C.S. 4x8
ASSY.
3. Remove the E-RING, 4 that secures the TOP COVER SPACER and remove it.
See Figure 4-29.
C H E C K The Stylus Pro 7400/7450/7800/7880/7880C do not have the

P O IN T TOP COVER SPACER and the E-RING,4.
While performing the next step for the Stylus Pro Stylus Pro
7400/7450/7800/7880/7880C, hold the ROLL TOP COVER
with your hand as it may slip off the printer.
Left Side of the Printer

4. Remove the three screws that secure the ROLL TRAY R ASSY. and remove it.
See Figure 4-29.
Figure 4-28. Removing the ROLL TRAY L ASSY.
One roll bearing R screw 14
Right Side of the Printer
TOP COVER SPACER
ROLL TRAY L ASSY.

Roll bearing R screw 14
E-RING, 4
C.C.S. 4x8
Figure 4-29. Removing the ROLL TRAY R ASSY.

5. Slide the ROLL TOP COVER leftward and remove the UNDULATE WASHER
and the DAMPER DISK. See Figure 4-31. DAMPER DISK
C A U T IO N Be sure to reattach the UNDULATE WASHER and the ROLL TOP COVER UNDULATE WASHER
DAMPER DISK in the correct order.
5-2
5-1
Figure 4-31. Removing the UNDULATE WASHER and DAMPER DISK

DAMPER DISK
UNDULATE WASHER
Left Break Pin Right Break Pin
Figure 4-30. Reinstalling the UNDULATE WASHER and

DAMPER DISK
When performing the next step, be careful not to damage the

ROLL TOP COVER.
C H E C K The next step is not required for the Stylus Pro 7400/7450/7800/
6-2
P O IN T 7880/7880C as they do not have the break pins. 6-3 6-1
6. Press the ROLL TOP COVER to the left side to release its right end from the right
break pin, and remove the ROLL TOP COVER releasing its left end from the left
break pin. See Figure 4-32.
Figure 4-32. Removing the ROLL TOP COVER

4.2.3.9 FRONT COVER ASSY. FRONT COVER ASSY.

2. Remove the four screws that secure the FRONT COVER ASSY. and remove it
together with the two Reinforcing Hinges.
Make sure that the FRONT COVER, HINGE, L/R and the FRONT
COVER SPRING L/R are in the statuses shown in the figure below,
and then install the FRONT COVER ASSY.
Right Side of the Printer FRONT COVER,

HINGE, L C.C.S. 4x10 C.C.S. 4x10
FRONT COVER
SPRING L
Reinforcing Hinge Reinforcing Hinge
Figure 4-34. Removing the FRONT COVER ASSY.
Left Side of the Printer FRONT COVER,

HINGE, R
FRONT COVER
SPRING R
Figure 4-33. Checking the FRONT COVER, HINGE and FRONT

COVER SPRING

4.2.3.10 Front Sensor Left Side of the Printer

FRONT SENSOR COVER
2. Remove the screw that secures the FRONT SENSOR COVER. See Figure 4-36.
One C.C.S. M3 x 8 screw
3. Release the tab that secures the FRONT SENSOR COVER and turn it in the Tab
direction shown in the figure. See Figure 4-36.
Set the guide pin of the FRONT SENSOR COVER into the
positioning hole on the frame.
Insert the tab of the FRONT SENSOR COVER into the slot of
the frame. C.C.S 3x8
Guide Pin
Figure 4-36. Removing the FRONT SENSOR COVER
Hooked tabs
FRONT SENSOR
Tab
Figure 4-35. Reinstalling the FRONT SENSOR COVER
4. Release the two hooked tabs that secure the FRONT SENSOR and remove it. See
Connector
Figure 4-37.
5. Remove the connector from the FRONT SENSOR. See Figure 4-37.
Figure 4-37. Removing the FRONT SENSOR

4.2.4 Removing the Circuit Boards Connect the FFCs to their correct positions matching the numbers
written on the FFCs with those printed on the board as shown in
4.2.4.1 BOARD ASSY., MAIN Figure 4-39.
CN17, CN18, CN20, CN21, CN23
C A U T IO N Do not insert FFCs into the connectors at an angle. Doing so may
damage, short, or break the terminals in the connector resulting in
a breakdown of the elements on the board.
1. Remove the Rear Cover. See Section 4.2.3.6 on page 234.

2. Disconnect the following connectors and FFCs from the BOARD ASSY., MAIN.
Table 4-3. Connectors and FFCs Connected to the BOARD ASSY., MAIN
Number of
Connector No. Color Destination
Pins
CN1 White 14 P/S BOARD ASSY. (CN001)
Figure 4-38. Reconnecting FFCs
CN9 --- 20 PANEL ASSY.
CN10 --- 3 P Rear Sensor
CN13 White 3 Relay harness (CR MOTOR ASSY.) CN20 CN21 CN25 CN1 CN9 CN10
CN14 White 2 Relay harness (PF MOTOR ASSY.)
CN15 Black 4 Relay harness (Pressure Motor)
CN16 White 4 Relay harness (Pump Motor)
CN18
CN17 --- 31 BOARD ASSY., SUB (CN1)
CN17 CN23 CN27 CN26
CN18 --- 31 BOARD ASSY., SUB (CN2) CN31
CN20 --- 31 BOARD ASSY., SUB (CN4)
CN15
CN21 --- 26 BOARD ASSY., SUB; B (CN1)
CN23 --- 26 BOARD ASSY., SUB; C (CN1)
CN16
CN25 Black 3 Relay harness (Right VACUUM FAN ASSY.)
CN14
CN26 Red 3 Relay harness (Middle VACUUM FAN ASSY.)
CN13
CN27 Yellow 3 Relay harness (Left VACUUM FAN ASSY.)
CN31 White 3 Regulator Solenoid (relay harness)
BOARD ASSY., MAIN
Figure 4-39. Connector Locations

3. Remove the seven screws that secure the BOARD ASSY., MAIN and remove it.
C.C.S. 3x6
Seven C.C.S. M3 x 6 screws
C A U T IO N Do not put the board directly on conductive surfaces with its

side that components are soldered to facing down.
A lithium battery is preinstalled on the boards provided as
service parts. So, direct contact between the board surface that
components are soldered to and conductive materials, or
putting conductive materials on the circuits must be avoided.
A D J U S T M E N T Whenever the BOARD ASSY., MAIN is replaced, the

R E Q U IR E D
corresponding adjustments must be carried out. See Chapter 5 on
page 306.
C.C.S. 3x6
Figure 4-40. Removing the BOARD ASSY., MAIN

4.2.4.2 P/S BOARD ASSY. C.C.S. 3x6 P/S BOARD ASSY.
W A R N IN G When removing the P/S BOARD ASSY., do not start the work
immediately after disconnecting the AC cable. Wait for at least five
minutes for the electrolytic capacitor to finish discharging residual
charges.
CN001
1. Remove the Rear Cover. See Section 4.2.3.6 on page 234. CN301 Connector
Connector
2. Remove the all connectors on the P/S BOARD ASSY.
Table 4-4. Connectors on the P/S BOARD ASSY.

Number of
Pins
CN001 White 2 INLET ASSY. C.C.S. 3x6
CN301 White 14 BOARD ASSY., MAIN (CN1) Figure 4-41. Removing the P/S BOARD ASSY.
3. Remove the eight screws that secure the P/S BOARD ASSY., and remove it.
Eight C.C.S. M3 x 6 screws
A D J U S T M E N T Whenever the P/S BOARD ASSY. is replaced, the corresponding

R E Q U IR E D
adjustments must be carried out. See Chapter 5 on page 306.

4.2.4.3 INLETS ASSY.

W A R N IN G When removing the INLET ASSY., do not start the work 2: C.C.S. 4x8 INLET ASSY.
Retaining Clip
immediately after disconnecting the AC cable. Wait for at least five
minutes for the electrolytic capacitor to finish discharging residual
charges.
1. Remove the Rear Cover. See Section 4.2.3.6 on page 234.

2. Remove the screw that secures the grounding wire.
One C.C.S. M4 x 8 screw 5
Tab
3. Disconnect the connector of the INLET ASSY. from the P/S BOARD ASSY., and
release the INLET ASSY harness and the grounding wire from the retaining clip. Connector Grounding 4: C.C.S. 4x8
Wire
4. Remove the screw that secures the INLET ASSY.
One C.C.S. M4 x 8 screw P/S BOARD ASSY.
5. Slide the INLET ASSY leftwards to release its right bottom tab from the notch, Figure 4-42. Removing the INLET ASSY.
and remove the INLET ASSY.

4.2.4.4 BOARD ASSY., SUB

1. Remove the H Top Cover. See Section 4.2.3.2 on page 230. 4-1
2. Unlock the CARRIAGE ASSY. and move the unit to the center. See Section
4.2.1.2 on page 224. 4-2
3. Loosen the screw that secures the CR COVER ASSY.
4. Lift the right side of the CR Cover to release it from the tab and remove the CR 3
COVER ASSY.
One C.P.S.(S-P2) M3 x 8 screw
C A U T IO N When reinstalling the CR COVER ASSY., be careful not to trap

any of the harnesses between the cover and the main unit.
Tab CR COVER ASSY.
Figure 4-43. Removing the CR COVER ASSY.
5. Disconnect the all connectors and FFCs from the BOARD ASSY., SUB. See
Figure 4-44. CN4 CN1 CN6
Table 4-5. Connectors and FFCs Connected to the BOARD ASSY., SUB
CN7
Connector Number Connector Number
Color Destination Color Destination
No. of Pins No. of Pins CN12
BOARD
Cutter CN13
CN1 --- 31 ASSY., MAIN CN7 White 2
Solenoid Assy.
(CN17)
CN10
BOARD
IM (Ink Mark)
CN2 --- 31 ASSY., MAIN CN8 --- 4 CN9
Sensor
(CN18)
CR Encoder
CN3 --- --- Not used CN9 --- 5 CN8 CN2 CN5
Sensor
BOARD
CN4 --- 31 ASSY., MAIN CN10 Red 4 P Edge Sensor Figure 4-44. Connector Locations
(CN20)
CN5 --- 31 Print Head CN12 Black 2 PG HP Sensor
CN6 --- 31 Print Head CN13 White 2 CR HP Sensor

Connect the FFCs to their correct positions matching the numbers C.C.P. 3x8
written on the FFCs with those printed on the board as shown in
Figure 4-44.
CN1, CN2, CN4, CN5, CN6
Grounding C.P.S.(S-P2) 3x14 BOARD ASSY., SUB

Terminal
Figure 4-46. Removing the BOARD ASSY., SUB
Figure 4-45. Reconnecting FFCs
6. Remove the four screws that secure the BOARD ASSY., SUB and remove the
C594 SUB BOARD.
Three C.C.P. M3 x 8 screws
Secure the grounding terminal to the board with the C.P.S. (S-P2)
M3 x 14 screw.
A D J U S T M E N T Whenever the BOARD ASSY., SUB is replaced, the corresponding

R E Q U IR E D
adjustments must be carried out. See Chapter 5 on page 306.

4.2.4.5 BOARD ASSY., SUB; B

1. Remove the R SIDE COVER ASSY. See Section 4.2.3.4 on page 232. CN1
2. Disconnect the all connectors and FFCs from the BOARD ASSY., SUB; B. See
CN13 CN12
Figure 4-47.
Table 4-6. Connectors and FFCs Connected to the BOARD ASSY., SUB; B CN6
Number of
Connector No. Color Destination CN7
Pins
CN1 --- 26 BOARD ASSY., MAIN (CN21) CN20
CN8
CN5 Blue 2 I/C LEVER SENSOR R
CN6 --- 7 CSIC RELAY Photo black (matte black)*1*2 CN5
CN9
(R1) BOARD Cyan*3
CN7 --- 7 CSIC RELAY Cyan*1*2
CN10
(R2) BOARD Cyan*3
CN8 --- 7 CSIC RELAY Magenta*1
(R3) BOARD Vivid Magenta*2
Yellow*3 Figure 4-47. Connector Locations
CN9 --- 7 CSIC RELAY Yellow*1*2
Right Side of the Printer BOARD ASSY.,
(R4) BOARD Yellow*3 SUB; B
CN10 --- 7 Maintenance Tank
CN12 Red 3 P Thick1 Sensor
CN13 Yellow 3 PG Thick2 Sensor
CN20 Black 3 Pump Phase Sensor
Note *1: Stylus Pro 7800/9800

*2: Stylus Pro 7880/7880C/9880/9880C
*3: Stylus Pro 7400/7450/9400/9450 C.C.S. 3x8
3. Remove the four screws that secure the BOARD ASSY., SUB; B and remove it.
See Figure 4-48.
Figure 4-48. Removing the BOARD ASSY., SUB; B

4.2.4.6 BOARD ASSY., SUB; C CN15 CN5
C H E C K BOARD ASSY., SUB; C for the Stylus Pro 7450/7880/7880C/9450/

P O IN T 9880/9880C is covered with a box-shaped lumiler to protect the
board from ink mist.
CN10
1. Remove the L Side Cover Assy. See Section 4.2.3.5 on page 233.
2. Disconnect the all connectors and FFCs from the BOARD ASSY., SUB; C. See CN1 CN16
Figure 4-49.
Table 4-7. Connectors and FFCs Connected to the BOARD ASSY., SUB; C
Number of
Pins
CN1 --- 26 BOARD ASSY., MAIN (CN23)
CN5 Blue 2 I/C LEVER SENSOR L
CN6 --- 7 CSIC RELAY Light light black*1*2 CN6 CN7 CN8 CN9 CN17
(L1) BOARD Matte black*3 Figure 4-49. Connector Locations
CN7 --- 7 CSIC RELAY Light magenta*1
(L2) BOARD Vivid Light magenta*2
Matte black*3 Left Side of the Printer C.C. 3x8
CN8 --- 7 CSIC RELAY Light cyan*1*2
(L3) BOARD Magenta*3
CN9 --- 7 CSIC RELAY Light black*1*2
(L4) BOARD Magenta*3
CN10 White 4 PF Encoder Sensor
CN15 Red 3 Pressure Sensor
CN16 Black 2 Front Sensor
CN17 --- 7 Maintenance Tank*4
Note *1: Stylus Pro 7800/9800

*2: Stylus Pro 7880/7880C/9880/9880C
*3: Stylus Pro 7400/7450/9400/9450
BOARD ASSY., SUB; C
*4: Stylus Pro 9400/9450/9800/9880/9880C only
3. Remove the four screws that secure the BOARD ASSY., SUB; C and remove it. Figure 4-50. Removing the BOARD ASSY., SUB; C
See Figure 4-50.
Four C.C. M3 x 6 screws

4.2.5 Removing the Carriage Mechanism

Tension Nut Plate
4.2.5.1 CR BELT
1. Remove the R SIDE COVER ASSY. See Section 4.2.3.4 on page 232.
2. Remove the CR COVER ASSY. See Section 4.2.4.4 on page 245.
C H E C K Before releasing the tension of the CR BELT in the next step,

P O IN T remember the tension level pointed out by the scale on the Driven
Pulley Tension Plate. When reinstalling the CR BELT, adjusting CR BELT
the belt tension can be made quickly by putting the scale to the
same position.
Driven Pulley Tension Plate
C.C. 4x45
Figure 4-52. Releasing the CR BELT Tension

Figure 4-51. Belt Tension Level Scale on the Driven Pulley Tension
Plate
CR MOTOR ASSY.
Pinion Gear
3. Loosen the screw that secures the Driven Pulley Tension Plate until the screw end
does not protrude from the Tension Nut Plate, and release the tension of the CR
BELT. See Figure 4-52.
One C.C. M4 x 45 screw
4. Remove the CR BELT from the pinion gear of the CR MOTOR ASSY. See Figure
4-53.
Figure 4-53. Removing the CR BELT (1)

C A U T IO N When performing the next step, be careful not to lose the Bearing
Retainer and the Driven Pulley Shaft as they may come off the CR CR DRIVE PULLEY ASSY.
DRIVE PULLEY ASSY. If they come off, reattach them with
reference to the figure below.
Bearing Retainer
Driven Pulley Shaft
Notches
Figure 4-54. Reassembling the CR DRIVE PULLEY ASSY. Figure 4-55. Removing the CR BELT (2)
5. Remove the CR DRIVE PULLEY ASSY. and the CR BELT from the two notches MAIN TUBE HOLDER
of the Driven Pulley Tension Plate, and remove the CR BELT from the CR Guide Pins
DRIVE PULLEY ASSY. See Figure 4-55.
TUBE, SUPPLY, INK
6. Remove the two screws that secure the MAIN TUBE HOLDER. See Figure 4-56.
Two C.P.S.(S-P2) M3 x 8 screws
Set the two positioning holes of the MAIN TUBE HOLDER onto
the two guide pins. See Figure 4-56.
C.P.S.(S-P2) 3x8
Figure 4-56. Screws for the MAIN TUBE HOLDER

7. Tilt the MAIN TUBE HOLDER frontward and pull out the CR BELT from the
retainer of the CARRIAGE ASSY.
A D J U S T M E N T Whenever the CR BELT is reinstalled or replaced, the

R E Q U IR E D
corresponding adjustment must be carried out. See Chapter 5 on
page 306.
Retainer
Figure 4-57. Removing the CR BELT (3)

4.2.5.2 CR MOTOR ASSY. Left Side of the Printer Retaining Clips

2. Remove the CR BELT from the pinion gear of the CR MOTOR ASSY. See
Section 4.2.5.1 on page 249.
3. Disconnect the CR MOTOR ASSY. connector from the relay connector, and
release the CR MOTOR ASSY. harness from the two retaining clips. See Figure
4-58.

Hold the CR MOTOR ASSY. with your hand while removing
the screws as it may slip off the printer.
Be careful not to damage the pinion gear of the CR MOTOR
ASSY.
Exercise care to avoid deforming or damaging the SCALE, PF.
See Figure 4-59.
Relay Connector
4. Remove the three screws that secure the CR MOTOR ASSY. and remove it. See Figure 4-58. Releasing the CR MOTOR ASSY. Harness
Figure 4-59.
Three C.P.S.(S-P2) M4 x 8 screws Harness Outlet C.P.S.(S-P2) 3x8
Replace the SCALE. CR at the timing described below. See

Section 4.2.5.7 on page 260.
• Stylus Pro 7400/7450/7800/7880/7880C:
Every other time the CR MOTOR ASSY. is replaced CR MOTOR ASSY.
• Stylus Pro 9400/9450/9800/9880/9880C:
Each time the CR MOTOR ASSY. is replaced
Reinstall the CR MOTOR ASSY. so that the harness outlet of
the assy. faces up. See Figure 4-59.
A D J U S T M E N T Whenever the CR MOTOR ASSY. is reinstalled or replaced, the

R E Q U IR E D Pinion Gear
page 306.
SCALE, PF
Figure 4-59. Removing the CR MOTOR ASSY.

4.2.5.3 CR HP Sensor
1. Remove the MAIN TUBE HOLDER. See Section 4.2.5.1 on page 249.
C A U T IO N When performing the next step, be careful not to pull out the MAIN Connector
TUBE HOLDER forcibly as TUBE, SUPPLY, INKs are routed
inside the holder.
TUBE, SUPPLY, INK

CR HP Sensor
Hooked Tabs
Figure 4-60. Handling the MAIN TUBE HOLDER
2. Pull out the MAIN TUBE HOLDER frontward, and release the three hooked tabs
that secure the CR HP Sensor and remove the sensor.
3. Disconnect the connector from the CR HP Sensor.
Figure 4-61. Removing the CR HP Sensor

4.2.5.4 PG HP Sensor PG HP Sensor

1. Remove the MAIN TUBE HOLDER. See Section 4.2.5.1 on page 249.
Connector
C A U T IO N When performing the next step, be careful not to pull out the MAIN
TUBE HOLDER forcibly as TUBE, SUPPLY, INKs are routed
inside the holder.
TUBE, SUPPLY, INK
Hooked Tabs
Figure 4-62. Handling the MAIN TUBE HOLDER
2. Pull out the MAIN TUBE HOLDER frontward, and release the three hooked tabs
that secure the PG HP Sensor and remove the sensor.
3. Disconnect the connector from the PG HP Sensor.
Figure 4-63. Removing the PG HP Sensor

4.2.5.5 CR Encoder Sensor SCALE, CR

1. Remove the H TOP COVER ASSY. See Section 4.2.3.2 on page 230. C.P.S.(S-P2) 3x8
page 224.
C A U T IO N When performing the next step, be careful not to damage the

SCALE, CR.
3. Remove the screw that secures the CR ENCODER HOLDER and remove it.
One C.P.S.(S-P2) M3 x 8 screw CR ENCODER HOLDER
Set the two guide pins on the CR ENCODER HOLDER into

the positioning holes on the frame.
Reassembly
Guide Pins
Figure 4-65. Removing the CR ENCODER HOLDER
Figure 4-64. Reinstalling the CR ENCODER HOLDER
After reinstalling the CR ENCODER HOLDER, make sure

that the SCALE, CR is properly inserted into the slit of the CR
Encoder Sensor. See Figure 4-65.

4. Disconnect the FFC from the CR Encoder Sensor connector.

5. Remove the screw that secures the CR Encoder Sensor and remove it. CR Encoder Sensor Connector
One C.B.P. M3 x 6 screw
Set the two positioning holes of the CR Encoder Sensor onto the two
guide pins.
FFC
A D J U S T M E N T Whenever the CR Encoder Sensor is reinstalled or replaced, the

R E Q U IR E D
page 306.
Guide Pins C.B.P. 3x6
Figure 4-66. Removing the CR Encoder Sensor

4.2.5.6 CUTTER SOLENOID ASSY. CUTTER SOLENOID

ASSY. harness
1. Disconnect the connector of the CUTTER SOLENOID ASSY. from the BOARD
ASSY, SUB. See Section 4.2.4.4 on page 245.
2. Pull out the harness of the CUTTER SOLENOID ASSY. through the notch of the
CR BOARD HOLDER. See Figure 4-67.
3. Remove the CR ENCODER HOLDER. See Section 4.2.5.5 on page 255.
4. Cut the TILAP and release the harness, FFC, and the grounding wire. See Figure
4-68.
Secure the following harnesses, FFCs, and the grounding wire with
a TILAP at the position shown in the figure. See Figure 4-68.
CR BOARD HOLDER
CUTTER SOLENOID ASSY. harness
P Edge Sensor harness Notch
CR Encoder Sensor FFC
IM Sensor FFC Figure 4-67. Pulling Out the CUTTER SOLENOID ASSY. Harness
Grounding wire (connected between the BOARD ASSY, SUB
and the CARRIAGE ASSY.)
Guide Pin TILAP
5. Remove the three screws that secure the CUTTER HOLDER ASSY. and remove
it. See Figure 4-68. C.P.S.(S-P2) 3x5
Three C.P.S.(S-P2) M3 x 5 screws
Set the two positioning holes of the CUTTER HOLDER ASSY. onto
the two guide pins. See Figure 4-68.
Guide Pin
CUTTER HOLDER ASSY.
Figure 4-68. Removing the CUTTER HOLDER ASSY.

6. Release the harness of the CUTTER SOLENOID ASSY. from the retaining clip
CUTTER SOLENOID
and the hooked tab of the IM Sensor Cover. See Figure 4-70. ASSY. harness
C.C.P. 3x8
7. Remove the three screws that secure the CUTTER HOLDER. See Figure 4-70.
CUTTER HOLDER
8. Pull out the harness of the CUTTER SOLENOID ASSY. through the notch of the
CUTTER HOLDER BRACKET, and remove the CUTTER HOLDER. See Figure
4-70.
Retaining Clip
Set the tab and hooked tab of the CUTTER HOLDER into the
slots of the frame.
Route the harness of the CUTTER SOLENOID ASSY. through
the notch of the hooked tab on the CUTTER HOLDER. Hooked tab
IM Sensor Cover
Notch
Tab and
Hooked
Tab
Figure 4-70. Removing the CUTTER HOLDER
CR LOCK KICKER CUTTER CAP

Notch
SOLENOID
SHAFT SOLENOID SPRING
Figure 4-69. Reinstalling the CUTTER HOLDER
Hooked tab
9. Remove the Cutter. See Section 4.2.2.3 on page 227.
10. Release the hooked tab that secures the CR LOCK KICKER and remove it
together with the CUTTER CAP, SOLENOID SPRING, and the SOLENOID
SHAFT. See Figure 4-71.
Figure 4-71. Removing the CR LOCK KICKER

11. Remove the two screws that secure the CUTTER SOLENOID ASSY. and remove
it.
C.P.S.(S-P2) 2.6x6
Two C.P.S.(S-P2) M2.6 x 6 screws
A D J U S T M E N T Whenever the CUTTER SOLENOID ASSY. is reinstalled or

R E Q U IR E D
replaced, the corresponding adjustment must be carried out. See
Chapter 5 on page 306.
CUTTER
SOLENOID ASSY.
Figure 4-72. Removing the CUTTER SOLENOID ASSY.

4.2.5.7 SCALE, CR
CR SCALE SCALE, CR SCALE CENTER SCALE CENTER GUIDE C
1. Remove the L Side Cover Assy. See Section 4.2.3.5 on page 233. SPRING GUIDE C
page 224.
C A U T IO N When performing the following steps, be careful not to touch the

SCALE, CR with bare hands or get it soiled with ink. Also be
extremely careful not to scratch it by, for example, hitting it against Notch Hole Hooked tab Hooked tab
frames. Any dirt or scratches on the SCALE, CR may cause a
malfunction of the CR Encoder Sensor.
3. Remove the CR SCALE SPRING from the notch of the frame, and remove the
spring from the hole of the SCALE, CR.
4. Release the SCALE, CR from the hooked tab each on the three SCALE CENTER
GUIDE C, and carefully pull out the SCALE, CR rightward from the inner side of
the CARRIAGE ASSY.
C H E C K When removing the SCALE, CR of the Stylus Pro 7400/7450/7800/

P O IN T 7880/7880C, release it from a hooked tab on the left SCALE
CENTER GUIDE C, then follow the same procedure described FENCE GUIDE R
above.
5. Release the right edge of the SCALE, CR from the hooked tab on the frame, and
pull out the SCALE, CR from the FENCE GUIDE R.
Hooked tab
Figure 4-73. Removing the SCALE, CR

4.2.5.8 CARRIAGE UNIT PRESS LEVER

2. Remove the L SIDE COVER ASSY. See Section 4.2.3.5 on page 233.
3. Remove the PUMP CAP ASSY. See Section 4.2.7.4 on page 298.
4. Remove the BOX ASSY., FLUSHING (R). See Section 4.2.7.6 on page 302. E-RING, 7
5. Remove the COVER, MIST. See Section 4.2.7.6 on page 302.

6. Remove the SCALE, CR. See Section 4.2.5.7 on page 260.
7. Remove the PRINT HEAD. See Section 4.2.7.1 on page 281.
8. Remove the CR BELT. See Section 4.2.5.1 on page 249.
9. Remove E-RING, 7 that secures the PRESS LEVER and remove it. See Figure
4-74.
10. Mark PG COMBINED GEAR 17 and PG REDUCTION GEAR 17-39 so that you
can realign them to the same location. See Figure 4-75.
11. Remove E-RING, 3 and PG COMBINED GEAR 17-39. See Figure 4-75.
Figure 4-74. Removing the PRESS LEVER
PG COMBINED GEAR 17
E-RING, 3
Mark these points.
PG REDUCTION GEAR 17-39
Figure 4-75. Removing PG COMBINED GEAR 17

12. Remove the five screws that secure the MAINTENANCE SIDE PLATE, and
remove it. See Figure 4-76 and Figure 4-77.
Five C.C.S. M3x8 screws
MAINTENANCE SIDE PLATE
C.C.S. 3x8
Figure 4-76. Screws that Secure the MAINTENANCE SIDE PLATE

(Lateral View)
C.C.S. 3x8
Figure 4-77. Screws that Secure the MAINTENANCE SIDE PLATE

(Overhead View)

13. Remove the two screws that secure the PANEL FFC MOUNTING PLATE, and
remove it together with the FFC. See Figure 4-78. PANEL FFC MOUNTING PLATE
Two C.C.S. M3x8 screws
14. Remove the three screws that secure the DRIVEN PULLEY BASE PLATE, and
remove it. See Figure 4-79.
Three C.C.S. M4x8 screws
C.C.S. 3x8
Figure 4-78. Removing the PANEL FFC MOUNTING PLATE
C.C.S. 4x8
DRIVEN PULLEY BASE PLATE
Figure 4-79. Removing the DRIVEN PULLEY BASE PLATE

15. Remove the two screws that secure the CR RAIL PLATE R, and remove it.
See Figure 4-81.
Two C.C.S. M4x8 screws
16. Mark the main unit frame as shown in the figure on the right so that you can attach
the FENCE GUIDE (R) to the same location when you reassemble it, and remove CR RAIL PLATE R
the FENCE GUIDE (R). See Figure 4-82.
When installing the FENCE GUIDE (R), use a new two-sided

tape to fix it.
Attach the FENCE GUIDE (R) in the orientation as shown in
the figure below.
C.C.S. 4x8
Figure 4-80. Installing the FENCE GUIDE (R)
Figure 4-81. Removing the CR RAIL PLATE R
FENCE GUIDE (R)
Mark these points.
Figure 4-82. Removing the FENCE GUIDE (R)

17. Remove the screw on the BOARD ASSY., SUB and release the grounding wire.
See Figure 4-84.
BOARD ASSY., SUB
One C.P.S. (S-P2) M3x14 screw
18. Disconnect the four connectors on the BOARD ASSY., SUB, and pull the CR BOARD HOLDER
harnesses and FFCs through the hole in the CR BOARD HOLDER. See Figure
4-84.
19. Remove the CARRIAGE UNIT from the rail. See Figure 4-85.
When installing the CARRIAGE UNIT, make sure you move the
levers on the left and right sides of the CARRIAGE UNIT in the
direction of the arrow. Connectors
Hole C.P.S.(S-P2) 3x14
Figure 4-84. Releasing the Harnesses and FFCs
Figure 4-83. Installing the CARRIAGE UNIT
CARRIAGE UNIT
Figure 4-85. Removing the CARRIAGE UNIT

4.2.6 Removing the Paper Feed Mechanism

4.2.6.1 VACUUM FAN ASSY.
1. Remove the P GUIDE L ASSY. See Section 4.2.3.7 on page 236.
2. Remove the FRONT COVER ASSY. See Section 4.2.3.9 on page 239.
Hooked tabs
C A U T IO N When performing the next step, use a screwdriver whose length is
shorter than 15 cm.
C.P.S.(S-P2) 3x6 TUBE COVER
3. Remove the screw that secures the TUBE COVER. See Figure 4-86.
4. Slide the TUBE COVER leftward to release it from the two hooked tabs, and
remove the TUBE COVER. See Figure 4-86.
Figure 4-86. Removing the TUBE COVER
C A U T IO N When reinstalling the TUBE COVER, be careful not to trap TUBE,
SUPPLY, INK under the cover. Hooked tabs
5. Release the two hooked tabs on each of the seven PAPER OUTLET ROLLER
Assies, and remove them. See Figure 4-87.
PAPER OUTLET ROLLER ASSY.
C H E C K The Stylus Pro 7400/7450/7800/7880/7880C have four PAPER

P O IN T OUTLET ROLLER Assies.
Figure 4-87. Removing the PAPER OUTLET ROLLER ASSY.

6. Remove the screw that secures each of the two SEAL, HOLDs, and remove them.
See Figure 4-89.
SEAL, HOLD
C H E C K The SEAL, HOLD is not included in the Stylus Pro 7400/7450/7800/

P O IN T 7880/7880C.
7. Disconnect the three connectors of the VACUUM FAN ASSY. from the relay
connectors. See Figure 4-90.
C.C.S. 3x8
8. Release the two relay harnesses from the five retaining clips (two clips on the
center, and three clips on the right side) of the VACUUM FAN ASSY. See Figure Figure 4-89. Removing the SEAL, HOLD
4-90.
Route the two relay harnesses as shown in the figure below.

Connector
Center
Relay harness Relay harness
Center Right Side

Wind the relay harness to be connected to the left
VACUUM FAN ASSY. around the hooked tab.
Right Side
Hooked tabs Hooked tabs
Figure 4-90. Releasing the Relay Harnesses
Wind the relay harness to be Wind the relay harness to be

connected to the left VACUUM connected to the center VACUUM
FAN ASSY. around the hooked tab. FAN ASSY. around the hooked tab.
Figure 4-88. Releasing the Relay Harnesses

9. Remove the four screws that secure each of the three VACUUM FAN Assies. See
Figure 4-91.
12 (4 pcs. x 3) C.C.S. M3 x 8 screws
10-2
10. To remove the left and right VACUUM FAN Assies, pull them toward you and
then downward as far as they go to pull out their rear, and raise the rear toward you
without raising the front to remove them from the rear. See Figure 4-92.
11. Pull the right VACUUM FAN ASSY. downward and pull out its rear toward you.
See Figure 4-93.
12. Turn the FRONT COVER, HINGE, R toward the inner side to release the right
side of the right VACUUM FAN ASSY., and then raise the rear of the assy.
toward you to remove it from the rear. See Figure 4-93.
C H E C K The Stylus Pro 7400/7450/7800/7880/7880C have two VACUUM

P O IN T 10-1
FAN Assies.
Figure 4-92. Removing the Left and Center VACUUM FAN Assies
12-1
VACUUM FAN ASSY.
12-2
11-2
FRONT COVER,
HINGE, R
C.C.S. 3x8
Figure 4-91. Screws Securing the VACUUM FAN ASSY.
11-1
Figure 4-93. Removing the Right VACUUM FAN ASSY.

4.2.6.2 PF MOTOR ASSY. Left Side of the Printer

C A U T IO N When performing the next step, be careful not to deform or damage

the SCALE, PF. See Figure 4-95.
2. Remove the three screws that secure the PF ENC COVER B. See Figure 4-94.
Three C.B.P. M3 x 8 screws
3. Release the three tabs that secure the PF ENC COVER B and remove it. See
Figure 4-94.
PF ENC COVER B
4. Disconnect the connector of the PF Encoder Sensor from the BOARD ASSY.,
SUB; C. See Figure 4-95.
C.B.P. M3x8
5. Remove the two screws that secure the PF Encoder Mounting Plate and remove it.
See Figure 4-95. Tabs
Two C.P.S.(S-P2) M3 x 8 screws Figure 4-94. Removing the PF ENC COVER B
Connector
Guide Pins
C.P.S.(S-P2) 3x8
PF Encoder Mounting Plate
Figure 4-95. Removing the PF Encoder Mounting Plate

Set the two positioning holes of the PF Encoder Mounting Plate

onto the two guide pins. See Figure 4-95. Retaining Clip
After installing the PF Encoder Mounting Plate, make sure that
the SCALE, PF is properly inserted into the slit of the PF
Encoder Sensor. Relay Connector
SCALE, PF
PF Encoder Sensor
C.P.S.(S-P2) 4x8
PF Motor Mounting Plate
Figure 4-97. Screws Securing the PF Motor Mounting Plate
Figure 4-96. Reinstalling the PF Encoder Mounting Plate X REDUCTION BELT
Before screwing the SCALE, PF, adjust its position to the Hooked tab
center of the slit so that the scale does not contact with the
sensor.
6. Disconnect the connector of the PF MOTOR ASSY. from the relay connector, and
release the PF MOTOR ASSY. harness from the retaining clip. See Figure 4-97.
8
7. Remove the four screws that secure the PF Motor Mounting Plate. See Figure
4-97.
Four C.P.S.(S-P2) M4 x 8 screws
Pinion Gear
8. Release the hooked tab of the PF Motor Mounting Plate, remove the X
REDUCTION BELT from the pinion gear of the PF MOTOR ASSY., and then
remove the PF Motor Mounting Plate together with the PF MOTOR ASSY. See
Figure 4-98.
Figure 4-98. Removing the PF Motor Mounting Plate

9. Remove the three screws that secure the PF MOTOR ASSY. and remove it. See
Figure 4-99. C.P.S.(S-P2) 4x8
PF MOTOR ASSY.
Three C.P.S.(S-P2) M4 x 8 screws
Reinstall the PF MOTOR ASSY. so that the harness outlet of the

assy. faces toward the rear side of the printer. See Figure 4-99. Harness Outlet
A D J U S T M E N T Whenever the PF MOTOR ASSY. is reinstalled or replaced, the

R E Q U IR E D
page 306.
Figure 4-99. Removing the PF MOTOR ASSY.

4.2.6.3 PF Encoder Sensor Left Side of the Printer

C A U T IO N When removing the SCALE, PF, be careful not to deform or

damage it. See Figure 4-101.
2. Remove the three screws that secure the PF ENC COVER B. See Figure 4-100.
Three C.B.S. M3 x 8 screws
3. Release the three tabs that secure the PF ENC COVER B and remove it. See
Figure 4-100.
PF ENC COVER B
C A U T IO N When removing the PF Encoder Sensor, be careful not to bend the
capacitor on the sensor. See Figure 4-101.
C.B.P. M3x8
Tabs
Figure 4-100. Removing the PF ENC COVER B

4. Remove the connector from the PF Encoder Sensor. See Figure 4-101.
5. Remove the two screws that secure the PF Encoder Sensor and remove it. See
Figure 4-101.
Two C.P.P. M2.6 x 6 screws
Connector
Capacitor
C.P.P. M2.6x6
PF Encoder
Sensor
SCALE, PF
Figure 4-101. Removing the PF Encoder Sensor

Make sure that the two positioning pins on the PF Encoder A D J U S T M E N T Whenever the PF Encoder Sensor is reinstalled or replaced, the
R E Q U IR E D
Sensor match up with the positioning holes on the holder. corresponding adjustment must be carried out. See Chapter 5 on
page 306.
Positioning Holes
Positioning Pins
Figure 4-102. Reinstalling the PF Encoder Sensor (1)

When reinstalling the PF Encoder Sensor, check that the
SCALE, PF is positioned correctly: between the sides of the
Sensor, but not touching either side.
SCALE, PF
PF Encoder Sensor
Figure 4-103. Reinstalling the PF Encoder Sensor (2)

Make sure that the SCALE, PF is not touching either side of the
Sensor.

4.2.6.4 SCALE, PF Left Side of the Printer

1. Remove the PF Encoder Mounting Plate. See Section 4.2.6.2 on page 269.
PF Encoder Retainer
2. Remove the three screws that secure the PF Encoder Retainer and remove it
together with the SCALE, PF.
C.C.P 3x6
SCALE, PF
Figure 4-104. Removing the SCALE, PF

4.2.6.5 P Thick1 Sensor, P Thick2 Sensor P Thick Sensor Mounting Plate Upper Right of the Printer
1. Remove the H TOP COVER ASSY. See Section 4.2.3.2 on page 230.
2. Remove the screw that secures the P Thick Sensor Mounting Plate and remove it.
See Figure 4-105.
One C.C.S. M3 x 8 screw
When reinstalling the P Thick Sensor Mounting Plate, make sure

the two guide pins on the Mounting Plate are set in the mounting
holes. See Figure 4-105. C.C.S. M3x8
3. Release the three tabs that secure each of the P Thick1 Sensor and the P Thick2
Sensor and remove the two Sensors. See Figure 4-106. Guide Pins
4. Remove the connector both from the P Thick1 Sensor and the P Thick2 Sensor. Figure 4-105. Screws Securing the P Thick Sensor Mounting Plate
See Figure 4-106.
A D J U S T M E N T Whenever either or both of the P Thick1 Sensor and the P Thick2

R E Q U IR E D
Sensor is/are reinstalled or replaced, the corresponding adjustment 3-1
must be carried out. See Chapter 5 on page 306.
3-1 3-1
3-1 3-1
3-1
3-2
4
P Thick2 Sensor 3-2
P Thick1 Sensor
4
Figure 4-106. Removing the P Thick1 Sensor and P Thick2 Sensor

4.2.6.6 P Rear Sensor

1. Remove the P Thick Sensor Mounting Plate. See Section 4.2.6.5 on page 275.
2. Disconnect the FFC from the connector.
3. Release the two tabs that secure the P Rear Sensor and remove it.
A D J U S T M E N T Whenever the P Rear Sensor is reinstalled or replaced, the

R E Q U IR E D
page 306.
FFC
Tabs
Connector
P Rear Sensor
Figure 4-107. Removing the P Rear Sensor

4.2.6.7 IM (Ink Mark) Sensor

C.P.S.(S-P2) M3x5
FFC
4.2.1.2 on page 224. Retaining
Clip
3. Release the FFC and harnesses from the retaining clip on the IM SENSOR Harnesses
COVER. See Figure 4-108.
4. Remove the screw that secures the IM SENSOR HOLDER. See Figure 4-108.
When reinstalling the IM Sensor Holder, make sure the two guide Guide Pins
pins on the Holder are set in the positioning holes. See Figure 4-108.
IM Sensor Holder
5. Move the CARRIAGE ASSY. to the left while holding the IM Sensor Holder with
your fingers so that it does not touch the Platen. Figure 4-108. Screw Securing the IM Sensor Holder
6. Pull the IM Sensor Holder out through the hole on the bracket. See Figure 4-109.
7. Remove the screw that secures the IM Sensor Holder and remove it. See Figure
4-109. Hole
One C.B.P. M3 x 6 screw IM SENSOR COVER
When reinstalling the IM Sensor Holder, make sure the positioning

tab of the Holder is set in the positioning slot on the IM SENSOR
COVER. See Figure 4-109.
6
C.B.P. M3x6
Positioning Tab
Figure 4-109. Removing the IM Sensor Holder

8. Remove the screw that secures the IM Sensor and remove it.
One C.P.P. M1.4 x 5 screw
FFC
Put the protrusion of the IM Sensor into the hole located under the
tab.
Connector IM (Ink Mark) Sensor
Protrusion
C.P.P. M1.4x5
Figure 4-111. Removing the IM Sensor
Tab
Figure 4-110. Reinstalling the IM Sensor
9. Disconnect the FFC from the connector.
A D J U S T M E N T Whenever the IM Sensor is reinstalled or replaced, the

R E Q U IR E D
page 306.

4.2.6.8 P Edge Sensor

1. Disconnect the connector of the P Edge Sensor from the BOARD ASSY., SUB. P Edge Sensor
See Section 4.2.4.4 on page 245. harness
2. Pull out the harness of the P Edge Sensor through the notch of the CR BOARD CR BOARD HOLDER
HOLDER, and release the harness from the retaining clip.See Figure 4-112.
3. Remove the CUTTER HOLDER ASSY. See Section 4.2.5.6 on page 257.
4. Remove the screw that secures the Edge Sensor Holder and remove it. See Figure
4-113.
One C.C.P. M3 x 8 screw Notch
Set the two guide pins of the Edge Sensor Holder in the positioning
Retaining Clip
holes. See Figure 4-113.
Figure 4-112. Releasing the P Edge Sensor Harness
Guide Pins
C.C.P. 3x8
Edge Sensor Holder
Figure 4-113. Removing the Edge Sensor Holder

5. Cut the cable tie and release the P Edge Sensor harness.
6. Remove the screw that secures the P Edge Sensor and remove it.
One C.B.P. M3 x 6 screw
Set the positioning hole of the P Edge Sensor onto the guide pin. See
Figure 4-114.
Cable Tie
C.B.P. 3x6
P Edge Sensor
Guide Pins
Figure 4-114. Removing the P Edge Sensor

4.2.7 Removing the Ink System Mechanism

HEAD FG PLATE; C 3: C.B.S. M3x10
4.2.7.1 PRINT HEAD
1. Remove the H TOP COVER ASSY. See Section 4.2.3.2 on page 230.
4.2.1.2 on page 224.
3. Remove the two screws that secure the Damper Unit. 4: C.P.S.(S-P2) M3x8 Tab

4. Remove the screw that secures the HEAD FG PLATE; C.
Do not screw the HEAD FG PLATE; C too tightly as it is flexible

and easy to bend. 5
3: C.B.S. M3x10
5. Pull the Damper Unit toward you and pull the tab out of the hole and remove the
Damper Unit.
When reinstalling the Damper Unit, make sure the two guide Damper Unit HOLDER, HEAD
pins on the Unit are set in the positioning holes.
Make sure that the Damper Unit is in close contact with the
HOLDER, HEAD (PRINT HEAD) before screwing the Unit.
Guide Pins
Figure 4-115. Removing the Damper Unit

6. Put the left retaining hook of the Damper Unit on the hole on the left bottom of the
Hole
CR COVER ASSY. to hang the Unit on the Assy. See Figure 4-116. CR COVER ASSY.
7. Loosen the right screw and remove the left screw that secure the HEAD FIXING
PLATE. See Figure 4-117.
Retaining Hook
When tightening the screw on the right that secures the HEAD
FIXING PLATE, make sure to hold the Carriage Unit with your
hand so that the Carriage Unit does not tilt.
8. Release the HEAD FIXING PLATE from the tab and slide the right side of the
Plate toward you. See Figure 4-117.
Figure 4-116. Hanging the Damper Unit
Remove the C.P.S.(S-P2) M3x6 screw
Tab
Loosen the C.P.S. (S-P2) M3x6 screw
HEAD FIXING PLATE
Figure 4-117. Releasing the HEAD FIXING PLATE

C A U T IO N When removing the PRINT HEAD, be careful not to touch and Rails
damage the nozzles and Ink Supply Needles.
Upper
Tab
9. Slide the HOLDER, HEAD downward and then pull it toward you releasing the
two lower tabs and one upper tab and pulling out the two rails. And remove the
HOLDER, HEAD while being careful not to let the HEAD FG PLATE; C contact
with the frame.
9-2
Insert the two rails of the HOLDER, HEAD under the two ball
bearings.
Make sure the positioning tab is set in the upper left groove of
the HOLDER, HEAD. 9-1 9-1
HOLDER, HEAD
Positioning Tab Ball Bearings Lower Tabs
Figure 4-119. Removing the HOLDER, HEAD
Rails
Groove
Figure 4-118. Reinstalling the HOLDER, HEAD

10. Remove the three screws that secure the PRINT HEAD and remove it. See Figure
C.B.P. M2.6x6
4-121.
Three C.B.P. M2.6 x 6 screws
When removing the PRINT HEAD, the ABSORBER, CR may

come off the HOLDER, HEAD. If this occurs, attach the
ABSORBER, CR as shown in the figure below.
ABSORBER, CRs
Head Rank ID Label PRINT HEAD
Figure 4-121. Screws Securing the PRINT HEAD
Head FFC
Two-sided
Tape
Figure 4-120. Reinstalling the ABSORBER, CRs
11. Peel off the two Head FFCs secured to the PRINT HEAD with two-sided tape, and
then disconnect the FFCs from the PRINT HEAD. See Figure 4-122.
A D J U S T M E N T Whenever the PRINT HEAD is reinstalled or replaced, the

R E Q U IR E D
page 306. When replacing the PRINT HEAD with a new one, note
down the 40-digit Head Rank ID indicated on the ID label affixed to Figure 4-122. Disconnecting the Head FFC
the new PRINT HEAD. See Figure 4-121.

4.2.7.2 VALVE ASSY., HEAD; C

TUBE, SUPPLY, INK
1. Remove the Damper Unit. See Section 4.2.7.1 on page 281.

As remaining ink may leak or spatter, have a waste cloth
Retaining tabs
beforehand to wipe out it.
Exercise care to avoid letting the dust or any foreign materials
get inside the TUBE, SUPPLY, INK.
Be careful not to fold the TUBU, SUPPLY, INK or damage it
by hitting it against frame edges.
2. Loosen the eight screws that secure the TUBE, SUPPLY, INK.
CONNECTING SCREW, M7: 8 pcs.
3. Pull out the eight TUBE, SUPPLY, INK from the VALVE ASSY., HEAD; C and
CONNECTING
release them from the retaining tabs. SCREW, M7
VALVE ASSY., HEAD; C
Figure 4-123. Removing the TUBE, SUPPLY, INK

Make sure that the O-RING, CONNECTER, M7 is attached to Markings (a character “L” or “R” followed by a number) are
the leading end of each one of the four TUBE, SUPPLY, INK. printed on the surface of the all TUBE, SUPPLY, INK to
identify the tubes connecting location. Make sure to connect
them to their correct position as shown in the figure below.
L1 L2 L3 L4 R1 R2 R3 R4
O RING, CONNECTER, M7
Figure 4-124. Reinstalling the TUBE, SUPPLY, INK (1)
L3 L3 L3 L3
Marking
Figure 4-125. Reinstalling the TUBE, SUPPLY, INK (2)

4. Remove the two screws that secure the HOLDER, DAMPER and remove the
HOLDER DAMPER turning it.
Two C.B.P. M3 x 8 screws
Engage the two coupling tabs of the HOLDER, DAMPER with the
coupling pins of the COVER, DUMPER. HOLDER, DAMPER
Coupling tabs
Coupling pins
C.B.P. 3x8
Figure 4-126. Reinstalling the HOLDER, DAMPER Figure 4-127. Removing the HOLDER, DAMPER


Never touch the film part of the VALVE ASSY., HEAD; C.
COVER, DUMPER
Be careful not to damage or deform the joint part of the
VALVE ASSY., HEAD; C to be connected to the TUBE,
SUPPLY, INK.
Joint part
Film part
(the opposite side
also has the film.)
VALVE ASSY., HEAD; C
Figure 4-129. Removing the VALVE ASSY., HEAD; C
Figure 4-128. Handling the VALVE ASSY., HEAD; C
5. Remove the eight VALVE ASSY., HEAD; C from the COVER, DUMPER.
A D J U S T M E N T Whenever the VALVE ASSY., HEAD; C is reinstalled or replaced,

R E Q U IR E D
the corresponding adjustment must be carried out. See Chapter 5 on
page 306.

4.2.7.3 HOLDER ASSY., IC, RIGHT, Retaining clip TUBE, SUPPLY, INK 2: Retaining tabs
HOLDER ASSY., IC, LEFT
Connector
HOLDER ASSY., IC, RIGHT FFC
1. Remove the R SIDE COVER ASSY. See Section 4.2.3.4 on page 232. I/C, LOCK
LEVER
2. Release the four TUBE, SUPPLY, INK from the four retaining tabs and the
retaining clip.
Make sure that the four TUBE, SUPPLY, INK are routed behind
the screwed tab.
4
Right Front of the Printer
HOLDER ASSY.,
IC, RIGHT Acetate tape
Screwed tab
I/C LEVER
SENSOR R
6: Tabs
Figure 4-130. Routing the TUBE, SUPPLY, INK
3. Disconnect the four FFCs from the CSIC RELAY BOARD.

4. Lower the I/C, LOCK LEVER. Connector
5. Remove the piece of the acetate tape that secures the harness of the I/C LEVER
SENSOR R.
Figure 4-131. Releasing the TUBE, SUPPLY, INK and Removing the I/C LEVER
6. Release the two tabs that secure the I/C LEVER SENSOR R and remove it. SENSOR R
7. Remove the connector from the I/C LEVER SENSOR R.

8. Release the harness of the I/C LEVER SENSOR R from the three hooked tabs of
the HARNESS/TUBE STOPPER and pull out the harness.
HARNESS/TUBE STOPPER 8: Hooked tabs
9. Pull out the TUBE, PRESSURIZING from the HOLDER ASSY., IC, RIGHT, and
release it from the three retaining clips of the HARNESS/TUBE STOPPER.
Make sure that the joint of the TUBE, PRESSURIZING is

I/C LEVER SENSOR
located at the retaining clip as shown in the figure below. R Harness
9: Hooked tabs
TUBE,
PRESSURIZING
8: Hooked tabs
Retaining clip Figure 4-133. Releasing the I/C LEVER SENSOR R Harness and the TUBE,
PRESSURIZING
Joint
Figure 4-132. Routing the TUBE, PRESSURIZING
Insert the TUBE, PRESSURIZING all the way.

10. Remove the four screws that secure the HOLDER ASSY., IC, RIGHT.
C.C.S. 4x8
C A U T IO N When performing the next step, be careful not to pull the HOLDER
11-1
ASSY., IC, RIGHT too much as it is still connected to the printer
with the TUBE, SUPPLY INK.
Hooked tab
11. Release the hooked tab that secures the HOLDER ASSY., IC, RIGHT, and
remove it.
Make sure to insert the two tabs of the HOLDER ASSY., IC, 11-2
RIGHT into the two slots.
Tabs
C.C.S. 4x8
Figure 4-134. Reinstalling the HOLDER ASSY., IC, RIGHT
Figure 4-135. Removing the HOLDER ASSY., IC, RIGHT (1)


12. Loosen the four screws that secure the four TUBE, SUPPLY, INK, and remove
them from the HOLDER ASSY., IC, RIGHT.
Four Coupling Screws Coupling Screws
Make sure that the O-RING is attached to the leading end of

each one of the four TUBE, SUPPLY, INK.
O-RING
Figure 4-137. Removing the HOLDER ASSY., IC, RIGHT (2)
Figure 4-136. Reinstalling the TUBE, SUPPLY, INK
A D J U S T M E N T Whenever the HOLDER ASSY., IC, RIGHT is reinstalled or

R E Q U IR E D

HOLDER ASSY., IC, LEFT

FFC Connector
2. Release the four TUBE, SUPPLY, INK from the four retaining tabs and the
retaining clip.
3. Release the four FFCs from the three hooked tabs and disconnect them from the
CSIC RELAY BOARD.
3: Hooked tabs
4. Lower the I/C, LOCK LEVER.
5. Remove the piece of the acetate tape that secures the harness of the I/C LEVER 2: Retaining tabs Retaining clip TUBE, SUPPLY, INK
SENSOR L.
6. Release the two tabs that secure the I/C LEVER SENSOR L and remove it. I/C, LOCK LEVER
7. Remove the connector from the I/C LEVER SENSOR L.
HOLDER ASSY.,
Acetate tape IC, LEFT
I/C LEVER SENSOR L
6: Tabs
Connector
Figure 4-138. Releasing the TUBE, SUPPLY, INK and Removing the I/C LEVER
SENSOR L

8. Release the harness of the I/C LEVER SENSOR L from the three hooked tabs of
the HARNESS/TUBE STOPPER and pull out the harness. Routing the I/C LEVER
SENSOR L Harness
Route the harness of the I/C LEVER SENSOR L winding one turn
of it around the hooked tab of the HARNESS/TUBE STOPPER.
See Figure 4-140.
9. Pull out the TUBE, PRESSURIZING from the HOLDER ASSY., IC, LEFT, and I/C LEVER SENSOR L
release it from the three retaining clips of the HARNESS/TUBE STOPPER. Harness
Make sure that the joint of the TUBE, PRESSURIZING is

located at the retaining clip as shown in the figure below.
9: Hooked tabs
8: Hooked tabs
HARNESS/TUBE
STOPPER
TUBE, PRESSURIZING
Retaining clip
Joint
8: Hooked tabs
Figure 4-139. Routing the TUBE, PRESSURIZING
Insert the TUBE, PRESSURIZING all the way. Figure 4-140. Releasing the I/C LEVER SENSOR L Harness and the TUBE,
PRESSURIZING

10. Remove the four screws that secure the HOLDER ASSY., IC, LEFT. C.C.S. 4x8
C.C.S. 4x8
Figure 4-141. Screws Securing the HOLDER ASSY., IC, LEFT

C A U T IO N When performing the next step, be careful not to pull the HOLDER Make sure to insert the two tabs of the HOLDER ASSY., IC, LEFT
ASSY., IC, LEFT too much as it is still connected to the printer into the two slots.
with the TUBE, SUPPLY INK.
11. Release the hooked tab that secures the HOLDER ASSY., IC, LEFT, and remove Tabs
it.
C A U T IO N When reinstalling the HOLDER ASSY., IC LEFT, be careful not to

trap the Front Sensor harness and the TUBE, INK, WASTE; L
between the two screwed tabs and the frame.
Screwed tabs Front Sensor

Harness Figure 4-143. Reinstalling the HOLDER ASSY., IC, LEFT
Hooked tab
11-1
TUBE, INK, WASTE; L
Figure 4-142. Screwed Tabs located at Upper Side of the HOLDER

ASSY., IC, LEFT
11-2
Figure 4-144. Removing the HOLDER ASSY., IC, LEFT (1)


12. Loosen the four screws that secure the four TUBE, SUPPLY, INK, and remove
them from the HOLDER ASSY., IC, LEFT.
Four Coupling Screws
Make sure that the O-RING is attached to the leading end of Coupling Screws
each one of the four TUBE, SUPPLY, INK.
O-RING
Figure 4-146. Removing the HOLDER ASSY., IC, LEFT (2)
Figure 4-145. Reinstalling the TUBE, SUPPLY, INK
A D J U S T M E N T Whenever the HOLDER ASSY., IC, LEFT is reinstalled or

R E Q U IR E D

4.2.7.4 PUMP CAP ASSY. Right Rear of the Printer Retaining Clips
With Locks
C A U T IO N When removing the PUMP CAP ASSY., ink may leak out of the
Relay Connector
Waste Ink Tubes and the Ink Exhaust. Have a waste cloth
beforehand to clean up.
Pump Motor
Harnesses
Locks
2. Release the harnesses of the Pump Motor from the retaining clip.
3. Disconnect the Pump Motor connector from the relay connector.
4. Pull the Waste Ink Tubes out of the Ink Exhaust. Retaining Clip
Waste Ink Tubes
C A U T IO N When reinstalling the Waste Ink Tube, make sure to insert it

Ink Exhaust
correctly into the waste ink outlet and route the tubes as shown in
the figure right, or ink may leak.
Figure 4-147. Releasing the Pump Motor Harnesses and Waste Ink Tubes
5. Release the two locks of each of the two retaining clips with locks that secure the
Pump Motor harnesses and the Waste Ink Tubes and release them from the clips.

6. Release the harness of the Pump Phase Sensor from the notch.
Right Rear of the Printer C.C.S. M3x8
C A U T IO N When removing the PUMP CAP ASSY., the following precautions

must be followed.
Be careful not to damage the gears engaged with the PUMP Pump Phase Guide
CAP ASSY. See Figure 4-149. Sensor Harness Pin Positioning
Gears
Never touch the CLEANER, HEAD nor put it contact with any Tab
other parts. Doing so may deteriorate its performance to wipe
Notch
ink off, and cause poor print quality.
CLEANER, HEAD
PUMP CAP
ASSY.
Figure 4-148. Handling the CLEANER, HEAD
7. Remove the four screws that secure the PUMP CAP ASSY., and remove it from
Guide Pin
rear side of the printer.
When reinstalling the PUMP CAP ASSY., make sure the C.C.S. M3x8
positioning tab of the Assy. is set in the positioning slot.
Make sure the two positioning holes of the PUMP CAP ASSY. Figure 4-149. Removing the PUMP CAP ASSY. (1)
is set on the guide pins.

C A U T IO N Follow the procedure below to replace the POROUS PAD, INK

EJECT, TRAY. It must be replaced when the PUMP CAP ASSY.
has reached its end of life, or the POROUS PAD, INK EJECT,
TRAY has absorbed an excess amount of waste ink.
1. Remove the POROUS PAD, INK EJECT, TRAY from the INK
EJECT TRAY.
2. If paper dust has accumulated on the INK EJECT TRAY,
Connector
remove the paper dust.
* Do not use an airbrush to blow the dust off as the dust can get
inside the printer.
3. Attach a new POROUS PAD, INK EJECT, TRAY setting its
four positioning holes onto the ribs on the Waste Ink Tray. Pump Phase Sensor
POROUS PAD, INK EJECT, TRAY
Positioning Holes and Ribs
Figure 4-151. Removing the PUMP CAP ASSY. (2)
Waste Ink Tray
Figure 4-150. Replacing the POROUS PAD, INK EJECT, TRAY
4. Disconnect the connector from the Pump Phase Sensor.
A D J U S T M E N T Whenever the PUMP CAP ASSY. is replaced, the corresponding

R E Q U IR E D
adjustment must be carried out. See Chapter 5 on page 306.

4.2.7.5 CLEANER, HEAD CLEANER, HEAD

1. Remove the PUMP CAP ASSY. See Section 4.2.7.4 on page 298.
C A U T IO N Never touch the CLEANER, HEAD with bare hands as the oil of
your hand remained on the cleaner surface may repel ink and cause
partial dot omission. Use a pair of tweezers cleaned by a cleaner or
etc. to handle the CLEANER, HEAD.
2. Release the CLEANER, HEAD from the two hooked tabs, and remove it from the
PUMP CAP ASSY. Hooked tabs
Make sure to install the CLEANER, HEAD in the correct

orientation as shown in the figure below.
Figure 4-153. Removing the CLEANER, HEAD
To the Carriage home

direction
Opposite to the home

direction
Figure 4-152. Orientation of the CLEANER, HEAD
A D J U S T M E N T Whenever the CLEANER, HEAD is replaced, the corresponding

R E Q U IR E D
adjustment must be carried out. See Chapter 5 on page 306.

4.2.7.6 BOX ASSY., FLUSHING (R, L)

Right Rear of the Printer
C A U T IO N When removing the BOX ASSY., FLUSHING (R/L), ink may leak
out of the Waste Ink Tubes and the Ink Exhaust. Have a waste cloth TUBE, INK,
WASTE; R
beforehand to wipe out the leaked ink.
Holes
BOX ASSY., FLUSHING (R)
Ink Exhaust
C A U T IO N When performing the next step, be careful not to damage the

SCALE, CR.
2. Remove the 2 screws that secure the BOX ASSY., FLUSHING (R).
3. Pull out the TUBE, INK, WASTE; R from the Ink Exhaust through the two holes
of the frame, and remove the BOX ASSY., FLUSHING (R). SCALE, CR
C A U T IO N When reinstalling the TUBE, INK, WASTE; R, make sure to insert

it correctly into the waste ink outlet and route the tubes as shown in
C.P.S.(S-P2) 3x8
BOX ASSY.,
FLUSHING (R)
Figure 4-154. Removing the BOX ASSY., FLUSHING (R)

C A U T IO N The COVER, MIST may come off the frame after removing the Set the two guide pins of the BOX ASSY., FLUSHING (R) in the
BOX ASSY., FLUSHING (R). If the COVER, MIST come off, positioning holes on the frame.
reattach them on the frame matching up their holes with the three
tabs and one guide pin as shown in the figure below.
Tabs
Guide Pins
COVER, MIST
Figure 4-156. Reinstalling the BOX ASSY., FLUSHING (R)
A D J U S T M E N T Whenever the BOX ASSY., FLUSHING (R) is replaced, the

R E Q U IR E D
page 306.
Guide Pin
Figure 4-155. Reattaching the COVER, MIST

BOX ASSY., FLUSHING (L) Left Front of the Printer ROLLER, PF
2. Remove the 2 screws that secure the BOX ASSY., FLUSHING (L).
Two C.C.P. M3 x 8 screws
3. Pull out the TUBE, INK, WASTE; L from the Ink Exhaust through the two holes
BOX ASSY., C.C.P 3x8
of the frame, and remove the BOX ASSY., FLUSHING (L).
FLUSHING (L)
C A U T IO N When reinstalling the TUBE, INK, WASTE; L, make sure to insert

it correctly into the waste ink outlet and route the tubes as shown in Holes
Set the two positioning holes of the BOX ASSY., FLUSHING

(L) onto the guide pins on the frame. Guide Pins
Before screwing the BOX ASSY., FLUSHING (L), make sure
Ink Exhaust TUBE, INK, WASTE; L
that its upper edge is not in contact with the ROLLER, PF.
Figure 4-157. Removing the BOX ASSY., FLUSHING (L)
A D J U S T M E N T Whenever the BOX ASSY., FLUSHING (L) is replaced, the
R E Q U IR E D
page 306.

4.2.7.7 PUMP ASSY., SUPPLY

Relay Connector
1. Remove the COVER, REAR. See Section 4.2.3.6 on page 234.
2. Disconnect the connector both of the Pressure Motor and the Regulator Solenoid
from the relay connectors. See Figure 4-158.
3. Release the harnesses both of the Pressure Motor and the Regulator Solenoid from Retaining Clips
the eight retaining clips. See Figure 4-158. Harness Rear Side of the Printer
C H E C K The Stylus Pro 7400/7450/7800/7880/7880C has 6 retaining clips for

P O IN T the Pressure Motor and the Regulator Solenoid.
4. Disconnect the connector from the Pressure Sensor. See Figure 4-159.
Retaining Clip
5. Pull the two TUBE, PRESSURIZINGs shown in Figure 4-159 out of the PUMP Figure 4-158. Releasing the Harnesses
ASSY., SUPPLY.
Harness Left Rear of the Printer
C A U T IO N When inserting the two TUBE, PRESSURIZINGs into the PUMP (Regulator Solenoid)
TUBE, PRESSURIZING
ASSY., SUPPLY, pay attention to the followings. See Figure 4-159. (Home position side)
Be careful not to insert them on wrong shafts.
One tube come from the direction of the carriage home position
TUBE, PRESSURIZING
should be inserted on the upper shaft, and the other tube that (Opposit side of home
comes from the opposite direction should be inserted on the direction)
Harness
lower shaft.
(Pressure Motor)
Make sure to insert them on the shaft as far as they will go.
PUMP ASSY., 7
6. Remove the two screws that secure the PUMP ASSY., SUPPLY. See Figure SUPPLY
4-159.
7. Lift the PUMP ASSY., SUPPLY obliquely upward to release the tab, and remove Tab
the PUMP ASSY., SUPPLY. See Figure 4-159.
A D J U S T M E N T Whenever the PUMP ASSY., SUPPLY is replaced, the Connector

Pressure Sensor
R E Q U IR E D
corresponding adjustment must be carried out. See Chapter 5 on C.C.S. M3x8
page 306.
Figure 4-159. Removing the PUMP ASSY., SUPPLY

CHAPTER
5
ADJUSTMENT
5.1 Overview 5.1.3 Parts and Units that Require Adjustments

The following parts and units require adjustments after they are repaired or replaced.
This chapter describes the Adjustment Program software utility and the adjustment
procedures required after repairing or replacing certain parts in the Stylus Pro 7400/ Table 5-1. Parts and Units that Require Adjustments
7800/9400/9800.
Part or Unit Name (Disassembly/Reassembly reference page)
Main Board* (BOARD ASSY., MAIN (p.241))
5.1.1 Precautions
Power Supply Board (P/S BOARD ASSY. (p.243))
Always observe the following cautions whenever make an adjustment on the printer.
Relay Board (BOARD ASSY., SUB (p.245))
C A U T IO N Always refer to “5.1.4 Required Adjustments by Part or Unit” Cleaning Unit (PUMP CAP ASSY. (p.298), CLEANER, HEAD (p.301), BOX ASSY.,
(p.308) and make sure to perform all adjustments listed in the FLUSHING (R, L) (p.302))
table in the given order. Pressure Pump Unit (PUMP ASSY., SUPPLY (p.305))
Always read and follow the precautions given in each section Printhead (p.281)
that explains each adjustment. Ignoring the precautions can Damper (VALVE ASSY., HEAD; C (p.285))
result in malfunction of the printer.
Motor CR Motor (CR MOTOR ASSY. (p.252))
5.1.2 Adjustment Workflow PF Motor (PF MOTOR ASSY. (p.269))

Sensor Paper Thickness Sensor (P Thick1 Sensor, P Thick2 Sensor (p.275))
See “5.1.3 Parts and Units that Require Adjustments” (p.307) to check whether the
part you repaired or replaced is included in the list. And, if it is, see “5.1.4 Required Ink Mark Sensor (p.277)
Adjustments by Part or Unit” (p.308) to make sure what adjustments must be made. Be CR Encoder Sensor (p.255)
sure to perform the all required adjustments in the specified order given in the table. Rear Sensor (P Rear Sensor (p.276))
PF Encoder Sensor (p.272)
Is the part you repaired or replaced
NO
included in “Table 5-1. Parts and No adjustment necessary Ink Cartridge Slot
Units that Require Adjustments” (HOLDER ASSY., IC, RIGHT, HOLDER ASSY., IC, LEFT (p.289))
(p.307)?
Cutter Solenoid (CUTTER SOLENOID ASSY. (p.257))
YES “5.2 Mechanical Adjustment” (p.315)
CR Timing Belt (CR BELT (p.249))
See “Table 5-2. Required Adjustments
in the Order of Execution” (p.308) to “5.3 Basic Adjustment” (p.331) Carriage Unit (CARRIAGE UNIT (p.261))
check the required adjustments and
the correct order to perform them. Note "*": Required adjustments after repairing or replacing the Main Board differs
“5.4 Advanced Adjustment” (p.375)
according to whether parameters stored on the NVRAM can be backed up or
not.
“5.5 Check Results” (p.380)
“5.6 Reset Counters” (p.385)

Update the firmware as necessary.
“5.7 Installing Firmware” (p.389)
Adjustment Overview 307

5.1.4 Required Adjustments by Part or Unit Table 5-2. Required Adjustments in the Order of Execution (continued)
Part Name Required Adjustment RP*1 RM*2 Page
The following tables list adjustments required after each part or unit is repaired or
replaced. The adjustments are listed in the order of executing them. Power Supply 21 Colorimetric Calibration (Color ID) { --- p.359
Board 22 Writing MAC Address { --- p.392
Note "*1": RP = After replacing the part with a new one.
"*2": RM = After repairing the part (includes when it is just removed and reinstalled) Relay Board 1 Colorimetric Calibration (Color ID) { --- p.359
Cleaning 1 Reset When Cleaning Unit Change { --- p.386
Table 5-2. Required Adjustments in the Order of Execution Unit 2 Reset PG Switching Counter { --- p.385
Part Name Required Adjustment RP*1 RM*2 Page
Pressure Pump 1 Reset Pump Counter { --- p.388
Main Board 1 Installing Firmware { --- p.389 Unit
(Backup = OK) {
2 NVRAM Back Up and Write --- p.356 Printhead 1 Cleaning { --- p.357
3 Colorimetric Calibration (Color ID) { --- p.359 2 Head Rank ID { --- p.332
Main Board 1 Installing Firmware { --- p.389 3 Check Nozzle { --- p.380
(Backup = NG) {
2 Input Serial Number --- p.333 4 Check Alignment { { p.381
3 Head Rank ID { --- p.332 5 Nozzle Bi-D Adjustment { { p.339
4 Initial Ink Charge Flag ON/OFF { --- p.355 6 Print Head Slant Adjustment (CR) { { p.343
5 RTC&USB ID&IEEE1394 ID { --- p.331 7 PG Ajustment { --- p.327
6 Rear Sensor Adjustment { --- p.358 (Perform the adjustment if necessary.)
7 Check Nozzle { --- p.380 8 Print Head Slant Adjustment (PF) { { p.340
8 Check Alignment { --- p.381 9 Auto Uni-D Adjustment { { p.347
9 980mm Band Feed Adjustment { --- p.354 10 Auto Bi-D Adjustment { { p.375
10 Nozzle Bi-D Adjustment { --- p.339 11 Print Image { { p.384
11 Print Head Slant Adjustment (PF) { --- p.340 12 Reset When PrintHead Change { --- p.387
12 Print Head Slant Adjustment (CR) { --- p.343 13 Colorimetric Calibration (Color ID) { --- p.359
13 Ink Mark Sensor Level Adjustment { --- p.346 Damper 1 Initial Ink Charge { { p.357
14 T&B&S (Roll Paper) { --- p.334 2 Check Nozzle { --- p.380
15 Platen Position Adjustment { --- p.352 3 Air leak check { { p.324
16 Ink Mark Sensor Adjustment for Auto { --- p.349
Nozzle Check
17 Auto Uni-D Adjustment { --- p.347
18 Auto Bi-D Adjustment { --- p.375
19 Cutter Pressure Adjustment { --- p.338
20 Colorimetric Calibration (Color ID) { --- p.359

Table 5-2. Required Adjustments in the Order of Execution (continued) Table 5-2. Required Adjustments in the Order of Execution (continued)
Part Name Required Adjustment RP*1 RM*2 Page Part Name Required Adjustment RP*1 RM*2 Page
CR Motor 1 CR Timing Belt Tension Adjustment { { p.320 Carriage Unit 1 Platen Position Adjustment { --- p.352
(or CR Timing 2 Nozzle Bi-D Adjustment { { p.339 2 Rear Sensor Adjustment { --- p.358
Belt)
3 T&B&S (Roll Paper) { { p.334 3 Print Head Slant Adjustment (CR) { --- p.343
4 Platen Position Adjustment { { p.352 4 PG Ajustment { --- p.327
5 Auto Uni-D Adjustment { { p.347 (Perform the adjustment if necessary.)
6 Auto Bi-D Adjustment { { p.375 5 Print Head Slant Adjustment (PF) { --- p.340
7 Reset When CR Unit Change { --- p.386 6 Check Nozzle { --- p.380
PF Motor 1 PF Timing Belt Tension Adjustment { { p.321 7 Ink Mark Sensor Adjustment for Auto { --- p.349
Nozzle Check
2 T&B&S + 980mm Band Feed { { p.336
8 Auto Uni-D Adjustment { --- p.347
3 Reset PF Motor Counter { --- p.385
9 Auto Bi-D Adjustment { --- p.375
Paper Thickness 1 Paper Thickness Sensor Position { { p.318
Sensor Adjustment 10 Skew Check { --- p.351
Ink Mark 1 Ink Mark Sensor Height Adjustment { { p.315 11 Nozzle Bi-D Adjustment { --- p.339
Sensor 2 Ink Mark Sensor Level Adjustment { { p.346
3 T&B&S (Roll Paper) { --- p.334
4 Platen Position Adjustment { { p.352
5 Ink Mark Sensor Adjustment for Auto { { p.349
Nozzle Check
6 Auto Uni-D Adjustment { { p.347
7 Auto Bi-D Adjustment { { p.375
CR Encoder 1 CR Encoder Sensor Adjustment { --- p.322
Sensor
Rear Sensor 1 Rear Sensor Adjustment { --- p.358
PF Encoder 1 PF Encoder Sensor Adjustment { --- p.323
Sensor 2 T&B&S + 980mm Band Feed { --- p.336
Ink Tube 1 Air leak check { { p.324
Ink 1 Air leak check { { p.324
Cartridge
Slot
Cutter 1 Cutter Position/Height Adjustment { { p.316
Solenoid 2 Cutter Pressure Adjustment { { p.338

5.1.5 Description of Adjustments

The following tables describes the general outline of the adjustments.
Note "*1": AU = Adjustment Program
"*2": SM = Serviceman Mode (See “1.4.6 SERVICEMAN MODE” (p.111).)
"*3": AT = Jig or Tool for the adjustment (does not include the program tool)
MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
Tool
Adjustment General Overview Page
AU*1 SM*2 AT*3
Ink Mark Sensor Height Adjustment Adjusts the position of the Ink Mark Sensor so that the gap between the sensor and the platen becomes properly. --- --- { p.315
Cutter Position/Height Adjustment Adjusts the Cutter position and checks the paper cutoff position to optimize the gap between the cutter and the --- --- { p.316
bumps for the cutter.
Paper Thickness Sensor Position Adjustment Adjusts the attaching positions of the Paper Thick Sensor 1 and 2 so that the sensors can detect paper thickness --- { { p.318
accurately.
CR Timing Belt Tension Adjustment Adjusts the tension of the CR Timing Belt to a specified level. --- --- --- p.320
PF Timing Belt Tension Adjustment Adjusts the tension of the PF Timing Belt to a specified level. --- --- { p.321
CR Encoder Sensor Adjustment Adjusts the position of the CR Scale in relation to that of the CR Encoder Sensor. --- --- --- p.322
PF Encoder Sensor Adjustment Adjusts the position of the PF Loop Scale in relation to that of the PF Encoder Sensor. --- --- --- p.323
Air Leak Check Checks if air leak is occurring or not in the ink path after replacing the Ink Tube, Ink Cartridge Holder or --- --- { p.324
Dampers, or after adjusting the Ink Cartridge Holder or Damper joints.
PG Adjustment Adjusts the gap between the platen and the carriage unit. --- --- { p.327

BASIC ADJUSTMENT
Tool
AU*1 SM*2 AT*3
RTC&USB ID&IEEE1394 ID Initializes the RTC and writes USB ID and IEEE 1394 ID. { --- --- p.331
Head Rank ID Writes a Head Rank ID. { --- --- p.332
Input Serial Number Writes and reads the serial number. { --- --- p.333
T&B&S (Roll Paper) Adjusts the print area on roll paper. { --- --- p.334
T&B&S + 980mm Band Feed Corrects a paper feeding amount and adjusts the left, right, top and bottom margins. { --- --- p.336
Cutter Pressure Adjustment Adjusts the paper cutting pressure. { { --- p.338
Nozzle Bi-D Adjustment Makes Bi-D adjustment for matte black nozzles, which can be used as a benchmark when making Bi-D { --- --- p.339
adjustment for the other color nozzles.
Print Head Slant Adjustment (PF) Prints an adjustment pattern to check if the Printhead is slanted in the PF direction and corrects the head angle. { --- --- p.340
Print Head Slant Adjustment (CR) Prints an adjustment pattern to check if the Printhead is slanted in the CR direction and corrects the head angle. { --- --- p.343
Ink Mark Sensor Level Adjustment Adjusts the light emitting amount of the Ink Mark Sensor. { --- --- p.346
Auto Uni-D Adjustment Performs an automatic Uni-D adjustment by the Ink Mark Sensor. { --- --- p.347
Auto Bi-d Adjustment (P.G. 0.8/1.6) Performs an automatic Bi-D adjustment by the Ink Mark Sensor. The platen gap to print an adjustment pattern { --- --- p.348
can be selected between 0.8 and 1.6.
Ink Mark Sensor Adjustment for Auto Nozzle Corrects the reading timing of the Ink Mark Sensor to detect dot missing status in main and sub scanning { --- --- p.349
Check direction.
Skew Check Feeds paper to check skew level of the paper. { --- --- p.351
Platen Position Adjustment Adjusts the printing position for borderless printing. { --- --- p.352
980mm Band Feed Adjustment Prints a 980-mm-length pattern to check the band-feed amount. { --- { p.354
Initial Ink Charge Flag ON/OFF A flag for initial ink charge can be set or cleared as necessary after replacing the Main Board. { --- --- p.355
NVRAM Back Up and Write Backs up parameters stored on the NVRAM on the previous board, and writes them into the NVRAM on a new { --- --- p.356
board.
Initial Ink Charge Performs an initial ink charge. { --- --- p.357
Cleaning Runs a cleaning. { --- --- p.357
Rear Sensor Adjustment Gets AD values of a newly attached Rear Sensor to store them onto the Main Board as a standard of reading --- { { p.358
operation of the sensor.
Colorimetric Calibration (Color ID) Adjusts the amount of ink droplets { --- { p.359
Writing MAC Address Writes MAC address to the main board. { --- --- p.392

ADVANCED ADJUSTMENT
Tool
AU*1 SM*2 AT*3
Auto Bi-D Adjustment Performs an automatic Bi-D adjustment by the Ink Mark Sensor. The adjustment patterns are printed out with { --- --- p.375
the platen gap set at 0.8 and 1.6.
Manual Bi-D Adjustment Makes Bi-D adjustments for all nozzles. { --- --- p.376
Destination Setting Makes the destination settings. { --- --- p.378
PF Micro Feed Adjustment (Bi-D) Adjusts a paper feed amount to reduce bands appear on prints. { --- --- p.379
CHECK RESULTS
Tool
AU*1 SM*2 AT*3
Check Nozzle Checks the nozzles for clogging. { --- --- p.380
Check Alignment Checks the print alignment. { --- --- p.381
Print Adjustment Check Pattern Prints all adjustment parameters and patterns. { --- --- p.382
Check Cutting Performs a roll paper cutting operation. The cutter performance can be checked. { --- --- p.383
Print Image Prints a sample image. Print quality can be checked. { --- --- p.384
RESET COUNTERS
Tool
AU*1 SM*2 AT*3
Reset PG Switching Counter Resets the PG switching counter. { --- --- p.385
Reset PF Motor Counter Resets the cumulative travel distance of the PF Motor. { --- --- p.385
Reset When CR Unit Change Resets the cumulative number of “Pass” times of the CR Motor. { --- --- p.386
Reset When Cleaning Unit Change Resets the life counter of the Cleaning Unit. { --- --- p.386
Reset When PrintHead Change Resets the life counter of the Printhead. { --- --- p.387
Reset When Cutter Solenoid Change Resets the counter of the Cutter Solenoid Unit. { --- --- p.387
Reset Pump Counter Resets the counter of the Pump Unit. { --- --- p.388
Reset Ink Information Resets ink information set for each nozzle column. { --- --- p.388

5.1.6 Tools for Adjustments Table 5-3. Tools for Adjustments

Type Name Part Number Remarks
The table below shows the tools required for adjusting the Stylus Pro 7400/7450/7800/
7880/7880C/9400/9450/9800/9880/9880C. Soft- Adjustment Program --- Supplies
ware NVRAM backup utility --- Supplies
Table 5-3. Tools for Adjustments
Colorimetric Calibration Tool --- Supplies
Type Name Part Number Remarks
EPSON LFP Remote Panel tool --- Supplies
Hard Ink Mark Sensor Position Jig *1 1424365 For adjusting,
Tool checking Note "*1": The jig comes in a kit with multiple parts.
P THICK Sensor Position Jig *1 1424364 Thickness:
"*2": Use when make test prints for adjustment.
0.2/0.3/0.5/0.6
Cutter Position Jig 1424366 ---
INK LEAK CHECK JIG 1430064 --- Table 5-4. Ink Cartridge (110 ml)
Kimoto, Micro Trace #300 1057723 --- Part No.
Tension Gauge F770 (2,200 K) 1060744 --- 8 color 4 color
Tension Gauge (10N) (1,000 gf) 1401952 --- Ink Name Stylus Pro
Stylus Pro Stylus Pro Stylus Pro
Ruler (measurable at least 1,000 mm) --- Commercially 7880/7880C/
7800/9800 7400/9400 7450/9450
available 9880/9880C
Ink Cartridges (8 pcs.)*2 See Table 5-4 Consumables Photo Black C13T562100 C13T602100 --- ---
Maintenance Tank*2 C12C890191 Option Matte Black C13T566800 C13T611800 C13T566800 C13T611800
Premium Glossy Photo 24” (610 mm) S041638 EPSON genuine Cyan C13T562200 C13T602200 C13T566200 C13T611200
Paper (Stylus Pro 7400/7450/ Vivid Magenta --- C13T602300 --- ---
7800/7880/7880C)
Magenta C13T562300 --- C13T566300 C13T611300
44” (1118 mm) S041640 EPSON genuine
Yellow C13T562400 C13T602400 C13T566400 C13T611400
(Stylus Pro 9400/9450/
9800/9880/9880C) Light Black C13T562700 C13T602700 --- ---
Doubleweight Matte 24” (610 mm) S041385 EPSON genuine Light Cyan C13T562500 C13T602500 --- ---
Paper (Stylus Pro 7400/7450/ Vivid Light Magenta --- C13T602600 --- ---
7800/7880/7880C)
Light Magenta C13T562600 --- --- ---
44” (1118 mm) S041387 EPSON genuine
(Stylus Pro 9400/9450/ Light Light Black C13T562900 C13T602900 --- ---
9800/9880/9880C)
PG measuring jig 1.1mm

5.1.7 Adjustment Program Basic Operations Sequential mode

By selecting a part you replaced or repaired, this mode guides you to perform all
This section describes the basic operations of the Adjustment Program. the required adjustments in a predetermined sequence.
1. Highlight the part you replaced or repaired in the left box and click the [Add]
C A U T IO N The Adjustment Program includes some adjustment items which
button.
should not be performed at on-site service. Be sure not to perform
any adjustments that are not described in this manual at on-site 2. Click the [OK] button.
service.
System Requirements
OS: Windows 98SE, Me, 2000, XP
Interface: USB
The printer driver and EPW3 must have been installed.
Startup
1. Double-click on “adjwiz2.exe” to start the Adjustment Program.
2. A startup screen will appear. Select the printer name and the port.
z Printer Name (and the port)
Stylus Pro 7400, Stylus Pro 7450, Stylus Pro 7800, Stylus Pro 7880,
Stylus Pro 7880C, Stylus Pro 9400, Stylus Pro 9450, Stylus Pro 9800,
Stylus Pro 9880, Stylus Pro 9880C Figure 5-2. Sequential Mode
z Mode Individual mode
Select the mode between the sequential and individual modes. This mode allows you to select and perform an adjustment individually.
3. Click the [Start] button.
1. Highlight the target adjustment item and click the [OK] button.
Figure 5-1. Adjustment Program Startup Screen
Figure 5-3. Individual Mode

5.2 Mechanical Adjustment

Adjust the sensor position
5.2.1 Ink Mark Sensor Height Adjustment while loosening this screw.
This adjustment is intended to adjust the gap between the Ink Mark Sensor and the
platen.
Required Tool
Ink Mark Sensor Position Jig (for the adjustment and verification)
Procedure
1. Set the adjustment jig on the platen at home side by putting the four legs of the
jig into the paper suction holes as shown in Figure 5-4. Then move the
Carriage Unit slowly until the Ink Mark Sensor comes on the jig. Jig for Adjustment
2. Loosen the screw that secures the Ink Mark Sensor to the Carriage Unit as
shown in Figure 5-5, and adjust the position of the sensor so that it contacts
with the jig. Then tighten the screw.
3. Set the jig for verification to the position shown in Figure 5-4, and move the
Carriage Unit slowly until the Ink Mark Sensor comes on the jig. Then check
that the sensor slightly contacts with the elevated portion of the jig. Figure 5-5. Ink Mark Sensor Height Adjustment (1)
Jig for Adjustment Jig for Verification Adjust the sensor position so that it slightly
contacts with this elevated portion.
Jig for Verification
Paper Suction Holes Paper Suction Holes
Figure 5-4. Jig Setting Positions
Figure 5-6. Ink Mark Sensor Height Adjustment (2)
Adjustment Mechanical Adjustment 315

5.2.2 Cutter Position/Height Adjustment

Loosen the three screws.
This adjustment allows you to adjust the position and height of the cutter in relation to
the elevated portions on the platen provided for the cutter.
Required Tool
Cutter Position Jig
Procedure
1. Set the cutter position jig on the sub-platen at home side by putting the two
legs of the jig into the paper suction holes as shown in Figure 5-7. Then move
the Carriage Unit slowly until the Cutter Unit comes on the jig.
2. Loosen the three screws shown in Figure 5-8 that secure the Cutter Unit to the
Carriage Unit so that the Cutter Unit position can be adjusted.
3. Adjust the position of the Cutter Unit so that its bottom and left edges align
with those of the positioning jig, and press the unit against the jig to make
them in absolute contact with one another as shown in Figure 5-9. Then
secure the Cutter Unit with the screw loosened in Step 2.
Figure 5-8. Cutter Position/Height Adjustment (1)
Cutter Position Jig
Press the Cutter Unit

against the Jig
Paper Suction Holes
Figure 5-7. Jig Setting Position
Figure 5-9. Cutter Position/Height Adjustment (2)

5.2.2.1 Paper Cutting Position Check

You can verify whether the cutter position adjustment described in the previous section Carriage Unit Cut sheet of paper
was made properly or not by actually cutting paper with the cutter.
Cutter position verification
Procedure
1. Load a cut sheet of plain paper (A4 size or smaller; minimum allowable size is
10 (W) x 20 (H) cm) on the home side along with the paper setting position,
and press the Paper Set Lever down to secure the sheet.
2. Move the Carriage Unit with your hand to the right edge of the loaded sheet,
and press the Cutter down manually.
3. While holding down the bottom edge of the sheet with your hand, cut the
sheet with the cutter.
4. Place the gauge whose minimum measurement unit is 0.5 mm on the edge of
the elevated portion for the cutter on the sub-platen and verify that the gap
between the edge and the actual cut line is within 0.5 mm (with a tolerance of
-0.3 to +0.2 mm).
5. If the gap is out of the specified range, readjust the cutter position using the A gap between the cut line and
cutter position jig. the edge of the elevated portion
on the sub platen
0.5mm (+0.2/-0.3mm)
C H E C K The distance from the edge of the elevated portion for the cutter on
P O IN T the sub platen to the actual cut line of paper should be within 0.5
Cutter
mm with tolerance of -0.3 to +0.2 mm.
6. Perform the same verification at the anti-home side. Load a cut sheet on the
anti-home side, cut it by manually moving the cutter and measure the gap
between the edge of the elevated portion for the cutter and the actual cut line.
If the gap is out of the specified range, readjust the cutter position using the
cutter position jig.
Figure 5-10. Paper Cutting Position Check

5.2.3 Paper Thickness Sensor Position Adjustment If the displayed value is other than the “10”, the sensor position adjustment
must be carried out.
After the P THICK 1 and 2 sensors are replaced, the newly attached sensors must be →Adjustment Procedure
checked for their detection accuracy as it varies depending on the attaching position. 7. Release the Paper Set Lever to set the P THICK Sensor Position Jig (0.5) to
The sensor attaching position can be checked by the Self Testing menu and conduct the position shown in Figure 5-11, and press the Paper Set Lever down.
this adjustment only when the test result is NG. Check that “Sensor: Paper 10” is displayed on the LCD panel.
Required Tool If the displayed value is other than the “10”, the sensor position adjustment
P THICK Sensor Position Jig (0.2/0.3/0.5/0.6)
→Adjustment Procedure
Check Procedure 8. Release the Paper Set Lever to set the P THICK Sensor Position Jig (0.6) to
the position shown in Figure 5-11, and press the Paper Set Lever down.
C A U T IO N The following tests must be conducted with the Paper Set Lever Check that “Sensor: Paper 11” is displayed on the LCD panel.
pressed down. If the displayed value is other than the “11”, the sensor position adjustment
9. Release the Paper Set Lever and check that “Sensor. Paper 01” is displayed on
the LCD panel.
1. Enter into the Serviceman Mode.
10. After all the checking and adjustment are completed, perform the sensor self
Turn the printer ON while holding down the [Pause], [Menu ], and testing again to ensure that the sensor position is set properly.
[Paper Feed ].
2. Select “SELF TESTING: Test” to enter the Self Testing menu.
[Menu ]
3. Select “Test: Sensor”.
[Paper Feed ] twice → [Menu ] → [Paper Feed ] once
4. Make sure that the Paper Set Lever is pressed down and check that “Sensor:
Paper 00” is displayed on the LCD panel. If the displayed value is other than
the “00”, the sensor position adjustment must be carried out.
5. Release the Paper Set Lever to set the P THICK Sensor Position Jig (0.2) to
the position shown in Figure 5-11, and press the Paper Set Lever down.
Check that “Sensor: Paper 00” is displayed on the LCD panel.
If the displayed value is other than the “00”, the sensor position adjustment
P THICK Sensor Position Jig
6. Release the Paper Set Lever to set the P THICK Sensor Position Jig (0.3) to
the position shown in Figure 5-11, and press the Paper Set Lever down. Figure 5-11. Paper Thickness Sensor Position Adjustment (1)
Check that “Sensor: Paper 10” is displayed on the LCD panel.

Adjustment Procedure
Adjust the position of the P THICK Sensor 1 holder when the self testing with the Screws
0.2 or 0.3 jig resulted in NG, or when you do not have the 0.2 and 0.3 jigs. Adjust
the position of the P THICK Sensor 2 holder when the self testing with 0.5 or 0.6
jig resulted in NG, or when you do not have the 0.5 and 0.6 jigs.
1. Loosen the screw that secures the P THICK Sensor Holder.
2. Slightly slide the holder back and forth while watching the value displayed on
the LCD panel. Stop the holder immediately after the target value is
displayed.
1 2
C H E C K Slide the holder toward you to increase the value and slide it
P O IN T backward to decrease the value.
P THICK Sensor Holder
3. Secure the holder by tightening the screw.

Figure 5-12. Paper Thickness Sensor Position Adjustment (2)
0.3
0.2
0.5
0.6
Figure 5-13. P THICK Sensor Position Jigs

5.2.4 CR Timing Belt Tension Adjustment

Whenever the CR Motor Assy. or the CR Timing Belt is reattached or replaced, or the
CR Timing Belt tension is released, this adjustment must be carried out to apply proper
tension to the CR Timing Belt.
No tool is required
CR Tension
Procedure Screw
1. Turn the CR Tension screw until the tension indicating tab locates right at the
center of the tick marks (between the two long ticks) on the CR Tension
bracket.
2. After the adjustment, apply thread-locker to the CR Tension screw.
C H E C K Whether the CR Timing Belt tension has been adjusted or not can
P O IN T be judged by whether the thread-locker is applied or not.
CR Timing Belt CR Tension Bracket
Figure 5-14. CR Timing Belt Tension Adjustment
Center of the tick marks
Figure 5-15. Setting Position on Tick Marks

5.2.5 PF Timing Belt Tension Adjustment

Whenever the PF Motor Assy. is reattached or replaced, or the PF Timing Belt is
released, this adjustment must be carried out to apply proper tension to the PF Timing
Belt with the tension gauge.
Required Tool Tension Gauge
Tension gauge F770
Standard tension
2,200g ± 10% (tension in the moving direction of the PF Motor Mounting Plate)
Procedure
1. Loosen the four screws that secure the PF Motor Mounting Plate.
2. Hitch the tip of the tension gauge to the hole on the PF Motor Mounting Plate.
3. Pull the gauge in the direction of the arrow shown in Figure 5-16 until the
standard tension is obtained. And first tighten the two of the four screws
located diametrically opposite each other.
4. Then tighten the remaining two screws.
Figure 5-16. PF Timing Belt Tension Adjustment

5.2.6 CR Encoder Sensor Adjustment

This adjustment is intended to maintain a proper gap between the CR Encoder Sensor
and the CR Scale. CR Encoder Sensor Securing Screw
No tool is required
Procedure
1. Move the Carriage from the home to the anti-home side to visually check if
the CR Scale comes into contact with the CR Encoder Sensor as shown in
Figure 5-17.
2. If the contact is observed, loosen the screw that secures the CR Encoder
Sensor to adjust the sensor position not to contact with the CR Scale, and
tighten the screw.
3. Verify the sensor position by moving the Carriage from the home to anti-
home side.
SCALE, CR
CR Encoder
Sensor
Keep the CR Scale clear of

the sensor.
Figure 5-17. CR Encoder Sensor Adjustment

5.2.7 PF Encoder Sensor Adjustment

PF Loop Scale
This adjustment is intended to maintain a proper gap between the PF Encoder Sensor
and the PF Loop Scale. Securing Screws
No tool is required
Procedure
1. Loosen the two screws that secure the PF Encoder Mounting Plate. Adjust the
plate position visually so that the PF Loop Scale runs through the center of the
slit of the PF Encoder Sensor.
PF Encoder
Sensor
PF Encoder Mounting Plate
PF Loop Scale
PF Encoder
Sensor
Figure 5-18. PF Encoder Sensor Adjustment

5.2.8 Air Leak Check Pressure Gauge (GC66)

The battery can be replaced from the
The ink supply path should be checked for air leaks whenever the Ink Tube, Ink hole on the rear.
Cartridge Holder or Dampers are replaced, or the joint of the Ink Cartridge Holder and Valve No.2 (close)
the Damper is once loosened and retightened.
Measurement Cartridge Valve No.3 (close) Regulator Guard Plate
C A U T IO N Do not touch or press the regulator located under the regulator
guard plate.
Required Tool
INK LEAK CHECK JIG (with digital pressure gauge GC66): 1 x CR2016 (3V)
Procedure
1. Remove the seal cap of the Measurement Cartridge.
2. Insert the Measurement Cartridge into the Ink Cartridge Slot of the printer and
lower the Ink Lever. Valve No.1 (close) Regulator
3. Press the green button on the pressure gauge to turn the gauge ON.
Air Filter Syringe
Seal Cap
Figure 5-19. INK LEAK CHECK JIG Kit

4. Open the Valve No.2 and No.3 to reduce the pressure inside the measurement Connected to the Measurement Cartridge inserted
jig. into the cartridge slot of the printer.
5. Check that “0.0” kPa is displayed on the gauge.
6. Close the Valve No.3 and pull the piston head of the syringe. “0.0” kPa must be displayed
Valve No.3 (close) Green Button

Valve No.2 (close)
Syringe with its piston pulled fully
Figure 5-20. Air Leak Check (1)

7. Open the Valve No.1 and push the piston head of the syringe.
Should be within the range of 36 to 42 kPa.
8. Verify that the value displayed on the gauge is within the range of 36 to 42
kPa.
9. Close the Valve No.2. Write down the value displayed on the gauge after the Valve No.2 (open) Valve No.3 (open)
Valve No.2 is closed, and leave the jig for about three minutes.
10. Compare the value displayed after a lapse of three minutes with the value
written down in Step 9. A difference within 0.4 kPa is judged as OK (no air
leaks). A difference greater than 0.4 kPa is regarded as an evidence of air
leaks. Check the Damper joint for looseness or any other abnormalities, and
correct it if necessary. Then perform Step 4 to 10 again.
11. After verifying that the difference is within 0.4 kPa, open the Valve No.3 to
reduce the pressure inside the jig.
12. Disconnect the Measurement Cartridge from the Ink Cartridge Slot after the
gauge displays 0.0 kpa.
13. Put the seal cap onto the Measurement Cartridge.
Perform the above air leak check for each of the all Ink Cartridge Slots of the
printer.
14. When the air leak check of the all Ink Cartridge Slots is completed, press the
green button on the gauge for four to five seconds to turn the gauge OFF. Syringe with its piston pushed fully
15. Close the Valve No.1, No.2 and No.3.
Figure 5-21. Air Leak Check (2)

5.2.9 PG Adjustment
C H E C K Perform the PG adjustment if necessary.
P O IN T Align the top of 150mm
scale with the top most
suction holes on platen.
On this adjustment, the gap between the printhead and the platen will be measured. If
the gap is out of the standard, make sure to adjust it.
PG MEASUREMENT 150mm scale

Jigs
Procedure
1. Move the carriage unit manually to the opposite to the home position. Figure 5-22. Attaching position of the 150mm scale
2. Attach a 150mm scale with thickness less than 1mm on the platen with double
sided tape.
Slide gear BA
3. Rotate the slide gear BA on the right side of carriage unit, and adjust the tab to
the lower side.
Tab
Figure 5-23. Where to set the Slide Gear BA

4. Place the PG measuring jig 1.1mm.
C A U T IO N When moving the carriage unit to the PG measuring jig, take care
not to apply load onto the carriage unit. PG measuring jig
5. Move the carriage unit from the left side to the PG measuring jig 1.1mm, and
check if the head assy contacts the jig.
If not contacting the PG measuring jig 1.1mm
⇒ Go to Step 6
If contacting the PG measuring jig 1.1mm
⇒ “ PG Re-adjustment” (p.330)
7. Move the carriage unit from the left side to the PG measuring jig 1.2mm, and Carriage Unit
check if the head assy contacts the jig. Figure 5-24. PG measurement on the right side of the head assy
⇒ Go to Step 8
8. Place the PG measuring jig 1.1mm and confirm again that the right side of the
head assy does not contact the jig.

9. Remove the jig and move the carriage unit manually to the home position
side.
10. Place the PG measuring jig 1.1mm and move the carriage unit from the right
side to the jig, and check if the head assy contacts the jig.
⇒ Go to Step 11 PG measuring jig
12. Move the carriage unit from the right side to the PG measuring jig 1.2mm, and
check if the head assy contacts the jig.
If contacting the PG measuring jig 1.2mm Carriage Unit
⇒ Go to Step 13
13. Place the PG measuring jig 1.1mm and confirm again that the left side of the
head assy does not contact the jig. Figure 5-25. PG measurement on the left side of the head assy
14. Move the carriage to the opposite to the home position, and make a
confirmation about the right side of the head assy once again to finish the
adjustment.
C H E C K After this adjustment, make sure to check if the CR scale is not

P O IN T contaminated.

PG RE-ADJUSTMENT
PG adjustment levers (Right)
PG Re-adjustment on the right side of the head assy
1. Loosen the screw that secures the adjustment lever on the right side of the
carriage unit.
C A U T IO N Take care not to widen the eccentric shaft bearing.
Screw
2. Adjust the gap by moving the adjustment lever up and down little by little.
3. Tighten the screw.
4. Give the PG lever one turn and confirm that the PG eccentric shaft shifts correctly.
5. After this adjustment, perform the PG measurement once again.
PG Re-adjustment on the left side of the head assy
1. Loosen the screw that secures the adjustment lever on the left side of the
carriage unit. Figure 5-27. Re-adjustment on the right side of the head assy
2. Adjust the gap by moving the adjustment lever up and down little by little.
3. Tighten the screw.
PG adjustment levers (Left)
4. Give the PG lever one turn and confirm that the PG eccentric shaft shifts correctly.
5. After this adjustment, perform the PG measurement once again.
PG adjustment levers (Left) PG adjustment levers (Right)
Screw
PG lever
Screw
Figure 5-28. Re-adjustment on the left side of the head assy
Figure 5-26. Locations of the PG adjustment levers

5.3 Basic Adjustment IEEE 1394 ID Label
5.3.1 RTC&USB ID&IEEE1394 ID
C H E C K Writing IEEE1394 ID is Stylus 7400/7800/9400/9800 only.

P O IN T
This allows you to write date and time to be maintained by the RTC, USB ID and
IEEE1394 ID to the newly mounted Main Board.
Procedure
1. After replacing the Main Board, write down the 10-digit ID (IEEE1394 ID)
on the ID label affixed on the right frame of the printer.
2. Turn the printer ON.
3. Start up the Adjustment Program and select [RTC&USB ID&IEEE1394 ID]. Figure 5-29. IEEE 1394 ID Label
4. Check if the date and time displayed on the screen is correct. Enter the date
and time if necessary.
5. Enter the 10-digit serial number of the printer. USB ID is automatically
created according to the serial number.
6. Enter the 10-digit IEEE1394 ID written down in Step 1 into the box.
7. Click the [Write] button to write the information entered into the boxes onto
the NVRAM on the new Main Board.
8. Click the [Next] button to display a confirmation screen. All the information
written on the NVRAM is displayed on the screen. Confirm the information
and click [OK].
9. Click the [Finish] button.
C A U T IO N If the printer is turned OFF and back ON after changing the USB
ID, the computer (Windows) detects the USB port used to connect
the printer as a new port and automatically copies the printer
driver as xxxx (copy x). If you need to perform another adjustment
using the Adjustment Program, exit out of the program and select
the “copy x” driver, then restart the program.
Figure 5-30. [RTC&USB ID&IEEE1394 ID] Screen
Adjustment Basic Adjustment 331

5.3.2 Head Rank ID

Every printhead has its own Head Rank ID which compensates unit-to-unit variation.
Whenever the printhead is replaced, the Head Rank ID of the new printhead must be
written using this menu.
Procedure for Writing
<Entering the ID manually>
2. Start up the Adjustment Program and select [Head Rank ID].
3. Write down the 40-digit Head Rank ID (QR code) indicated on the ID label ID Label
affixed to the new Printhead.
4. Enter the 40-digit ID into the edit boxes in the same way as indicated on the
label (eight digits per each edit box).
5. Click the [Write] button.
Procedure for Writing
Enter the ID code.
<Entering the ID using a file (txt) obtained from the new printhead>
3. Click the [File Open] and select a Head Rank ID Information file (txt).
4. Click the [Write] button.
Procedure for Storing the Head Rank ID Information as a File
3. Write down the 40-digit Head Rank ID (QR code) indicated on the ID label
affixed to the new Printhead.
4. Enter the 40-digit ID into the edit boxes in the same way as indicated on the
label (eight digits per each edit box).
5. Click the [File Save] and save the ID information under a new file name.
Figure 5-31. [Head Rank ID] Screen

5.3.3 Input Serial Number

This allows you to write the serial number of the printer onto the NVRAM. And the
stored serial number can be read and displayed for verification.
Procedure
2. Start up the Adjustment Program and select [Input serial number].
3. Enter the 10-digit serial number of the printer and click the [Write] button.
4. The serial number is written onto the NVRAM on the Main Board.
5. Click the [Read] button to display the stored serial number.
Figure 5-32. [Input Serial Number] Screen

5.3.4 T&B&S (Roll Paper) 7. After confirming that the all values are within the specified range, click the
[Finish] button.
The print area on roll paper including the cutoff position, and the light emitting timing If they are not, perform Step 3 to Step 5 again.
of the Ink Mark Sensor in main scanning direction can be adjusted using this menu.
Paper Used C A U T IO N Be sure to place the adjustment pattern print on a flat surface when
performing the measurement.
Size: 24” (Stylus Pro 7400/7450/7800/7880/7880C)
44” (Stylus Pro 9400/9450/9800/9880/9880C)
Type: Doubleweight Matte Paper
Specifications
Top margin: 10 ± 1 mm
Bottom margin: 14 ± 1 mm
Side margin: 10 ± 0.3 mm
Procedure
1. Start up the Adjustment Program and select [T&B&S (Roll Paper)].
2. Click the [Print] button to print the adjustment pattern.
3. Referring to Figure 5-34, measure the distance of the following three points.
Top and bottom margins
Check the direction of the arrow beside the “T&B Position” printed on the
bottom right of the adjustment pattern print. If the arrow is right-pointing,
measure the top and bottom margin width on the right side of the
adjustment pattern, and if it is left-pointing, measure those on the left side
of the pattern as shown in Figure 5-34.
Side margin
Measure the side margin width indicated on Figure 5-34.
Figure 5-33. [T&B&S (Roll Paper)] Screen
4. Enter the following values into the corresponding edit boxes. (The words
inside the parentheses indicate the names displayed on the screen.)
Values measured in Step 3
Top margin (Top Margin)
Bottom margin (Bottom Margin)
Side margin (Side Margin)
Values printed under the pattern
Ink Mark Sensor Left (MS Left)
Ink Mark Sensor Right (MS Right)
5. Click the [Write] button and then click the [Print] button to print the
adjustment pattern again.
6. Perform Step 3 and Step 4 and click the [Write] button.

Top Margin Top Margin

(←) (→)
Side Margin
T & B Position : <--

MS Left : XX.XXX mm
MS Right : X.XXX mm
Bottom Margin Bottom Margin

(←) (→)
Figure 5-34. Adjustment Pattern

5.3.5 T&B&S + 980mm Band Feed C A U T IO N Be sure to place the adjustment pattern print on a flat surface when
Paper feeding amount and the left, right, top and bottom margins can be adjusted using performing the measurement.
this menu.
Paper Used
Size: 24” (Stylus Pro 7400/7450/7800/7880/7880C)
44” (Stylus Pro 9400/9450/9800/9880/9880C)
Specifications
Top margin: 10 ± 5 mm
Bottom margin: 14 ± 5 mm
Side margin: 10 ± 5 mm
980mm feed: 980mm ± 10 mm
Procedure
1. Start up the Adjustment Program and select [T&B&S + 980mm Band Feed].
3. Referring to Figure 5-36, measure the distance of the following four points.
Top margin
Bottom margin
Side margin
Band-feed amount
4. Enter the values measured in Step 3 into the corresponding edit boxes. (The Figure 5-35. T&B&S (Roll Paper) + 980mm Band Feed Screen
words inside the parentheses indicate the names displayed on the screen.)
Top margin (Top Margin)
Bottom margin (Bottom Margin)
Side margin (Side Margin Adjust)
Band-feed amount (980mm Feed)
5. Click the [Write] button and then click the [Print] button to print the
adjustment pattern again.
6. Perform Step 3 and Step 4 and click the [Write] button.
7. After confirming that the all values are within the specified range, click the
[Finish] button.
If they are not, perform Step 3 to Step 5 again.

Top Margin (10 ± 5 mm)
Top
Side Margin (10 ± 5 mm)
Measurement
Bottom Margin (14 ± 5 mm)

5.3.6 Cutter Pressure Adjustment 10. [Decrease or increase the value by pressing the [Paper Feed ( )] buttons
and press the [Enter ] button to accept the change. →Step 5
Whenever the Cutter Solenoid is replaced, the cutter pressure must be adjusted using
this menu.
Required Tool
Tension gauge (10N)
Standard pressure
350 to 700g
Procedure
Turn the printer ON while holding down the [Pause], [Menu ], and
[Paper Feed ].
2. Select “SELF TESTING: Test” to enter the Self Testing menu.
[Menu ]
3. Select “Test: Cut Adj.”.
[Menu ] → [Paper Feed ] four times Cutter Cap Tension Gauge
4. Select “Cut Adj: Cutter”.
[Menu ] Figure 5-37. Cutter Pressure Adjustment
5. Press the [Enter ] button after “Pressure: ∗XX%” is displayed on the LCD
panel. “Exec. Adj. ?” will be displayed.
6. Press the [Enter ] button again. “Please Wait” will be displayed.
7. When the Carriage Unit moves to the cutoff position, “[Exec] Key Down”
will be displayed.
8. Hitch the tip of the tension gauge to the cutter cap.
9. Press the [Enter ] button and pull the gauge. Measure the tension when the
cutter is moved upward.
z Measurement Points
Perform the tension measurement at the right, center and the left of the
printer.
When the result satisfies the standard level, finish the adjustment.
Return the Carriage Unit to its home position and turn the printer OFF.
When the result does not satisfies the standard level, proceed to Step
10.
If the standard level cannot be obtained even after repeating the
adjustment, replace the Cutter Solenoid.

5.3.7 Nozzle Bi-D Adjustment

This menu conducts a bi-directional printing alignment adjustment for the Photo or
Matte black nozzle column. The black ink alignment should be adjusted properly
before performing the Bi-D adjustment for the other color ink.
Paper Used
Size: 24” (Stylus Pro 7400/7450/7800/7880/7880C)
44” (Stylus Pro 9400/9450/9800/9880/9880C)
Procedure
2. Start up the Adjustment Program and select [Nozzle Bi-D Adjustment].
3. Click the [Print] button to print a nozzle check pattern. The printer starts
printing the Bi-D pattern and the current setting.
4. Examine the printout lines and select the value for the most sharpest and
straight line. Then enter the value into the edit box.
Figure 5-38. [Nozzle Bi-D Adjustment] Screen
C H E C K The printed pattern is changed 2 steps, but you can input in 1-step
P O IN T unit.
Current Set Value PK/MK = 47 (0)
5. Click the [Write] button. After writing the value is completed, print the Bi-D
pattern again for verification.
39 47 55
Figure 5-39. Bi-D Pattern

5.3.8 Print Head Slant Adjustment (PF) z A>B, or A<B (Pattern 1, 3):
Click the [Next] and start adjustment on the next screen. →Step 6
Paper Used
Size: 24” (Stylus Pro 7400/7450/7800/7880/7880C) Paper Feed Direction
44” (Stylus Pro 9400/9450/9800/9880/9880C)
Type: Premium Glossy Photo Paper
Procedure
2. Start up the Adjustment Program and select [Print Head Slant Adjustment
(PF)].
Pattern 1 (A>B)
3. Click the [Print] button to print the adjustment pattern. A
B NG
Paper
Paper Ejecting
Direction
Pattern 2 (A=B)
A
B
OK
Pattern 1 (A<B)
A
B
NG
Figure 5-40. [Print Head Slant Adjustment (PF)] Screen (1)
4. Examine the printout block patterns. In each block pattern, check the point
where the vertical and horizontal white lines (gaps between the adjacent Figure 5-41. Adjustment Pattern
blocks) cross each other.
5. Measure the width of the vertical white line at the cross point with a calibrated
magnifying glass.
z A=B (Pattern 2):
Click the [Next] and click the [Finish] on the next screen to finish the
adjustment.

6. Remove the H Top Cover and move the Carriage Unit to the center.
7. Remove the two screws (A and B shown in Figure 5-42) that secure the Head
Fixing Plate and remove it.
8. Loosen the screw (C) that secures the Head Slant Lever.
Screws Securing the Head Fixing Plate
C H E C K Loosing or tightening the screw securing the Head Slant Lever
P O IN T becomes easier with a ratchet screwdriver.
B
A
9. Slightly move the Head Slant Lever up or downward to correct the inclination
of the printhead.
z A>B (Pattern 1) shown in Figure 5-41: Head Fixing Plate
Move the Head Slant Lever downward.
z A<B (Pattern 3) shown in Figure 5-41:
Move the Head Slant Lever upward. Screw Securing the Head
Upward Slant Lever
C A U T IO N When tightening the screw on the right that secures the Head C
Fixing Plate, make sure to hold the Carriage Unit with your hand so
that the Carriage Unit does not tilt.
10. Attach the three screws removed in Step 7, and tighten them in the order of A,
B, and C. Then return the Carriage Unit to its home position and close the Downward
printer cover (half transparent).
11. Click the [Back] button to return to the previous screen. Repeat Step 3 to Step Head Slant Lever
9 until the correct result is obtained.
Figure 5-42. Screws and Head Slant Lever

Figure 5-43. Print Head Slant Adjustment (PF) Screen (2)

5.3.9 Print Head Slant Adjustment (CR)

Paper Used 1 A<B 2 A=B 3 A>B
Size: 24” (Stylus Pro 7400/7450/7800/7880/7880C) B B B

44” (Stylus Pro 9400/9450/9800/9880/9880C)
A A
Type: Premium Glossy Photo Paper A
Procedure
2. Start up the Adjustment Program and select [Print Head Slant Adjustment
(CR)].

Figure 5-44. [Print Head Slant Adjustment (CR)] Screen (1)
4. Examine the printout patterns with its print start side facing downward.
5. Measure the two intervals of dot-lines in any one of the patterns shown in
Figure 5-45 with a calibrated magnifying glass.
z The two intervals are the same: No need to make the adjustment. Click the
[Next] button twice to display the Screen 3 (Figure 5-48) and click the
[Run] on the screen. The Carriage Unit will return to its home position and
the roll paper will be reeled off.
Click the [Finish] button to exit out of the adjustment menu.
z The two intervals are Not the same: Proceed to Step 6.

6. Remove the H Top Cover and move the Carriage Unit to the center.
7. Remove the two screws (A and B shown in Figure 5-47) that secure the Head
Fixing Plate and remove it.
8. Slightly move the H Adjust Lever up or downward to correct the inclination
of the printhead.
z A<B shown in Figure 5-45: Move the H Adjust Lever downward.
z A>B shown in Figure 5-45: Move the H Adjust Lever upward.
C A U T IO N When tightening the screw on the right that secures the Head
Fixing Plate, make sure to hold the Carriage Unit with your hand so
that the Carriage Unit does not tilt. H Adjust Lever
9. Tighten the A and B screws that are removed in Step 7 in that order.
10. Close the printer cover (half transparent) and temporary joint the cover.
11. Press the [Back] button to return to the Screen 1 (Figure 5-44) and click the
[Print] on the screen to print the adjustment pattern again. The Carriage Unit
automatically moves to the center upon finishing the printing.
12. Click the [Next] button. (Go to Screen 3)
13. Examine the printout patterns again following the instruction in Step 5. If the
result is NG, perform Step 6 to Step 13 again.
Head Fixing Plate
B
A
Screws Securing the Head Fixing Plate
Figure 5-47. Screws Securing the Head Fixing Plate and the H Adjust Lever


5.3.10 Ink Mark Sensor Level Adjustment

This adjustment is made automatically. The Ink Mark Sensor emits light on the paper
and the platen, and receives the reflected light. The printer automatically adjusts the
sensitivity of the sensor by examining the received light intensity. The procedure
below explains how to print and read the adjustment values.
Paper Used
Size: 24” (Stylus Pro 7400/7450/7800/7880/7880C)
44” (Stylus Pro 9400/9450/9800/9880/9880C)
Procedure
2. Start up the Adjustment Program and select [Ink Mark Sensor Level
Adjustment].
3. Click the [Run] button to print adjusted values.
4. The following are explanations of the printed values. Check the values in B to
E if they meet the standard. Figure 5-49. [Ink Mark Sensor Level Adjustment] Screen
z A: Indicates which photoreceiver; PW1 or PW2 received the light when
the platen gap is set to 1.2.
z B: Switches between 1 and 0 depending on the received light intensity. A B C D E
The LED light intensity changes according to this value.
[PW1 (PG=1.2)] I/O: 1, D/A: 162, A/D: 234, A/D (2): 7,
z C: Indicates the light intensity emitted from the LED. There is no
standard for the light intensity control. [PW2 (PG=1.2)] I/O: 1, D/A: 91, A/D: 236,
z D: Indicates the light intensity reflected off the paper. The values should Figure 5-50. Ink Mark Sensor Adjusted Values
be within the range of 230 to 236.
z E: Indicates the light intensity reflected off the platen. The value should
be a single-digit number.

5.3.11 Auto Uni-D Adjustment

An automatic Uni-D adjustment by the Ink Mark Sensor can be made using this menu.
After printing the adjustment pattern, the subsequent adjustment procedures (scanning VSD1
the pattern and correction) are performed automatically.The pattern is printed with the
platen gap set to 1.2. The correction values obtained using the pattern are reflected on
the other platen gap settings (the values are copied and stored for each platen gap
setting).
Paper Used
VSD2
Size: 24” (Stylus Pro 7400/7450/7800/7880/7880C)
44” (Stylus Pro 9400/9450/9800/9880/9880C)
Procedure
VSD3
2. Start up the Adjustment Program and select [Auto Uni-D Adjustment].
3. Click the [Run] button to print the adjustment pattern.
4. When the pattern is printed, the printer automatically starts to scan the pattern
[VSD1] Fine = Lk : -3 M : 3 C : -3 LLk : -7 Y : -8 Lc : -2 Lm : -7 [VSD2] Fine = Lk : 3 M : 2 C : -1 LLk : 2 Y : -3 Lc : 3 Lm : -2
and performs the corrections. (No manual adjustment is required.) [VSD3] Fine = Lk : 0 M : 3 C : -3 LLk : -2 Y : -7 Lc : -2 Lm : -3 [PG=1.2]
5. Click the [Finish] button. Figure 5-52. Adjustment Pattern
Figure 5-51. [Auto Uni-D Adjustment] Screen

5.3.12 Auto Bi-D Adjustment (P.G. 0.8/1.6)

An automatic Bi-D adjustment by the Ink Mark Sensor can be made using this menu.
After printing the adjustment pattern with the platen gap set to 0.8 or 1.6, the
subsequent adjustment procedures (scanning the pattern and correction) are performed
automatically.
C H E C K The difference between this newly added adjustment and the “Auto
P O IN T Bi-D Adjustment” is whether the platen gap (0.8 or 1.6) to print the
adjustment pattern can be selected individually or not (the latter
one always prints two sets of pattern using the both platen gap
settings).
Paper Used
Size: 24” (Stylus Pro 7400/7450/7800/7880/7880C)
44” (Stylus Pro 9400/9450/9800/9880/9880C)
Figure 5-53. [Auto Bi-D Adjustment (PG0.8/1.6)] Screen
Procedure
VSD1 E column
2. Start up the Adjustment Program and select [Auto Nozzle Bi-D Adjustment D column
G column
(P.G. 0.8/1.6)]. F column
A column
3. Select the platen gap between 0.8 and 1.6, and click [Run] button to print the H column
C column
adjustment pattern. B column
4. When the pattern is printed, the printer automatically starts to scan the pattern
and performs the corrections. (No manual adjustment is required.) VSD2
VSD3
[VSD1] [PG=0.8] [Average] VSD1 = 21 Rough = 0

Fine = E : -1 [ 0, -1,---] D : 0 [ 1, -1,---] G : 0[ 1, -1,---] F : 1[ 1, -1,---] A : 1 [ 3, -1,---] H : 0[ 1, -1,---] C : 1[ 1, 1,---] B : 2[ 4, 0,--
-]
Fine = E : 1 [ 1, 1,---] D : 0 [ 1, -1,---] G : 2[ 2, -1,---] F : 1[ 1, -1,---] A : 0 [ 1, -1,---] H : 0[ 1, -1,---] C : 1[ 1, 1,---] B : 4[ 3, 4,--
-]
Fine = E : 1 [ 1, 1,---] D : 1 [ 1, -1,---] G : 2[ 2, -1,---] F : 1[ 1, -1,---] A : 1 [ 1, -1,---] H : 1[ 1, 1,---] C : 2[ 1, 2,---] B : 5[ 4, 6,--
-]

5.3.13 Ink Mark Sensor Adjustment for Auto Nozzle Check

This menu automatically adjusts the Ink Mark Sensor scanning timing (drive pulse of
the CR and PF motors), and also checks the sensor for dot-missing detection
sensitivity. Since the scanning timing varies by unit-to-unit according to the CR and PF
motors’ characteristic, the timing adjustment is made by storing a difference
(correction value) between standard values (pulses) and actually measured values.
First the printer automatically prints a pattern and makes the timing adjustment in both
main and sub scanning directions using the pattern. Then two patterns (with and
without dot-missing) are printed to check the dot-missing detection sensitivity of the
sensor.
Paper Used
Size: 24” (Stylus Pro 7400/7450/7800/7880/7880C)
44” (Stylus Pro 9400/9450/9800/9880/9880C)
Procedure
1. Turn the printer ON. Figure 5-55. [Ink Mark Sensor Adjustment for Auto Nozzle Check] Screen
2. Start up the Adjustment Program and select [Ink Mark Sensor Adjustment for
Auto Nozzle Check].
3. Select the [Sensor Adjustment] and click the [Run] button. An adjustment
pattern will be printed.
The Ink Mark Sensor starts to scan the printed pattern and when finished, the
printer automatically conducts the timing adjustment and prints the result.

4. Select the [Print Check Pattern] and click the [Run] button to print dot-
missing detection check patterns.
The one pattern includes dot-missing and the other one does not. The Ink
Mark Sensor scans them and the result is printed below the patterns.
[PG=1.2]
[Position] MK : ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0),
( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0)
[Position] C : ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0),
( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0)
[Position] M : ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0),
[PG=1.2] ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0)
[Position] Y : ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0),
( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0)
[Position] MK : ( 1, 3) , ( 9, 3) , ( 5, 13) , ( 1, 22) , ( 9, 22) , ( 0, 0),
[Position] LLk : ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0),
( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0)
( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0)
[Position] C : ( 1, 3) , ( 9, 3) , ( 5, 13) , ( 1, 22) , ( 9, 22) , ( 0, 0),
[Position] Lm : ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0),
( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0)
( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0)
[Position] M : ( 1, 3) , ( 9, 3) , ( 5, 13) , ( 1, 22) , ( 9, 22) , ( 0, 0),
[Position] Lc : ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0),
( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0)
( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0)
[Position] Y : ( 1, 3) , ( 9, 3) , ( 5, 13) , ( 1, 22) , ( 9, 22) , ( 0, 0),
[Position] Lk : ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0),
( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0)
( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0)
[Position] LLk : ( 1, 3) , ( 9, 3) , ( 5, 13) , ( 1, 22) , ( 9, 22) , ( 0, 0), OK! Go to next work
( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0)
[Position] Lm : ( 1, 3) , ( 9, 3) , ( 5, 13) , ( 1, 22) , ( 9, 22) , ( 0, 0), Figure 5-58. Dot-missing Detection Check Pattern (No dot-missing)
( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0)
[Position] Lc : ( 1, 3) , ( 9, 3) , ( 5, 13) , ( 1, 22) , ( 9, 22) , ( 0, 0),
( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0)
[Position] Lk : ( 1, 3) , ( 9, 3) , ( 5, 13) , ( 1, 22) , ( 9, 22) , ( 0, 0),
( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0)
OK! Go to next work
Figure 5-57. Dot-missing Detection Check Pattern (with dot-missing)

5.3.14 Skew Check

Paper Used
Size: 24” (Stylus Pro 7400/7450/7800/7880/7880C)
44” (Stylus Pro 9400/9450/9800/9880/9880C)
Procedure
2. Start up the Adjustment Program and select [Skew Check].
3. Click the [Run] button. The roll paper will be ejected by about one meter and
a deviation in position of the left and right edge of the paper is detected by the
Multi Sensor.
C A U T IO N As about one-meter-length roll paper is ejected, keep the paper

ejection area clear of any obstacles.
Figure 5-59. [Skew Check] Screen
4. When the deviation amount is displayed, click the [OK] button.

5. Click the [Finish] button and reset the roll paper.

5.3.15 Platen Position Adjustment

This menu allows you to adjust print position for the borderless printing (no margin on
the left and right sides) in relation to the position of the Ink pads on the platen.
Paper Used
Size: 24” (Stylus Pro 7400/7450/7800/7880/7880C)
44” (Stylus Pro 9400/9450/9800/9880/9880C)
Adjustment Procedure
2. Start up the Adjustment Program and select [Platen Position Adjustment].
4. Check if the line printed on the right side of the paper (when viewed from the
front of the printer) aligns with the edge of the platen tabs holding down the
Ink Pad as shown in Figure 5-61. If it does, click the [Next] button to proceed
to the next “Check Procedure”. If the line is not in proper alignment, measure
the deviation (the gap shown by red arrows in Figure 5-61, and enter the Figure 5-60. [Platen Position Adjustment] Screen (1)
measured value into the edit box.
z When the line is shifted leftward: + (plus) the measured value
z When the line is shifted rightward: - (minus) the measured value
5. Click the [Write] button to write the value into the printer.
6. Click the [Next] button.
+ value - value
NG OK NG

Check Procedure
1. Click the [Check] button to print the check pattern.
2. Check if the printed lines align with the edge of the platen tabs holding down
the Ink Pad as shown in Figure 5-63. If it does, click the [Finish] button.
If the lines are not in proper alignment with the platen tabs, click the [Back]
button to perform the adjustment again.
Figure 5-62. [Platen Position Adjustment] Screen (2)
OK NG

5.3.16 980mm Band Feed Adjustment

Required Tool
Ruler (measurable at least 1,000 mm)
Paper Used
Size: 24” (Stylus Pro 7400/7450/7800/7880/7880C)
44” (Stylus Pro 9400/9450/9800/9880/9880C)
Procedure
2. Start up the Adjustment Program and select [980mm Band Feed Adjustment].
4. Measure the distance shown in Figure 5-65 with a 1000 mm ruler and a scale
stopper.
5. Enter the measured value into the [980mm Band] edit box and click the
[Write] button. Figure 5-64. [980mm Band Feed Adjustment] Screen
C H E C K A line printed on the center is a guide line to help the measurement.

P O IN T

5.3.17 Initial Ink Charge Flag ON/OFF

Procedure
[Paper Feed ].
Measurement 2. Start up the Adjustment Program and select [Initial Ink charge flag ON/OFF].
3. Select “ON” or “OFF” and click the [Run] button.
Figure 5-66. [Initial Ink Charge Flag ON/OFF] Screen

5.3.18 NVRAM Back Up and Write 5. Start up the Adjustment Program and select [NVRAM Back Up and Write].
6. Click the [Run] button to run the NVRAM Backup Utility.
Whenever the Main Board is replaced, parameters stored in the NVRAM on the 7. Select the target printer on which the parameters are written in the [Printer
previous board should be backed up and written onto the new board using this menu. Name].
Read & Save Procedure 8. Click the [Open] button to select and open the file which was saved in “Read
& Save Procedure” Step 6.
C A U T IO N When reading the parameters from the previous board, turn 9. Click the [Write] button to start writing the parameters.
the printer ON in F/W update mode. 10. When the writing is completed, exit out of the NVRAM Backup Utility.
Install and start EPW3 beforehand so as to avoid the
communication error.
1. Enter into the F/W update mode.

Turn the printer ON while holding down the [Paper Source ], [Menu
], [Paper Feed ] and [Paper Feed ].
2. Start up the Adjustment Program and select [NVRAM Back Up and Write].
3. Click the [Run] button to run the NVRAM Backup Utility.
4. Select the target printer from which the parameters are read in the [Printer
Name].
5. Click the [Read] button to start reading the parameters.
6. When the reading is completed, click the [Save] button and save the readout
parameters under a new file name.
7. Turn the printer OFF.
Write Procedure
C A U T IO N When writing the parameters on the new board, turn the printer
ON in Service Man mode.
Figure 5-67. [NVRAM Back Up and Write] Screen

1. Remove the all Ink Cartridges.
2. Remove the Maintenance Tank.
3. Release the Paper Set Lever.
[Paper Feed ].

5.3.19 Initial Ink Charge 5.3.20 Cleaning

Check the remaining amount of ink before performing the initial
Procedure
C A U T IO N
ink charge. If the remaining amount is lower than 50%, replace the 1. Turn the printer ON.
ink cartridge with a new one in advance. 2. Start up the Adjustment Program and select [Cleaning].
3. Select the cleaning type and press the corresponding key (F1 to F4) to perform
the selected cleaning.
Procedure Key Cleaning Amount of Ink Consumption Processing Time

1. Turn the printer ON. F1 CL1 Approx. 2.9 g/8 colors Approx. One and quarter min.
2. Start up the Adjustment Program and select [Initial Ink Charge]. F2 CL2 Approx. 3.8 g/8 colors Approx. One and quarter min.
3. Press the F5 key to start the initial ink charge. F3 CL3 Approx. 7.8 g/8 colors Approx. One and quarter min.
4. When the ink charge is completed, click the [Finish] button.
F4 CL4 Approx. 29.2 g/8 colors Approx. Three and half min.
4. When the cleaning is completed, click the [Finish] button.
Figure 5-68. [Initial Ink Charge] Screen
Figure 5-69. [Cleaning] Screen

5.3.21 Rear Sensor Adjustment 8. After confirming the “RearAD: *** *** ***” display, release the Paper Set
Lever and remove the Micro Trace.
Whenever the Rear Sensor is replaced, AD values (basis for paper detection) of a 9. Lower the Paper Set Lever and turn the printer OFF.
newly attached sensor should be obtained to store them onto the Main Board.
Required Tool Micro Trace
Kimoto, Micro Trace #300

Procedure
[Paper Feed ].
2. Select “SELF TESTING: Adjustment” to enter the Self Testing menu.
[Paper Feed ] → [Menu ]
3. Select “Adjustment: RearAD”.
[Paper Feed ] five times
4. Release the Paper Set Lever.
5. Load the Micro Trace on the printer from the rear paper feeder setting it to the
position shown in Figure 5-70, and lower the Paper Set Lever.
C A U T IO N In Figure 5-70, the H Top Cover is removed to show the position of

the Micro Trace clearly. When performing the adjustment, do not
remove the H Top Cover, or the AD value cannot be obtained Figure 5-70. Setting the Micro Trace
correctly.
6. Press the [Menu ] button. “[Enter] Start” will be displayed on the LCD
panel.
7. Press the [Enter ] button to start the AD value acquisition operation. After
about five seconds, the obtained AD value is displayed as “RearAD: *** ***
***”.
C A U T IO N “Retry AD Adjust” is displayed when the value cannot be obtained

due to Rear Sensor failure. In such case, replace the sensor and
make the adjustment again.

5.3.22 Colorimetric Calibration (Color ID)

5.3.22.1 Adjustment Overview
This adjustment is required after replacing any of the following parts.
PRINT HEAD
BOARD ASSY., MAIN
BOARD ASSY., SUB
P/S BOARD ASSY.
PURPOSE
By registering/controlling information concerning the ink droplets, this product

improves calibration accuracy and ensures stable color quality. (Difference in color
among individual products or each mode is reduced.) (Refer to “2.5 Colorimetric
Calibration (Color ID) Overview” (p.178))
PRINCIPLE
The calibration is performed by measuring a printed correction pattern with a

calibrator. ID information that is calculated based on the acquired color values (L*, a*,
b*) is transmitted to the printer driver, and the printer driver corrects the dot generation
amount for each dot size x each color in the print data.

5.3.22.2 Adjusting Method <Entire Process Workflow> <Separate Workflow>

(On-site Service) (User)
TOOLS REQUIRED
START START
Table 5-5. Tools Required
At repair work site Chart printing
Tool Application/Specification
Cleaning by the user Cleaning
Plain Paper (A4) For nozzle check and printing surface protection
Plain Paper (A3) For alignment check
EPSON Enhanced (Archival) Matte For printing charts
Nozzle check Nozzle check
Paper (A4)
Computer Following drivers should be installed beforehand.
Alignment check Alignment check
Printer driver for this product
USB driver for the calibrator
GretagMacbeth eye-one (i1) With UV filter Print calibration chart Print calibration chart
(Calibrator)
Calibration plate (White plate) Accessory provided with the calibrator Color measuring
Measure color by service Measure color
Scanning ruler (Scale) Accessory provided with the calibrator
personnel
USB cable To connect the computer and the calibrator
Black sheet Should be larger than A4 Write the color ID Generate color ID data
Clear file Required when sending charts
Print validation chart Enter the data
ADJUSTMENT WORKFLOW Color ID writing

Measure color by the user Write the color ID
The workflow of the adjustment is explained in this section. There are two types of the
workflow; the one is for performing adjustment at a place same as the repair (parts
replacement) work site, the other is for performing adjustment in a different place from Output the result
the repair work site as the adjustment (color measuring) could not be executed on site.
Entire process workflow
Performing adjustment continuously at the same place where the repairment is END END
carried put.
Separate process workflow Figure 5-71. Adjustment Workflow
Performing adjustment (color measuring) in a different place from the repair work
site

ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE (ENTIRE PROCESS WORKFLOW)
1. Turn the printer power on.

2. Start the adjustment program, and select [Colorimetric Calibration Tool].
3. Click [Run] to start the “Colorimetric Calibration Tool”.
4. Click the [Perform entire process] button.
5. Make sure that the “READY” message is displayed on the printer LCD, and click
[Next].
6. Select the connected printer from the printer list, and check if the LCD panel backlight
of the printer flashes by clicking [Confirming flashing of the backlight].
7. Click [Next], then the message that prompt you to agitate the ink inside the cartridges
will be displayed.
C H E C K If the printer has not been used for more than two weeks, it is
P O IN T recommended to agitate the ink inside the cartridges to get an
accurate result. Remove all the ink cartridges from the printer, and
shake them gently for four or five times.
8. Click [OK] to start the cleaning.
Figure 5-72. Colorimetric Calibration ID Startup Screen

9. Load an A4-sized paper vertically on the paper tray, select “Automatic Nozzle Check”
from the “Types of Nozzle Check” box, and click [Next] to start the nozzle check.
10. Load an A3-sized paper horizontally on the paper tray and click [Next] to perform the
alignment check.
C H E C K Clicking the [Skip alignment check] button will let you proceed to
P O IN T the next step without performing the alignment check.
11. Check the alignment pattern. If there is any defect, click [Cleaning] to execute
cleaning.
If the check pattern is appropriate, click [Next].
12. Load an A4-sized Archival Matte Paper vertically on the paper tray, and click [Next] to
print the calibration chart.
C A U T IO N Never touch the printed calibration chart.
Figure 5-73. Entire Process Screen

13. Make sure there is no missing dots in the nozzle check pattern at the bottom of the
C A U T IO N Do not contaminate the white plate of the calibration base plate. If
calibration chart.
tainted, use alcohol to clean the plate.
If there are missing dots, click [Print Calibration Chart Again]. The calibration chart
will be printed again after performing cleaning.
If there are no missing dots, let the chart stand for five minutes until it dries out paying
attention not to touch the chart.
14. When the calibration chart dries out (after five minutes), click [Next].
15. Connect a calibrator to the computer, and click [Measure].
16. Place the calibrator on the calibration base plate, and click [Calibrate]
17. Keep the calibrator remain set on the base plate, hold down the button on the side of
the calibrator until it beeps.
Once the calibration completed normally, following screen appears.
White Plate
i1 Calibrator
Button
Calibration Plate
Figure 5-74. i1Calibrator

18. Make sure that the date and time printed in the second line on the upper left of the chart
(measurable time and date) is within the range displayed under the heading “GMT” on
the lower screen. (If the date and time is not within the range, it is necessary to print the
cart again.)
19. Refer to Figure 5-77, lay the chart on the black paper (or sheet) with the upper part of
the chart facing left side, and set the scanning ruler onto the bottom most patch line.
Printed date and time Main unit serial OS type Black ink type
number
2005-08-29 11:37 (GMT 2005-08-29 02:37)

S/W : 0000000000 OS:Win BlackInk : Photo
2005-09-05 11:32 (GMT 2005-09-05 02:32)
Printer : EPSON Stylus Pro 9800
Measurable date and time Product name

2005-08-29 11:37 (GMT 2005-08-29 02:37)
S/W : 0000000000 OS : Win BlackInk:Photo
2005-09-05 11:32 (GMT 2005-09-05 02:32)
Calibration
patch
Set the scanning ruler with its guide gap matched with the patch.
Nozzle check
pattern
Figure 5-77. Setting the Chart and the Scanning Ruler
Figure 5-76. Measurable Time and Date Check

20. Click [OK] and follow the instructions (following procedure) displayed on the screen
C A U T IO N When measuring colors, pay attention to the instructions below.
to perform color measuring.
Take more than 10 seconds to measure one line.
1. Set the calibrator with its measuring part matched with measuring start Keep the scan speed constant as possible.
position (margin) as shown in Figure 5-79. Measure each of the lines twice. (Measure the line as instructed
2. Press down the button on the side of the calibrator. on the program screen.)
3. When it beeps, keep holding down the button and scan the patch along the Place the chart on a flat surface. The calibrator and the ruler
calibration guide to measuring end position (margin). must be attached firmly to the chart in order to measure the
4. Once the measuring is complete, release the button. colors accurately.
5. Repeat Step 1 through 4 twice for the same patch line. Do not scan any places other than the one shown in Figure 5-79.
6. Repeat Step 1 through 5 to measure the bottommost line to the top line. (The If a color-measuring error occurs or the measured values are
line that needs to be measured is displayed on the screen.) completely out of the standard values, a warning mark ( )
21. Once all the lines (8 lines) are measured, click [OK]. appears. In this instance, check the instructions mentioned
above and retry the color measuring again.
If an error mark ( ) appears, check the instructions
mentioned above and retry the color measuring again.
Unmeasured
lines
Currently
measured line
Measured lines
Figure 5-78. Color Measuring Screen
Start position in the color measuring End position in the color measuring
Figure 5-79. Setting the Calibrator/Measuring Position


S/W : 0000000000 OS : Win BlackInk:Photo
2005-08-29 11:37 (GMT 2005-08-29 02:37)
2005-09-05 11:32 (GMT 2005-09-05 02:32)
Figure 5-81. Color Measuring Order

22. Make sure that the “READY” message is displayed on the printer LCD panel, and
click [Next] to write the Color ID to the printer main unit.
23. When the writing is complete, click the [Next] button.

24. Load an A4-sized Archival Matte Paper vertically on the paper tray, and click [Next] to
print the first page (Sheet1) of the verify chart.
C A U T IO N Never touch the printed calibration chart.
25. When the first page of the verify chart is printed to the last, load an A4-sized Archival
Matte Paper vertically on the paper tray, and click [Next] to print the second page
(Sheet2) of the verify chart.
26. Make sure that there is no missing dot in the verify chart.
If there is any defect, click [Print Verify Chart Again]. The verify chart will be printed
again after performing cleaning.
If there are no missing dots, let the chart stand for five minutes until it dries out paying
attention not to touch the chart
27. When the verify chart dries out (after five minutes), click [Next].
28. Connect the calibrator to the computer, and click [Measure].
29. Place the calibrator on the calibration base plate, and click [Calibrate].
30. Keep the calibrator remain set on the base plate, hold down the button on the side of
the calibrator until it beeps.
Once the calibration completed normally, following screen appears.

31. Make sure that the date and time printed in the second line on the upper left of the chart
(measurable time and date) is within the range displayed under the heading “GMT” on Sheet number Main unit serial number
the lower screen. (If the date and time is not within the range, it is necessary to print the
chart again.)
Sheet1
32. Refer to Figure 5-84, lay the chart on the black paper (or sheet) with the upper part of
S/W : 0000000000
the chart facing left side, and set the scanning ruler onto the bottommost patch line. 2005-08-29 11:58 Printed date and time
(GMT 2005-08-29 02:58)
2005-09-05 11:53 Measurable date and time
(GMT 2005-09-05 02:53)
Sheet1
S/W : 0000000000
2005-08-29 11:58
(GMT 2005-08-29 02:58)
2005-09-05 11:53
(GMT 2005-09-05 02:53)
Calibration
Patch
Figure 5-84. Setting the Chart and the Scanning Ruler
Figure 5-85. Measurable Date and Time Check

33. Click [OK] and follow the instructions (following procedure) displayed on the screen
to perform color measuring.
1. Set the calibrator with its measuring part matched with measuring start
position (gray part) as shown in Figure 5-79.
2. Press the button on the side of the calibrator.
3. When it beeps, keep holding down the button and scan the patch along the
scanning ruler to measuring end position (gray part).
4. Once the measuring is complete, release the button.
Start position in the color measuring End position in the color measuring
5. Repeat Step 1 through 4 twice for the same patch line.
6. Repeat Step 1 through 5 to measure the bottommost line to the top line. (The
Figure 5-87. Setting the Calibrator/Color Measuring Position
line which needs to be measured is displayed on the screen.)
34. Once all the lines (5 lines) are measured, click [OK].
35. Measure Sheet 2 by following Step 31 through 34.
(GMT 2005-08-29 02:58)
(GMT 2005-09-05 02:53)

S/W : 0000000000
2005-08-29 11:58
2005-09-05 11:53
Sheet1

Figure 5-86. Color Measuring Order

36. Click [Save] to save the result under a new file name (txt file).
37. Click the [End] button.

ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE (SEPARATE WORKFLOW)

Printing Calibration Chart (at repair work site)
1. Turn the printer power on.
2. Start the adjustment program and select [Colorimetric Calibration Tool].
3. Click [Run] to start “Colorimetric Calibration Tool”.
4. Click [Print a Calibration Chart].
5. Perform Step 5 through 12 of “Adjustment Procedure (Entire Process Workflow)” to Figure 5-90. Printing Calibration Chart
print the Calibration chart.
6. Lay one plain paper on the print surface of the Calibration chart, put them in a clear file
together with the alignment check pattern, and send them to a place where the color
measuring is carried out.
C A U T IO N The printed calibration charts should be sent to a color-measuring

site immediately, as the color of the patch may be discolored in a
week.

Creating Color ID Data (at color measuring site)

1. Start the adjustment program, and select [Colorimetric Calibration Tool].
Perform the color
3. Click [Create Color ID]. measurement
4. Select the type of the currently used black ink from the “BlackInk” pull-down menu,
and click [Next].
5. Perform Step 5 through 12 of “Adjustment Procedure (Entire Process Workflow)” to
print the calibration chart.
6. Enter the 10-digit serial numbers that are printed on the calibration chart, and click
[Next]
7. Click [Save], make sure that the file name is equivalent to the main unit serial number,
and save the color ID data (dat format).
8. Click [End].
9. Send the color ID data acquired in the procedure to the repair work site.
Figure 5-91. Generating Colorimetric Calibration ID Data

Writing Color ID (at repair work site)

1. Start the adjustment program and select [Colorimetric Calibration ID].
3. Click [Write Color ID].
4. Perform Step 5 to 6 of “Adjustment Procedure (Entire Process Workflow)” to check
the connection status to the printer.
5. Select [File] from “Input Method”.
6. Click [Specify the file], select the color ID data file (dat format), and click [Next].
7. Make sure that the S/N shown in the input data is the same as that of the connected
printer and that it should be the same as the product number of the printer. Click
[Next].
8. When the writing is complete, click [End].
Figure 5-92. Writing Colorimetric Calibration ID

5.4 Advanced Adjustment

VSD1 E column
D column
5.4.1 Auto Bi-D Adjustment G column
F column
A column
H column
An automatic Bi-D adjustment by the Ink Mark Sensor can be made using this menu. C column
B column
After printing the adjustment pattern, the subsequent adjustment procedures (scanning
the pattern and correction) are performed automatically.
VSD2
The pattern is printed with the platen gap set to 0.8 and 1.6.
Paper Used
Size: 24” (Stylus Pro 7400/7450/7800/7880/7880C)
44” (Stylus Pro 9400/9450/9800/9880/9880C)
Type: Doubleweight Matte Paper VSD3
Procedure
2. Start up the Adjustment Program and select [Auto Bi-D Adjustment]. [VSD1] [PG=0.8] [Average] VSD1 = 21 Rough = 0
3. Click the [Run] button to print the adjustment pattern. -]
Fine = E : -1 [ 0, -1,---] D : 0 [ 1, -1,---] G : 0[ 1, -1,---] F : 1[ 1, -1,---] A : 1 [ 3, -1,---] H : 0[ 1, -1,---] C : 1[ 1, 1,---] B : 2[ 4, 0,--

4. When the pattern is printed, the printer automatically starts to scan the pattern Fine = E : 1 [ 1, 1,---] D : 0 [ 1, -1,---] G : 2[ 2, -1,---] F : 1[ 1, -1,---] A : 0 [ 1, -1,---] H : 0[ 1, -1,---] C : 1[ 1, 1,---] B : 4[ 3, 4,--
-]
and performs the corrections. (No manual adjustment is required.) [VSD3] [PG=0.8] [Average] VSD2
Fine = E : 1 [ 1, 1,---] D :
= 14 Rough = 0
1 [ 1, -1,---] G : 2[ 2, -1,---] F : 1[ 1, -1,---] A : 1 [ 1, -1,---] H : 1[ 1, 1,---] C : 2[ 1, 2,---] B : 5[ 4, 6,--
-]
Figure 5-93. [Auto Bi-D Adjustment] Screen
Adjustment Advanced Adjustment 375

5.4.2 Manual Bi-D Adjustment

This menu allows you to perform a Bi-D adjustment by visually checking the print
alignment.
Paper Used 3
Size: 24” (Stylus Pro 7400/7450/7800/7880/7880C) 4

1
44” (Stylus Pro 9400/9450/9800/9880/9880C)
Procedure 5
1. Turn the printer ON. 2 7
2. Start up the Adjustment Program and select [Manual Bi-D Adjustment].
3. Select the platen gap setting ( 1 ).
4. Click the [Next] button ( 2 ).
5. Click the [Print] button to print the Bi-D adjustment pattern for Photo or
6
Matte black ( 3 ).
(The pattern is printed in VSD1, VSD2, and VSD3 modes, so three patterns
Figure 5-95. [Manual Bi-D Adjustment] Screen (1)
are printed at a time.)
6. Examine the printout pattern, and select the value for the most sharpest and Print mode Indicates the value for the center line
straight line from the left and right pattern blocks respectively. Then calculate
the average of the selected two values. Perform this operation for each of the # 1 [ Bi-D VSD 1 PG=1.2 ] (Step = 2)
three mode patterns. Enter the obtained value for each of the three modes into PK/MK = 8 (0) PK/MK = 8 (0)
the corresponding edit box ( 4 ).
Most sharpest and straight line
# 1 [ Bi-D VSD 1 PG=1.2 ] (Step = 2)
PK/MK = 8 (0) PK/MK = 6 (0)
Center Line
(+) direction ← → (-) direction
# 1 [ Bi-D VSD 1 PG=1.2 ] (Step = 2)

PK/MK = 8 (0) PK/MK = 8 (0)
10 4 VSD1
Enter “7” into the edit box # 2 [ Bi-D VSD 1 PG=1.2 ] (Step = 2)
PK/MK = 8 (0) PK/MK = 6 (0)
C H E C K The printed pattern is changed 2 steps, but you can input in 1-step VSD2
P O IN T unit.
# 3 [ Bi-D VSD 1 PG=1.2 ] (Step = 2)
PK/MK = 8 (0) PK/MK = 8 (0)
VSD3
7. Click the [Write] button ( 5 ) to write the input values. When the writing is
completed, click the [OK] button ( 6 ). Figure 5-96. Adjustment Patterns (Photo or Matte Black)
8. Click the [Next] button ( 7 ).

9. Click the [Print] button to print the Bi-D adjustment pattern for color ink
( 8 ). (The pattern is printed in VSD1, VSD2, and VSD3 modes, so three
patterns are printed at a time.)
10. Examine the printout patterns for each of the three modes, and select the value
for the group of most closely aligned blocks for each mode. Then enter the
values into the edit boxes ( 9 ).
C H E C K The printed pattern is changed 2 steps, but you can input in 1-step
P O IN T unit.
11. Click the [Write] button ( 10 ) to write the input values. When the writing is
completed, click the [OK] button ( 11 ).
12. Click the [Finish] button ( 12 ).
Figure 5-98. Adjustment Patterns (Color)

10
12
11
Figure 5-97. [Manual Bi-D Adjustment] Screen (2)

5.4.3 Destination Setting

Procedure
2. Start up the Adjustment Program and select [Change Model Name].
3. Select the [Others] and click the [Run] button to set the destination setting
onto the NVRAM.
4. Click the [Next] button.
5. Click the [Check] button to display the currently set model name. After
confirming the name, click the [OK] button.
Figure 5-100. [Destination Setting] Screen (2)

5.4.4 PF Micro Feed Adjustment (Bi-D)

Print quality on media used by the user can be adjusted using the EPSON LFP Remote
Panel.
The EPSON LFP Remote Panel has the following functions:
Adjustment:
Adjustment of the paper feed amount and the microweave.
Printout settings:
Prints out the correction values of the paper feed amount and the microweave
stored on the printer.
Settings Initialization:
Returns the settings for the paper feed amount and the microweave to their factory
default.
C H E C K For the operation method of the EPSON LFP Remote Panel, refer
P O IN T its help function.
Figure 5-102. [PF Micro Feed Adjustment (Bi-D)] Screen
Procedure
2. Start up the Adjustment Program and select [PF Micro Feed Adjustment (Bi-
D)].
3. Click the [Run] button to run the EPSON LFP Remote Panel.
4. Select [Paper Feed Adjuster], and perform the paper feed amount (Adjust) and
the microweave adjustments (MicroWeave Adjustment).
Figure 5-103. EPSON LFP Remote Panel Startup Screen

5.5 Check Results

5.5.1 Check Nozzle
This menu allows you to check the ink nozzles for clogging. If they are found to be
clogging, perform a cleaning and then check them again.
Paper Used
Size: 24” (Stylus Pro 7400/7450/7800/7880/7880C)
44” (Stylus Pro 9400/9450/9800/9880/9880C)
Procedure
2. Start up the Adjustment Program and select [Check Nozzle].
3. Click the [Run] button to print a nozzle check pattern.
4. Check the printout pattern for dot missing.
5. When no dot-missing is observed, click the [Finish] button to exit out of the Figure 5-104. [Check Nozzle] Screen
menu.
If the pattern has broken lines or missing segment, perform a cleaning. Then
print the pattern again to check.
Figure 5-105. Nozzle Check Pattern
Adjustment Check Results 380

5.5.2 Check Alignment

This allows you to check the print alignment for each of the three print modes (VSD1,
VSD2, VSD3). If any misalignment symptoms or abnormalities are found on the
printed pattern, a cleaning must be performed.
Paper Used
Size: 24” (Stylus Pro 7400/7450/7800/7880/7880C)
44” (Stylus Pro 9400/9450/9800/9880/9880C)
Type: Premium Glossy Photo Paper
Procedure
2. Start up the Adjustment Program and select [Check Alignment].
3. Select the print mode and click the [Print] button to print a alignment check
pattern.
4. Check the printout pattern for any misalignment symptoms.
5. When no misalignment symptom is observed, click the [Finish] button to exit
out of the menu. Figure 5-106. [Check Alignment] Screen
If misalignment is found on the pattern, perform a cleaning. Then print the
pattern again to check.
Horizontal
Alignment
Vertical
Alignment
Figure 5-107. Alignment Check Pattern

5.5.3 Print Adjustment Check Pattern

All the adjustment patterns and adjusted parameters stored on the printer can be printed
out using this menu.
Paper Used
Size: 24” (Stylus Pro 7400/7450/7800/7880/7880C)
44” (Stylus Pro 9400/9450/9800/9880/9880C)
Procedure
2. Start up the Adjustment Program and select [Print Adjustment Check Pattern].
3. Select the [Print All Pattern] or [Print Variables] and click the [Print] button to
start the print operation.
z Print All Pattern
All adjustment patterns and parameters are printed out at a time.
z Print Variables
All adjusted parameters stored on the printer are printed out at a time. Figure 5-108. [Print Adjustment Check Pattern] Screen
C A U T IO N Required length of roll paper for performing the “Print All

Pattern” is approx. 3.6 meters. Be sure to check the remaining
length or roll paper and keep the paper eject area clear of any
obstacles before performing the printing operation.
4. After confirming that all patterns are printed, click the [Finish] button.

5.5.4 Check Cutting

The printer performs a cutting operation specified number of times when this menu is
executed. Check the cutter for wear by examining the cut surface of the paper.
Paper Used
Size: 24” (Stylus Pro 7400/7450/7800/7880/7880C)
44” (Stylus Pro 9400/9450/9800/9880/9880C)
Procedure
2. Start up the Adjustment Program and select [Check Cutting].
3. Enter the desired number of cutting operations into the [Number of cut] edit
box and click the [Run] button.
4. Examine the cutting surface of the ejected paper. Then click the [Finish]
button.
Figure 5-109. [Check Cutting] Screen

5.5.5 Print Image

C A U T IO N Before performing the following operations, be sure to select a
paper size to print the image.
Procedure
2. Click the [Open] button and select any one of the image files (bmp) in the
“tanzaku” folder in the “adjwiz2” folder in which the Adjustment Program is
stored.
3. Select media type from the [Media Type] pull-down menu.
4. Click the [Print] button to print the selected image.
5. After checking the printed image, click the [Finish] button.
Figure 5-110. [Print Image] Screen

5.6 Reset Counters 5.6.2 Reset PF Motor Counter

Procedure
5.6.1 Reset PG Switching Counter 1. Turn the printer ON.
Procedure 2. Start up the Adjustment Program and select [Reset PF Motor Counter].
3. Click the [Run] button to reset the PF Motor life counter.
2. Start up the Adjustment Program and select [Reset PG Switching Counter].
3. Click the [Run] button to reset the PG switching counter.
Figure 5-112. [Reset PF Motor Counter] Screen
Figure 5-111. [Reset PG Switching Counter] Screen
Adjustment Reset Counters 385

5.6.3 Reset When CR Unit Change 5.6.4 Reset When Cleaning Unit Change
Procedure Procedure
1. Turn the printer ON. 1. Turn the printer ON.
2. Start up the Adjustment Program and select [Reset When CR Unit Change]. 2. Start up the Adjustment Program and select [Reset When Cleaning Unit
3. Click the [Run] button to reset the CR Motor life counter. Change].
4. Click the [Finish] button. 3. Click the [Run] button to reset the Cleaning Unit change counter.
Figure 5-113. [Reset When CR Unit Change] Screen

Figure 5-114. [Reset When Cleaning Unit Change] Screen

5.6.5 Reset When PrintHead Change 5.6.6 Reset When Cutter Solenoid Change
Procedure Procedure
2. Start up the Adjustment Program and select [Reset When Printhead Change]. 2. Start up the Adjustment Program and select [Reset When Cutter Solenoid
3. Click the [Run] button to reset the Head Unit change counter. Change].
4. Click the [Finish] button. 3. Click the [Run] button to reset the Cutter Solenoid Unit change counter.
Figure 5-115. [Reset When Printhead Change] Screen

Figure 5-116. [Reset When Cutter Solenoid Change] Screen

5.6.7 Reset Pump Counter 5.6.8 Reset Ink Information

Procedure Procedure
2. Start up the Adjustment Program and select [Reset Pump Counter]. 2. Start up the Adjustment Program and select [Reset ink information].
3. Click the [Run] button to reset the Pump counter. 3. Select the number of ink colors between eight or four colors and click the
4. Click the [Finish] button. [Run] button to reset the ink information by nozzle column.
Figure 5-117. [Reset Pump Counter] Screen

Figure 5-118. [Reset ink information] Screen

5.7 Installing Firmware

The firmware of the printer is stored onto the Flash ROM on the Main Board.
Whenever the Main Board is replaced, or when updating the firmware is required,
write the firmware on the Flash ROM following the procedure below.
C A U T IO N If the printer is turned ON for the first time after the firmware is
uploaded on the newly mounted Main Board which does not have
any parameters at all, the printer automatically performs the initial
ink charge. When the initial ink charge is not necessary, be sure to
clear the flag. See “5.3.17 Initial Ink Charge Flag ON/OFF”
(p.355).
Tool and System Requirements

Firmware Update Tool Figure 5-119. [Firmware Update Tool] Screen
OS: Windows 98, Me, 2000, XP
Interface: USB
Procedure
1. Turn both the printer and computer OFF and connect them with a USB cable.
2. First turn the computer ON and then turn the printer ON.
3. Start the Firmware Update Tool.
4. Select the port and the firmware file (UPG format).
5. Click the [Send] button to transfer the firmware data.
6. When the transferring is completed, “Complete” pop-up window will be
displayed. Click the [OK] button. Figure 5-120. [Completion] Pop-up Window
7. When writing the firmware is completed, the printer automatically reboots.
Adjustment Installing Firmware 389

5.8 Model Setting (when replacing the Main Board) STYLUS PRO 7400/7800/9400/9800
Tool and System Requirements
C H E C K The procedures to configure the model/model name differ between
P O IN T Stylus Pro 7400/7800/9400/9800 and Stylus Pro 7450/7880/7880C/ Firmware Update Tool
9450/9880/9880C. OS: Windows 98, Me, 2000, XP
Interface: USB
Settings
The procedure to configure the model/model name of each model is as follows. 1. Reboot the printer in Serviceman Mode.
2. A device wizard appears on the PC. Click [cancel].
Stylus Pro 7400/7800/9400/9800 Stylus Pro 7450/7880/7880C/9450/9880/9880C 3. Using the Firmware update tool, send the prn file corresponds to the printer
Send a file containing the setting data Configure them on the Adjustment Program. model.
using the Firmware Update Tool. 4. Turn the printer off.
Adjustment Model Setting (when replacing the Main Board) 390

STYLUS PRO 7450/7880/7880C/9450/9880/9880C

Procedure
1. Turn the printer ON, and start the Adjustment Program.
2. Select the printer name.
3. Click the icon on the top left of the window.
4. Select [Port Check on Connected Printer].
5. The pop up screen to confirm the port is displayed. Click [Yes].
6. Click [Start].
C H E C K If a connection error occurs, verify the connection between the

P O IN T computer and the printer one more time, and make sure to perform
the adjustment again.
Figure 5-122. [Port Check on Connected Printer] Screen
Figure 5-121. [Select Printer Name] Screen
Adjustment Model Setting (when replacing the Main Board) 391

5.9 Writing MAC Address

The MAC address of this printer is recorded on the Flash ROM of the main board.
When replacing the main board, make sure to write the MAC address to the new board
as follows.
Procedure
1. Turn on the power of the printer.
2. Start the adjustment program, and select [Set MAC address].
C H E C K The label on which the MAC address is printed is attached on the

P O IN T rear of the printer as shown in figure 5-123.
3. Key in the MAC address and press [Enter].

4. Press [Next].
Figure 5-124. [Set MAC address] Window
5. Press [Confirm], and check that the same MAC address is displayed as the
one you just keyed in.
6. Press [Finish].
Rear of the printer
Main board
MAC address label
Figure 5-125. Confirmation Window of [Set MAC address]

Figure 5-123. Location of the Label with MAC Address
Adjustment Writing MAC Address 392

CHAPTER
6
MAINTENANCE
6.1 Overview C A U T IO N Make sufficient work space for servicing.

Set up the printer on a vibration-free and stable flat surface.
This chapter provides information on how to maintain the printer in its optimum The mass of the printers are as follows. Carrying the printer should
operating condition. be performed by the specified number of people and be sure to hold
Basically, servicing on the Stylus Pro 7400/7450/7800/7880/7880C/9400/9450/9800/ the printer with the positions shown in the figure below.
9880/9880C should be performed on-site. Be sure to strictly observe the following • Stylus Pro 7400/7800: 48.9 kg
precautions to avoid an accident or injury causing the user trouble. (two persons or more are required)
• Stylus Pro 7450/7880/7880C: 49.1 kg
W A R N IN G The power switch is installed on the secondary side of the power (two persons or more are required)
circuit, so power is always supplied to the power supply circuit • Stylus Pro 9400/9450/9800/9880/9880C: 90.2 kg
even when the switch is OFF unless the power cord is (four persons or more are required)
unplugged from the wall power outlet. Unless otherwise stated When air duster is used on the repair and the maintenance
(for printing or operation checks), be sure to unplug the power work, the use of the air duster products containing the
code from the wall outlet before disassembling or assembling inflammable gas is prohibited.
the printer to prevent electric shock and damage to the circuit.
The front sensor which detects the Open/Close statuses of the <Stylus Pro 7400/7450/7800/7880/7880C>
printer cover also functions as an interlock switch for safety
purposes. Disabling the switch function is prohibited.
A lithium battery is mounted on the Main Board (control
circuit) for memory backup. Be sure to observe the following
precautions when handling the lithium battery.
• Be careful not to short the electrode of the battery.
• When replacing the battery, make sure to insert it in correct
orientation.
• Never heat the battery or plunge it into the flames. <Stylus Pro 9400/9450/9800/9880/9880C>
• Do not put the Main Board directly on conductive materials.
Be extremely careful not to get the ink into your eye or let it
come into contact with your skin. If it happens, wash out your
eye or skin with water immediately. If any abnormality is
found, contact a physician.
Maintenance Overview 394

C A U T IO N Be sure to spread a sheet of paper or cloth on the work space 6.1.1 Product Life Information
before removing any ink-path-related parts or components to Periodic Maintenance Items
keep the space from being soiled with leaked ink.
Do not touch electrical circuit boards with bare hands as the There is no part or component which should be replaced periodically before the
elements on the board are so sensitive that they can be easily printer itself reaches its end of life indicated below.
damaged by static electricity. If you have to handle the boards If the printer is kept on being used after reaching its end of life, it causes a service
with bare hands, use static electricity discharge equipment such call error calling for a replacement of a part before the part breaks down. (Except
as anti-static wrist straps. the consumables such as the Maintenance tank and the cutter.)
When the printer has to be operated with the covers removed, Product Life
take extra care not to get your fingers or clothes caught in • Stylus Pro 7400/7450/7800/7880/7880C
moving parts such as fans. 3,700,000 cycles of the carriage movement
The cutter blade is razor-sharp. Be especially careful when • Stylus Pro 9400/9450/9800/9880/9880C
handling the cutter. 6,300,000 cycles of the carriage movement
Carbide blade employed for the cutter blade is hard but brittle. The table below shows the parts and units which causes the replacement requiring
Be careful not to hit it against metal parts of the printer as it error.
can be easily damaged.
When the printer should be repacked for transportation after Part Name Maintenance Call Service Call
being used, make sure to follow the steps below after turning
the power OFF. CR Motor 0002 00000101
1. Check that the print head is capped properly. RTC backup battery 0008 00010023
2. Remove the all ink cartridges. Cleaning Unit 0040 0001002D
3. Repack the printer using the packaging box, cushioning
materials and protective equipment indicated in the Pressure Pump Unit 0400 0001003F
“Unpacking and Setup Guide”.
Life Information
The information on part life can be checked by the PRINTER STATUS menu in
the Panel Setting mode. Remaining amount of life is expressed in percentage
(“F*****E”). The life counters can be reset by the Adjustment Program.
W A R N IN G Be careful not to mistakenly reset the life counters for the parts or
components which are not replaced or checked. Especially, the
waste ink counter “MAIN TANK” in the Adjustment Program
should NOT be reset. Doing so adversely affects the printer
operation and may result in ink leakage.

6.1.2 Required Maintenance Items Cleaning of the Platen and Sub Platen
Be sure to check on the following items every time you service the printer. Brush down paper dust or dirt and then wipe them using OA cleaner. If the paper
suction holes are clogged with paper dust, etc., push the dust inside the printer with
Item Points to be Checked Remedy a precision screwdriver or similar tool.
Platen, sub platen and L- Paper dust, foreign materials on Cleaning Be careful not to touch the following parts during the cleaning.
C A U T IO N
surface of the paper guide them If ink has adhered to the Absorbers for borderless printing
parts, wipe it off with a damp
Rollers
cloth and then wipe with a
clean, dry cloth. Print head guide
SCALE, CR Paper dust, foreign materials on Cleaning
(A plate with slits on it used them Replace the Timing Fence If
for the CR Encoder it has scratches or is cracked.
detection)
Guide rail on the CR Guide Foreign materials on it Cleaning
Frame
Sensors located in the paper Foreign materials on them Cleaning
path
• IM (Ink Mark) Sensor
• P Rear Sensor, etc.
Absorbers for
borderless printing
Paper Suction Holes

6.2 Lubrication [Lubrication 1]

Part Name PG Idle Gear
Lubrication on the Stylus Pro 7400/7450/7800/7880/7880C/9400/9450/9800/9880/
Lubrication Point 1. On the teeth of the three gears
9880C should be performed as needed. Use only lubricants indicated in the table
below. 2. Five shaft heads retained by the E-rings
3. Bearing part (one point)
Name Amount Supplier Part No. Lubricants G-26
G-26 40 g EPSON 1080614 Amount 1. A drop of 1 mm in diameter for about one third around the each gear
Super Malpas 32 50 ml NIPPON OIL CORPORATION 1432563 2. A drop of 1 mm in diameter for about 2 mm length on the each E-ring
3. A drop of 1 mm in diameter for 2 mm length on the shaft head
C A U T IO N Never use any lubricants other than the specified ones. Doing so Remarks Use a small syringe or needle (equivalent to JIS17#).
may damage the components, shorten their useful life, and result in
a malfunction of the printer.
Lubrication Point 3
Lubrication Point 1
Lubrication Point 2
Maintenance Lubrication 397

[Lubrication 2] [Lubrication 3]
Part Name Roll Top Cover Part Name Roll Top Cover
Lubrication Point On the right side of the Roll Top Cover where contacts with the washer Lubrication Point On the left and right break pins where contact with the slit-ends of the Roll
Top Cover
Lubricants G-26
Amount A drop of 1 mm in diameter for around the circle Note : The Stylus Pro 7400/7450/7800/7880/7880C are not equipped
with the break pins.
Remarks Use a small syringe or needle (equivalent to JIS17#).
Lubricants G-26
Amount A drop of 1 mm in diameter for about one fourth around the each pin
Right Side of the Printer Left Side of the Printer
Lubrication Point Lubrication Point
Lubrication Point

[Lubrication 4] [Lubrication 5]
Part Name Driven Roller C Assy. Part Name CR Guide Rail
Lubrication Point Contact point between the Arm Bracket and the Pressure Cam Lubrication Point Outside four surfaces on the CR Guide Rail on where the roller bearings
• Stylus Pro 7400/7450/7800/7880/7880C: 8 points run through
• Stylus Pro 9400/9450/9800/9880/9880C: 14 points Lubricants Super Malpas 32
Lubricants G-26 Amount A drop of 1 mm in diameter for the full-length of each four surfaces
Amount A drop of 1 mm in diameter for about 2 mm length on the each contact Remarks • Use a small syringe or needle (equivalent to JIS17#).
point • Be sure to clean the surfaces before applying the lubricants.
CR Guide Rail
Lubrication Point
Lubrication Point
Lubrication Point
Pressure Cam
Arm Bracket

CHAPTER
7
APPENDIX
7.1 Connectors
C594 Main Board (Stylus Pro 7400/7800/9400/9800 only) C699 Main Board (Stylus Pro 7450/7880/7880C/9450/9880/9880C only)
Table 7-1. C594 Main Board Connectors List Table 7-2. C699 Main Board Connectors List
CN.No. Pins Color Connected to Remarks CN.No. Pins Color Connected to Remarks
CN1 14 White P/S BOARD ASSY. (CN001) CN1 14 White P/S BOARD ASSY. (CN001)
CN5 36 --- Type-B interface CN5 36 --- Type-B interface
CN6 4 --- USB 2.0 CN6 4 --- USB 2.0
CN7 8 --- IEEE1394 CN7 8 --- IEEE1394
CN8 15 --- Auto Take-Up Reel Unit *1 Option CN8 15 --- Auto Take-Up Reel Unit *1 Option
CN9 20 --- PANEL ASSY. FFC CN9 20 --- PANEL ASSY. FFC
CN10 3 --- P Rear Sensor FFC CN10 3 --- P Rear Sensor FFC
CN13 3 White CR MOTOR ASSY. With relay harness CN13 3 White CR MOTOR ASSY. With relay harness
CN14 2 White PF MOTOR ASSY. With relay harness CN14 2 White PF MOTOR ASSY. With relay harness
CN15 4 Black Pressure Motor With relay harness CN15 4 Black Pressure Motor With relay harness
CN16 4 White Pump Motor With relay harness CN16 4 White Pump Motor With relay harness
CN17 31 --- BOARD ASSY., SUB (CN1) FFC CN17 31 --- BOARD ASSY., SUB (CN1) FFC
CN21 26 --- BOARD ASSY., SUB; B (CN1) FFC CN21 26 --- BOARD ASSY., SUB; B (CN1) FFC
CN23 26 --- BOARD ASSY., SUB; C (CN1) FFC CN23 26 --- BOARD ASSY., SUB; C (CN1) FFC
CN25 3 Black Right VACUUM FAN ASSY. With relay harness CN25 3 Black Right VACUUM FAN ASSY. With relay harness
CN26 3 Red Middle VACUUM FAN ASSY. With relay harness CN26 3 Red Middle VACUUM FAN ASSY. With relay harness
CN27 3 Yellow Left VACUUM FAN ASSY. With relay harness CN27 3 Yellow Left VACUUM FAN ASSY. With relay harness
CN29 2 White Cooling Fan CN29 2 White Cooling Fan
CN30 2 White Heatsink Cooling Fan CN30 2 White Heatsink Cooling Fan
CN31 3 White Regulator Solenoid With relay harness CN31 3 White Regulator Solenoid With relay harness
Note "*1": Stylus Pro 7400/7800 Note "*1": Stylus Pro 7800/7880/7880C
Appendix Connectors 401

Power Supply Board SUB-B Board

Table 7-3. Power Supply Board Connector List
C594 SUB-B Board (Stylus Pro 7400/7800/9400/9800 only)
C699 SUB-B Board (Stylus Pro 7450/7880/7880C/9450/9880/9880C only)
CN.No. Pins Color Connected to Remarks
CN001 2 White INLET ASSY. Table 7-5. C594 SUB-B Board Connectors List
CN301 14 White BOARD ASSY., MAIN (CN1) CN.No. Pins Color Connected to Remarks
CN1 26 --- BOARD ASSY., MAIN (CN21) FFC
CN5 2 Blue I/C LEVER SENSOR R
C594 SUB Board (Relay Board 1) CN6 7 --- CSIC RELAY Photo black (matte FFC
(R1) BOARD black)*1*2
Table 7-4. C594 SUB Board Connectors List
Cyan*3 FFC
CN7 7 --- CSIC RELAY Cyan*1*2 FFC
CN1 31 --- BOARD ASSY., MAIN (CN17) FFC (R2) BOARD Cyan*3 FFC
CN8 7 --- CSIC RELAY Magenta*1 FFC
CN4 31 --- BOARD ASSY., MAIN (CN20) FFC (R3) BOARD Vivid Magenta*2 FFC
CN5 31 --- Print Head FFC Yellow*3 FFC
CN6 31 --- Print Head FFC CN9 7 --- CSIC RELAY Yellow*1*2 FFC
CN7 2 White Cutter Solenoid Assy. (R4) BOARD Yellow*3 FFC
CN8 4 --- IM (Ink Mark) Sensor FFC CN10 7 --- Maintenance Tank FFC
CN9 5 --- CR Encoder Sensor FFC CN12 3 Red P Thick1 Sensor
CN10 4 Red P Edge Sensor CN13 3 Yellow P Thick2 Sensor
CN12 2 Black PG HP Sensor CN20 3 Black Pump Phase Sensor
CN13 2 White CR HP Sensor
Note "*1": Stylus Pro 7800/9800
"*2": Stylus Pro 7880/7880C/9880/9880C
"*3": Stylus Pro 7400/7450/9400/9450

SUB-C Board
C594 SUB-C Board (Stylus Pro 7400/7800/9400/9800 only)
C699 SUB-C Board (Stylus Pro 7450/7880/7880C/9450/9880/9880C only)
Table 7-6. C594 SUB-C Board Connectors List
CN5 2 Blue I/C LEVER SENSOR L
CN6 7 --- CSIC RELAY Light light black*1*2 FFC
(L1) BOARD Matte black*3 FFC
CN7 7 --- CSIC RELAY Light magenta*1 FFC
(L2) BOARD Vivid Light Magenta*2 FFC
Matte black*3 FFC
CN8 7 --- CSIC RELAY Light cyan*1*2 FFC
(L3) BOARD Magenta*3 FFC
CN9 7 --- CSIC RELAY Light black*1*2 FFC
(L4) BOARD Magenta*3 FFC
CN10 4 White PF Encoder Sensor
CN15 3 Red Pressure Sensor
CN16 2 Black Front Sensor
CN17 7 --- Maintenance Tank*4 FFC
Note "*1": Stylus Pro 7800/9800

"*2": Stylus Pro 7880/7880C/9880/9880C
"*3": Stylus Pro 7400/7450/9400/9450
"*4": Stylus Pro 9400/9450/9800/9880/9880C only
C594 Panel Board

Table 7-7. C594 Panel Board Connectors List
CN2 19 --- LCD FFC
CN3 4 --- LED FFC

CN1
CN3
CN1 Relay FFC
Pressure I/C LEVER
CN15
CN5
CN12 CN13
Sensor SENSOR L
P Thick1 P Thick2
Sensor Sensor
C594 Panel Board CN6
CN10
PF Encoder
CN2 CSIC RELAY (R1) Sensor
BOARD
CN1 Relay FFC

CN7
CN16
CSIC RELAY (R2) Front
Cutter BOARD Sensor
CN7 C594 SUB Board CN20
Solenoid Assy. CN8 Pump Phase Sensor
CSIC RELAY (R3) C594 SUB-C Board
CN12 BOARD CN5
CN5 Print Head
CN6 Print Head

CN4 Relay FFC
CN2 Relay FFC
CN1 Relay FFC
PG HP Sensor
CSIC RELAY
CSIC RELAY
CSIC RELAY
CSIC RELAY
(L1) BOARD
(L2) BOARD
(L3) BOARD
(L4) BOARD
CN9 I/C LEVER
Maintenance
CN17
CN6
CN7
CN8
CN9
CN13 Ink Mark SENSOR R
CSIC RELAY (R4) Tank
CR HP Sensor
Sensor BOARD
CN8
CN10 CN10
P Edge Sensor Maintenance Tank
CN9 C594 SUB-B Board
CR Encoder Sensor
Right
CN20 Relay FFC CN21 Relay FFC CN29 CN25 VACUUM CN1 CN9 CN10
FAN ASSY.
Cooling Fan P/S BOARD ASSY. PANEL ASSY. P Rear Sensor
CN18 Relay FFC CN23 Relay FFC Middle
CN27 CN26 VACUUM
Left VACUUM FAN ASSY. FAN ASSY.
CN17 Relay FFC
CN31 CN5
Regulator Solenoid Type-B
CN301
C594 Main Board
BOARD ASSY.,
MAIN
Pressure Motor
CN15
Power Supply
CN16
CN001
Pump Board INLET
Motor
CN30
Heatsink ASSY.
Cooling Fan PF MOTOR ASSY.
CN14
CN8 CN13 CR MOTOR ASSY.

CN6
Auto Take-Up USB CN7
Reel Unit 2.0 IEEE
1394
Figure 7-1. Stylus Pro 7400/7800/9400/9800 Connectors

CN1
CN3
CN1 Relay FFC
Pressure I/C LEVER
CN15
CN5
CN12 CN13
Sensor SENSOR L
P Thick1 P Thick2
Sensor Sensor
C594 Panel Board CN6
CN10
PF Encoder
CN2 CSIC RELAY (R1) Sensor
BOARD
CN1 Relay FFC

CN7
CN16
CSIC RELAY (R2) Front
Cutter BOARD Sensor
CN7 C594 SUB Board CN20
Solenoid Assy. CN8 Pump Phase Sensor
CSIC RELAY (R3) C699 SUB-C Board
CN12 BOARD CN5
CN5 Print Head
CN6 Print Head

CN4 Relay FFC
CN2 Relay FFC
CN1 Relay FFC
PG HP Sensor
CSIC RELAY
CSIC RELAY
CSIC RELAY
CSIC RELAY
(L1) BOARD
(L2) BOARD
(L3) BOARD
(L4) BOARD
CN9 I/C LEVER
Maintenance
CN17
CN6
CN7
CN8
CN9
CN13 Ink Mark SENSOR R
CSIC RELAY (R4) Tank
CR HP Sensor
Sensor BOARD
CN8
CN10 CN10
P Edge Sensor Maintenance Tank
CN9 C699 SUB-B Board
CR Encoder Sensor
Right
CN20 Relay FFC CN21 Relay FFC CN29 CN25 VACUUM CN1 CN9 CN10
FAN ASSY.
Cooling Fan P/S BOARD ASSY. PANEL ASSY. P Rear Sensor
CN18 Relay FFC CN23 Relay FFC Middle
CN27 CN26 VACUUM
Left VACUUM FAN ASSY. FAN ASSY.
CN17 Relay FFC
CN31
Regulator Solenoid
CN301
C699 Main Board
BOARD ASSY.,
MAIN
Pressure Motor
CN15
Power Supply
CN16
CN001
Pump Board INLET
Motor
CN30
Heatsink ASSY.
Cooling Fan PF MOTOR ASSY.
CN14
CN8 CN13 CR MOTOR ASSY.

Auto Take-Up CN6
Reel Unit CN32
USB
Network I/F
2.0
Figure 7-2. Stylus Pro 7450/7880/7880C/9450/9880/9880C Connectors

7.2 Exploded Diagrams

Stylus Pro 7400/7800 (Total: 14 pages)
Stylus Pro 9400/9800 (Total: 14 pages)
Stylus Pro 7450/7880/7880C (Total: 13 pages)
Stylus Pro 9450/9880/9880C (Total: 14 pages)
Appendix Exploded Diagrams 406

127
126 105
102
125 103 107
106
124
108
128 104 130
131
129
104
120
121 109
101
116
122
115
119 114
113
132
117
100 133
115
118
131 114
110
111
123
112
P X-7500,7500S / E P S ON S T Y LUS P R O 7400,7800 No.01 R ev.01 C 594-C AS E -011

150
151
152
152
152
152

201
200
202
P X-7500,7500S / E P S ON S T Y LUS P R O 7400,7800 No.03 R ev.01 C 594-E LE C -011

204
203

301
300
302
P X-7500,7500S / E P S ON S T Y LUS P R O 7400,7800 No.05 R ev.01 C 594-P OWE -011

515
512
513
514
530 530
X4
507 509
511 X4
516
510 X4
506 508
522
516
518
503 504
505
521
520
501 X6
517 519 X8
502
523
529 531
524 X16
500
525 X16
500
526 X8
500 528 X8
527 X8 529
500
P X-7500,7500S / E P S ON S T Y LUS P R O 7400,7800 No.06 R ev.01 C 594-ME C H-011

550
561 551
559
562
570
569
568
564
560
565
558 566
557
552
566
556
563 567
552
554
553
555
571

611
612
610
608
615
609
615
613
606 X8
607 X16
614
605
604
600
603
602 X3
601

657
658
652
659
656
660
656 661
664
655
651 650 653 654
665
654 655
653
669 662
667
662
668
666

700 701 X15
700

754
766
766
753
755
766 756
758 756 755
757 758
756 765
758 755
767 756 765 766
757 758 755 766
755 758 756
755
755 767
767 751 757 766
756
755 766
750 758
767 755
757 766
756 767
758 756
758
752 759 760
766 767
761
755
763
762
764

809
803 804
803 805
800 806
805 808
802 807
803
802
803
807 807
801
810

851
850 855
854
853
856
856
856
856
856
856
856
856
856

900
901
902
906
901
903 905
903
904

127
104
102 126 103
125
107
124 106
105
104
120
121 128
108
101 129
104 130
131
109
122
116
115
114 113
119 132
100
117 133
131 115
118
123
114 112
134 110
111

150
151
152
152
152
152

201
202
200

204
203

301
300
302
P X-9500,9500S / E P S ON S T Y LUS P R O 9400,9800 No.05 R ev.01 C 595-P OWE -011

512
515
509
508 511 x6
507 513
516
506 514
510 x6
522
503 504 516

502 505 520
529 517
521
532
529 530
530
501 x9 523 518
(505) (506) (507)

531 531 (508) 519 x8
500 x7 (503)(504)
(502) (509)
524 X16
525 X16
526 X8
528 X8
527 X8

550
561 551
559
562
570
569
568
564
560
565
558 566
557
552
566
556
563 567
552
554
553
555
571

611
610
608
612
609
615
615
613
614
606 X14
607 X28
604
605
602
603
602
600
602
601

660
657
652
661
651
664
670
650 658
671 656 X3 659
665
653 X3
672
657
654 X3 655 X3
662
667
662
669
658
662
659
668 662
662
666

700
701 X15
700

753
766
750
752
755 X17
767 X7
754
764
762
769
751
757 X4
758 X8
763
771
756 X12
770
760
759
761 765 X8 768
PX-9500,9500S / EPSON STYLUS PRO 9400,9800 No.11 Rev.01 C595-MECH-061

809
803 804
803 805
800 806
805 808
802 807
803
802
803
807 807
801
810

851
850
855
856
854
853
852 856
856
856
856 856
856 856
856
856
856
856

900
901
902
906
901
903
905
903
904

127
126
135 105
102
125 103
106
124 107
108
134 104 130
131
129
104
120
121 109
101
116
122
115
119 114
154 113
132
117
100 133
115
118
131 128 114

110
111
123
112
P X-7550,S ,N / S T Y LUS P R O 7880,C ,7450 No.01 R ev.01 C 700-C AS E -011J P N

Only numbered Service Parts
are available.
150
151
152
152
152
152
PX-7550,S,N / STYLUS PRO 7880,C,7450 No.02 Rev.01 C700-CASE-021

are available.
201
301
200
300
202
302
PX-7550,S,N / STYLUS PRO 7880,C,7450 No.03 Rev.01 C700-ELEC-011

are available. 204
203

515
are available.
512
513
514
530 530
X4
507 509
511 X4
516
510 X4
506 508
522
516
518
503 504
505
521
520
501 X7
517 519 X8
502
523
529 531
524 X16
500
525 X16
500
526 X8
500 528 X8
527 X8 529
500
PX-7550,S,N / STYLUS PRO 7880,C,7450 No.05 Rev.01 C700-MECH-011

550
(OPTION) Only numbered Service Parts
are available.
561 551
573
559
562
570
569
568
564
560
565
558 566
557
552
566
556
563 567
552
554
553
555
572
571

611
612
610
are available. 608
615
609
615
613
606 X8
607 X16
614
605
600
603
602 X4
601

are available. 657
658
652
659
660
664 661
653
655
651 650 654
665
654
655
663
653 663
669 662
667
662
668
666

702 Only numbered Service Parts
are available.
702
700 701 X15

702
702
700

754
753
755
756
758 755
757 758
758 756 755
767 756
755 755
757 758 755
758 756 755
767 756
767 755
767 751 757
755 755
750 758
755
756
757 755
756 767
758 756
758
752 759 760
761
755
763
762
764
P X-7550,S ,N / S T Y LUS P R O 7880,C ,7450 No.10 R ev.01 C 700-ME C H-063

are available.
809
803 804
803
800 806
808
802 807
803
802
803
807 807
801
811
810

are available.
851
850 855
854
853
852
856
856
856
856
856
856
856
856
856

are available.
900
901
902
906
901
903 905
903
904

are available. 127
126 104
102 135 103
125
106
124 107
105
104
120
121 128
108
101 129
104 130
131
109
122
116
115
114 113
119 132
100
154
133
117
131 115
118
123
114 111
110
136
112

are available.
150
152
152
152
152

are available.
201
202
301
200
300
302

are available.
204
203

are available.
512
515
509
508 511 x6
507 513
516
506 514
510 x6
522
503 504 516

502 505 520
529 517
521
532
529 530
530
501 x9 523 518
(505) (506) (507) (508)

531 519 x8
500 x7 (503)(504)
(502) (509)
524 X16
525 X16
526 X8
528 X8
527X8

550
are available.
561 551
573
559
562
570
569
568
564
560
565
558 566
557
552
566
556
563 567
552
554
553
555
572
571

Only numbered Service Parts 611
are available.
610
608
612
609
615
615
613
614
606 X14
607 X28
602
605
602
603
602
600
602
601

are available.
660
657
652
661
651
664
670
650
658
671 656 X2 659
665
654 X3
655 X3
672
657
653 X3
663
663
658
669 663
662
659 663
662
663
668 662
667
662
662
666
PX-9550,S ,N/ STYLUS PRO 9880,C,94450 No.08 Rev.01 C699-MECH-041

703 are available.
702
702
702 703
703 700
702
702 701 X15
702
703
700

753
766 are available.
750
752
755 X10
767 X7
754
764
762
769
751
757 X4
758X8
763
771
756 X12
770
760
759
761 765 X4 768

are available.
809
803 804
803 805
800 806
805 808
802 807
803
802
803
807 807
801
811
810

Only numbered Service Parts are available.
851
850
855
856
854
853
856
852
856
856
856 856
856 856
856
856
856
856

are available.
900
901
902
906
901
903
905
903
904

951
(included 952,953)
961
# 959 SCREW SET ( A - C )
C
A
B
A
952
960 (5pcs )
954
953 957
963
B 962 958
(included 952,953)
956
966
952
965
A
955
964 A
953
P X-9550,S ,N No.14 R ev.01 C 699-ME C H-102

7.3 ASP List (Parts List) Table 7-8. List for Stylus Pro 7400/7800
Ref No. Part Name
126 LABEL,CUT PAPER SET
7.3.1 ASP List for Stylus Pro 7400/7800
127 LABEL,CUTTER CHANGE1
Table 7-8. List for Stylus Pro 7400/7800
128 LABEL,ULTORA CHROME INK,K3;B
Ref No. Part Name
129 LABEL,MODEL NAME
100 L SIDE COVER ASSY.
130 LABEL,PAPER LEVER SET UP
101 ROLL TRAY L ASSY.
131 LABEL,HAND POSITION,24
102 ROLL TOP COVER,24
132 LABEL,CHOKE CLEANING
103 H TOP COVER ASSY.,24
133 LABEL,CAUTION,TRANSPORT
104 CATCH
150 P GUIDE U,24
105 ROLL TRAY R ASSY.
151 P GUIDE ASSY.,24
106 DAMPER DISK (TOP COVER)
152 RUBBER FOOT
107 UNDULATE WASHER (TOP COVER)
200 BOARD ASSY.,MAIN
108 PRSSURE LEVER KNOB
201 BOARD ASSY.,SUB
109 R SIDE COVER ASSY.
202 BOARD ASSY.,SUB
110 FRONT COVER ASSY.,24
203 BOARD ASSY.,SUB
111 BOARD SHEET STOPPER R
204 PANEL ASSY.
112 BOARD SHEET STOPPER L
300 P/S BORAD ASSY.
113 I/H COVER R
301 DC CABLE ASSY.
114 KNOB,I/C,LOCK LEVER;C593
302 INLET ASSY.
115 MIN SIDE LOCK#091Y
500 PAPER OUTLET ROLLER ASSY.
116 I/H COVER R ASSY.
501 TUBE CLAMP
117 I/H COVER L ASSY.
502 TUBE,SUPPLY,INK,#11,24
118 I/H COVER L
119 FRONT SENSOR COVER
120 COVER,I/F
121 GROUND PLATE,IF
122 FRONT COVER SPRING R,24
123 FRONT COVER SPRING L,24
124 LOGO PLATE,13X54;G
125 LABEL,ROLL PAPER SET,CHANGE
510 TUBE,FILME,STOPPER
Appendix ASP List (Parts List) 462

Table 7-8. List for Stylus Pro 7400/7800 Table 7-8. List for Stylus Pro 7400/7800
Ref No. Part Name Ref No. Part Name
511 TUBE,FFC,STOPPER 559 IM SENSOR FFC
512 CR COVER ASSY. 560 CUTTER SOLENOID ASSY.
513 TUBE FILME,24 561 CR LOCK KICKER
514 SUS SUPPORT 562 SOLENOID SPRING
515 CR FFC2 563 EDGE SENSOR CABLE ASSY.
516 PHOTO SENSOR,SG2481 564 HEAD FFC ASSY.
517 COVER,DUMPER 565 PRINT HEAD
518 HOLDING SPRING,DUMPER 566 POROUS PAD,CR
519 VALVE ASSY.,HEAD;C 567 HEAD ADJUST LEVER
520 HOLDER,DUMPER 568 CABLE CLAMP
521 PG ORG CABLE ASSY. 569 TILAP
522 CR ORG CABLE ASSY. 570 LABEL,CUT POSITION
523 FG CABLE ASSY. 571 BOARD ASSY.,ENCODER,CR;B
524 JOINT SCREWS,M6 600 CR MOTER ASSY.
525 O RING,TUBE FASTEN 601 CR SCALE SPRING
526 JOINT,2,L 602 SCALE CENTER GUIDE C
527 CONNECTING SCREW,M7 603 SCALE CR,24
528 O RING,CONNECTER,M7 604 FENCE GUIDE R
529 CABLE CLAMP 605 CR BELT
530 FLAT CORE (SSC-40-12) 606 DRIVE ROLLER C ASSY.
531 LABEL,CUTTER CHANGE2 607 PRESS SPRING
550 CARRIAGE ASSY. 608 P REAR SENSOR HOLDER
551 SLIDE GEAR 609 BOARD ASSY.,PW
552 HEAD PG SPRING 610 P REAR FFC
553 H ADJUST SLIDE CORE ARBOR LEVER 611 P THICK2 SENSOR CABLE ASSY.
554 H ADJUST LEVER 612 P THICK1 SENSOR CABLE ASSY.
555 H ADJUST SPRING 613 TENSION SPRING
556 CR ENCODER HOLDER 614 CR DRIVE PULLEY ASSY.,24
557 INK SENSOR COVER 615 PHOTO SENSOR,SG2481
558 BOARD ASSY.,INK MARK 650 PUMP ASSY.,SUPPLY

Table 7-8. List for Stylus Pro 7400/7800 Table 7-8. List for Stylus Pro 7400/7800
651 TUBE,PRESSURIZING,FULL 759 TERM L EEC1
652 TUBE,PRESSURIZING,24 760 CR MOTER CABLE 1 ASSY.
653 VACUUM FAN ASSY. 761 PF MOTER CABLE 1 ASSY.
654 SEAL FAN 762 PRESS POS CABLE ASSY.
655 DUCT FAN B 763 F COVER CABLE ASSY.
656 SEAL HOLD 764 PF ENC CABLE ASSY.
657 POROUS PAD ASSY.,INK EJECT 765 EDGE SADDLE
658 BOARD ASSY.,IC 766 FLAT CLAMP (FCR-30-V0)
659 CONNECTOR,CARTRIDGE,PR 767 FLAT CLAMP,FCR-15 V0
660 BOX ASSY.,FLUSHING 800 PUMP CAP ASSY.
661 TUBE INK WASTE R 801 CLEANER,HEAD,A,ASP
662 PAPER GUIDE P,24 802 CABLE CLAMP
663 PAPER GUIDE HOLDER 803 FLAT CLAMP (FCR-30-V0)
664 VACUUM FAN1 CABLE ASSY. 804 FLAT CORE (SSC-40-12)
665 VACUUM FAN2 CABLE ASSY. 805 FLAT CORE HOLDER
666 HOLDER ASSY.,IC,RIGHT,8C 806 PG REDUCTION GEAR,17,39
667 INK FFC R ASSY. 807 PG IDLE GEAR A
668 HOLDER ASSY.,IC,LEFT,8C 808 PG IDLE GEAR B
669 INK FFC L ASSY. 809 PRESS LEVER
700 EDGE SADDLE 810 PG CONNECT GEAR,40
701 HEXAGON STUD,M3X8 850 PF MOTER ASSY.,24
750 PCB COVER 851 BOARD ASSY.,ENCODER
751 TERM R FFC 852 PF ENC COVER B
752 INK FFC2 853 SCALE,PF
753 PUMP PHASE CABLE ASSY. 855 X REDUCTION BELT
754 PANEL FFC 856 POROUS PAD
755 CABLE CLAMP 900 FLANGE,LEFT
756 FLAT CLAMP,FCR-35 901 ADAPTER
757 FLAT CORE (SSC-40-12) 902 ROLL SHAFT
758 FLAT CORE HOLDER 903 E-RING,3,F/UC-3C

Table 7-8. List for Stylus Pro 7400/7800 7.3.2 ASP List for Stylus Pro 9400/9800
Ref No. Part Name
Table 7-9. ASP List for Stylus Pro 9400/9800
904 STOPPER SHAFT
Ref No. Part Name
905 FLANGE,RIGHT
100 L SIDE COVER ASSY.
906 LABEL,ROLLPAPER SET,2/3 INCH
101 ROLL TRAY L ASSY.
NON FIG CR STOPPER ASSY.
NON FIG INK CART.BOXED,PBK,PIG'T;D38C,110,AS
NON FIG INK CART.BOXED,C,PIG'T;D38C,110,AS
104 CATCH
NON FIG INK CART.BOXED,M,PIG'T;D38C,110,AS
105 ROLL TRAY R ASSY.
NON FIG INK CART.BOXED,Y,PIG'T;D38C,110,AS
106 DAMPER DISK (TOP COVER)
NON FIG INK CART.BOXED,LC,PIG'T;D38C,110,AS
107 UNDULATE WASHER (TOP COVER)
NON FIG INK CART.BOXED,LM,PIG'T;D38C,110,AS
108 PRSSURE LEVER KNOB
NON FIG INK CART.BOXED,LBK,PIG'T;D38C,110,AS
109 R SIDE COVER ASSY.
NON FIG INK CART.BOXED,LLBK,PIG'T;D38C,110,AS
NON FIG KIMOTO MICRO TRACE#300;A-3
111 BOARD SHEET STOPPER R
NON FIG TENSION GAUGE 40N
112 BOARD SHEET STOPPER L
NON FIG GREASE G-26
NON FIG TENSION GAUGE (10N) 113 I/H COVER R
NON FIG CLEANING CART.BOXED;D38C,AS 114 KNOB,I/C,LOCK LEVER;C593
NON FIG BLACK CONVERSION KIT,AS,D38C 115 MIN SIDE LOCK#091Y
116 I/H COVER R ASSY.
117 I/H COVER L ASSY.
118 I/H COVER L
120 COVER,I/F
121 GROUND PLATE,IF
125 LABEL,ROLL PAPER SET,CHANGE
128 LABEL,ULTORA CHROME INK,K3;B

Table 7-9. ASP List for Stylus Pro 9400/9800 Table 7-9. ASP List for Stylus Pro 9400/9800
129 LABEL,MODEL NAME 513 TUBE FILME,44
130 LABEL,PAPER LEVER SET UP 514 SUS SUPPORT
131 LABEL,HAND POSITION,44 515 CR FFC2
132 LABEL,CHOKE CLEANING 516 PHOTO SENSOR,SG2481
133 LABEL,CAUTION,TRANSPORT 517 COVER,DUMPER
134 BOARD SHEET STOPPER C 518 HOLDING SPRING,DUMPER
150 P GUIDE U,44 519 VALVE ASSY.,HEAD;C
151 PGUIDE L ASSY.,44 520 HOLDER,DUMPER
152 HANDLE 521 PG ORG CABLE ASSY.
200 BOARD ASSY.,MAIN 522 CR ORG CABLE ASSY.
201 BOARD ASSY.,SUB 523 FG CABLE ASSY.
202 BOARD ASSY.,SUB 524 JOINT SCREWS,M6
203 BOARD ASSY.,SUB 525 O RING,TUBE FASTEN
204 PANEL ASSY. 526 JOINT,2,L
300 P/S BORAD ASSY. 527 CONNECTING SCREW,M7
301 DC CABLE ASSY. 528 O RING,CONNECTER,M7
302 INLET ASSY. 529 CABLE CLAMP
500 PAPER OUTLET ROLLER ASSY. 530 FLAT CORE (SSC-40-12)
501 TUBE CLAMP 531 LABEL,CUTTER CHANGE2
502 TUBE,SUPPLY,INK,#1,44 532 FG CABLE,44
503 TUBE,SUPPLY,INK,#2,44 550 CARRIAGE ASSY.
504 TUBE,SUPPLY,INK,#3,44 551 SLIDE GEAR
505 TUBE,SUPPLY,INK,#4,44 552 HEAD PG SPRING
506 TUBE,SUPPLY,INK,#5,44 553 H ADJUST SLIDE CORE ARBOR LEVER
507 TUBE,SUPPLY,INK,#6,44 554 H ADJUST LEVER
508 TUBE,SUPPLY,INK,#7,44 555 H ADJUST SPRING
509 TUBE,SUPPLY,INK,#8,44 556 CR ENCODER HOLDER
510 TUBE,FILME,STOPPER 557 INK SENSOR COVER
511 TUBE,FFC,STOPPER 558 BOARD ASSY.,INK MARK
512 CR COVER ASSY. 559 IM SENSOR FFC

560 CUTTER SOLENOID ASSY. 652 TUBE,PRESSURIZING,44
561 CR LOCK KICKER 653 VACUUM FAN ASSY.
562 SOLENOID SPRING 654 SEAL FAN
563 EDGE SENSOR CABLE ASSY. 655 DUCT FAN B
564 HEAD FFC ASSY. 656 SEAL HOLD
565 PRINT HEAD 657 POROUS PAD ASSY.,INK EJECT
566 POROUS PAD,CR 658 BOARD ASSY.,IC
567 HEAD ADJUST LEVER 659 CONNECTOR,CARTRIDGE,PR
568 CABLE CLAMP 660 BOX ASSY.,FLUSHING
569 TILAP 661 TUBE INK WASTE R
570 LABEL,CUT POSITION 662 PAPER GUIDE P44
571 BOARD ASSY.,ENCODER,CR;B 663 PAPER GUIDE HOLDER
600 CR MOTER ASSY. 664 VACUUM FAN1 CABLE ASSY.
601 CR SCALE SPRING 665 VACUUM FAN2 CABLE ASSY.
602 SCALE CENTER GUIDE C 666 HOLDER ASSY.,IC,RIGHT,8C
603 SCALE,CR,44 667 INK FFC R ASSY.
604 FENCE GUIDE R 668 HOLDER ASSY.,IC,LEFT,8C
605 CR BELT 669 INK FFC L ASSY.
606 DRIVE ROLLER C ASSY. 670 BOX ASSY.,FLUSHING,44
607 PRESS SPRING 671 TUBE INK WASTE L
608 P REAR SENSOR HOLDER 672 VACUUM FAN3 CABLE ASSY.
609 BOARD ASSY.,PW 700 EDGE SADDLE
610 P REAR FFC 701 HEXAGON STUD,M3X8
611 P THICK2 SENSOR CABLE ASSY. 750 PCB COVER
612 P THICK1 SENSOR CABLE ASSY. 751 TERM R FFC
613 TENSION SPRING 752 INK FFC2
614 CR DRIVE PULLEY ASSY.,44 753 PUMP PHASE CABLE ASSY.
615 PHOTO SENSOR,SG2481 754 PANEL FFC
650 PUMP ASSY.,SUPPLY 755 CABLE CLAMP
651 TUBE,PRESSURIZING,FULL 756 FLAT CLAMP,FCR-35

757 FLAT CORE (SSC-40-12) 854 REDUCTION PULLE
758 FLAT CORE HOLDER 855 X REDUCTION BELT
759 TERM L FFC2 856 POROUS PAD
760 CR MOTER CABLE 2 ASSY. 900 FLANGE,LEFT
761 PF MOTER CABLE 2 ASSY. 901 ADAPTER
762 PRESS POS CABLE ASSY. 902 ROLL SHAFT
763 F COVER CABLE ASSY. 903 E-RING,3,F/UC-3C
764 PF ENC CABLE ASSY. 904 STOPPER SHAFT
765 EDGE SADDLE 905 FLANGE,RIGHT
766 FLAT CLAMP (FCR-30-V0) 906 LABEL,ROLLPAPER SET,2/3 INCH
767 FLAT CLAMP,FCR-15 V0 NON FIG CR STOPPER ASSY.
768 INK FFC1 NON FIG INK CART.BOXED,PBK,PIG'T;D38C,110,AS
769 PUMP MOTER CABLE ASSY. NON FIG INK CART.BOXED,C,PIG'T;D38C,110,AS
770 RE SOL JUNCTION CABLE ASSY. NON FIG INK CART.BOXED,M,PIG'T;D38C,110,AS
771 PRESS MOT JUNCTION CABLE ASSY. NON FIG INK CART.BOXED,Y,PIG'T;D38C,110,AS
800 PUMP CAP ASSY. NON FIG INK CART.BOXED,LC,PIG'T;D38C,110,AS
801 CLEANER,HEAD,A,ASP NON FIG INK CART.BOXED,LM,PIG'T;D38C,110,AS
802 CABLE CLAMP NON FIG INK CART.BOXED,LBK,PIG'T;D38C,110,AS
803 FLAT CLAMP (FCR-30-V0) NON FIG INK CART.BOXED,LLBK,PIG'T;D38C,110,AS
804 FLAT CORE (SSC-40-12) NON FIG KIMOTO MICRO TRACE#300;A-3
805 FLAT CORE HOLDER NON FIG TENSION GAUGE 40N
806 PG REDUCTION GEAR,17,39 NON FIG GREASE G-26
807 PG IDLE GEAR A NON FIG TENSION GAUGE (10N)
808 PG IDLE GEAR B NON FIG CLEANING CART.BOXED;D38C,AS
809 PRESS LEVER NON FIG BLACK CONVERSION KIT,AS,D38C
810 PG CONNECT GEAR,40
850 PF MOTOR PULLEY ASSY.
851 BOARD ASSY.,ENCODER
852 PF ENC COVER B
853 SCALE,PF

7.3.3 ASP List for Stylus Pro 7450/7880/7880C Table 7-10. ASP List for Stylus Pro 7450/7880/7880C
Ref No. Part Name
Table 7-10. ASP List for Stylus Pro 7450/7880/7880C
129 LABEL,MODEL NAME;K
Ref No. Part Name
130 LABEL,PAPER LEVER SET UP
100 L SIDE COVER ASSY.,ASP
131 LABEL,HAND POSITION,24
101 ROLL TRAY L ASSY.,ASP
132 LABEL,CHOKE CLEANING;C
133 LABEL,CAUTION,TRANSPORT;C
135 LABEL,BOARD PAPER SET
104 CATCH
150 P GUIDE U,24
105 ROLL TRAY R ASSY.,ASP
151 P GUIDE L ASSY.,24+,ASP
106 WAVE WASHER,I.W.T.W-60
152 RUBBER FOOT
107 DAMPER DISK BA
154 DETECTOR,LEAF,B2
108 PRESSURE LEVER KNOB
200 BOARD ASSY.,MAIN
109 R SIDE COVER ASSY.,ASP
201 BOARD ASSY.,SUB
202 BOARD ASSY.,SUB
111 STOPPER R
203 BOARD ASSY.,SUB
112 STOPPER L
204 PANEL ASSY.,ASP
113 IH COVER R
300 POWER BOARD
301 POWER CABLE
302 INLET ASSY.
116 I/H COVER R ASSY.,ASP
500 PAPER OUTLET ROLLER ASSY.,ASP
117 I/H COVER L ASSY.,ASP
501 PIPE CLIP(SMALL)
118 IH COVER L
120 COVER,IF,CA00
121 GROUND PLATE,IF,CA00
125 LABEL,ROLL PAPER CHANGE
510 FILM TUBE FIXING
511 TUBE FFC FIXING
128 LABEL,ULTORA CHROME INK;B

Table 7-10. ASP List for Stylus Pro 7450/7880/7880C Table 7-10. ASP List for Stylus Pro 7450/7880/7880C
512 CR COVER ASSY.,ASP 560 SOLENOID
513 TUBE FILME,24 561 CR LOCK KICKER
514 GUIDE PLATE,TUBE 562 SOLENOID SPRING
515 CR FFC2,ASP 563 EDGE SENSE CABLE ASSY.
516 PHOTO SENSOR,SG2481 564 HEAD FFC ASSY.,ASP
517 HOLDER,DUMPER 565 PRINT HEAD
518 HOLDING SPRING,DUMPER 566 POROUS PAD,CR
519 VALVE ASSY.,HEAD;C,ESL,ASP 567 HEAD LEVER
520 COVER,DUMPER 568 WIRE SADDLE
521 PG ORG CABLE ASSY. 569 WIRE BAND
522 CR ORG CABLE ASSY. 570 LABEL,CUT POSITION
523 FG CABLE ASSY. 571 BOARD ASSY.,ENCODER,CR;B
524 JOINT SCREWS,M6 572 CR CUSHION R SET
525 O RING,TUBE FASTEN 573 CUTTER CAP
526 JOINT,2,L 600 CR MOTOR ASSY.
527 CONNECTING SCREW,M7 601 CR SCALE SPRING
528 O RING,CONNECTER,M7 602 SCALE INTERNAL HOLDER C
529 WIRE SADDLE 603 SCALE CR,24
530 FERRITE CORE,SSC-40-12-F 605 CR BELT
531 LABEL,CUTTER CHANGE2 606 DRIVE ROLLER C ASSY.,ASP
550 CARRIAGE ASSY.(CUSHION),ASP 607 PRESSURE SPRING
551 SLIDE GEAR BA 608 P REAR SENSOR HOLDER
552 HEAD PG SPRING 609 BOARD ASSY.,PW
553 H ADJUSTMENT ECCENTRIC SHAFT 610 P REAR FFC
554 H ADJUSTMENT LEVER 611 P THICK 2 CABLE ASSY.
555 HEAD ADJUSTMENT SPRING 612 P THICK 1 CABLE ASSY.
556 CR ENCODER HOLDER B 613 TENSION SPRING BA
557 INK MARK SENSOR COVER 614 CR DRIVE PULLEY ASSY.,24
558 BOARD ASSY.,INK MARK 615 PHOTO SENSOR,SG2481
559 IM SENSE FFC 650 PUMP ASSY.,SUPPLY

651 TUBE,PRESSURIZING,FULL;B 760 CR MOTER CABLE 1 ASSY.
652 TUBE,PRESSURIZING,24 761 PF MOTER CABLE 1 ASSY.
653 VACUUM FAN ASSY.,MAINTENANCE 762 PRESS POS CABLE ASSY.
654 SEAL FAN 763 F COVER CABLE ASSY.
655 DUCT FAN B 764 PF ENC CABLE ASSY.
657 POROUS PAD ASSY.,INK EJECT 766 FLAT CLAMP,FCR-30 V0
658 BOARD ASSY.,IC 800 PUMP CAP ASSY.
659 CONNECTOR,CARTRIDGE,A 801 CLEANER,HEAD
660 BOX ASSY.,FLUSHING 802 WIRE SADDLE
661 WASTE INK TUBE R 803 FLAT CLAMP,FCR-30 V0
662 PAPER GUIDE P,24 804 FERRITE CORE,SSC-40-12-F
663 PAPER GUIDE HOLDER 805 FLAT CORE HOLDER
664 ADSORPTION FAN 1 CABLE ASSY. 806 PG REDUCTION GEAR 17-39
665 ADSORPTION FAN 2 CABLE ASSY. 807 PG IDLE GEAR A BA
666 HOLDER ASSY.,IC,RIGHT,4C,C699 808 PG IDLE GEAR B BA
667 INK FFC R ASSY.,ASP 809 PRESSURE LEVER
668 HOLDER ASSY.,IC,LEFT,4C,C699 810 PG CONNECTING GEAR 40
669 INK FFC L ASSY.,ASP 811 POROUS PAD,INK EJECT,TRAY
700 EDGE CLAMP 850 PF MOTER ASSY.,24
701 HEXAGON STUD,M3X8 851 BOARD ASSY.,ENCODER
702 POROUS PAD,SUB PLATEN BASE,A 852 PF ENCODER COVER B
750 BOAED COVER 853 SCALE,PF
751 TERM R FFC,ASP 854 SPEED REDUCTION PULLEY
752 INK FFC2,ASP 855 X SPEED REDUCTION BELT BA
753 PUMP PHASE CABLE ASSY. 856 POROUS PAD,PLATEN
754 PANEL FFC,ASP 900 FLANGE,LEFT
755 WIRE SADDLE 901 ADAPTER
757 FERRITE CORE,SSC-40-12-F 902 ROLL SHAFT
758 FLAT CORE HOLDER 903 E-RING,3,F/UC-3C
759 TERM L FFC1 904 STOPPER SHAFT L

Table 7-10. ASP List for Stylus Pro 7450/7880/7880C 7.3.4 ASP List for Stylus Pro 9450/9880/9880C
Ref No. Part Name
905 FLANGE,RIGHT
Ref No. Part Name
906 LABEL,ROLLPAPER SET,2/3 INCH
100 L SIDE COVER ASSY.,ASP
IC21 GATE ARRAY
101 ROLL TRAY L ASSY.,ASP
NON FIG BLACK CONVERSION KIT BOXED;AS,9C1
102 TOP COVER,44
NON FIG CR STOPPER ASSY.,ASP
103 H TOP COVER ASSY.,44,ASP
NON FIG CUTTER POSITION JIG
104 CATCH
NON FIG GREASE G-26 (40GR)(B702600001)
105 ROLL TRAY R ASSY.,ASP
NON FIG INK CART.BOXED C,PIGT;9C1,110AS
106 WAVE WASHER,I.W.T.W-60
NON FIG INK CART.BOXED LBK,PIGT;9C1,110AS
107 DAMPER DISK BA
NON FIG INK CART.BOXED LC,PIGT;9C1,110AS
108 PRESSURE LEVER KNOB
NON FIG INK CART.BOXED LLBK,PIGT;9C1,110AS
109 R SIDE COVER ASSY.,ASP
NON FIG INK CART.BOXED PBK,PIGT;9C1,110AS
110 FRONT COVER ASSY.,44,ASP
NON FIG INK CART.BOXED VLM,PIGT;9C1,110AS
111 STOPPER R
NON FIG INK CART.BOXED VM,PIGT;9C1,110AS
112 STOPPER L
NON FIG INK CART.BOXED Y,PIGT;9C1,110AS
113 IH COVER R
NON FIG INK LEAK CHECK JIG
NON FIG INK MARK SENSOR POSITION JIG
NON FIG JETRAS JP-D300S
116 I/H COVER R ASSY.,ASP
117 I/H COVER L ASSY.,ASP
NON FIG P-THICK SENSOR POSITION JIG
118 IH COVER L
NON FIG SUPER MULTI OIL #32
120 COVER,IF,CA00
NON FIG TENSION GAUGE(10N)
121 GROUND PLATE,IF,CA00
125 LABEL,ROLL PAPER CHANGE
128 LABEL,ULTORA CHROME INK;B

129 LABEL,MODEL NAME;E 512 CR COVER ASSY.,ASP
130 LABEL,PAPER LEVER SET UP 513 TUBE FILM,44
131 LABEL,HAND POSITION,44 514 GUIDE PLATE,TUBU
132 LABEL,CHOKE CLEANING;C 515 CR FFC2,ASP
133 LABEL,CAUTION,TRANSPORT;C 516 PHOTO SENSOR,SG2481
135 LABEL,BOARD PAPER SET 517 HOLDER,DUMPER
136 STOPPER C 518 HOLDING SPRING,DUMPER
150 P-GUIDE U,44 519 VALVE ASSY.,HEAD;C,ESL,ASP
152 PLASTIC HANDLE 520 COVER,DUMPER
154 DETECTOR,LEAF,B2 521 PG ORG CABLE ASSY.
200 BOARD ASSY.,MAIN 522 CR ORG CABLE ASSY.
201 BOARD ASSY.,SUB 523 FG CABLE ASSY.
202 BOARD ASSY.,SUB 524 JOINT SCREWS,M6
203 BOARD ASSY.,SUB 525 O RING,TUBE FASTEN
204 PANEL ASSY.,ASP 526 JOINT,2,L
300 POWER BOARD 527 CONNECTING SCREW,M7
301 POWER CABLE 528 O RING,CONNECTER,M7
302 INLET ASSY. 529 CABLE CLAMP
500 PAPER OUTLET ROLLER ASSY.,ASP 530 FERRITE CORE,SSC-40-12-F
501 PIPE CLIP(SMALL) 531 LABEL,CUTTER CHANGE2
502 TUBE,SUPPLY,INK,#1,44 532 FG CABLE
503 TUBE,SUPPLY,INK,#2,44 550 CARRIAGE ASSY.(CUSHION),ASP
504 TUBE,SUPPLY,INK,#3,44 551 SLIDE GEAR BA
505 TUBE,SUPPLY,INK,#4,44 552 HEAD PG SPRING
506 TUBE,SUPPLY,INK,#5,44 553 H ADJUSTMENT ECCENTRIC SHAFT
507 TUBE,SUPPLY,INK,#6,44 554 H ADJUSTMENT LEVER
508 TUBE,SUPPLY,INK,#7,44 555 HEAD ADJUSTMENT SPRING
509 TUBE,SUPPLY,INK,#8,44 556 CR ENCODER HOLDER B
510 FILM TUBE FIXING 557 INK MARK SENSOR COVER
511 TUBE FFC FIXING 558 BOARD ASSY.,INK MARK

559 IM SENSE FFC 615 PHOTO SENSOR,SG2481
560 SOLENOID 650 PUMP ASSY.,SUPPLY
561 CR LOCK KICKER 651 TUBE,PRESSURIZING,FULL;B
562 SOLENOID SPRING 652 TUBE,PRESSURIZING,44
563 EDGE SENSE CABLE ASSY. 653 VACUUM FAN ASSY.,MAINTENANCE
564 HEAD FFC ASSY.,ASP 654 SEAL FAN
565 PRINT HEAD 655 DUCT FAN B
566 POROUS PAD,CR 656 SEAL HOLDER
567 HEAD LEVER 657 POROUS PAD ASSY.,INK EJECT
568 CABLE CLAMP 658 BOARD ASSY.,IC
569 WIRE BAND 659 CONNECTOR,CARTRIDGE,A
570 LABEL,CUT POSITION 660 BOX ASSY.,FLUSHING
571 BOARD ASSY.,ENCODER,CR;B 661 WASTE INK TUBE R
572 CR CUSHION R SET 662 PAPER GUIDE P,44
573 CUTTER CAP 663 PAPER GUIDE HOLDER
574 HOLDER,HEAD 664 ADSORPTION FAN 1 CABLE ASSY.
600 CR MOTOR ASSY. 665 ADSORPTION FAN 2 CABLE ASSY.
601 CR SCALE SPRING 666 HOLDER ASSY.,IC,RIGHT,4C,C699
602 SCALE INTERNAL HOLDER C 667 INK FFC R ASSY.,ASP
603 SCALE,CR,44 668 HOLDER ASSY.,IC,LEFT,4C,C699
605 CR BELT 669 INK FFC L ASSY.,ASP
606 DRIVE ROLLER C ASSY.,ASP 670 BOX ASSY.,FLUSHING,44
607 PRESSURE SPRING 671 WASTE INK TUBE L
608 P REAR SENSOR HOLDER 672 ADSORPTION FAN 3 CABLE ASSY.
609 BOARD ASSY.,PW 700 EDGE CLAMP
610 P REAR FFC 701 HEXAGON STUD,M3X8
611 P THICK 2 CABLE ASSY. 702 POROUS PAD,SUB PLATEN BASE,A
612 P THICK 1 CABLE ASSY. 703 POROUS PAD,SUB PLATEN BASE,B
613 TENSION SPRING BA 750 BOAED COVER
614 CR DRIVE PULLEY ASSY.,ASP 751 TERM R FFC,ASP

752 INK FFC2,ASP 810 PG CONNECTING GEAR 40
753 PUMP PHASE CABLE ASSY. 811 POROUS PAD,INK EJECT,TRAY
754 PANEL FFC,ASP 850 PF MOTOR ASSY.
755 CABLE CLAMP 851 BOARD ASSY.,ENCODER
756 FLAT CLAMP,FCR-35 852 PF ENCODER COVER B
757 FERRITE CORE,SSC-40-12-F 853 SCALE,PF
758 FLAT CORE HOLDER 854 SPEED REDUCTION PULLEY
759 TERM L FFC2,ASP 855 X SPEED REDUCTION BELT BA
760 CR MOTOR CABLE 2 ASSY. 856 POROUS PAD,PLATEN
761 PF MOTOR CABLE 2 ASSY. 900 FLANGE,LEFT
762 PRESS POS CABLE ASSY. 901 ADAPTER
763 F COVER CABLE ASSY. 902 SCROLLER(2 STANDARD)
764 PF ENC CABLE ASSY. 903 E-RING,3,F/UC-3C
765 EDGE SADDLE 904 STOPPER SHAFT L
766 FLAT CLAMP,FCR-30 V0 905 FLANGE,RIGHT
767 FLAT CLAMP,FCR-15 V0 906 LABEL,ROLLPAPER SET,2/3 INCH
768 INK FFC1,ASP 951 STAND L ASSY.
769 PUMP MOTOR CABLE ASSY. 952 CASTER (NON STOPPER)
770 RE SOL CONNECTOR CABLE ASSY. 953 CASTER (STOPPER)
771 PRESS MOT CONNECTOR CABLE ASSY. 954 UPPER ARM,L.
800 PUMP CAP ASSY. 955 UNDER ARM
801 CLEANER,HEAD 956 OUTLET TRAY ASSY.,OVERSEAS.
802 CABLE CLAMP 957 STAND STAY ASSY.
803 FLAT CLAMP,FCR-30 V0 958 STAND R ASSY.
804 FERRITE CORE,SSC-40-12-F 959 SCREW ASSY.
805 FLAT CORE HOLDER 960 SUPPORT PAPER FILM ASSY.
806 PG REDUCTION GEAR 17-39 961 UPPER ARM HOLDER,L.
807 PG IDLE GEAR A BA 962 UPPER ARM HOLDER,R.
808 PG IDLE GEAR B BA 963 UNDER ARM HOLDER,L.
809 PRESSURE LEVER 964 UNDER ARM HOLDER,R.


Ref No. Part Name
965 UPPER ARM,R.
966 LABEL,PAPER EJECT CLOTH SET,44;B
970 STAND ASSY.,44
IC21 GATE ARRAY
NON FIG BLACK CONVERSION KIT BOXED;AS,9C1
NON FIG CR STOPPER ASSY.,ASP
NON FIG CUTTER POSITION JIG
NON FIG GREASE G-26 (40GR)(B702600001)
NON FIG INK CART.BOXED C,PIGT;9C1,110AS
NON FIG INK CART.BOXED C,PIGT;9K1,110AS
NON FIG INK CART.BOXED LBK,PIGT;9C1,110AS
NON FIG INK CART.BOXED LC,PIGT;9C1,110AS
NON FIG INK CART.BOXED LLBK,PIGT;9C1,110AS
NON FIG INK CART.BOXED M,PIGT;9K1,110AS
NON FIG INK CART.BOXED MBK,PIGT;9K1,110AS
NON FIG INK CART.BOXED PBK,PIGT;9C1,110AS
NON FIG INK CART.BOXED VLM,PIGT;9C1,110AS
NON FIG INK CART.BOXED VM,PIGT;9C1,110AS
NON FIG INK CART.BOXED Y,PIGT;9C1,110AS
NON FIG INK CART.BOXED Y,PIGT;9K1,110AS
NON FIG INK LEAK CHECK JIG
NON FIG INK MARK SENSOR POSITION JIG
NON FIG JETRAS JP-D300S
NON FIG P-THICK SENSOR POSITION JIG
NON FIG SUPER MULTI OIL #32
NON FIG TENSION GAUGE(10N)

Epson 7880 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Epson 7880 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Epson 7880 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What are the main precautions mentioned in the document?

What are the main precautions mentioned in the document?

What are some of the major components listed in the parts list?

What are some of the major components listed in the parts list?

SERVICE MANUAL

Large Format Color Inkjet Printer

EPSON Stylus Pro 7400/7450/7800/7880/7880C

Copyright © 2007 SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION.

Manual Configuration Symbols Used in this Manual

Chapter 3 Troubleshooting Chapter 5 Adjustment

5.3.20 Cleaning ................................................................................................. 357 Chapter 6 Maintenance

1.1 Product Description  Super-high definition

Stylus Pro 9800

 The latest RIP

Product Description Product Description 12

Product Description Product Description 13

 Stylus Pro 7450/7880/7880C/9450/9880/9880C:

Product Description Product Description 14

1.1.2 Difference between 8 color and 4 color machines

Product Description Product Description 15

1.2 Basic Specifications  Ink configuration

8 color machine Black Photo Black / Matte Black * 180

Product Description Basic Specifications 16

 Printing speed 1.2.2 Character Specifications

Product Description Basic Specifications 17

1.2.4 Paper Specifications 1.2.4.2 Cut Sheet

NOTE • Do not use curled, folded, or deckle-edge paper.

Product Description Basic Specifications 18

1.2.4.3 Selectable Paper Size

Table 1-10. Selectable Paper Size

Product Description Basic Specifications 19

Paper Feed Direction

Product Description Basic Specifications 20

1.2.5.2 Borderless Printing Specifications BORDERLESS PRINTING MODE

Table 1-12. Paper Width Mode Operation

Product Description Basic Specifications 21

BORDERLESS PRINTING SETTING PROCEDURES BORDERLESS PRINTING GUARANTEE CONDITIONS

Table 1-14. Borderless Printing Setting  Borderless printing guarantee conditions

Product Description Basic Specifications 22

1.2.5.3 Cut Specifications 1.2.5.4 Paper Set Lever

ROLL PAPER MANUAL CUT

Product Description Basic Specifications 23

1.2.6 Electrical Related Information 1.2.7 Reliability

Product Description Basic Specifications 24

1.2.7.4 Cutter Life-span 1.2.7.6 MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures)

Table 1-17. Replacement Parts Life-span

Product Description Basic Specifications 25

1.2.8 Environmental Conditions 1.2.8.2 Vibration Resistance

Figure 1-2. Allowable Range of Temperature and Humidity

Product Description Basic Specifications 26

1.2.9 Overall Dimensions

(When no base is mounted)

Product Description Basic Specifications 27

1.2.9.2 Stylus Pro 9400/9450/9800/9880/9880C Overall Dimensions

Product Description Basic Specifications 28

Product Description Basic Specifications 29

 Accessories/Options (Stylus Pro 7450/7880/7880C/9450/9880/9880C)

Product Description Basic Specifications 30

 Special paper for paper type and size.

1.1 Product Description Super-high definition

The latest RIP

Stylus Pro 7450/7880/7880C/9450/9880/9880C:

1.2 Basic Specifications Ink configuration

Printing speed 1.2.2 Character Specifications

Table 1-14. Borderless Printing Setting Borderless printing guarantee conditions

Accessories/Options (Stylus Pro 7450/7880/7880C/9450/9880/9880C)

Special paper for paper type and size.

Stylus Pro 7450/7880/7880C/9450/9880/9880C

1.4.2.2 Icons on the LCD Platen Gap Setting

Paper Suction 1.4.3 Job Information

Job Information Note "*1": Currently reserved as 00h 00h fixed.

1.4.4 Panel Setting Exiting from the Panel Setting Mode

Panel display Printer Setup menu

Test Print menu Printer Status menu

Custom Paper menu Maintenance menu